LMS Test - Lab Mission Synthesis

LMS Test.
Lab Mission Synthesis
User manual
16A
Copyright Siemens Industry Software NV

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Mission Synthesis ......................................................................................... 7

Section 1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................... 7
Section 1.1.1 Test strategies ...................................................................................... 7
Section 1.2 Derivation of a test specification ......................................................... 8
Section 1.2.1 Analysis of the life cycle...................................................................... 9
Section 1.2.2 Collection of the data on the real environment .................................... 9
Section 1.2.3 Determination of the environment to be simulated ............................ 10
Section 1.2.4 Establishment of the test program ...................................................... 21
Section 1.2.5 Determination of the test PSD or sweeping sine ................................ 24
Chapter 2 Data and its management ........................................................................... 25

Section 2.1 Data management and configuration ................................................. 25
Section 2.1.1 The desktop ........................................................................................ 25
Section 2.1.2 Applications ....................................................................................... 26
Section 2.1.3 Projects .............................................................................................. 26
Section 2.1.4 Documentation ................................................................................... 28
Section 2.2 Importing and exporting data ............................................................. 28
Section 2.2.1 Importing data items .......................................................................... 29
Section 2.2.2 Exporting data items .......................................................................... 38
Section 2.2.3 Copying pictures ................................................................................ 47
Section 2.3 My Links ............................................................................................ 48
Section 2.3.1 Elements in the My Links collection folder ....................................... 48
Section 2.4 Project data ........................................................................................ 50
Section 2.4.1 Sections .............................................................................................. 50
Section 2.4.2 Runs ................................................................................................... 50
Section 2.4.3 TDF .................................................................................................... 51
Section 2.4.4 LDSF ................................................................................................. 51
Section 2.4.5 Other folders ...................................................................................... 51
Chapter 3 The LMS Configuration and Unit System .................................................. 53

Section 3.1 Concept of the LMS Configurations System ..................................... 53
Section 3.1.1 Write strategy..................................................................................... 55
Section 3.1.2 Read strategy ..................................................................................... 55
Section 3.2 Concept of the LMS Unit System ...................................................... 56
Section 3.2.1 Unit .................................................................................................... 56
Section 3.2.2 Label Unit .......................................................................................... 57
Section 3.2.3 Base Quantity..................................................................................... 57
Section 3.2.4 Quantity ............................................................................................. 57
Section 3.2.5 Quantity Case ..................................................................................... 57
Section 3.2.6 Unit Case ........................................................................................... 58
Section 3.2.7 Unit system ........................................................................................ 58
Section 3.3 Editing LMS Units ............................................................................. 58
Section 3.3.1 Versioning of LMS Unit System ....................................................... 58
Section 3.3.2 Main panel logic ................................................................................ 59
Section 3.3.3 Menu bar ............................................................................................ 60
Section 3.3.4 Unit Cases panel ................................................................................ 64
Section 3.3.5 Unit Rules panel................................................................................. 70
16A 3
Chapter 4 Documentation and Presentation .............................................................. 73
Section 4.1 Using cursors in displays ................................................................... 73
Section 4.1.1 [Procedure] To use cursors in the display .......................................... 73
Section 4.2 Function display windows ................................................................. 77
Section 4.2.2 The Axis menus ................................................................................. 89
Section 4.2.3 The Display menus .......................................................................... 108
Section 4.2.4 The Data menus ............................................................................... 118
Section 4.2.5 The Cursor menus ............................................................................ 120
Section 4.2.6 The Curve Legend menus ................................................................ 123
Section 4.2.7 The Single (cursor) menus ............................................................... 126
Section 4.2.8 The Double (cursor) menus ............................................................. 130
Section 4.2.9 The Harmonic (cursor) menus ......................................................... 133
Section 4.2.10 The Automatic (cursor) menus ........................................................ 136
Section 4.2.11 The Processing (cursor) menus ........................................................ 137
Section 4.2.12 The Coupled (cursor) menus ............................................................ 140
Section 4.3 Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays ................................. 141
Section 4.4 Geometry display windows.............................................................. 143
Section 4.4.1 [Procedure] To use the displays ....................................................... 143
Section 4.4.2 The Geometry display functions ...................................................... 149
Section 4.5 Mouse and keyboard tips in geometry displays ............................... 173
Section 4.6 Curve scrolling (prev/next on function displays) ............................. 173
Section 4.7 The Layout management dialog....................................................... 176
Section 4.7.1 [Procedure] To create or modify a layout ........................................ 177
Section 4.7.2 The Layout management panel ........................................................ 191
Section 4.7.3 The Layout editing panel ................................................................. 193
Section 4.8 Document Memo Templates ............................................................ 194
Section 4.8.1 New Memo Template ...................................................................... 194
Section 4.8.2 Default Memo template ................................................................... 194
Section 4.9 Creating print formats ...................................................................... 195
Section 4.9.1 [Procedure] To create a single-picture print format in the Data Viewing
worksheet 196
Section 4.9.2 [Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print format in Word or PowerPoint 197
Section 4.9.3 [Procedure] To set printing options ................................................. 198
Section 4.9.4 [Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print format .................. 199
Section 4.9.5 [Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to Word or PowerPoint 200
Section 4.9.6 [Procedure] To remove a message about an old LMS Powerpoint Printing
Add-In 201
Section 4.10 Documentation User Attributes ....................................................... 201
Section 4.10.1 User Attributes ................................................................................. 201
Section 4.11 Document Memo Templates ............................................................ 203
Section 4.11.1 New Memo Template ...................................................................... 203
Section 4.11.2 Default Memo template ................................................................... 204
Chapter 5 The LMS Test.Lab Desktop workbook ..................................................... 205

Section 5.1 Desktop Add-ins .............................................................................. 205
Section 5.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................... 205
Section 5.1.2 General (Desktop) add-ins ............................................................... 206
Section 5.2 Parameter and Option Locking ........................................................ 222
Section 5.2.1 Parameter Locking ........................................................................... 222
Section 5.2.2 Options Locking .............................................................................. 224
Section 5.3 The Tec.Manager Options ............................................................... 225
Section 5.3.1 Tec.Manager Tab ............................................................................. 225
Section 5.4 The Desktop menu bar ..................................................................... 226
Section 5.4.1 File ................................................................................................... 226
Section 5.4.2 Edit................................................................................................... 229
Section 5.4.3 View................................................................................................. 230
4 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

Section 5.4.4 Data .................................................................................................. 231
Section 5.4.5 Tools ................................................................................................ 232
Section 5.4.6 Window............................................................................................ 257
Section 5.4.7 Help ................................................................................................. 257
Section 5.5 The Desktop button bar .................................................................... 259
Section 5.5.1 Toolbars ........................................................................................... 259
Section 5.6 Conditioning toolbar ........................................................................ 268
Section 5.6.1 To condition displayed data ............................................................. 268
Section 5.6.2 Conditioning functions .................................................................... 270
Section 5.7 The Documentation worksheet ........................................................ 276
Section 5.7.1 [Procedure] Project / Section info .................................................... 276
Section 5.7.2 Extended Project / Section info ........................................................ 279
Section 5.8 The Data Explorer dialog ................................................................. 280
Section 5.8.1 [Procedure] To view and manage data ............................................. 280
Section 5.8.2 The Data Explorer Toolbar .............................................................. 282
Section 5.8.3 The Search panel .............................................................................. 283
Section 5.8.4 The Tree-view browser panel .......................................................... 286
Section 5.8.5 The Detail View panel ..................................................................... 292
Section 5.9 The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet ....................................... 295
Section 5.9.1 [Procedure] To create pictures of your data ..................................... 296
Section 5.9.2 The Data Explorer ............................................................................ 299
Section 5.9.3 The Picture Display panel ................................................................ 299
Section 5.9.4 The Picture Selection bar ................................................................. 300
Section 5.10 The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet ................................. 305
Section 5.10.1 [Procedure] To print data using a predefined print format ............... 305
Section 5.10.3 The Format display panel................................................................. 306
Section 5.10.4 The Format selection bar ................................................................. 307
Section 5.11 The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet..................................... 307
Section 5.11.1 The Data Explorer panel .................................................................. 307
Section 5.11.2 The Data Set panel ........................................................................... 307
Section 5.11.3 The Active Formula Set panel ......................................................... 308
Section 5.11.4 The Picture display panel ................................................................. 308
Section 5.11.5 [Procedure] To define a processing function ................................... 308
Section 5.11.8 The Active Formula Set panel ......................................................... 316
Section 5.11.9 The Picture Display panel ................................................................ 321
Section 5.11.10 The Picture Selection bar ................................................................. 323
Section 5.12 The Data Block Processing worksheet ............................................. 327
Section 5.12.1 [Procedure] To create and calculate user defined metrics ................ 329
Section 5.12.2 The Data List panel .......................................................................... 330
Section 5.12.3 The Data Block Processing Calculator ............................................ 333
Section 5.12.4 The Display panel ............................................................................ 339
Section 5.13 The Data Block Editor worksheet .................................................... 341
Section 5.13.1 [Procedure] To create a data block .................................................. 341
Section 5.13.2 Function ........................................................................................... 343
Section 5.13.3 X-axis ............................................................................................... 344
Section 5.13.4 Y-axis ............................................................................................... 345
Section 5.13.5 Buttons ............................................................................................. 345
Section 5.13.6 The Values table .............................................................................. 346
Section 5.13.7 The Display ...................................................................................... 347
Chapter 6 The LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis workbook .................................... 349

Section 6.1 Introduction...................................................................................... 349
Section 6.1.1 Test strategies .................................................................................. 349
16A 5
Section 6.2 Derivation of a test specification ..................................................... 351
Section 6.2.1 Analysis of the life cycle.................................................................. 351
Section 6.2.2 Collection of the data on the real environment ................................ 352
Section 6.2.3 Determination of the environment to be simulated .......................... 352
Section 6.2.4 Establishment of the test program .................................................... 363
Section 6.2.5 Determination of the test PSD or sweeping sine .............................. 366
Section 6.3 Batch Reporting worksheet .............................................................. 366
Section 6.3.1 [Procedure] To batch report data ..................................................... 366
Section 6.3.2 The Data Selection panel ................................................................. 368
Section 6.3.3 The Template Set panel ................................................................... 369
Section 6.3.5 The Print Format panel .................................................................... 372
Section 6.3.6 The Reporting panel ......................................................................... 373
Section 6.4 Time Data Selection worksheet ....................................................... 373
Section 6.4.1 [Procedure] To use the Time Data Selection worksheet .................. 374
Section 6.4.2 Pane header options ......................................................................... 381
Section 6.4.3 Data Source Selection panel ............................................................ 382
Section 6.4.4 Data Set panel .................................................................................. 384
Section 6.4.5 Time Signal Calculator panel ........................................................... 390
Section 6.4.6 Interactive editing toolbar ................................................................ 396
Section 6.4.7 Multi-trace Display .......................................................................... 398
Section 6.4.8 Quick spectral map .......................................................................... 402
Section 6.4.9 Single value statistics ....................................................................... 403

Chapter 1 Mission Synthesis
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................7
Derivation of a test specification ........................................8
Section 1.1 Introduction
Almost all equipment is subjected to vibrational environments, such as that

encountered during road transportation at some point during its useful life. Such
environments have been shown to be both important and damaging, since
approximately half of the failures suffered during satellite and missile launch
vehicle flights can be attributed to mechanical vibration and shock. To reduce
such failure rates, therefore, it is essential to take these vibrational stresses into
account at an early stage of the development of the equipment and to be able to
design accurate tests to achieve this end.
Such tests must satisfy the following criteria:

 be severe enough to ensure that if the equipment survives the test then you
can safely assume that it will do so in the actual environment;
 be representative enough of the actual environment to give sufficient
confidence that if the equipment fails during the test it will do so under real
operational conditions;
 be general enough to ensure that all items of equipment of the same design
will survive the test.
A balance needs to be found therefore between severity and accuracy. The test
needs to give the developer the confidence that it is strenuous enough to
produce those failures that are likely to occur under normal operating
conditions, while avoiding such levels as would cause excessive damage as such
testing would tend to lead to a costly ‘over design’ of the equipment. Thus the
goal of the mission synthesis is to design the optimum test.
Section 1.1.1 Test strategies
Mission synthesis is concerned with the specifications for tests based on real
environmental data. To this end, there are two main strategies possible for
determining test specifications.
Step 1
Testing of the equipment in situ
This involves mounting the equipment on the source of vibration and subjecting
16A 7
it to the actual conditions it is likely to encounter. Such testing has the

advantage that
it is highly representative and requires no laboratory facilities for simulation or
specification of test conditions. In some cases (satellites for example) it is
highly
impractical and can be either costly or inaccurate if the life cycle of the
equipment is long. In addition, there is no real control over the test conditions
and the random
character of real life situations do not allow you to either test the limits of
endurance or to provide a safety factor.
Step 2
Testing of the equipment by simulation of conditions in a laboratory
For condition simulations, the test specifications can be based on either
standards or on data measured in the environment.
Section 1.1.1.1 Standards

There are a wide range of standards readily available defining levels for shock
and vibration tests, which in general are derived from real environmental data.
Using standard test specifications is useful when the conditions the equipment
will be subjected to are unknown or cannot be easily measured or approximated.
They are of course essential if you wish to ensure the equipment has a
predefined strength which complies with certain standards. Standards are
however conservative by nature and in general will lead to overdesigned
equipment, incurring a long and costly development.
Section 1.1.1.2 Real environmental data

This type of testing can be performed when the life cycle of the equipment is
well known. When this life cycle can be divided into stages of known duration
and loading conditions, specifications can be developed which closely simulate
the real environment. Testing to the limits enables safety margins to be
evaluated, and in general the risk of oversizing is diminished.
On the other hand, however, the equipment will be designed for a specific life
cycle.This implies that comparisons between different pieces of equipment are
difficult and that changes to the test specifications will require a new
assessment. It is also important to ensure that the actual testing complies with
the specifications. This is not always easy because of mechanical impedance
problems.
The Test.lab Mission synthesis software enables you to determine test

specifications based on real environmental data.
Section 1.2 Derivation of a test specification
This section describes how a test specification for a particular life profile of a

piece of equipment can be derived from a set of data describing the real
environment.
The determination of the test specification can be summarized as the following

stages:
Step 1
Analysis of the life cycle (on page 9)
Step 2
Collection of the data on the real environment (on page 9)
Step 3
Determination of the environment to be simulated (on page 10)
Step 4
Determination of the test PSD or sweeping sine (on page 24)
Section 1.2.1 Analysis of the life cycle
The life cycle of an item of equipment can be broken down into a series of
phases known as situations, as illustrated in the flow chart below.
Figure 1 Life profile of the equipment
In general, situations occur one after the other, i.e., in series. At some stages in
the life cycle, however, situations may occur in parallel, as illustrated above.
During each situation, there are a number of parameters that effect the
environment. These can include such factors as speed, position of the
equipment, duration of the phase, as well as conditions such as temperature,
humidity and vibrations, which must be taken into account.
Section 1.2.2 Collection of the data on the real environment
Data must be obtained to evaluate each situation identified in the life cycle.
Several sources of this type of data are possible.
16A 9
 Measurements made under actual conditions

Such data which involves placing the equipment in the actual environment is the
most accurate. But since the equipment is often not available and the
measurement situation impractical, it is also the most difficult to obtain.
 Measurements made on vehicles without the test object
When the test equipment is not available, useful data can be obtained by taking
measurements on the actual vehicles to be used in the life profile, and either
modelling the test structure or weighting the resulting data with transfer
functions.
 Representative measurements obtained from data bases
In many cases, data acquired for defining or verifying test specifications is
retained in data banks. This can be useful when making test specifications for
vehicles in the same category, where the measured values are felt to
approximate sufficiently to the current situation. Such data are generally
available as time signals, shock response spectra or power spectral densities.
 Standards
 Prediction computations
Section 1.2.2.1 Data describing the environment

The categories for describing the environments can be broken down into actual
measured data taken from a database or data generated specifically to describe a
particular situation. Once data has been selected for use in the mission synthesis
program it is called an "environment" and can be seen in the upper list in the
‘Mission synthesis’ module.
Section 1.2.2.1.1 Measured data

The measured data must be of type acceleration. They can be:
 Frequency spectra referred to as Swept sine
 Autopower spectra referred to as Random PSD
 Time samples − from shock pulses, TDF files or random measurements
referred to as Time records
Section 1.2.3 Determination of the environment to be simulated
The simulated environment must be as severe as the real one, allow a reduced
test time to be implemented, and preferably be capable of being conducted on
standard testing equipment. The determination of the simulated environment
consists of three stages:

 the synthesis of the equivalent damage potential of the real environment this
involves the computation of the SRS, MRS and FDS
 the application of an uncertainty (safety) factor to take into account the
uncertainties that exist in the definition of the test specifications
 the combination of all the factors describing individual situations into one
global test specification
Section 1.2.3.1 Synthesis of the equivalent damage potential

The starting point is the data collected on the real environment − consisting of
the shocks and random vibrations to which the equipment is subjected. The
damage incurred by these loads arises from:
Step 1
the stress exceeding a maximum (threshold)
Step 2
the accumulated fatigue due to cyclic loading
The first type of stress is represented by the Maximum Response Spectrum and
the Shock Response Spectrum, and the second type by the Fatigue Damage
Spectra.
16A 11
Section 1.2.3.1.1 Calculation of the Shock Response Spectrum (SRS)

A shock response spectrum models the damage potential of an object that has
been subjected to an acceleration shock time pulse. It is obtained, by
considering the response of a series of damped single−degree− of−freedom
systems, each with a different natural frequency, to the input pulse. A plot of the
peak response against the natural frequency defines the shock response
spectrum. This is illustrated below.
Figure 3 Derivation of a shock response spectrum
A typical SDOF system and the differential equation for the response y of the
mass is given below.
where

 m is the mass
 c is the viscous damping coefficient
 k is the spring constant.
Using the natural frequency , and critical damping factor , Equation 1 can
be written as:
Using Laplace transformation, we can obtain the transfer function of the

response of the mass for base excitation as:
Similarly the transfer function of relative displacement of the mass with respect
to the base, for base excitation, is derived as:
Equations 4 and 5 define ‘Shock filters’ in the frequency (Laplace) domain. The
smaller the value of , the larger will be the magnification factor for the filter
response for frequencies in the input near the resonance frequency . The
Laplace transform of the response of such a shock filter to a given base input is
obtained by multiplying by the Laplace transform of the base input.
16A 13
Section 1.2.3.1.2 Calculation of the Maximum Response Spectrum

(MRS)
This function represents the variation with frequency of the maximum response
of a series of damped single−degree− of−freedom systems, each with a different
natural frequency, to a dynamic load. While the SRS models the response to
short but high level time pulses, the MRS represents the steady state response to
repetitive, lower level time pulses. The loading signal can be a time function or
a Power Spectral Density function derived from the original time signal.
Figure 4 Derivation of the maximum response spectrum
Section 1.2.3.1.3 Calculation of the Fatigue Damage Spectrum (FDS)

The relationship between the maximum stress induced by cyclic loading
and the maximum number of cycles before rupture for a given material is
given by the Woehler curve. The constant A and the exponent b are
characteristics of the material.

Figure 5 Woehler curve
The stress is assumed to be related linearly to the strain (relative displacement)

through the Elastic modulus of the material. is the number of cycles at which
rupture or failure will occur when the object is subjected to cyclic stress at level
. The fatigue damage induced by cycles at level can be quantified by
the ratio . A real environment load will rarely be purely cyclic. There are
however several counting algorithms that can extract a number of cyclic loads at
different levels and numbers of cycles . The two methods are Zero max
and Range pair. Range pair is used in Test.Lab software.
Zero max
This method consists of searching for the maximum value between any two zero
crossings, and considering this as a half cycle at that level.
The cumulative damage D can be derived in the following manner.
16A 15
Range pair
This method consists of counting ranges between consecutive peaks and valleys
in the signal. The first phase consists of a data reduction process whereby
ranges that are smaller than the following one are eliminated from the signal. In
the example shown here, R1>R2, so R1 is not eliminated. R2<R3 so R2 is
eliminated from the signal and one cycle is added to the cycle count. The
process is then restarted using the new signal. R4>R1 so the point is retained as
a residual and the search continues for smaller ranges.
At the end of the first phase the result is a count of all the cycles removed and
series of residual points retained from the original signal. The second phase
consists of dividing the signal into a series of consecutive range pairs as shown
below. 1 cycle is then added to the cycle count for each pair.
The final result is a cycle count with the corresponding level determined
from its range value . According to Miners rule, the cumulative damage ( )
due to the real loading is given by

If D is equal to 1, then the object will fail due to fatigue. The Fatigue Damage
Spectrum is arrived at by considering the cumulative damage experienced by a
series of damped single−degree− of−freedom systems, each with a different
natural frequency to the input load. A plot of the cumulative damage against the
natural frequency defines the Fatigue Damage Spectrum, as illustrated in Figure
6.
Figure 6 Derivation of a Fatigue Damage Spectrum
Section 1.2.3.2 Application of the uncertainty (safety) factor (k)

The determination of a test specification from measured data involves taking
into account a whole series of uncertainties arising from different sources. The
test data, for example, are subject to measurement errors and inadequacies of
the test method. The actual results obtained are subjected to variations or
dispersal of values for both measured vibrations and strengths. Because of this it
is necessary to apply a safety or uncertainty factor to compensate. However,
simply summing the uncertainty factors from all possible sources would lead to
an unrealistically high value. The purpose of this section is to show how a
realistic uncertainty factor (k) can be derived.
An arbitrary value of (k) can be chosen. This strategy should be adopted when
very few environments are being used to determine the test specification. In this
case you should define a User defined factor and simply enter the required value
for k. MRS and FDS factors respectively will then be multiplied by this value
when determining the test specification.
If the distribution of the environmental load E (CVE and distribution type) and
the distribution of the material resistance R (CVR and distribution type) are
known, then a Constant uncertainty factor k can be computed. If a large amount
of data is available, then a variable coefficient of variation CV E can be
computed for each frequency.
16A 17
The parameter used to describe the characteristic environment relating to a

situation can generally be regarded as a random function represented by a type
of distribution, a mean value and a standard deviation as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7 Distribution of the environmental load
The standard deviation as well as its ratio with the value known as the
coefficient of variation can be computed either from the measured
data or obtained from specialist literature. The most suitable distribution
function for the environmental load level is considered to be a log−normal one.
Similarly, the capability of the equipment to resist the loads exerted by the
environment can be described in a similar way, as shown in Figure 8.
Values for the coefficient of variation can be obtained from

reference to the appropriate literature or by performing measurements on some
of the test objects. A suitable value based on published results is considered to
be A suitable value for the coefficient of variation for fatigue damage
is Strength distributions can be represented by both normal and
log−normal distributions, but the log−normal one is considered to be the most
suitable.
Figure 8 Distribution of material resistance
If all the above parameters are known, then the actual probability (P) that an
equipment material will not withstand its environment can be determined.

P = Prob (Environment > Resistance)
This can be represented graphically by the area where the curves describing the
loads and the material characteristics overlap as shown below.
Figure 9 Probability of failure P
If we now impose a required probability failure (P0) by moving the material

resistance curve to encompass this area we can arrive at a (fictional)
position where this condition is satisfied as shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10 Required probability of failure P0
The ratio of this position (where r implies required) to the

environment (where m implies measured) is known as the uncertainty factor
(k)
Eqn 8
If then the failure probability (P) of the material will be less than the
imposed value (P0) for this particular environment The goal of the test
specification is to prove that this is in fact the case and that failure is unlikely to
occur.
16A 19
The arbitrary or computed value of k is now applied and the required

environment is given by
This has to be done for each frequency line of the environmental load E. If CVE
is retrieved from the literature, k will be constant over the frequency range. If
CVE is computed from measured data, then k will vary with frequency. Figure 2
shows the final outcome of this stage is a triplet of functions (SRS, MRS and
FDS) determining the equivalent damage potential for a particular situation.
Section 1.2.3.3 Combining the situations

The three spectra describing each situation must now be combined according to
their role in the overall life cycle. These situations can exist in parallel or in
series. Consider the following life profile.
Section 1.2.3.3.1 Situations in parallel

In this case the equipment is subjected only to one of the parallel situations
or . The combined effect is arrived at by computing:
 the envelope of the

Section 1.2.3.3.2 Situations in series

Now the equipment is subjected only to situations in series. The combined
effect for all situations is arrived at by computing:


 the sum of the
Section 1.2.4 Establishment of the test program
The purpose of quantification testing is to demonstrate that the equipment has a

certain reliability, i.e. that it has a failure probability less that P 0. The discussion
on the application of the uncertainty factor (see "Application of the
uncertainty (safety) factor (k)" on page 17) showed that this was equivalent to
proving that the condition exists. If it can be shown that if n tests are
done at level (where TF is the test factor), and that all these tests
resulted in no failures, then the above conditions is satisfied.
Consider first, a statistical variable x with the mean value m, and standard
deviation The variable given by
(where n is the number of values of x) is also a statistical variable with mean

value m, and standard deviation given by
The mean value for the equipment resistance can be determined by performing a
number of tests (n). From the above theory, we will know that the mean value
calculated from these n results will lie within a certain range centered on the
actual mean value
It will in fact lie in a range defined by the limits and defined by a

certain confidence factor X%.
The test factor is defined as
16A 21
which can be computed when the following parameters are known:
Let us now consider the particular hypothetical case where n ruptures occurred
at the same load level Rconst
which implies that
So if n tests were carried out, and all failed at the same level (Rconst), then
Rconst lies in the range Rinfr to Rsupr with confidence level X%.
Now assume that n tests are performed at a test level ET and that no failures
occurred. This implies that ET < Ri for all n tests.
In the worst case this would mean that the test level was only just below the
rupture level
From the above, we know that

and
This defines the possible positions of
and
as indicated by the gray area in the figure.
The worst case is the lowest range where ET was equal to Rsupr. This implies that
although n tests resulted in no failures, the strongest specimens had been tested.
The mean resistance is smaller than ET.
But if we now consider the case where the test level is set to
Therefore, if we do n tests without failure at level we have proven

that even for the worst case and the failure probability of the material
will be less than P0 for the environment load defined by
16A 23
Section 1.2.5 Determination of the test PSD or sweeping sine
The final stage is to find a swept sine or random signal which will form an
adequate test specification. When fatigue is critical, this PSD − based on the life
profile functions and the test factor − must have an FDS that envelopes that of
the life profile (reference) FDS. If this is not the case, then the test specification
parameters must be adjusted and a new PSD determined.
Figure 11 Generation of the test PSD and swept sine where fatigue is critical
For certain applications, it is preferable to determine the characteristics of the

PSD based on the MRS or the SRS. This procedure can be adopted if fatigue
damage is not a critical factor. The same procedure as shown in Figure 11 is
adopted.

Chapter 2 Data and its management
In This Chapter
Data management and configuration ..................................25
Importing and exporting data .............................................28
My Links ............................................................................48
Project data .........................................................................50
Section 2.1 Data management and configuration
This document discusses some concepts and terminology concerned with the
Test.Lab software in general and the Desktop software in particular.
 The desktop (on page 25)
 Applications (on page 26)
 Projects (on page 26)
 Documentation (on page 28)
Section 2.1.1 The desktop
The Test.Lab desktop is the basic software module or application that is started
by double clicking the LMS shortcut or icon on your computer. An application
window appears that contains a menubar, a toolbar and a working area.
A new window is opened every time you open a project. These multiple project
windows can be arranged using the Window menu either, as a cascade or, to
make them all visible, as tiles. Each one of these windows is related to a
different project.
Every application window has a menubar and a toolbar (although the toolbar
can be hidden, if required, using the View Toolbars menu). The contents of
the menubar and toolbar depend on the active window and the project /
application that it represents. You can make a particular window active by
clicking on it and the active project / application window is then distinguished
by the color of its title bar turning in a darker blue.
Note: All operations performed using the menubar and toolbar will be
executed on this active project / application window.
16A 25
Section 2.1.2 Applications
An application is an integrated software module, such as Test.Lab Desktop.

Each application provides all the functionality required to perform a specific
task. Each step required to accomplish this is performed using a specific
worksheet, and by stepping through each worksheet in order, the required task
can be realized. The complete set of worksheets required for an application
comprises a workbook.
You can open any Test.Lab application by using the Start menu on the
Windows taskbar. Click on the application's shortcut available under the
Programs menu. You can then open an existing project (.lms file) within the
application by using the File Open... menu or the Open Project icon on
the toolbar. Or, you can open a new project by using the File New menu or the
New Project icon on the toolbar.
You can open an existing project by right clicking on the project and selecting
Open with....
Then select the Test.Lab application that you want to use.
If you want to open your projects using this application by default just check the
corresponding checkbox Always use the selected program to open this
kind of file.
Section 2.1.3 Projects
A project is a single entity that contains all the data that you require to be kept
together. It is a means of grouping a set of data that logically belong together.
This is typically the data relating to a particular test object. It could thus include
all sorts of data, such as measurement data, test and processing setups, geometry
and modal data.
Note: One project is not necessarily related to just one application.
You can use different applications with the same project and you can use a
single application with a number of different projects, though typically you
would not have the same project open in different applications at the same time.
Projects are automatically assigned a name that contains a sequential number

(ProjectX). The project can be renamed when being saved using the File Save
As... menu or the Save icon on the toolbar.

Section 2.1.3.1 Opening a project within an application

First, start the application by clicking on its shortcut.
Using the toolbar icon for New Project (on page 261) will open a new
default project (NewProject.lms on the <install
dir>\LMSTest.Lab11A\central\Install folder.
You can open an existing project (.lms file) within the application by using the
File Open... menu.
A project can be assigned a name and be saved as an .lms file.
Section 2.1.3.2 Opening a project directly

Using Windows Explorer, when you double-click the project file, it is opened
by the default application. This default is set during the Test.Lab installation
procedure.
You can also use the standard Windows functionality to open an existing project
with a different application.
First select the project in a Windows Explorer and right click the file.
In the popup menu, use the Open With... option to select the application that
you want to open the project.
Section 2.1.3.3 Project templates

Every project is based on a template that determines the initial setup and
settings for a new project. A project template can contain multiple test setups or
sections. Project template files have the extension .tpl
Section 2.1.3.3.1 [Procedure] To make a new project template

Step 1
Open an existing project. Make any changes to the test setup you require.
Step 2
Save the project settings with the File Save As Template... menu and give it a
name (file_name.tpl).
When you next use File New on the menubar to start a new project, the new
template will be available for selection.
Section 2.1.3.3.2 [Procedure] To change the default project template

Step 1
First make a new project template as above.
Step 2
When you save the project settings via the File Save As Template... menu,
16A 27
select the option to create a template shortcut on the desktop.

You can now open a new file with the created template by double clicking the
desktop shortcut.
Section 2.1.4 Documentation
Documentation in the form of user defined attributes as well as MS Word

documents or pictures, can be attached to projects, sections and runs. You can
use the documentation worksheet to add a document to a project and to a
section.
To add a document to a run, use the browser tree in the Data Data Explorer
menu. In addition, other files including picture files can be added.
Section 2.1.4.1 LMS Document templates

Every project, section and run document is based on a template. This template
determines the basic structure and format for a document. Document template
files normally have the .doc extension. The program provides a default template
for project, section and run documents.
Section 2.2 Importing and exporting data
This document describes the types of files that you can import and export and
those that can be embedded in a report.
The Test.Lab software enables you to view and access data on the network
systems that have been configured for access.
This data is accessed via the network folder in the browser tree of the Navigator
worksheet with the “Network” icon . From this folder you can export the
data items to a text (.txt) and, if suitable, to a sound (.wav) file.
A graphical representation of the data can be displayed in the appropriate

windows. A complete layout, composed of one or more display windows and
the data inside them, is termed a “picture”. Pictures can be copied and pasted
into other applications using a number of different formats.

 Importing data items (on page 29)

 Exporting data items (on page 38)
 Copying pictures (on page 47)
Section 2.2.1 Importing data items
Section 2.2.1.1 Data types you can import

 This section describes the different types of data that can be accessed and
thus imported in the Desktop software. These are categorized into the
following types:
 Cada-X project databases (see "The Cada-X project database" on page 29)
 Cada-X TDF databases (see "The TDF database" on page 31)
 Cada-X TRDS files (see "TRDS files" on page 32)
 Road Runner data or Pimento data (see "Road Runner files" on page 34)
 Sysnoise data (see "Sysnoise databases" on page 34)
 Universal files (on page 33)
 SDF files (on page 34)
 RPC III files (on page 35)
 Matlab data (on page 35)
 Test.Lab data
 Virtual.Lab data
 ASAM-ODS ATFx data (see "ASAM ATFx data" on page 37)
 STL files (geometry) (see "STL data" on page 38)
 I-Deas afu and afi data
Section 2.2.1.2 The Cada-X project database
Note: The project being discussed here is a Cada-X database and not the
Test.Lab storage facility used in the Desktop software context.
The Cada-X project database is used to store a wide variety of data that can be
acquired and created using the Cada-X software. It is a collection of data that
logically belong together; most frequently they all refer to a common object - a
car prototype for example. This includes geometrical data describing a structure,
test data measured on the structure and the results of analyses performed on the
test data. The five types of data that are contained in a project are illustrated
below.
16A 29
Contents of the Cada-X project database
Only one geometry definition of a test structure can exist in a project. There can
be any number of test sections and analysis sections that hold the results of
measurements and analyses on the test structure. You will see from the figure
above that the Cada-X database can also hold multiple sets of units.
When browsing, the project icon represents a project database. Clicking on

the sign next to this icon will reveal all the available data types in that
project.
When importing/accessing the Virtual.Lab data, the less common variables are
blocked. If needed, variables can be unblocked in the LoaderExtension.ini file
located in the LMS program folder.”
Section 2.2.1.2.1 Tests

Tests contain test data that has either been measured or computed. A block of
data values making up the specific function represents such data.
When browsing, the test section icon represents a test section. Clicking on
the sign next to this icon will reveal the contents of the test section.
In all cases a textual memo can be associated with each test.

2.2.1.2.1.1 Data functions
Data functions are composed of a series of data values that make up the block.
In addition there is a descriptive header containing information about the type of
block.
When browsing, the function icon indicates data functions. Any data
represented by this icon can be viewed in a display window in the Desktop
software application. A number of selected functions can be loaded into a
FrontBack window where they will overlay each other, or they can be loaded
into a Colormap or Waterfall window where the series of blocks will be
presented along a third axis.
The type of function (FRF, time record, coherence ...) is indicated along side
each record and can be read from the tool tip if the mouse pointer is placed over
the function icon. The primary identification of the function is also displayed. In
most cases this identifies the measurement point or channel on which the data
was acquired.

Data values
The series of data values which make up a block can be displayed as a static
function in a FrontBack window. You can export the complete list of values to a
number of alternative formats (see "Exporting data items" on page 38).
Data record headers

These are an extremely useful set of field values which are used to characterize
a data block and which can be used for searches and to derive information about
the characteristics of the data. Most of these appear in the legend that can be
associated with a display window. They can be read from the “Properties” sheet
associated with the data.
Section 2.2.1.2.2 Geometry

Only one geometry definition can exist in a Cada-X project database. This is
basically a wire frame model of the test object and consists of nodes (where
measurements are made and at which points mode shape deflections are
determined), connections between the nodes and surfaces between sets of three
nodes. You can see the nodes / connections / triangles in the “Properties” sheet.
The geometry of an object is represented by the icon and can be loaded into
a “Geometry” window, where it will form the “undeformed model”. Mode
shapes can be imposed on it and animated.
Section 2.2.1.2.3 Analyses

Analyses are a means of grouping results that are the outcome of various modal
analyses on the test data in the current project. Any number of analyses can be
held in a project and each one can hold a number of mode records.
Modes can be viewed in a Geometry window, where the correct model is on

display, and be animated on that model. Actual values can be seen in the
properties. If required, you can also export the values.
Section 2.2.1.3 The TDF database

The TDF database is used for the storage of “streamed data”. This is generally
extensive sets of measurement data that in most cases are unprocessed time
signals.
When browsing, the TDF identifies a TDF database. Clicking on the

sign next to this icon will reveal the contents of the TDF database.
There is no hierarchical structure to the TDF database. Bundles of channels are

grouped together in either “recordings”. Recordings can be of various lengths
and with varying numbers of channels.
16A 31
Structure of the TDF database
TDF files are generated in the Throughput Acquisition Monitor.
Recordings are bundles of streamed data that are imported, processed and
manipulated in Test monitor. They can come from imported DAT recordings,
measured directly using Binaural recording or be generated by processing from
within the Time data processing or Sound Quality monitors. Each recording can
contain an unlimited number of “channels” that logically belong together.
Recordings are represented in the browser by the 'recording' icon. Dragging

a recording into a display will result in all the channels it contains being
displayed. Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal all the channels
that were contained in the recording. The function represents each of these
channels. Any data represented by this function icon can be viewed in a (2D)
Frontback display window in the Desktop software.
Section 2.2.1.4 TRDS files

During a Signature monitor acquisition, a series of basic measurement functions
(time signals or frequency spectra for example) are acquired at specific times
during the complete acquisition. The acquisition of these basic measurement
functions is triggered by the value of a tracking parameter; which can be rpm,
time, temperature or some other variable that the user is interested in. This
results in a series of data blocks (or functions) that are known collectively as a
“map” since it plots the evolution of the measurement function with respect to
the tracking parameter.
Contents of a TRDS file
In addition, various composite functions can be generated. Each time the target
tracking parameter value is met, a single (real or complex) value is calculated

for each composite block based on the newly acquired data. The maximum
number of acquisitions determines the length of such blocks. The contents of
such blocks can be the tracking parameter values or online analysis functions
such as OA levels, order and frequency sections.
All of this data can be saved in a TRDS file. When browsing, the TRDS
indicates a TRDS file. Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal the
contents of the TRDS file.
The contents of this file will either be the “map” of basic measurement
functions or the single block composite functions. These various entities are
grouped together according to measurement channels as indicated by the
'channel' icon.
The function icon represents the single blocks of composite data, and the
type of function is indicated alongside. Data represented by this icon can be
visualized in a FrontBack window.
The waterfall icon represents the “map” of basic measurement functions.

Such data can be dragged into a 3D display window such as a waterfall or a
colormap window. The Z axis will be annotated with the value of the tracking
parameter (time, rpm, or whatever) as stored in the TRDS file. Clicking on the
sign next to the waterfall icon will reveal all the basic measurement
functions, each one being represented by the function icon. You can select a
number of these functions and load them into a 3D display window too, but in
this case the Z axis will be annotated with the number of functions loaded.
Section 2.2.1.5 Universal files

A Universal File is a physical file in ASCII format, containing symbolic data in
physical records with a maximum record length of 80 characters. The term
Universal File is used to denote a complete file which can contain a number of
“file datasets”. There are a number of different file datasets each used to
describe different types of functions.
The 'Header file data set' (151) contains the information for the model's name,
description and the generating program. It also contains information for the time
and date of the file's creation and last access.
The 'Units file data set' (164 or 156) contains the units and the description of the
units for the data set, as well as the factors for converting the file units to SI.
The 'Function at Nodal DOF file data set' (58) documents any time or frequency
domain function with several lines of ID information, response and reference
location, direction and name. The ordinate data type and abscissa spacing along
with the specific data type, axis labels, and units are also included in the file.
The 'Function at Nodal DOF file data set' (58b) contains data in both ASCII and
binary formats. The header (first 11 records) for Dataset 58b is identical to that
of Universal File Dataset 58. It contains function attribute information in ASCII
format. The remainder of the file contains the same data as Universal File
Dataset 58, but it presents that data in binary format.
16A 33
The 'Trace Lines' (82) specifies the trace line number, color, identification, and
the entries defining the trace. This file gives the connectivity that is used
together with the grid points to display the configuration of the system under
test or analysis.
The 'Analysis Data at Nodes' (55,2414) describes the specific kind of analysis
performed, as well as, the data model and characteristics, specific data type, and
number of data values.
When browsing Universal files, an icon indicates the complete Universal file.
Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal the number of functions
measured at nodal DOFs (type 58 data sets) contained in the file. Each of these
will be represented by the icon and can be displayed in a FrontBack window.
Section 2.2.1.6 SDF files

SDF stands for Standard Data Format, and is a data format that allows data to be
shared between HP analyzers. SDF files can contain the following kinds of
measurement data.
 time history, auto-correlation, cross-correlation, impulse response
 frequency
 linear spectrum, autopower spectrum, crosspower spectrum, frequency
response, ordinary coherence, partial coherence, multiple coherence.
 amplitude
 histogram, probability density function, cumulative density function
 full octave, third octave
 acoustic
 pressure data, intensity data, velocity data, sound power data
 waterfall data
The .sdf file contains a number of data records.
Section 2.2.1.7 Road Runner files

These are data files that are created using the LMS Roadrunner/Pimento Mobile
system. A number of files can be reported.
 Frequency data files (with .fdf extension)
 Order data files (with .odf extension)
 Octave data files (with .zdf extension)
 Time data files (with .tdf extension). These files can contain time data
streams and block data associated with the time streams.
These files contain individual records.
Section 2.2.1.8 Sysnoise databases

Sysnoise databases have the extension .sdb. These contain all the data relating

to one model. This includes geometrical data describing the model. The model
also has a number of potentials that are the primary acoustic results, arising
from the analysis that you have performed. These potentials are related to a
node or field point associated with the model, and the data available are the 2D
acoustic functions relating to a single direction. In addition there is the global
pressure results for each node. These 2D functions can be seen in a FrontBack
window.
Section 2.2.1.9 RPC III files

RPC III (Remote Parameter Control) files are sequential, fixed length, 512-byte
record files, containing a standard header, followed by data. The header
contains information about the data, stored as keyword-value pairs. For more
information about the RPC III file format, see the MTS website. In the Desktop
software you can view binary time history files - not ASCII or histogram files.
When browsing, the icon represents the rpc file. This file contains a time history
for each channel, which can be displayed in a FrontBack window. Properties of
the file show the header information.
Section 2.2.1.10 Matlab data

Matlab is a technical computing environment that combines numeric
computation, graphics and visualization, and a high-level programming
language for scientific and engineering applications. The name MATLAB
stands for MAtrix LABoratory. It provides easy access to matrix software which
enables the user to solve complex numerical problems without actually writing
a program.
Vectors and other one-dimensional matrices can be viewed in a FrontBack

window. Two-dimensional matrices can be shown in a Waterfall or Colormap
window.
When creating data in matlab, it is possible to make a header, so that the data is
annotated in Test.Lab. Beneath a short description of this structure. For concrete
examples, please use the ‘export to matlab’ functionality.
When exporting in MKS units, the data will be stored in MKS units (so even if
the label says ‘g’, the values are expressed in m/s2). The data structure is the
following:
Function_Record -> [depends on the structure of the data]
XValues -> Values (1xm)
-> quantity -> label ('g')
-> unit transform -> offset (0)
-> factor (0.10192)
-> log_ref (1)
16A 35
-> quantity terms (see lower)
YValues-> Values (nxm)
-> unit transform -> offset (0)
-> factor (0.10192)
-> log_ref (1)
-> quantity terms (see lower)
When exporting in user units, the data will be stored in user units (the label is g,
so also the data is in ‘g’. There is no description of the label given - the data
structure is the following:
Function_Record -> [depends on the structure of the data]
XValues-> Values (1xm)
YValues-> Values (nxm)
(link to this place) -> quantity terms-> -> num 1
-> den 1
-> Quantity(LENGTH)
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity ANGLE
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity MASS
-> -> num -2
-> den 1
-> Quantity TIME
-> -> num 0

-> den 1
-> Quantity CURRENT
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity LIGHT
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity TEMPERATURE
-> -> num 0
-> den 1
-> Quantity MOLECULAR_AMOUNT
Section 2.2.1.11 ASAM ATFx data

The ATFx file is a standardized text-based format for exchanging data and
meta-information between different systems and platforms.
An atfx file consists out of two main parts. The application model, which
describes the data and orders it in a structure. and the data instances themselves.
Test.Lab supports the following NVH data types (in the (xml or referenced
binary files):
1D: This data type is just a sequence of numbers, meaning it is a vector.

Therefore, it is called 1D data. This data type is typically used to store e.g. tacho
pulse information..
2D: 2D data are typically represented in a 2D array, where 1 dimension depends

on the length of the function and the other dimension is 2 or more:
 in the most simple case the dimension is 2: one vector with Y-axis values
and another one with X-axis values
 in other cases, there could be multiple X-axis (e.g. Hz and rpm)
These are the the Test.Lab blocks and blockstreams.
3D: 3D data are in fact sets of 2D data that are linked together in the 3rd
dimension by an additional parameter. Typically, all X-axis of the 2D functions
contained in a 3D data object are the same
These are the the Test.Lab Waterfall and Colormap data.
The following ATFx data types are not supported:
16A 37
 MTL : Multidimensional Time at Level

 TAL : Time At Level
 Rainflow data
 Geometry data like Geometry, Modesets, modes, …
Section 2.2.1.12 STL data

The STL file format is a geometry definition file format that uses a mesh of
triangles to form the shell of a solid object, where each triangle shares common
sides and vertices. Most CAD packages will allow you to export to the .stl file
format. It is the industry standard for exchange of geometry for rapid
prototyping. The file extension stands for STereoLithography. This allows to
import basic geometry info from almost any CAD package. Test.Lab supports
binary and ASCII STL Files. It is recommended to generate the geometry with a
rather coarse faceting. The STL files format does not contain any information
on units. Test.Lab assumes that the units are in mm.
Section 2.2.2 Exporting data items
You can export links (see "[Procedure] To create and export links
(bookmarks)" on page 48) to your data using bookmarks.
You can also export data files using the popup menu in the Data Explorer.
Step 1
Open up the browser tree in the Navigator worksheet.
Step 2
Browse for the data item you want to export.
Step 3
Right click on the data file to select it.
Step 4
Select Export to from the popup menu in the Navigator worksheet.
Step 5
Choose the file format you want for the data item. Data types and suitable file
formats for their export are given in the following table.
Step 6
Specify the name and location where you want to save the data.
Note: For exporting Test.Lab data items to Cada-X you must specify both the
name of the database and the project.
Step 7
Click Save.

Data items that are in the browser tree can be exported as a text (.txt) file, to a
Cada-X database or projects file and, if suitable, a sound (.wav) file. The table
below correlates the data types with the formats that can be used for their
export.
Data Cada- Univers SD Matla DynaWor Tex Wa AFM ATF

types X al File F b ks t v file x
(ASCI
I)
Time X X X X X X X x
Coherenc X X X X X X x
e
Frequenc X X X X X X x
y
Geometr X X
y
Waterfall X X X x
Modal X X X
Modes
Operatio X X
nal
Modes
Data types and suitable export formats
Note: Modes can be exported to AVI files directly from the Geometry display.
Section 2.2.2.1 Cada-X

This exports data items to a Cada-X database for further analysis. A dialog
appears in which you can specify the project (and the test) in which the data will
be stored.
Section 2.2.2.2 Universal File

This writes data in a file in Universal file format. A dialog appears in which you
can specify the location and the file name.
When mode shapes are exported to universal file, they are always scaled using
Unity Modal Mass.
Section 2.2.2.2.1 Node naming strategy

Limitations of universal file format
The geometry model used in a universal file has important limitations:
16A 39
 The nodes that can be stored in universal files are ONLY NUMBERS and
the NUMBERS must be unique
 A concept of 'components' is not known.
Node naming strategy when writing
In order to cope, in the best possible way, with the geometry created in Test.Lab
where components are used and where the node numbers might not be unique
(because the same number can be used for different components), the following
strategy is used:
 If the node names in Test.Lab are NOT a digit, the corresponding node in
the universal file will be assigned a number starting from 1;
 If the node name (excluding component name) from Test.Lab is a number
and if all the available node numbers are unique, this node number will be
kept when writing the universal file;
 If not all the available node numbers in Test.Lab are unique (e.g. if you
have two different components with the same node number), the node
numbers exported to universal file will be renumbered (no match between
original and saved node);
If the option ’Write CADA-X compatible file’ is used, node numbers are
limited to four figures, while the component information to five figures and
higher (10000, 20000,...).
 The component information available in the geometry is saved by writing
all the lines between the nodes of a single component to a single 'Trace line'
(dataset 82) for that component;
Node map file
In order to better cope with loss of information when point names from
Test.Lab are forced to be written as node numbers in the universal file, we also
provide (as an option ‘Generate node map file’ which can be selected) the
capability to write a 'node map' table when we export. This is just a simple table
of correspondence between the full Test.Lab node name and the new node
number from the universal file. When the universal file is read and the node
map table file is available, we can then reimport it with the correct name.
The strategy is to try to use the geometry information to generate this node map
and then follow the same node map when measurements with a specific point
name are exported.
Node names found in measurements
If no geometry is available in the project, then a similar strategy will be

followed for all the 'point names' found in the measurements to be exported.
The option 'Extract Node number from DOFs' is useful for the following
particular case:

 The geometry contains component and nodes (i.e. is not empty)

 And a measurement is exported and has a point name with a node name
equal to a number NOT present in the geometry.
In this case, with the option being 'off', the node number you will find back for
this measurement in the universal file will be a node number starting from
100.000.001.
With this option 'on', the node number you will find back for this measurement
in the universal file will be the same as the one in Test.Lab.
This option should be set 'on' by default.
Section 2.2.2.2.2 Export options

Use binary format for measurements
You can decide to use the binary format for measurement data. This option is
very useful for long time traces.
Generate node map file

If the option "Generate node map file" is used, an extra file (same file name but
with .map as extension) will be created and the matching between the node in
UFF and point ID in Test.Lab will be written in this file.
Note: If this file is available, Test.Lab will always read it and try to recover the
point id when you import data from universal file. Please refer to the previous
chapter about node naming strategy in universal file.
Normalize modes
If the option "Normalize modes" is used when you export the mode set, the
modes will be normalized in amplitude format when writing in universal file.
 The imaginary part of the new mode gets the amplitude value of the original
mode with the sign of the imaginary part of the original mode.
 The real part of the new mode is set to zero.
Unity Modal Mass mode shape scaling depends on default unit of mass
Modes are scaled to Unity Modal Mass when exporting mode sets. Normally,
they are scaled to a modal mass of 1 kg. When the option ‘Unity Modal Mass
mode shape scaling depends on default unit of mass’ is used, modes are scaled
in the way the default mass unit is 1. In case of the English unit system, this
leads to a modal mass of 1 lb.
Keep original format and scaling for blocks
When measurement blocks are exported to universal file, they are always
transformed to the default format and scaling, except when this option is
checked. The default formats and scaling types depend of the function type:
spectrum: linear-peak (single-sided), autopower: power - peak (single-sided),
and crosspower: power - peak (single-sided). Exception: when the format is
16A 41
PSD, this format is kept (because it can be set in the universal file) and the
scaling type is set to RMS.
Write CADA-X compatible files
If the option "Write CADA-X compatible files" is used, node numbers are
limited to four figures (up to 9999) to be compatible with CADA-X.
Component information is put in the fifth figure and higher (10000, 20000,...)
when node names are not unique over different components.
Note: Please refer to the previous chapter about node naming strategy in
universal file.
Include node numbers only

If the option "Include node numbers only" is used, only the node numbers are
exported, not the component information.
In case of no component, write node names in response and reference entity

fields
If a component is available it will be written in the response and reference entity
fields. In case of no component, this option writes the node names to these
fields instead of leaving them empty.
Export inverted transformation matrix
If the option "Export inverted transformation matrix" is used, the information of
the euler angles is exported in an inverted transformation matrix.
Globalize mode shapes; do not export euler angles
If the option "Globalize mode shapes, do not export euler angles" is used, the
euler angles of the nodes are not exported to the universal file (kept zero) and
the mode shapes are globalized in the nodes with euler angles different from
zero.
Write node coordinates and orientations in dataset number 15 and 18
If the option "Write node coordinates and orientations in data set 15 and 18" is
used, node coordinates and orientations are written in the old dataset 15 and 18
instead of the new data set 2411 and 2420.
Export Geometry
If the option "Export Geometry" is used, the geometry is exported.
Pad incomplete lines with zeros
In case of this option, incomplete lines in the exported universal file are
complemented with zeros.
Extract Node number from DOFs
This is option is useful in case the geometry contains component and nodes (i.e.

is not empty) and a measurement is exported and has a point name with a node
name equal to a number NOT present in the geometry.
In this case, with the option being 'off', the node number you will find back for
this measurement in the universal file will be a node number starting from
100.000.001. With this option 'on', the node number you will find back for this
measurement in the universal file will be the same as the one in Test.Lab.
Note: Please refer to the previous chapter about node naming strategy in
universal file.
Write elements in dataset number 2412

In case of this option, lines and triangles are exported to dataset number 2412
instead of dataset number 82. Dataset number 2412 can contain lines, triangles,
and quadrangles. Dataset number 82 can only contain lines: only the edges of
triangles and quadrangles can be exported.
Section 2.2.2.3 SDF

This exports 2D Data to an SDF file. A dialog appears in which you can specify
the file in which the data will be stored.
Section 2.2.2.4 Matlab

Exports block(s) to a Matlab file. A dialog appears in which you can specify the
file in which the data will be stored.
Save with single precision floating point format
When this option is checked, the exported Matlab file will be written with single
precision (instead of double).
Group similar blocks in a matrix
When multiple blocks are selected during the export, this option will ensure that
blocks with an equal function class will be grouped in one folder. The folder
will be named after the common function class. As the concept of a waterfall
structure is unknown in Matlab, this can be useful to group the similar blocks.
Save in MKS units
If this option is checked, the data of the Matlab file is written in MKS units (e.g.
for accelerations, it will be expressed in m/s2 – even if the displayed unit is g).
In the Matlab file, you will find the complete ‘description’ of the unit including
the dimensions, the factor and offset.
If this option is not checked, the data is expressed in the ‘user units’ (e.g. for
accelerations, it will be expressed in ‘g’). The Matlab file only contains the
label of the unit.
16A 43
Section 2.2.2.5 DynaWorks

Export data to DynaWorks format.
Use binary format for measurements
You can decide to use the binary format for measurement data. This option is
very useful for long time traces.
Section 2.2.2.6 Text

In this case, the data values (X and Y values) in the function will be written to a
text file with the extension .txt. You can define the location and the name of the
file. This file can be viewed using a text editor such as Notepad or WordPad,
and it can also be imported into other applications such as Word ™ or Excel™.
Section 2.2.2.7 GPS

Recorded external GPS data, i.e. not recorded with the frontend integrated GPS
receiver, can be exported per Point id. The Point id needs to start with
“gps_external-gps-name:” to distinguish between multiple external gps
recordings.
Critical channels for GPS export are: Latitude, Longitude, Altitude and
NumberOfSatellites.
Section 2.2.2.7.1 KML (Keyhole Markup Language)

In this case, the GPS data in the throughput file will be exported to a KML file
that can be opened in Google Earth.
Filter options:
 None: no filtering will be applied. All points that are available in the TDF
will be exported.
 Minimum time between points: you can reduce the number of points
exported by defining how much time there should be between 2 points in
the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
 Minimum distance between points: you can reduce the number of points
exported by defining how much distance there should be between 2 points
in the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
Section 2.2.2.7.2 NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association)

In this case, the GPS data in the throughput file will be exported to a NMEA.
Filter options:
 None: no filtering will be applied. All points that are available in the TDF
will be exported.
 Minimum time between points: you can reduce the number of points

exported by defining how much time there should be between 2 points in

the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
 Minimum distance between points: you can reduce the number of points
exported by defining how much distance there should be between 2 points
in the track. This way, you can reduce the size of the exported file.
Section 2.2.2.7.3 Open KML

In this case, the GPS data, recorded with the frontend integrated GPS receiver in
the throughput file will be exported to a KML file directly visualized in Google
Earth. The default filtering setting, Minimum time between points = 1s, will be
used.
Section 2.2.2.8 Wav

In this case, the data values will be written to a sound or audio file with the
extension .wav. You can define the location and the name of the file. This file
can be played back on your audio hardware or device.
Section 2.2.2.8.1 Separate Files...

In this case, multiple traces are written into multiple wav files, one wav file for
each data trace.
Section 2.2.2.8.2 Stereo File...

In this case, a selection of two traces is merged into a single stereo wav file.
The Left and Right channels must contain the same amount of points and have
the same sampling rate to allow this stereo export.
The check box ‘Swap left and right channels when saving WAV’ effectively
swap the two selected channels as reported in the panel itself.
The range can be set automatic, or manual in Pa dB (peak).
Section 2.2.2.8.3 Multichannel File...

In this case, a selection of more than two traces is merged into a single
multichannel wav file.
All the selected channels must contain the same amount of points and have the
same sampling rate.
The range is automatically set for this multichannel wav export.
Section 2.2.2.8.4 Concatenated Files...

In this case, multiple traces are written into one wav file, one after another.
Exporting to Concatenated Files allows you to append the selected data items
16A 45
together and write them into a single wav file.
Section 2.2.2.8.5 Pulse Embedded 16bits Stereo File...

In this case, up to 4 traces are written into one wav file, exactly two audio
channels and up to 2 pulse coded channels in the 16th bit of the samples. The
pulse coded channels are rotational speeds or (vehicle) speeds.
The export to Pulse Embedded 16bits Stereo Files allows you to save audio data
with engine- and vehicle speed data synchronized into a single wav file.
2.2.2.8.5.1 Range Settings
The range value is defined either as full range or as HMS range; there is a
difference of 9dB between these. The HMS range is defined as the RMS value
corresponding to the peak value (-3dB) and interprets the highest bit as
headroom (-6dB).
The management of the range value is either automatic or manual. In the

automatic case the range is determined from scanning the data. In the manual
case the value defined in the manual range input field is used.
2.2.2.8.5.2 Stereo WAV settings
The audio channels are loaded as Left- and Right channel and the order can be
switched from a checkbox.
The frequency of the audio channels will be used as sampling frequency for the
WAV file.
2.2.2.8.5.3 Pulse channel settings
A pulse channel can be defined for Left- and Right channel. The evolution of
the rotational- or vehicle speed is converted into a pulse train which is then
coded in the 16th bit.
The Left channels support speed and the Right channels rotational speed. The
values for the Pulses/meter and Pulses/rev are not saved in the WAV file.
2.2.2.8.5.4 File name extensions
Section 2.2.2.9 AFM file (ASCII format)

In this case, data can be exported in an ASCII format with extension .afm and
these data can be imported afterwards in Test.Lab via Test.Lab Modal Analysis.
Section 2.2.2.10 RPC III

In this case data will be exported to an RPC III file format. This only works for
throughput data.
Section 2.2.2.11 ASAM ATFx Data

In this case data will be exported to an ASAM ATFx file format. A standard
NVH application model is used as default. It is possible to customize this

process and use a mapping file to map Test.Lab user attributes to a custom
NVH Data Model.
The following data can be exported to ASAM ATFx:
All 2D data: blocks and blockstreams
All 2,5 D data (waterfall and colormap data).
Section 2.2.3 Copying pictures
A picture is a display layout with data. A complete picture can be copied (and
pasted) to any application that accepts the type of file selected. Left click on the
picture tab to schedule the picture popup menu and access the copy options.
There are four types of copy that can be made here, each of which is described
below.
Section 2.2.3.1 Copy to Metafile

A Metafile is a picture format where the individual elements in the picture are
retained as such and can be edited individually. These files can be pasted into
Word and PowerPoint, and the contents (text strings, fonts, lines and colors,
etc.) of the picture can be edited within these applications.
This option is also available from the display popup menu that appears when
right clicking in a display window.
Section 2.2.3.2 Copy to Bitmap

A bitmap is picture format with a fixed number of pixels and colors. It can be
pasted into Word and PowerPoint, and the picture can be re-sized and formatted
within these applications.
It can also be pasted into a suitable graphic editing application where it can be
edited to a certain extent as a graphic file.
Section 2.2.3.3 Copy as Active Picture (embedded data)

In this case, not only is the picture copied, but the functionality in the display is
available too. It can then be pasted into Word and PowerPoint and changes
made directly to how the data is displayed.
This means that you have access directly to the popup menus that are used to
control both the format of the data function on display as well as the
characteristics of the window in which it appears. Even if no Reporting Seat
Client is installed on your system, you can install a plug-in that allows you to
activate and edit the pictures that are embedded in the document. This can result
in a very large document however.
16A 47
Section 2.2.3.4 Copy as Active Picture (linked data)

Documents containing active pictures with embedded data can be large. In order
to reduce the size of the document, active pictures can be copied with links to
the data. These pictures can then be pasted into Word and PowerPoint. Now
when the picture is activated, the link is activated and used to load the data and
the functionality of the display. This means that you can now make changes to
how the data is displayed using the popup menus available in the display
windows.
Section 2.3 My Links
My Links (often referred to as bookmarks) are a convenient way to provide

direct access to specific data items that you need to refer to quickly. They can
also be exported so that other users on your network can access your data.
Section 2.3.1 Elements in the My Links collection folder
The My Links folder is found in the Data Explorer with the My Links icon .
Individual links are defined in this folder as “links” to specific data items. They
have a “Link” icon such as or . They can be dragged into the displays in
exactly the same way as any other data files. Bookmarks for data folders need to
be expanded by clicking on the next to the link before individual data files
can be selected and displayed.
Collections of referenced / marked / linked data items can be combined into a

New Folder within the link (bookmark) collection.
Linked items and folders of linked data can be exported to shared files or
directories from which other users can access them. In the same way bookmarks
that other users have exported can be imported into the bookmark collection or
folders within it.
All the operations that can be performed on link elements are described in the
Navigator worksheet.
Section 2.3.1.1 [Procedure] To create and export links (bookmarks)

Step 1
Select the item that you want to link to. This operation can be performed on a
single data function, or on any type of data container such as a test section or a
database. All sub-directories and folders in the selected data container will be
included and will be available in the bookmark.
Step 2

Right click on the selected item and select Copy from the popup menu.
Step 3
Scroll back up to the top of the browser tree and find the “My Links” icon .
Step 4
To place the link in the My Links folder, right click on the My Links folder to
display the popup menu.
Select Paste as link from the popup menu to place the reference directly in the
My Links folder. Then click on the next to the My Links folder to see the
new reference. A link icon that has the same icon and label as the original data
represents it.
Step 5
To place the link in a new folder select Add folder from the popup menu of the
My Links icon.
Click on the to expand the My Links folder and you will see the New
Folder. Right click on this and select Paste as link from the popup menu.
When you open up the folder, you will see the reference preceded by a link
icon.
To change the name of the folder, right click on it and select "Rename" from the
popup menu.
To place the new link in an existing folder, right click on this folder and select
Paste as Link from the popup menu.
Step 6
Continue this process until you have built up the collection of references and
folders that you require.
Data referenced as links (bookmarks) can be manipulated and visualized in
exactly the same way as data that is being accessed over your network.
Step 7
To export links, select the object(s) that you want to export. This can be a single
data function, a data container or a bookmark folder.
Right click on it and select Export from the popup menu.
In the dialog that appears, select the shared directory on which users will search
for links and enter a name for the link file. Link (bookmark) files have the
extension, .bmk. Click on Save to create the file and place it in the specified
directory.
Alternatively, select Export to from the popup menu and choose the file type
you want to use to export the data.
Another user can import a link by right clicking on the My Links icon or a link
folder and selecting Import from the popup menu.
To delete a link, right click on it and select Delete from the popup menu.
16A 49
Section 2.4 Project data
This document is concerned with the management of data within a Test.Lab

project.
Section 2.4.1 Sections
Sections are contained within projects. They are a means of organizing sets of
data that have been acquired under the same test conditions, analyzed using the
same parameters or derived using the same processing.
The channel setup and the measurement and processing parameters are part of
the Section. Activating a Section will cause these parameters to come into
effect.
When you start an application (or a new project), it creates a single section
within a new project. You can attach memos and other files (see "[Procedure]
To create or edit documentation" on page 276) to a section.
You can also create additional sections using the Data New Section... menu.
There is always an active section (shown in the Active Section

field in the toolbar) and all operations performed using
the menu and tool bar will be executed on this active section.
Note: All generated data is placed and saved in the active section.
Section 2.4.2 Runs
Runs are found within sections. They contain data from all measurement
channels that were acquired during the same measurement sequence. Each time
the Start button is used then a new run will be initiated which will contain the
acquired data.
Data is always saved in a run when the data acquisition is stopped. This data
must be removed if you do not want to keep it.
The setup used to measure a run is kept in its archived settings. You can
Print/View the archived settings, by viewing the content of the run in the Detail
View panel of the data browser and accessing the "Print/View archived
settings" option from the popup menu obtained by right clicking on the
Archived settings item. You can cause the setup to come into effect using the
Load the archived settings option from the popup menu obtained by right
clicking on the Archived settings item.

Section 2.4.3 TDF
When time recording during acquisition is enabled during measurement a TDF

database is created containing the raw unprocessed time signals. When
browsing, the TDF icon identifies a TDF database. Clicking on the sign
next to this icon will reveal the contents of the TDF database.
Physically the TDF is located in the same directory as the Test.Lab database
(starting with the project directory).
You can change the Bind Strategy (see "Options - Data tab" on page 242)
between the Test.Lab run and the TDF in the Settings tab of the
Tools Options menu.
Section 2.4.4 LDSF
Section 2.4.5 Other folders
Other folders include Post Processing folders, Conditioning folders and

Pictures.
When post processing has been carried on run data, you obtain a Processing
folder for each set of calculations you have carried out, within the relevant
section. Similarly, when you make pictures of your data, you will have a Picture
file for each one. These are placed in the active section.
16A 51
Chapter 3 The LMS Configuration and Unit System
In This Chapter
Concept of the LMS Configurations System......................53
Concept of the LMS Unit System ......................................56
Editing LMS Units .............................................................58
Section 3.1 Concept of the LMS Configurations System
In the LMS Configuration System, different files and settings that are relevant
for the LMS TEST applications, will be managed automatically by the software.
The system consists of 3 management levels :
16A 53
 Central or Factory level : this level will always be available and it contains
the LMS Factory files and settings. This level will be installed through the
install procedure and its content should never be updated manually.
 Group level (which is optional): this level can be enabled (optional) by the
user or administrator and it contains the configuration files and settings that
you want to share within a certain team.
 User level: this level will always be available and it contains all individual
configuration files and settings of a specific user.
For every level, a specific location (folder) needs to be defined. During
installation of the "LMS Configuration and Units Editor" tool, the administrator
has the possibility to define these locations for all users on that system.
You can change these locations for yourself with the command
"File->Configuration …". You will get the following dialog where you can
change it.
The typical configuration files which are managed by this system are :
 The Active Units system: ActiveUnitSystem.xml
 Tools->Options …. Settings: Configuration\Loader.cfg
 Column visibility of Time data selection:
Configuration\DynamicAttributes.txt
 Column visibility of Block processing:
Configuration\DataBlockProcessingVisibilityMap
 User attribute visibility: Configuration\UserAttributes.txt
 User attribute List types: Configuration\ListAttributes.txt
 Favorite Displays: Layout\SelectedLayoutFiles.txt
 Template for Documentation: Attachment Templates\MemoInventory.txt
The typical file types which are managed by this system are :

 Units files: *.lu5

 Project templates: Project Templates\*.tpl
 Time Data Selection Datasets: Dataset\*.tds
 Different Calculator Formulasets: FormulaSet\*.*FS
 Time Data Processing Processingsets: ProcessingSet\*.TPS
 Display layouts: Layout\*.lay
 Print formats: PrintFormats\*.doc(x)
 Column visibility files: GridFilters\*.txt
 Templates for Documentation: Attachment Templates\*.doc (html)
Section 3.1.1 Write strategy
When you are running one of the LMS Test applications (LMS Configuration
and Unit System tool, Test.lab), these applications will always write the
configuration files and settings on the User level.
Section 3.1.2 Read strategy
When you are running one of the LMS applications and when it needs a specific
setting (or file that contains that setting), then the following strategy will be
handled by default (File access priority = Local) :
Step 1
First the system will look on Local level. If it is found, it will be used.
Step 2
If it is not found, then the system will look on Group level. If it is found, it will
be used.
Step 3
If it is not found, then the system will use the Factory value which is always
available on central level.
Note: If File access priority = Group, then the system will first look on Group
and then on Local level.
When you are running one of the LMS applications and when you need a list of
available configuration files of a specific file type, then the following strategy
will be handled by default (File access priority = Local) :
Step 1
First the system will look which files are available on Local level. These are
always added to the list.
Step 2
16A 55
Then the system will look on Group level. These are added to the list, except
when a version of this file was already available on Local.
Step 3
Then the system will look on Central level. These are added to the list, except
when a version of this file is already available.
Note: If File access priority = Group, then the system will first look on Group
and then on Local level.
Section 3.2 Concept of the LMS Unit System
In the LMS Unit System, quantities are determined by their base quantity terms:
length, mass, time, angle, current, temperature, light, and mol. For the same
quantity multiple quantity cases can exist. One of these quantity cases is the
default quantity case, the others are defined by a number of unit rules. Each
quantity case maps with a set of unit cases. One of these unit cases is the default
unit case, the others are visible or invisible. A unit system (lu5) file contains all
the quantity cases, the unit rules, the lists of unit cases and their unit case status.
Section 3.2.1 Unit
Unit label:
 Linear conversion: scale factor, offset
User(si) = si * <scale factor> + <offset>
 Level conversion: log reference, log scale factor, log base, level string, flag
for power or linear unit.
Examples:
 Sound pressure’: unit label: “Pa”
scale factor: 1, offset: 0 Pa
log reference: 2e-5 Pa, log base: 10, log scale factor: 20, level string “dB
(2e-5)”, power: no
 ‘Temperature’: unit label: “deg C”
scale factor: 1, offset: -273.15 degC (0 K = -273.15 degC),
log reference: 1 degC, log base: 10, level scale factor: 20, level string “dB”,
power: no

Section 3.2.2 Label Unit
Same as unit, except no info about linear conversion (level conversion is

defined). Label units are weak units in the sense that they disappear when they
are used in computations together with other units. They are only meant for
associating user defined units with very specific semantics with the data.
Example:
 Label Unit Loudness
Unit label: "sones", Level label: "phones", Log reference: 0.0625, Log base:
2, Level scale factor: 10, Power: yes
Section 3.2.3 Base Quantity
 Base quantities: length, mass, time, angle, electric current, thermodynamic

temperature, luminous intensity, amount of substance
 See http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/Units/units.html
The reason to consider angle a base quantity is historical.
Section 3.2.4 Quantity
 Unique combination of Base Quantities:

rational powers for length, mass, time, angle, current, temperature, light, mol
can be all zero (for instance ratio)

 Multiple Quantity cases can exist for one Quantity (see later)
Example:
 Quantity acceleration: base quantity length = 1, base quantity time = -2
Section 3.2.5 Quantity Case
 Belongs to one Quantity: unique combination of rational powers for Base

Quantities
 A Quantity Case has a specific name.
 A Quantity Case is the default for the Quantity involved or can be defined
by a number of Unit Rules
Examples:
16A 57
 Quantity case Velocity: base quantiies: length=1, time -1, default

 Quantity case Speed: base quantities: length=1, time=-1, rules:
Distance*Time–1, Distance*Frequency
Section 3.2.6 Unit Case
 A Quantity Case has a related list (1 or more) of Units. We call this list of
Units belonging to the same Quantity Case the Unit Cases of this Quantity
Case.
 There is one and only one default unit case for each quantity case.
 Unit Case can be set to be visible or invisible. The default unit case has to
be visible.
 The unit labels of all Unit Cases belonging to one Quantity Case have to be
unique.
Example:
 Unit cases km and hm for quantity case Distance
Section 3.2.7 Unit system
 A unit system contains all the quantity cases, the unit rules, the lists of unit
cases and their unit case status.
 A unit system is not saved in the project database of the application, but in a
separate (lu5) file with a specific format. This unique unit system file is
accessible by each LMS Test application.
 The predefined unit system files: SI, Technical, English, ISO 1683-1983
Section 3.3 Editing LMS Units
The stand-alone LMS Configuration and Unit System tool can be used to create
and modify unit system (lu4 and lu5) files. The LMS Configuration and Unit
System tool is also used to select the active unit system file. This active unit
system is notified when the LMS Test application like Test.Lab is started. When
changing this active unit system the LMS Test application needs to be re-started
in order to be aware of this change.
Section 3.3.1 Versioning of LMS Unit System
LMS Unit System version 1.0.0 includes Factory unit system files of type ‘lu4’.

LMS Unit System version 2.0.0 includes new Factory unit system files of type
‘lu5’ and an upgrade of the LMS Configuration and Unit System tool. In these
new Factory unit system files, the name of the existing ‘MicroStrain’ quantity
cases into ‘Strain’ quantity cases has been changed. The new Factory unit
system files also contain extra quantity cases, extra unit cases, and a number of
improved unit parameters.
LMS Unit System version 2.1.0 includes extended Factory unit system files of
type ‘lu5’ and a minor upgrade of the LMS Configuration and Unit System tool.
LMS Unit System version 2.2.0 includes extended Factory unit system files of
type ‘lu5’.
Section 3.3.2 Main panel logic
The main panel consists:

 A single menu bar
 Two tabs, one for the units and one for the unit rules
 Checkboxes to manage the visibility in the Units tab
 Four action buttons in case of Units tab:
 Add Unit…
 Add Label…
 Edit…
 Delete…
 Two action buttons in case of Unit rules tab:
 Add…
 Delete…
The general concept is that all information in the tabs is read-only and that the
unit- or rule information can only be edited from a pop-up panel.
16A 59
Section 3.3.3 Menu bar
Section 3.3.3.1 File =>Configuration

You will get the following dialog which is used to change the user configuration
folder, the group configuration folder and the settings of the group
configuration.
Note: Please refer to the section about the concept of the LMS configuration.
Section 3.3.3.2 File => Select active unit system

This is menu is used the select the active unit system and open it in the LMS
Configuration and Unit System tool.
On File => Select active unit system…, a list is shown with all available unit
system files. Unit system files only appear once in the list and on selection, the
priority Local=>Group=>central is followed. An example of this logic is given
below:

Unit system file Location Unit system file Visibility status

Name
central Technical.lu5 Not visible, overruled by Group

Configuration
English.lu5 Visible
SI.lu5 Visible
ISO_1683_1983.lu5 Visible
GroupConfiguration Technical.lu5 Not visible, overruled by

UserConfiguration\user1
Company.lu5 Visible
UserConfiguration\user1 Ultimate.lu5 Visible
Technical.lu5 Visible
The above situation for user ‘user1’ will result in a list with the following four
items listed in alphabetic order:
Company.lu5 (GroupConfiguration)
English.lu5 (central)
SI.lu5 (central)
ISO_1683_1983.lu5 (central)
Technical.lu5 (UserConfiguration)
Ultimate.lu5 (UserConfiguration)
One of these six unit system files can be made active.
Section 3.3.3.3 File => Upgrade unit system
Section 3.3.3.3.1 Major upgrade

The latest versions of the LMS Configuration and Unit System tool can only
open ‘*.lu5’ unit system files."
Old unit system files of type ‘lu4’ can be imported and upgraded into type ‘lu5’
starting from a chosen unit system on the Central folder (Technical, SI, English,
or ISO 168301983):
16A 61
 The ‘MicroStrain’ quantity cases will be transformed into the ‘Strain’

quantity cases.
 Missing quantity cases with all their unit cases will be added.
 Missing unit rules will be added.
 Optionally (option 1, by default on), the unit parameters can be updated.
 Optionally (option 2, by default off), the missing unit cases of existing
quantity cases can be added.
After upgrade the modified unit system will be saved on the UserConfiguration
folder and it will be made active. Also a logging will be listed about:
 Added quantity cases
 Added unit cases
 Added unit rules
 Modifies unit cases (happens when option 1 is on)
 Ignored unit cases, being new unit cases of existing quantity cases which
have not been added (happens in case option 2 is off).
Section 3.3.3.3.2 Minor upgrade

In a similar way a minor upgrade of the unit system files can be performed
when needed. For instance 2.0.0 lu5 unit system files can be upgraded to 2.1.0
or 2.2.0 lu5 unit system files.
Section 3.3.3.4 File => Import dynamic units

The unit system files containing the newly created dynamic units are loaded
from the UserConfiguration folder (dynamic rules are not loaded). All dynamic
quantity cases and unit cases are added (read inserted) to the lists of units.
Dynamic quantity cases and dynamic unit cases can be recognized by the unit
case status ‘Dynamic’. The user can change this status into ‘Default’, ‘Case
default’, Visible, or ‘Invisible’ to make this case static. Only the static units will
be saved afterwards (see later).
Section 3.3.3.5 File => Save

When saving the current status, all units and rules will be saved with the same
filename as the one that was opened, but always on the UserConfiguration
folder. This implies that a file loaded from the Central or Group folder will be
saved with the same name on the UserConfiguration folder.
When dynamic quantity cases and/or unit cases have been imported, they will
not be saved unless they have been made static by the user (by changing the
Unit Case Status field).
Section 3.3.3.6 File => Save as…

When saving the current status, all units and rules will be saved with a filename
that needs to be specified by the user. For that purpose a flat list of all unit

system files is shown including an input field containing the name of the unit
system file that was opened originally. The unit system file is saved on the
UserConfiguration folder.
Section 3.3.3.7 File => Exit

When closing the application, a message box pops up to ask if the user wants to
keep the changes (only if changes have been made).
Section 3.3.3.8 Edit => Find

On Find, a panel pops up with an input field ‘Find what:’. For units, the user
defined string will be searched for in the Quantity Case Name and the Unit Case
Name. For rules, all Quantity Case Names will be part of the search.
With Find Next, the next row will be highlighted containing a hit. This row will
be in the center of the visible list or higher when the list is too short.
The direction can be specified ‘Down’ or ‘Up’.
Search conditions which can be specified:

 Match case
 Match whole word
 Wrap searches
Continue searching from the beginning list, after reaching its end, when
searching down, or the end after reaching the beginning, when searching up.
Section 3.3.3.9 Edit => Add unit…

This action maps on the Add Unit button in case of Unit panel. You may check
on it later.
Section 3.3.3.10 Edit => Add label…

This action maps on the Add Label button in case of Unit panel. You may check
on it later.
Section 3.3.3.11 Edit => Add rule…

This action maps on the Add Rule button in case of Unit rule panel. You may
check on it later.
Section 3.3.3.12 Edit => Edit…

This action maps on the Edit button. You may check on it later.
Section 3.3.3.13 Edit => Delete…

This action maps on the Delete button and deletes the selected rows after
16A 63
confirmation.
Section 3.3.3.14 View => Toolbar

The toolbar can be shown or not.
Section 3.3.3.15 View => Show

The items in this View => Show Menu map on the checkboxes of the Units tab.
The ‘Checked/Not Checked’ status of the checkboxes is reflected in the menu
bar pull down.
Section 3.3.3.16 View => Sort

The items in this View => Sort menu map on the radio buttons of the Units tab.
The ‘Checked/Not Checked’ status of these radio buttons is reflected in the
menu bar pull down: According to base quantities / According to name.
Section 3.3.3.17 Help => LMS Configuration and Unit System Help
Launches the help of the LMS Configuration and Unit System tool application.
Section 3.3.3.18 Help => About LMS Configuration and Unit System
tool
Shows the ‘About’ of the LMS Configuration and Unit System tools
application.
Section 3.3.4 Unit Cases panel
Section 3.3.4.1 Sorting of the Unit Cases

The unit cases can be sorted in two different ways depending on the chosen
sorting option set in the menu or set by radio buttons below the panel:
 Sorting according to base quantities
 Sorting according to name
Section 3.3.4.1.1 Sorting according to base quantities

In this case, the sorting is using the following priorities:
Step 1
First the regular unit cases, then the label units. The regular unit cases are sorted
according to:
Step 2
Base quantities: from lowest fractional power to highest

 Length
 Mass
 Time
 Angle
 Temperature
 Electric current
 Luminous intensity
 Mole
Step 3
Quantity Case Name (*): first default quantity case, then the static ones in
alphabetic order; case sensitive, then the dynamic ones in alphabetic order; case
sensitive.
Note: A set of compatible quantity cases belong to the same quantity when they
all have the same base quantity terms (Length, Mass, Time, Angle,
Temperature, Electric current, Luminous intensity, and Mole). One quantity
case of such a set is the Default quantity case. The corresponding default unit
has status ‘Default’ (standing for general default unit). The corresponding
default units of the other (not-default) quantity cases have status ‘Case default’
(standing for case specific default unit).
Step 4
Unit Case Status (**) in sequence:
 Default
 Case default
 Visible
 Invisible
 Dynamic
Notes: A Label Unit can only have Label Status Visible or Dynamic. The
Dynamic option for the Unit Case Status is only available in case of an
imported unit case. (The option is Dynamic after importing the unit case and
can be changed by the user into another option.)
Step 5
Unit Case Name: alphabetic order; case sensitive
3.3.4.1.1.1 Presentation of unit cases per Quantity
The sorting algorithm makes sure that all unit cases of the same quantity are
next to each other. These groups of unit cases belonging to the same quantity
are displayed with alternating background colors: white and light grey.
The font colours are also optimized: red for all dynamic info and green for all
dynamic info which has been changed into static (Default, Case default, Visible,
or Invisible) by the user.
16A 65
Section 3.3.4.1.2 Sorting according to name

In this case, the sorting is using the following priorities:
Step 1
First the regular unit cases, then the label units. The regular unit cases are sorted
according to:
Step 2
Quantity Case Name: alphabetic order; case sensitive
Step 3
Unit Case Status (*) in sequence:
 Default
 Case default
 Visible
 Invisible
 Dynamic
Note: A set of compatible quantity cases belong to the same quantity when they
all have the same base quantity terms (Length, Mass, Time, Angle,
Temperature, Electric current, Luminous intensity, and Mole). One quantity
case of such a set is the Default quantity case. The corresponding default unit
has status ‘Default’ (standing for general default unit). The corresponding
default units of the other (not-default) quantity cases have status ‘Case default’
(standing for case specific default unit). The default quantity case is the quantity
case for which the default unit case is the quantity default, called ‘Default’ and
not only the default unit case for the quantity case, called the ‘Case default’.
A Label Unit can only have Label Status Visible or Dynamic.
The Dynamic option for the Unit Case Status is only available in case of an
imported unit case. (The option is Dynamic after importing the unit case and
can be changed by the user into another option.)
Step 4
Unit Case Name: alphabetic order; case sensitive
3.3.4.1.2.1 Presentation of unit cases per quantity case
The sorting algorithm makes sure that all unit cases of the same quantity case
are next to each other. These groups of unit cases belonging to the same
quantity case are displayed with alternating background colors: white and light
grey.
The font colours are also optimized: red for all dynamic info and green for all
dynamic info which has been changed into static (Default, Case default, Visible,
or Invisible) by the user.

Section 3.3.4.2 Format of the Level String

The level conversions include the acoustic weighting applied on the data. The
LMS unit system allows managing this aspect globally. For this purpose the
characters ‘<’, ‘W’, and ‘>’ are used. Whatever is between < and > will be
shown when the weighting is not Linear. When the weighting is Linear nothing
is shown. The common example for [Pa] to [dB] is given below:
Level String Linear data A-weighted data
dB dB dB
dB<(W)> dB dB(A)
dB<[W]> dB dB[A]
dB<(W)> re 20e-6 dB re 20e-6 dB(A) re 20e-6
Section 3.3.4.3 Edit…/Add...Unit Cases panel

When editing a unit, all information is loaded in the Edit Unit panel. The user
can edit all fields and Apply consistency is checked on.
When adding a unit, the values of the active selection are taken over in case a
unit is selected (and not a label). If no such selection is made, all values are put
to the defaults.
The formats of the parameters in the panel are:
16A 67
Panel Parameters Input format and values Default values
Quantity Case Name String – Should not be empty ‘<to be defined>’
Fractional Powers Integer values –positive or All set to 1

negative, non-zero for the
denominator
Unit Case Name String – Should not be empty ‘<to be defined>’
Unit Case Status Combo-box – either Default, Default

Case default, Visible, Invisible,
or Dynamic
Only one Unit Case can be the
Default.
Scale Factor Strict positive double 1.0
Scale Offset Double 0.0
Level Label String – ‘<W>’ is used to dB<(W)>

manage the acoustic weighting
Reference for Level 0 Strict positive double 1.0
Linear or Power Combo-box – either Linear or Linear

Power
Logarithmic Base Strict positive double – in 10.0

practice limited to 10 or 2.
Logarithmic Scale Factor Strict positive double – in 20.0

practice limited to 10 or20.
Table: Panel Parameters for Edit Units panel
The consistency check will be the verification of the uniqueness of the quantity
case name and the unit case name for the given quantity case and the validation
of the input parameters according the table above.
Section 3.3.4.4 Edit…/Add... Labels panel

When editing a label, all information is loaded in the Edit Label panel. The user
can edit all fields and Apply consistency is checked on.
When adding a label, the values of the active selection are taken over in case a
label is selected (and not a unit). If no such selection is made, all values are put
to the defaults.

Quantity Case Name String – Should not be empty ‘<to be defined>’
Label Name String – Should not be empty ‘<to be defined>’
Label Status Combo-box – either Default or Default

Dynamic
Level String String – ‘<W>’ is used to dB<(W)>

manage the acoustic weighting
Reference for Level 0 Strict positive double 1.0
Linear or Power Combo-box – either Linear or Linear

Power
Logarithmic Base Strict positive double – in 10.0

practice limited to 10 or 2.
Logarithmic Scale Factor Strict positive double – in 20.0

practice limited to 10 or20.
Table: Panel Parameters for Edit Labels panel
The consistency check will be the verification of the uniqueness of the quantity
case name and the label name and the validation of the input parameters
according the table above.
Section 3.3.4.5 Visibility Checkboxes of the Unit Cases tab

The Show options can be set in the menu or set by check boxes below the panel:
Section 3.3.4.5.1 Columns selection

 Show Base Quantity Powers: 8 columns with the base quantity powers will
be inserted after the visibility column. These columns will contain the
fractional powers as ratios, e.g.:’2/3’.
 Show Linear Conversion Parameters: inserts the linear conversion
parameters after the base quantity columns (if selected to be visible in the
list).
 Show Level Conversion Parameters: inserts the level conversion parameters
after the linear conversion parameters (if available) or after the base
quantity columns (if selected to be visible in the list).
Section 3.3.4.5.2 Rows selection

 Show All Visible Unit Cases: All Default and Visible items of the unit
system are displayed.
 Show All Unit Cases: All items of the unit system are displayed.
 Show Dynamic Unit Cases Only: Only the imported items, recognized by
16A 69
the ‘Dynamic’ Status type will be shown.
Section 3.3.5 Unit Rules panel
Section 3.3.5.1 Sorting of the Unit Rules

The Unit Rules are sorted in a fixed way. The user has no impact on it. The
sorting is using the following priorities:
 Resulting Quantity Case: alphabetic order; case sensitive
 Quantity Case 1: alphabetic order; case sensitive
 Fractional Power 1: from lowest fractional power to highest
 Quantity Case 2: alphabetic order; case sensitive
 Fractional Power 2: from lowest fractional power to highest
Section 3.3.5.2 Presentation of unit rules per resulting quantity case

The sorting algorithm ensures that all unit rules of the same resulting quantity
case are next to each other. These groups of unit rules belonging to the same
resulting quantity case are displayed with alternating background colors: white
and light grey.
Section 3.3.5.3 Edit…/Add... Unit Rules panel

When editing a rule, all information is loaded in the Edit Rule panel. The user
can edit all fields and on Apply consistency is checked.
When adding a Rule, the values of the active selection are taken over. If no
selection is made, all values are put to the defaults.
Quantity Case Names Combo-box showing a saved Ratio

Quantity Case
Fractional Powers Integer values – positive or Both set to 1

negative
Table: Panel Parameters for Edit Rules panel
The list of resulting quantity cases is adapted in the combo-box depending on

the above selected quantity cases, operations or powers. All quantity case names
are listed in alphabetic order.
The calculation of this list of resulting quantity cases depends on the base
quantities obtained from the proposed unit calculation. All quantity cases that

have the matching base quantities will appear in the list.
Only multiplication is supported as operation between units. When the second

fractional power is negative, then the operation will become the division. An
example could be speed (length / time): the unit rule will be: ‘length * time-1’.
The consistency check will be limited to the verification of the uniqueness of

the rule.
16A 71
Chapter 4 Documentation and Presentation
In This Chapter
Using cursors in displays ....................................................73
Function display windows ..................................................77
Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays ...................141
Geometry display windows ................................................143
Mouse and keyboard tips in geometry displays .................173
Curve scrolling (prev/next on function displays) ...............173
The Layout management dialog .........................................176
Document Memo Templates ..............................................194
Creating print formats ........................................................195
Documentation User Attributes ..........................................201
Document Memo Templates ..............................................203
Section 4.1 Using cursors in displays
A range of cursors can be used in Colormap, FrontBack, Geometry display,

Octave, Waterfall and Upper/Lower windows. The basic principles applying to
the use of cursors is the same for all types of windows, but there is more
functionality provided in the FrontBack and Upper/Lower displays, in which
specific curves can be selected and data values examined. The procedure given
below takes as an example the use of a double X cursor in a FrontBack or an
Upper/Lower window as a way of introducing the features of cursors in general.
More details on all the cursor functions are to be found in the documents
relating to the specific display windows.
Section 4.1.1 [Procedure] To use cursors in the display
This procedure assumes that you have a FrontBack or an Upper/Lower window

open with at least one data function on display.
Step 1
Right click inside the display area to obtain the display popup menu. You can
always get this menu by right clicking anywhere in or around the window, while
keeping the Ctrl key depressed.
Step 2
Select Front/Back Options... (in the case of a Front/Back) from this menu, then
click on the Cursors tab.
The Options entry appears in all windows in which cursors can be added and it
allows you to set the default cursor properties for each type of cursor. All
16A 73
cursors of this type, which are then added, will have these default style and
display characteristics.
Default cursor properties are associated with a display window type or picture.
The defaults for each cursor has thus to be set for every type of display window.
Note: After setting the defaults you can use Save Current Layout As... from the
View menu to save the layout and associated default cursor properties.
The properties of individual cursors already on the display can be changed.

Click on the cursor and select Cursor properties... from the popup menu
displayed. Any changes made here will only affect the cursor selected and not
any other cursor or the default properties of this cursor type.
First, click on the Cursors tab, define the settings and then click on Apply to
view the results, in order to set the default options.
Step 3
Select the cursor type of Double X from the Cursor dropdown selection
menu.
Step 4
The “Style” section of the dialog enables you to set the line style of the cursor
and choose the type and size of font for displaying the numerical values.
Click on Line... and choose the line color, pattern and width of the cursor.
Click on OK to accept the changes and to close the Line Style dialog.
Step 5
Click on Font... and select the font type, style, size and color.
Click on OK to accept the changes and to close the Font dialog.
Step 6
The “Value” section of the dialog enables you to turn the display “on” or “off”
and choose the format for how cursor or data values are displayed.
To display cursor values, check the Display button. To remove them from the
display uncheck it.
Step 7
The number of decimal points for the cursor value can be set using either the up
and down arrows provided or the keyboard.
Step 8
The cursor value can be displayed in engineering notation or not by checking or
unchecking the Engineering notation button.
Step 9
To makes these X axis values stand out check the ToolTip Style button. The
cursor values will then be displayed in a box with a gray background so they
will be much easier to see on a crowded display.
Step 10
The intersections of the cursors with the displayed curves can be shown by
checking on the Always display intersections. The cursor values will be
displayed in a box with a yellow background.

Click on OK to accept the changes and to close the Cursor Properties dialog.
This will return you to the display area.
Step 11
Right click inside the display area to obtain the display popup menu.
Step 12
Select X from the Add Double cursor menu. A pair of vertical lines with the
linestyle that you just selected will appear in the display. The X axis values will
be displayed as you have defined.
Step 13
Place the mouse cursor exactly on the left line and holding the right mouse
button down, drag it in either direction. Both cursors will move. This can also
be done by selecting the left line and using the arrow keys to move the cursor in
either direction.
Step 14
Place the mouse exactly on the line of the right cursor and holding the right
mouse button down, drag it in either direction. Now, only this cursor line will
move, thus changing the distance between the pair of cursor lines. This can also
be done by selecting the left line and using the arrow keys to move the cursor in
either direction.
Step 15
Right click on either of the cursor lines and you will see a popup menu that
allows you to change the cursor properties and how it is displayed.
Step 16
Selecting Cursor properties, schedules a dialog with the same functionality as
the “Cursors tab” in the Options 2D dialog. But any modifications that you
make here will only affect the current cursor and not the default one.
Note: Double cursors act as one. Any changes in properties made to one
cursor line will affect both.
Step 17
To zoom in on the area between the cursor lines select Zoom. The distance
between the cursor lines now becomes the X axis limits. The X axis limits are
now fixed, with the minimum and maximum values defined by the cursor
values. When you want to return to the previous view, right click on or below
the X axis and select Limits from the popup menu. Then reset the X axis limits
to Free or Optimized and this returns you to the full X axis range for the data.
Step 18
Now select any one of the data curves by left clicking on it. The curve will now
have series of markers on it and the Y values that correspond to the cursor
position on the selected curve will be displayed. If the ToolTip Style button is
checked these Y values will be displayed in a box with a yellow background.
The corresponding X values will have a gray background.
Step 19
Right click on the either of the cursor lines and you will now see a number of
additional entries in the popup menu. These enable you to make the cursor jump
to a specified point on the selected curve.
16A 75
Step 20
Right click on the right cursor line and select Move to next local maximum
from the cursor popup menu. This cursor line will then move forwards (to the
right) to the next peak of the selected curve. The other cursor line does not
move and so the distance between the cursor lines increases.
If you perform the same operation on the left line, this will move it forwards to
the next peak. This time, the right cursor line also move forwards a similar
amount, so as to keep the cursor lines the same distance apart.
Step 21
To move the right cursor line to the next minimum data value, right click on the
right cursor line and select Move to next local minimum from the cursor
popup menu. This cursor line will then move forwards to the next dip of the
selected curve.
Performing the same operation on the left line, this will move it forwards to the
next lowest point. This time, the right cursor line will also move forwards a
similar amount, so as to keep the cursor lines the same distance apart.
Step 22
Similarly, using other options from the cursor popup menu, you can move the
cursor backwards (to the left) to the previous peak or dip value. Select Move to
previous local maximum to move the cursor backwards to the previous peak
value. Select Move to previous local minimum to move the cursor backwards
to the previous dip value.
To move to the curve's maximum value select Move to global maximum.
Note: To move only one cursor line you must select the left one before carrying
out a Move to... option. To move both cursor lines you must select only the
right one.
Step 23
Now select a second data curve.
Individual curves can be selected by clicking on them with the mouse. To select
more than one curve at a time, left click on each curve in turn while holding the
Shift key down. To select all the curves on the display, right click inside the
display area to obtain the display popup menu. Then you can select Select All
Curves.
Step 24
Any Move to... option you now select from the cursor popup menu will
consider both or all your selected curves. For example, select Move to next
local maximum and the cursor line will move to the first peak it finds on either
of the two curves.
Step 25
You can remove the double cursor by right clicking on either cursor line and
selecting Remove Cursor from the menu.

Section 4.2 Function display windows
There are a number of parameters that control both the format of the functions
in the display as well as the characteristics of the window in which it appears.
These options are executed from the popup menus.
This document describes all the options in the function display windows:
16A 77
 Bode
 Colormap
 Matrix
 FrontBack
 Octave
 Upper/Lower
 Multi-Trace
 Waterfall
 XY
 GPS
 Nyquist
 Numerical
 Table
Bode
The Bode display represents a function window divided into two parts. It shows
you two aspects of the same data. When you load a single data trace into this
window, the upper part shows the amplitude and the lower part shows the phase
of the same trace. When you switch the format of the upper part from
Amplitude to Real, the format of the lower part switches to Imaginary. An X
cursor operates on both parts of the window.

The Bode display icon represents it.
Colormap
The Colormap display is used to display a series of data functions in relation to

a third parameter such as time or rpm (so called waterfall data). This parameter
is plotted along the Z axis. The Y (ordinate) value of each block is represented
as a color thus providing a two dimensional map of X against Z. In
LMSTest.Lab, this data is represented by a waterfall icon or and it can
be displayed in a Colormap window.
In addition a series of blocks represented by the function icons can be

displayed. as long as they have compatible quantities for Y values and for X
and Z axes.
The Colormap display is used to display a series of data functions in relation to

a third parameter such as time or rpm (so called waterfall data). This parameter
is plotted along the Z axis. The Y (ordinate) value of each block is represented
as a color thus providing a two dimensional map of X against Z. In
LMSTest.Lab, this data is represented by a waterfall icon or and it can be
displayed in a Colormap window.
In addition a series of blocks represented by the function icons can be

displayed, as long as they have compatible quantities for Y values and for X
and Z axes.
The Colormap display can also be used to display metrics or section functions
in function of two parameters such as rpm and torque. The section functions
should be measured with one parameter being varying and the other parameter
being kept at a constant level. Measure different runs each time at a different
16A 79
level for the parameter that is kept constant, to build up a three dimensional set
of data. An example of such a measurement would be an engine efficiency map.
Drop the section functions in the Colormap window. Select the varying
parameter as X-axis and the parameter that is kept constant as Z-axis.
It is possible to add 2D data on top of waterfall data visualized in a colormap.

This can be done by dropping the 2D data in the left corner of the colormap.
The data is shown if the X and Y units of the 2D data correspond to those of the
CM or if it is a compatible order section of this waterfall data.
The Colormap display icon represents it.
Curve scrolling (prev/next on function displays)

In the picture display panel, the button allows a user to show or to hide
advanced curve scrolling. When clicking on it, an extra bar appears: making it
possible to scroll over curves, currently displayed in the picture. It only applies
to 2D and 2.5D function displays (so not on geometry displays nor on the
numerical display).
You can iterate over DOF ID, channel ID, REF DOF ID, section value, - in the
explanation beneath indicated as the iterator. When displaying blocks from a
waterfall you can iterate over the Tracking value or over the Tracking time.
Matrix
The Matrix display plots the result of a function with two independent variables.
In the LMSTest.Lab software, data represented by the rainflow icon can be

displayed in a Matrix window.

The Matrix display icon represents it.
FrontBack
The FrontBack display shows a 2D function window with an X and Y axis used
to display a number of overlaying data functions. Two separate Y axes are
provided; one on the right and one on the left.
Data can be displayed relative to one or the other and the format of these two
axes can be made different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for
example) of the same data can be overlaid on each other.
The FrontBack display icon represents it.
16A 81
Nyquist
A Nyquist display contains three axes:
Section 4.2.1.1 X axis

On this axis, the argument of a block will be presented.
Section 4.2.1.2 Y horizontal axis

The result of a block viewed in a certain axis format.
Section 4.2.1.3 Y vertical axis

The result of the same block as on the horizontal axis, but viewed in another
format.
The Nyquist window icon represents it.

Octave
The Octave display shows frequency spectra as octave blocks. In an Octave

display window you can see the result of integrating test data values over
various types of octave bands and their overall level values. These OA levels
are calculated and displayed for both the weighted and linear overall level.
The octave window icon represents it.
UL
The Upper/Lower display represents a pair of 2 or more 2D windows that are

linked together. They allow you to compare data traces above one another. This
means, for example, that when adding an X cursor, the same cursor is active in
the upper and all the lower window.
You have to add two curves with compatible X axes upon each other. Data can
be displayed relative to one or the other and the format of these two windows
can be made different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for
example) of the same data can be compared.
16A 83
You can also adjust the ratio of the area assigned to each window. Use Ctrl to
drag the horizontal blue line between the Upper and Lower display windows to
the desired width.
When dragging data to the left part of the display in the ‘automatic’ drop zone,
the data will automatically be spread – 1 y 1. Possibly, zones will be added
automatically – up to 20. You cannot drop more curves then available zones.
The Upper/Lower (UL) window icon represents it.
Multi-Trace display
The Multi-trace can be used to overview time series. The overview window on
top in this display shows the complete time data, the detailed window (beneath
the overview) shows the detailed section.
You can drag up to 20 time traces into this display – they all will have their own
overview and detailed zone. You cannot drop more traces then available zones.
Technically, the difference between an UL and a Multi-trace is the default

settings – they share all functionality.
The Multi-trace window icon represents it.

Waterfall
The Waterfall display shows a series of data functions in relation to a third

parameter such as time or rpm. This parameter is plotted along the Z axis and
shows the evolution of a function under particular conditions.
In the LMSTest.Lab software data represented by the waterfall icon can be

displayed in a waterfall window. In addition you can load a number of
individual data functions into a waterfall window too.
The Waterfall window icon represents it.
16A 85
XY
The XY display shows the Y-values of one block in function of the Y values of
a second block if both blocks have the same X-axis, e.g. the XY display is
‘unable to align X axes’ when the delta between the starting values of two X
axes, with an equal increment and number of lines, differs from the increment
value. An XY display includes four axes: X-axis, Y (front), Y (back) and Y
(horizontal).
Section 4.2.1.4 X axis

On this axis, the argument of the blocks will be presented.
Section 4.2.1.5 Y horizontal axis

The Y-values of a block. These values are used to compare with other Y-values
of blocks on the other Y axes (front and back).
Section 4.2.1.6 Y front axis

On this axis, an unlimited number of blocks can be added. The result of one
block on this axis will be combined with the result of the Y horizontal axis to
form one display curve. Both blocks must have the same argument, which is the
argument of the X axis.
Section 4.2.1.7 Y back axis

Similar to the Y front axis.
The XY window icon represents it.

GPS
The GPS display can be used to display GPS tracks.
Technically, the difference between an XY and a GPS display is the default

settings - they share all functionality.
The GPS window icon represents it.
16A 87
Note: The GPS format d°m’s”(latitude and longitude) is only available in a

display if the Point id of the respective GPS traces ends exactly on “Latitude”
or “Longitude”, e.g. the frontend gps:Longitude. Anything different is excluded,
e.g. GNSSPosData::Longitude_high or PosRapidUpdate::Latitude_.
Table
The Table display can be used to display single values. Only Single values
created by the RLDA application are supported. Both HardwareChecks and
Statistics can be dragged/dropped.
The ‘Order…’ of the columns can be defined and saved in a table display
layout. Data is required to define the order of the columns. If columns are not
available for ordering, the dropped data does not contain the according values.
The Table display has specific short-key combinations to control its visual
content: Mousewheel scrolls up/down, Shift+Mousewheel scrolls left/right and
Ctrl+Mousewheel zooms in/out. It is possible to hide individual columns or
show all columns. To make validation of these single values, an automatic
real-time check on every value and a color when a specific threshold is
exceeded, can be set. This can be set for example on the min and max of a
channel.
The threshold for a specific column can be changed with the colorscale context
menu for an alarm level, a warning level and an underload level. These
real-time checks are only available on a restricted set of statistical values.

Section 4.2.2 The Axis menus
Section 4.2.2.1 X-axis
Section 4.2.2.1.1 Limits

This menu enables you to specify how the limits of the displayed data will be
determined.
Free
The limits will correspond to the highest and lowest value actually contained
within the data. They will therefore change whenever new data is loaded into
the window, or when data is removed.
Optimized
In this case the highest and lowest values encountered in the data are rounded
up to convenient values.
Fixed...
In this case you can define the upper (max) and lower (min) value to be
displayed. Use a Double Cursor within the data window itself in order to set
these values.
Note: Note that you can also access this dialog by double clicking on the axis
itself.
Section 4.2.2.1.2 Format X

The options in this cascading menu determine how the X axis values will be
formatted.
Linear
Values between the upper and lower limits will be displayed on a linear scale.
This option is not available for Octave displays.
Decades
Values between the upper and lower limits will be displayed in decades, which
means that each division is a multiple of 10 of the previous one. This option is
not available for Octave displays.
Octaves
In this case the range between the upper and lower values are divided into
whole octave bands. The center frequency of one octave band is twice the center
frequency of the previous one, and the range increases with the center frequency
too. You may find that the limits are adjusted so that complete octave bands can
be encompassed. This option is not available for Octave displays.
16A 89
Octave bands
This option applies only to Octave displays. It integrates Y-values within a
frequency band. This results in a single Y value, which corresponds with the
center frequency on the x-axis. It is used to draw one bar for each frequency
band.
The number of frequency bands is determined by the format of the x-axis:

Octave 1/1, Octave 1/2, Octave 1/3, Octave 1/12, and Octave 1/24.
For instance with respect to Octave 1/1, Octave 1/2 uses twice the number of
frequency bands to integrate the Y-data. But note that a frequency band of
Octave 1/1 is twice as long - according to the x-axis - as one from Octave 1/2.
The same holds for other Octave formats.
Section 4.2.2.1.3 X Axis

This option is only available if the data in the display has more then 1 x-axis
connected to it, eg an order spectrum can have a time and an rpm axis. This
option allows the user to switch to one of the other X-axes.
Section 4.2.2.1.4 Second X Axis

This option is only available if the data in the display has more then 1 x-axis
connected to it, eg. an order spectrum can have a time and an rpm axis. This
option allows the user to set a second X-axis on top or on bottom of the display.
This second x-axis has its own settings. The limits follow the limits of the first
axis and cannot be set independent.
Section 4.2.2.1.5 Unit

This item shows you the unit currently on the display. If the axis has no data in
it, a list appears showing all available measurement units. It is not available for
Waterfall displays.
The unit can be defined before data is in the display, a list of the complete unit
set is shown. When the data afterwards are shown, this unit is used – if it is
compatible with the unit of the data. When data is already in the display, only
corresponding units of the same quantity are shown.
Units of compatible quantities are shown (if existing) in the More units fold out
list. Both, the main unit list and the sub level unit list, are ordered on scale
factor. The (quantity case) is appended in the sub level unit list, when the unit
label is not unique. When this (quantity case) is appended, both unit labels the
same, but their unit conversion parameters differ.
Section 4.2.2.1.6 Reverse

The option reverses the axis. The option is available in the Matrix display.

Section 4.2.2.1.7 General…

This option shows the ‘General Axis options’.
The tab ‘Y Axes’ used to indicate which Y axis is shown. This functionality is
moved to the display context menu Options…>Layout tab.
In the tab ‘Optimized limits’, some parameters for the calculation of optimized
limits can be set here. For log, dB, decade and octave format, the 'optimized
limit ranges’ can be specified other then default. For the amplitude format, the
default can be overwritten so that it always will use zero as minimum limit.
In the ‘Normalized format’ tab, settings can be chosen for the ‘Normalized’
format. Normalization can be done based on the ‘Maximum’ or based on the
‘Sum’ of all amplitude values. This reference can be taken per curve or
‘Individual’ or per Y axis or ‘Global’. In the latter case the global reference is
annotated in the format placeholder as (100% = value & unit). If the source data
is cumulated, the normalization is always based on the maximum.
Normalization based on sum is not supported for throughput data.
Section 4.2.2.1.8 Visible

This option switches on or off, all the annotation (as defined by the other axis
menu options) on this axis. It is not available for Waterfall displays.
Section 4.2.2.1.9 Options

This schedules a dialog in which the appearance of different features of the axis
is set. Define the settings and then click the Apply button to view the results, in
order to set display options.
4.2.2.1.9.1 Ticks
Ticks are short lines used to graduate an axis. Two lengths of lines are displayed
indicating the major and minor divisions of the range of values shown on the
axis.
Visible
Switches all ticks on or off.
Line Style
Schedules a dialog in which the color, pattern and thickness of the tick lines can
be set.
Base Resolution
This parameter specifies if the base ticks are calculated automatically or
specified by the user (custom). If it is on "Automatic", the range is defined as
the power of 10 that is less than the displayed limits. So if the displayed limits
are 99, then the range will be 10. And if the displayed limits are 101, then the
range will be 100. One (major) tick line is shown for each range.
16A 91
Offset and increment

The value of these parameter defines the offset and increment of the ticks – if
the base resolution is on ‘custom’.
Subdivisions
The value of this parameter determines the number of divisions that will be
displayed within the base resolution range. It only can be used in case of Base
resolution on automatic. Subdivisions on 1 means that only the major ticks will
be displayed. A resolution of 5 means that 4 minor tick lines will displayed
between the major ticks.
Selecting the subdivisions on Automatic means that between 10 and 20 ticks

will be displayed in total.
Type
You can select where the tick lines are to be placed in relation to the axis.
When they are inside the lines will be placed wholly within the display
window, along with the data.
When they are outside, they will be placed outside of the data window in the
border around it next to the annotation.
When they are crossed the lines will straddle the axis with their mid points on
the axis.
Annotation visible
When this option is "on" then the values corresponding to a tick will be
displayed next to it. The characteristics of this annotation are defined using the
Font button.
Font
This schedules a dialog in which you can define the font type, size, style and
color that you want to use for the annotation of the ticks. An example of the
current style is shown in the box alongside.
Decimals
If the annotation of the ticks is visible, then this field determines the number of
values behind decimal point that will be displayed. Increasing the number of
decimals displayed on the X axis may mean that fewer tick lines can be
annotated.
Engineering notation
Checking this button "on" means that the tick values will be displayed, when
possible, in the exponential form Ae+b or Ae-b, where A is the number defined
by the number of decimals and b is the power (as a multiple of three).
4.2.2.1.9.2 Grid
A grid is a set of lines that can be overlaid on the displayed data perpendicular

to the selected axis. The lines have a user defined appearance and interval.
Visible
The check box switches the grid on or off.
Base Resolution
This parameter specifies if the base grid lines are calculated automatically or
specified by the user (custom). If it is on “automatic”, the range is defined as
range will be 100.
Offset and increment

The value of these parameter defines the offset and increment of the grid lines –
if the base resolution is on ‘custom’.
Subdivisions
The value of this parameter determines the number of lines that will be
displayed within the base resolution range. It only can be used in case of Base
resolution on automatic. Subdivisions on 1 means that one grid line will be
displayed in the range, and a resolution of 10 means that 10 lines will be
displayed in the same range.
Selecting the subdivisions on Automatic means that between 10 and 20 grid

lines will be displayed in total.
Line Style
Schedules a dialog in which the color, pattern and width of the grid lines can be
set.
4.2.2.1.9.3 Custom Grid
A custom grid is a custom set of lines that can be overlaid on the displayed data
in a Colormap or a Waterfall display. The values from an existing block, e.g. a
TestLab block or an Excel block, can be selected based on their units. The units
of the selected block should match the visible X and Z axis units. Multiple
function blocks, for different sets of units, can be saved in the picture layout.
An increment can be chosen to create a custom grid with fixed percentage

intervals.
4.2.2.1.9.4 Limits
The options here define how the limit values will be displayed. The actual value
of the limits is determined from the Limits menu.
Visible
Switches the display of the limit values "on" or "off".
Font
16A 93
color that you want to use for the annotation of the limit values. An example of
the current style is shown in the box alongside.
Decimals
If the annotation of the limits is visible, then this field determines the number of
figures behind the decimal point that will be displayed.
Checking this button "on" means that the limit values will be displayed, when
4.2.2.1.9.5 Unit
The options here define how the unit associated with an axis will be displayed.
The actual units shown depend on the selected unit set.
Visible
Switches the display of the unit "on" or "off".
Font
color that you want to use for the annotation of the unit. An example of the
4.2.2.1.9.6 Name
The options here define if and how the axis name will be displayed. There is an
extra option to 'hide name for single axis data'.
4.2.2.1.9.7 Format
The options here define how the format of the data associated with an axis will
be displayed. The actual format to be used is selected from the Format menu for
the X, the Y or the Z axis.
Visible
Switches the display of the format value "on" or "off".
Font
color that you want to use for the annotation of the format. An example of the
Section 4.2.2.2 Y-axis

determined.

Free
Optimized
Fixed...
these values.
itself.
Section 4.2.2.2.2 Format Y

The options in this cascading menu determine which aspect of the ordinate
values in the data will be displayed as well as the type of scaling to be used.
Note: Different values for this parameter can be set for the left (front) and
right (back) Y axes in the FrontBack display window and for the top (upper)
and bottom (lower) Y axis in the UpperLower display window .
Real
Only the real part of a complex function is displayed.
Imag
Only the imaginary part of a complex function is displayed. This option is not
available for Octave displays.
Amplitude
Only amplitude values are displayed.
Y formats
16A 95
Phase
Phase values between +180 and -180 are displayed. This option is not available
for Octave displays.
dB
The dB values are displayed. If you want to extend the annotation with the DB
reference, you can do that for the involved unit(s) in the unit editor.
Log
The Y values are displayed on a logarithmic scale. For functions (no raw time
data), if the minimum amplitude value is equal to zero, the lower log limit will
be 90% of the lowest non-zero amplitude value.
Normalized
The Y amplitude values can be normalized. The option is available in a F/B
display, an Upper Lower display and a Multi-trace display. The normalization
settings can be chosen in the axis ‘General…’ context menu, the ‘Normalized
format’ tab.
Section 4.2.2.2.3 Processing

Align Direction
You can align the attributes 'Point direction sign' as well as the 'Referenced
point direction sign' of data. The data will be corrected automatically
(multiplied with -1) when needed.
Integrate/Differentiate
You can apply a single of double integration or differentiation data by first
selecting the appropriate curves and then selecting an option from the
Processing drop down menu.
Integration/differentiation is possible on data in the front or back of a front-back

display, in the upper or the lower of a upper-lower display, in the amplitude and
phase of a bode display, on a waterfall display and on a colormap display.
Integration/differentiation in the display is only available for ‘frequency related’

data, not on time data. Calculation is done by dividing/multiplying by .
Weighting
You can apply weighting on data making use of the predefined weighting
factors (A,B,C and D). The pop-up menu also allows showing the original
weighting (in case some front-end weighting or pre-weighting was applied) or
linear weighting (none). By default the data in the display will be shown with
their original weighting. Weighting is possible on data in the front or back of a

front-back display, in the upper or the lower target of an upper-lower display, in

(amplitude and phase) a bode display, in a waterfall display in a colormap
display and in an octave display.
Weighting in the display is only available for ‘frequency related’ data, not on
time data. Calculation is done by multiplying with the weighting curve in
frequency domain.
Cumulative
Both reversed and forward cumulative processing can be applied.
Always amplitudes are taken for the calculations.
Smoothing
The pop-up menu allows you to apply linear smoothing on data. The Linear
smoothing uses (except for the first and last sample) following algorithm :
NewX(i) = (X(i-1)+2*X(i)+X(i+1))/4. For complex valued functions, the
smoothing is performed on the amplitudes only.
Applying some exponential smoothing will be the result of two different

smoothing actions. First a smoothing is applied from the beginning until the end
of the data. Then a smoothing will be applied from the end until the beginning
of the considered data. This action will not allow the peak values to shift from
their original position. Smoothing can only be applied on frequency based data.
Smoothing on data is possible in the front or back of a front-back display, in the
upper or the lower of an upper-lower display, in the amplitude and phase of a
bode display.
In the Exponential smoothing dialog you can choose light, medium or heavy
smoothing. They will respectively represent a smoothing factor of 0.1, 0.5 and
0.8. You have also the possibility to specify a custom smoothing factor between
0 and 1.
Applying some Keep peaks smoothing will be the result of replacing each value
with the maximum of itself and the linear average of its two neighboring values.
Begin and end value are always kept. This comparison is done on amplitudes
only. The number of smoothing Cycles can be chosen in the Keep peaks
smoothing dialog with 10000 as maximum number of smoothing cycles.
Spectrum & Section Scaling

By default, section data (order sections, frequency & overall level sections) is
always calculated and shown in RMS values, even with ‘Original’ Spectrum &
Section Scaling processing. This function allows a user to view spectra &
sections with scaling ‘peak’, ‘peak-to-peak’ or ‘RMS’. The function affects only
section data, autopower, crosspower and spectrum data. Spectrum & Section
Scaling is possible on data in the front or back of a front-back display, in the
upper or the lower of an upper-lower display, in the amplitude and phase of a
bode display.
In displays where Spectrum & Section Scaling is not available (excluding the
octave display), visual feedback on the axis is given, as to provide feedback on
the used spectral scaling.
Extra feedback can be added to the display legend via the addition of the
16A 97
‘Spectrum scaling’ function attribute.
Reset All
This button will reset the applied weighting to the 'original' weighting, the
smoothing to 'none', the section scaling to RMS and the
integration/differentiation to ‘none’.

Waterfall displays.
Section 4.2.2.2.5 Hatching

This option makes it possible to hatch between the first 2 curves – in the front
and/or the back of a front-back.
Hatching is only supported for line segments and markers (not for block
outlines (used for octave data). In the octave display the octave visualizations,
line segments and skyline, are supported.
Hatching is only supported for strict monotone signals.
Section 4.2.2.2.6 Reverse

The option reverses the axis. The option is available in the Matrix display.




4.2.2.2.9.1 Grid
Visible
Switches the grid on or off.
Line Style
set.
Base Resolution
range will be 100.
4.2.2.2.9.2 Ticks
axis.
Visible
Line Style
be set.
16A 99
Base Resolution
Type
the axis.
Annotation visible
Font button.
Font
Decimals
annotated.
4.2.2.2.9.3 Limits
Visible

Font
Decimals
4.2.2.2.9.4 Unit
Visible
Font
4.2.2.2.9.5 Name
extra option to 'hide name for single axis data'. This option is only available for
an independent Y axis.
4.2.2.2.9.6 Format
Visible
Font
Section 4.2.2.2.10 Color Scale

This option enables you to select a color palette to be used to display the data
values. It is only available in a Colormap, Function-Map & Matrix display
windows.
16A 101
All the installed color palettes are listed in the cascading menu.
As extra options the color palette can be made more printer friendly by
whitening the lowest value color or the color palette can be inverted.
Transition
Color scale color transitions can be made Banded (default) or smooth.
For the Colormap and Function-Map display an extra ‘Base Ticks’ option is
available to fix color transitions on the color scale base ticks. The ‘base ticks
resolution’ can be customized in the color scale options menu with an offset and
an increment.
Section 4.2.2.3 Z-axis

determined.
Free
Optimized
Fixed...
these values.
itself.
Section 4.2.2.3.2 Format Z

This option is only available in Colormap, Waterfall and Matrix display
windows. It determines in which format the Z-axis values will be displayed. The
format of the Z-axis is default Linear.

Waterfall displays.




4.2.2.3.6.1 Grid
Visible
Switches the grid on or off.
Line Style
16A 103
set.
Base Resolution
range will be 100.
4.2.2.3.6.2 Custom Grid
A custom grid is a custom set of lines that can be overlaid on the displayed data
in a Colormap or a Waterfall display. The values from an existing block, e.g. a
TestLab block or an Excel block, can be selected based on their units. The units
of the selected block should match the visible X and Z axis units. Multiple
function blocks, for different sets of units, can be saved in the picture layout.
An increment can be chosen to create a custom grid with fixed percentage

intervals.
4.2.2.3.6.3 Ticks
axis.
Visible
Line Style
be set.
Base Resolution
Type
the axis.

Annotation visible
Font button.
Font
Decimals
annotated.
4.2.2.3.6.4 Limits
Visible
Font
Decimals
4.2.2.3.6.5 Name
extra option to 'hide name for single axis data'. This option is only available for
an independent Z axis.
16A 105
4.2.2.3.6.6 Unit
Visible
Font
4.2.2.3.6.7 Format
Visible
Font
These menus are obtained by right clicking on any X, Y or Z axis. They enable
you to adjust the characteristics of that axis. The contents of some entries in this
menu will depend on the type of axis.
For a FrontBack axis menu, different characteristics can be set for the left
(front) Y and the right (back) Y axes. While in the case of an UpperLower axis
menu, different characteristics can be set for the top (upper) Y and the bottom
(lower) Y axes.
Section 4.2.2.4 X-axes

Use the X-axis popup menu to switch between the X axes that are available.
Depending on displayed data type a number of options are provided.

4.2.2.4.1.1 Order map, spectrum waterfall, individual spectra of a
waterfall
Derived Frequency / Order
In Colormap and Waterfall displays you can view an order map with a
frequency X axis and a spectrum waterfall with an order X axis. There is a
frequency (or order) X axis available for each rpm Z axis.

You can also view the individual blocks of waterfalls with a derived
Frequency/Order axis in a 2D function display. This option is not available in an
octave display.
4.2.2.4.1.2 Sections, (orders, frequency sections, octave sections,
overall level, ...)
Sections are 2D slices through 3D maps or waterfalls, the X axis of a section
corresponds to the Z axis of the waterfall. Sections can contain the following X
axes:
Time
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the time value they
were measured. The first value is annotated with time 0, the other values are
annotated with the time relative to that of the first value.
Time (Throughput)
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the time value they
were measured. The time values correspond to those of the time recording
(Throughput file). This time recording can be superimposed in the same display
for comparison purposes.
Tacho channel (rpm), Derived Tacho channel and Static

channel
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the measured value
of the selected Tacho, Derived Tacho or Static channel.
Derived Frequency
You can view orders (and other sections) against frequency. For each Tacho
axis a frequency axis is available. For order sections, the order number of the
order section is taken into account.
For example:
 1st order section, with rpm axis from 2100 to 6100 rpm gives a frequency
axis from 35 to 101.66 Hz
 3rd order section, with rpm axis from 2100 to 6100 rpm gives a frequency
axis from 105 to 305 Hz
Derived number
Data values will be displayed along the X axis according to the sequence
number in which they were measured.
Section 4.2.2.5 Second X-axes

Use the Second X-axis popup menu to display a second X-axis on top of a
display. Only second X-axes with a correlation greater or equal to 98% with the
primary X-axis will be available. If the data in the display contains no second
X-axes, this field will be grayed out.
When the primary X-axis is changed, the second X-axis will be removed. The
16A 107
pop-up menu allows you then to select again a second X-axis if available.
If cursors are added to a display, they will always be linked to the unit of the
primary X-axis. The values of the second X axis are determined via linear
regression and are therefore always an approximation.
Use the Second X-axis popup menu to display a second X-axis on top of a
display. Only second X-axes with a correlation greater or equal to 98% with the
primary X-axis will be available. If the data in the display contains no second
X-axes, this field will be grayed out.
Section 4.2.2.6 Z-axes

Depending on the value of this toggle, another Z axis is annotated. A number of
options are provided. It is only available in Colormap and Waterfall display
windows.
Derived number
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the sequence number in
which they were measured.
Time
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the time value they
were measured. The first record is annotated with time 0, the other records are
annotated with the time value relative to that of the first record.
Time (Throughput)
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the time value they
were measured. The time values correspond to those of the time recording
(Throughput file ).
Tacho channel (rpm), Derived Tacho channel and Static

channel
Records will be displayed along the Z axis according to the measured value of
the selected Tacho, Derived Tacho or Static channel.
Section 4.2.3 The Display menus
This menu is obtained by right clicking in the display area of the window and
not on a curve. When there is a lot of data in a window it can be more easily
obtained by right clicking anywhere in the window, while holding the Ctrl key
down.
Section 4.2.3.1 Add Single Cursor

This allows you to add a number of single cursors (see "The Single (cursor)
menus" on page 126) with arrowhead handles.

Section 4.2.3.2 Add Double Cursor

This allows you to add a number of double cursors (see "The Double (cursor)
menus" on page 130) with arrowhead handles. Double cursors can be used to
examine specific ranges of data values.
Section 4.2.3.3 Add Harmonic Cursor

This allows you to add a number of harmonic cursors (see "The Harmonic
(cursor) menus" on page 133) with arrowhead handles. Harmonic cursors
change their separation in a way that makes them all harmonics of one
frequency.
Section 4.2.3.4 Add Automatic Cursor

This allows you to add an automatic peak cursor or an automatic valley cursor.
They cannot be moved. They indicate the peak or valley of the selected curve
within the range of the display. Throughput data is not supported.
The ‘Automatic Peak/Valley parameters’ can be accessed by clicking on the

popup menu of the cursor.
Section 4.2.3.5 Add Processing Cursor

All different kinds of processing cursors are available on waterfalls and
colormaps. You can insert a Z-, Order-, Frequency and Cross-cursor in a
display. The corresponding processed block can be dragged and dropped into
another display. While moving the processing cursor the view is instantaneously
updated.
An X-processing cursor is also available in a Front/Back display. The start

situation is a picture with at least two 2D-displays. In one of the 2D-displays
you can drop at least one function that is a processed function of that waterfall,
e.g. the OA-level or an order section. On this curve you can define a processing
cursor and the application identifies the corresponding spectrum according to
the specific position of that processing cursor. After dropping the corresponding
spectrum in a display, you can move this processing cursor and the view will be
updated instantaneously.
There is also the ability to adjust the processing parameters. For example, the
width unit of an order section can be determined by order, percentage,
frequency or number of lines.
The processing cursors can also be used in semi-embedded active pictures.
Section 4.2.3.6 Add Coupled Cursor

This allows you to add a number of coupled cursors. Coupled cursors can be
used to examine specific data values over multiple displays within a picture.
16A 109
Section 4.2.3.7 Remove All Cursors

This option removes all the cursors in the display. Right click on the cursor and
select Remove Cursor from the dropdown menu, in order to remove
individual cursors.
Section 4.2.3.8 Paste

This option can be used to paste an item that has been copied from the list in the
Data Explorer window.
Paste to Front / Back

In a FrontBack display window, you can paste data browser entries from the
Data Explorer to the front or to the back axis, executing this function in either
the left or the right hand side of the window.
Paste to Upper / Lower

In an UpperLower display window, you can paste data browser entries from the
Data Explorer to a specific axis in either the upper or lower window, depending
on where you executed the function (the upper or the lower side).
Section 4.2.3.9 Select All Curves

This option selects all curves on display. Individual curves can be selected by
left clicking on them or by pressing the Shift key while left clicking. It is not
available for Colormap or Waterfall displays.
Section 4.2.3.10 Deselect All Curves

This option deselects all the curves that are currently selected. Individual curves
can be deselected by left clicking on them with the Shift key depressed. It is not
available for Colormap or Waterfall displays.
Section 4.2.3.11 Remove Curve

This option relates to Colormap and Waterfall displays only. It removes “all”
curves in the display.
Section 4.2.3.12 Remove All Curves

This option removes all the curves in the display, from both the front and the
back axes. Right click on the curve and select Remove Curve from the
dropdown menu, in order to remove individual curve. It is not available for
Colormap or Waterfall displays.
Section 4.2.3.13 Legend

This toggles the presence of a floating legend inside the display window in
which information relating to the displayed data can be seen. You can drag it

with the mouse to any desired location in the window. Clicking on the small
box inside the floating legend selects the curve. Right-clicking on a legend
schedules a popup menu (see "The Curve Legend menus" on page 123) which
allows several actions to be made on both the legend itself and on the data in the
display.
Section 4.2.3.14 Title Legend

This toggles the presence of a title legend inside the display window. The title
legend enables you to show a title and the attributes common to all curves. You
can drag the title legend with the mouse to any desired location in the window.
Section 4.2.3.15 Cursor Legend

This toggles the presence of a floating cursor legend inside the display window
in which information regarding the cursor position, crossing values of the cursor
with the curve(s) and possibly calculated information can be seen. You can drag
it with the mouse to any desired location in the window. The formatting of the
contents is the same as and determined by the formatting of the legend. In the
cursor legend options you can also define whether the unit labels will be shown
in the cursor legend.
Right-clicking on a cursor legend schedules a dropdown menu with the

possibility to copy the contents of the legend into the Windows clipboard. These
contents can than be saved in e.g. Microsoft Excel.
Auto
When switched on, whenever an X, Y or cross cursor is added to the display,
the corresponding cursor legend will automatically be opened. When removing
the last cursor of a certain type, the corresponding cursor legend will disappear
automatically. When switched off, no cursor legend will be shown
automatically.
X
When switched on, the cursor legend for X cursors becomes visible.
Y (front)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Y (front) cursors becomes visible.
Y (back)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Y (back) cursors becomes visible.
Cross (front)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Cross (front) cursors becomes visible.
Cross (back)
When switched on, the cursor legend for Cross (back) cursors becomes visible.
16A 111
Section 4.2.3.16 Copy to Metafile

This function copies the contents of the display window to a metafile in the
windows clipboard. It can then be pasted into another application e.g. Word.
It is also possible to copy the contents of the complete picture (all the windows
in the layout) by executing the same function from the popup menu obtained
from the picture tab.
Section 4.2.3.17 Preview Mode

When this setting is "on", then the contents of the window will automatically be
updated by simply clicking on an item in the Data selector panel.
For the FrontBack Display, the selected item will be added to the back (right)
axis.
For the UpperLower Display, the selected item will be added to the lower
(bottom) axis.
You must select a suitable data type for the window and it must be compatible
with any data that is currently on display on the chosen axis. The magnifying
glass icon at the top right hand corner of the window indicates when this setting
is "on".
Section 4.2.3.18 Undo

This option will undo the latest zoom action. It will have the same effect as
using the backspace.
Section 4.2.3.19 Interactive zooming

With this option, you can switch on or off the interactive zooming with the
mouse.
Section 4.2.3.20 Maximize

This option causes the window in which you are working fill the entire desktop
space. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Section 4.2.3.21 Restore

This option can be used after the Zoom or the Maximize operations to restore
the active window to its rightful size within the layout/worksheet.
Section 4.2.3.22 Display Size

This option offers the possibility to resize and restore the picture size.

Maximize
This option causes the window in which you are working to fill the entire
desktop space. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Maximize to Picture
This option applies when you are working with a layout that contains a number
of windows. Selecting this option makes the active window fill the display area
panel. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Restore
This option can be used after the Maximize or the Maximize to Picture
operations in order to restore the active window to its rightful size within the
layout/worksheet.
Section 4.2.3.23 Display Format

The option Align front/back displays in picture allows you to align the format
of all displays in the picture.
The Copy and Paste options allow you to copy the format of one display and
paste it into another.
Section 4.2.3.24 Aspect ratio

This option is available for the XY display and applies to the Front (not the
Back) drop target.
By default the aspect ratio 'Mode' is 'Automatic', i.e. (eg mm/nr of pixels) used
for X and Y axis is the same. By default the 'Automatic options' setting 'Equal Y
ranges' is enabled, meaning the largest range is used for both (horizontal and
vertical) Y axes.
If the aspect ratio 'Mode' is put to ‘User defined’, a user can define another
ratio. With the Ctrl-mouse, you can define any ratio.
Section 4.2.3.25 Axis options

This opens the “Axis options” dialog which lets you apply chosen limit ranges
to all axes set to “optimized” limits.
 Log range (expressed in decades)
 dB range
 Decade range
 Octave range
Section 4.2.3.26 Overall Level Options...

This option is only available for Octave displays. It schedules the “Overall
Level Options...” in which the display settings for the two types of overall levels
16A 113
are set. The level marked [A, B, C or D] is the sum of the data values with the
standard acoustic filtering known as [A, B, C or D] weighting applied. The level
marked 'L' is the sum of the linear (unweighted) data values in all octave bands.
To display the actual data values on top of the bar, check the 'Show overall level
values' box “on”.
To calculate both types of overall level, check the 'Calculate both weighted and
linear overall level” box “on”.
To turn “off” either setting, uncheck the relevant box.
Section 4.2.3.27 Options

This schedules the 'Options' dialog in which a number of display settings can be
defined. Each one is set by first clicking on the tab, setting the parameters
values as required, then clicking Apply to see the effect.
Section 4.2.3.27.1 Layout

3D Effect
When this setting is on, then the border around the display area appears to have
some depth.
Display Area Color

Clicking on this button enables you to select the color which surrounds the
display area within its portion of the overall layout.
Graphic Area Color

Clicking on this button enables you to select the color used as background in the
display area.
Show
Indicates which axis are shown or ‘visible’ in the display. This tab is only
available for FrontBack, Octave, Function-Map, Colormap, XY, GPS, Nyquist,
Matrix and Video displays.
Section 4.2.3.27.2 Cursors

This dialog enables you to set the default cursor properties for a particular type
of cursor that is available in the display. These properties will be applied to all
cursors of this type when they are scheduled. It does not affect existing cursors.
The properties of existing cursors can be adjusted using the same dialog, by
right clicking on the cursor line.
Cursor
You can select the type of cursor that you want to apply the settings to from the
drop down list.

Style
Line style
Clicking on this button schedules a dialog in which you can choose the color,
pattern and the width of the cursor line.
Cursor
Show the cursor as a line, a short line or no line.
Intersection
Indicate the cursor intersection with curves with a line, a short line or no line.
Font
Clicking on this button schedules a dialog in which you can choose the font in
which the cursor value (if displayed) will be shown.
Show Handle
Turning this option “on” displays the cursor handle.
ToolTip Style
When this button is checked on, the cursor annotation value will be displayed
with a colored background, in the style of a tooltip, which makes it easier to
distinguish.
Value
When this button is checked on, then the current cursor value will be displayed.
Decimals
The number in this field determines the number of decimal places behind the
point that will be displayed in the cursor value.
Checking this button 'on' will mean that the cursor values (if they are visible)
will be displayed, when possible, in the exponential form Ae+b or Ae-b, where
A is the number defined by the number of decimals and b is the power (as a
multiple of three).
On all Harmonics
This option is available for the harmonic cursor. If the value is not shown on all
harmonics, the first or the selected instance of the harmonic cursor shows the
harmonic value.
Always show intersections

This button always you to show always the intersections with all the curves in
the display, even when the curves are not selected.
16A 115
Snap to data values

When this field is set to "snap to data values on curve", the only possible cursor
positions are on physically measured samples. When it is set to "None", the
cursor can be positioned anywhere. If the cursor is positioned between two
physically measured samples, then the readout value will be a linear
interpolation between the two surrounding samples.
Harmonic count
Show a fixed number of lines for a harmonic cursor.
Section 4.2.3.27.3 Label

You can define a label for each cursor which then will be shown in the cursor
legend.
Append to value
Appends the label to the cursor value.
On all Harmonics
This option is available for the harmonic cursor. If the label is not shown on all
harmonics, the first or the selected instance of the harmonic cursor shows the
harmonic value.
Section 4.2.3.27.4 Curve Property Schema

The default curve property settings for the first 14 curves can be edited via the
'Overrule the default curve property schema' checkbox. It is always possible to
'Reset to default schema'. When more than 14 curves are displayed the schema
gets repeated. The edited schema is only applied on newly dropped curves.
Note: In the application menu bar, in Tools>Options…>Displays>2D

Function Displays, the option ‘Always use trace type ‘Block Outlines’ for
octave data’ overrules the 2D display trace type setting for octave data.
Section 4.2.3.27.5 Miscellaneous

The 'Orientation' of the independent axes can be changed in a Front/Back
display, a colormap and a HistogramMatrix display.
During an online measurement process, the 'Number of visible traces', i.e. the
number of spectra shown during an online measurement, can be adjusted. Also
the 'Scrolling' range can be defined.
These options are only available for Colormap displays.
Section 4.2.3.28 Options - Numerical Display

A numerical display panel can contain 1 or more gauge or numerical displays. It

can only be used to display tacho or static channel values online in Signature
workbook.
When right-clicking on a display, the following functions are available:
Gauge / Numerical
Select the type of display.
Linear / dB
Select the format of the data. dB is calculated on the absolute values.
Color Scale
Define the limits for the gauge and allows to define 3 different colors
corresponding to 3 range of data.
Decimals...
Define the number of decimals to be displayed.
Options…
Automatic font size
Font size automatically resizes, i.e. the name will be auto fitted.
Display: name only
For large names, e.g. CAN channel names, only the part after the last ‘::’ will be
displayed.
When there are several displays in 1 numerical display panel, it is possible to
rearrange them by dragging and dropping them.
Section 4.2.3.29 Options - Curve

These options are only available for Waterfall displays.
Hidden lines
When this option is on, then front blocks will hide the lines of blocks that are
behind them.
Line Style...
Clicking on this button schedules a dialog in which you can choose a color,
pattern and width for the curves to be displayed in the window. The same style
will be applied to all curves.
Section 4.2.3.30 Options - View

These options are only available for Waterfall displays.
Scale
This is the percentage of the total height of the current window used for the X-Y
16A 117
plane. This value can range from 0.01 (1%) to 0.99 (99%).
Angle
This is the angle at which the Z axis is set. Values from 0.01° up to 65° are
possible.
Section 4.2.3.31 Tool

Zoom
When selected, zooming can be done by left clicking and dragging a square on a
curve. It modifies the display menu obtained by right clicking in the display
area of the window. Unzooming can be done by double clicking in the display
area or by selecting “Undo” from the modified display menu.
General
When selected, the standard display menu is obtained by right clicking in the
display area of the window.
Section 4.2.4 The Data menus
These operations relate to the data traces that are on display.
Section 4.2.4.1 Remove

Clicking on this item removes the selected curve from the display.
Section 4.2.4.2 Move to Front/Back

Only available in a Front/Back display. Clicking on this item moves the selected
curve either to the back or the front of the display.
Section 4.2.4.3 Cut

Clicking on this item cuts the selected curve from the display. You can paste the
curve in any compatible display by clicking on Paste menu item in the Display
popup menu.
Section 4.2.4.4 Copy

Clicking on this item copies the selected curve from the display. You can paste
the curve in any compatible display by clicking on Paste menu item in the
Display popup menu.
Section 4.2.4.5 Copy values

This option is not available for Colormap or Waterfall displays. It allows you to

copy the values of the selected curve for pasting purposes.
[All]
Copies all the values of the selected curve.
[Between X limits]
Copies only the values of the selected curve between the X limits of the display.
Section 4.2.4.6 Status Message

Clicking on this item schedules a message box indicating the status of the block.
This item becomes only sensitive when a message is available.
Section 4.2.4.7 Data Properties

This option is not available for Colormap or Waterfall displays. It opens the
“Properties” dialog presenting a table of the identification details for the
selected data. Columns can be hidden from view by right clicking on the header
field and then choosing Hide from the popup menu that appears.
Section 4.2.4.8 Curve Properties

This option schedules the Curve Properties dialog in which you can define the
properties of the curve used to draw the traces. It is not available for Colormap
Waterfall or Matrix displays.
Line
You can choose styles for the lines from the Trace style, Color, Pattern and
Width dropdown menus.
Fill
This allows you to select the color used for the selected curves from the Fill
Color dropdown menu.
Marker
This allows you to use markers, cross, cross (pre-10A) or dots, on the selected
curves You can then select the size of the markers from the MarkerSize
dropdown menu.
The marker style cross (pre-10A) differs from the cross markers in setting its
markers on the minimum and maximum values per pixel. With multiple data
values per pixel this gives a reduced min-max view in comparison with the
regular cross marker.
Annotation
An annotation can be added to the legend.
16A 119
Section 4.2.4.9 Replay

This option allows you to replay audio data when the Replay Add-in is
included. More explanation in the Audio replay & filter dialog chapter.
Section 4.2.4.10 Select

This option is not available for Colormap or Waterfall displays. Selecting is
performed by left clicking on the data trace or by clicking on the curve
identification box inside the floating legend (see "The Curve Legend menus"
on page 123). The selection is indicated by a series of small square markers
appearing on the curve. Selection is important when you are using cursors. A
displayed cursor value is that of the selected function. As you move the cursor
over the selected function the cursors snaps to a data point and displays the
corresponding X and Y values.
You can add curves to the current selection by left clicking on a curve with the
Shift key depressed.
You can remove a single curve from the selection by left clicking on it with the
Shift key depressed. Simply left clicking on a curve selects that curve and
deselects all others.
Section 4.2.5 The Cursor menus
These operations relate to the cursors that are on display. All of the cursor
options found in the complete set of displays are described or referred to here.
However, all of the options do not apply to all of the displays.
Cursors are added to a display using the Display menu (see "The Display
menus" on page 108).
Right clicking on a cursor brings up a popup menu.
Section 4.2.5.1 Remove cursor

This removes the cursor from the display.
Section 4.2.5.2 Zoom

This relates to double cursors only and expands the display between the cursor
values. The X axis now has fixed limits, with the minimum and maximum
values defined by the cursor values. To return to the original settings use the
Limits menu (see "Limits" on page 89) to reset the X axis limits.
Note: The following sub-menu entries concern the X-axis in the Bode,
FrontBack and UpperLower windows and are only seen if one or more curves

are linked.
Section 4.2.5.3 Move to…

The user will be asked for the value, where the cursor will be moved to.
Section 4.2.5.4 Move to next Sample

The cursor will move to the next sample.
Section 4.2.5.5 Move to previous Sample

The cursor will move to the previous sample.
Section 4.2.5.6 Move to next local maximum / minimum

This option is not available for Colormap, Octave or Waterfall displays. It
causes the cursor to jump to the next maximum (peak) or minimum (dip) in a
positive X direction found on any of the selected curves.
Section 4.2.5.7 Move to previous local maximum / minimum

causes the cursor to jump to the previous maximum (peak) or minimum (dip) in
a negative X direction found on any of the selected curves.
Section 4.2.5.8 Move to global maximum / minimum

causes the cursor to jump to the overall maximum or minimum value of all of
the selected curves.
Section 4.2.5.9 Snap to Data Values

If on, the cursor can only be placed at a sample of the data (and not in between).
It is not possible to snap a coupled cursor to data samples.
Section 4.2.5.10 Lock position

This option locks the cursor to its current position. It cannot be moved anymore
until the "lock position" option is disabled again via the same menu.
Section 4.2.5.11 Calculations

This option is available for double cursors and single X cursors. It specifies
which calculated values should be shown in the cursor legend, in addition to the
cursor position(s) and crossing values.
16A 121
Section 4.2.5.11.1 General cursor calculations in all Functions

displays
In general, next calculations are possible (depending on the cursor type and
display type): axis range, RMS, min, max, average, and range.
Section 4.2.5.11.2 Modal Cursor calculations in Front/Back and

Bode display
Next to these general calculations, in a Front/Back and a Bode display also the
calculation of the damping factor - damping ratio – loss factor is available for a
single cursor.
The damping factor, damping ratio, and loss factor can be easily calculated from
the two 3dB frequency values: the left and right crossvalues of the line, 3dB
lower than the local peak value:
where:
Q :damping factor
:damping ratio
:loss factor
Section 4.2.5.12 Processing…

When clicking this, an overview of some derived processing on the current
cursor is shown – e.g. an order section on order cursor of a waterfall.
Section 4.2.5.13 Properties…

This schedules a dialog in which you can adapt a number of characteristics of
the selected cursor.
These are the same options as previously documented for the Cursor tab in the
Options dialog (see "Options" on page 114) accessed through the Function
Display menu.

Section 4.2.6 The Curve Legend menus
Section 4.2.6.1 Show
This allows you to show the legend of 5, 10, 15 or all the curves that are
selected. You can also choose an other number of curves to be shown by
clicking custom.
You can then scroll through the different curves by clicking the up or down
arrows next to the curve legend .
Section 4.2.6.2 Copy Legend Values

This allows you to copy the complete content of the legend and to paste it in a
MS Word document, MS Excel, … .
Section 4.2.6.3 Size to fit

This automatically sets the optimal size of the legend box in the display.
Section 4.2.6.4 Options...

This opens the “Curve Legend Options” dialog containing five tabs.
Custom Content
This tab lets you choose custom content for your legend from a list of all the
possible information available for the legend box. The available attributes
depend on which Origin and Type you have selected. In the list of attributes you
can navigate to the desired attribute by using the keyboard and typing the first
letter.
16A 123
As the number of all available attributes is quite extended, we provide the

possibility to define a “Favorite list” of the attributes which you plan to use on a
regular base.
When an attribute is highlighted you can press the “Add to Favorites” button.
This will make sure you create a “Favorite List” which can be visualized by
enabling the “Show Favorites” checkbox. Multiple attributes from different
origin and type can be added to this “Favorite List” when this “Show Favorites”
option is disabled. On the other hand you can only remove items by pressing the
“Remove from Favorites” when the “Show Favorites” is enabled.
In the right panel you define the attributes that can be visualized in either the
legend or title legend. This list can receive input from the general list or the
Favorites. So, when switching the view of the Favorite List on or off, the
selected attributes will remain the same.
There is also the possibility to choose where the attributes common to all curves
are shown. Either the can be shown in the title legend or the legend or even
both. Note that you first need to enable to title legend first in the popup menu if
you would like the attributes to be visible.
Standard Content
This tab lets you choose, from a list of suggested standard content items, what
you wish to display as standard information in your legend box.
Calculated Content
This tab lets you choose from a list of single values which can be reported in the
legend. A single value is a calculated value from the data block. Those values
will be calculated after the visualization processing (i.e. window corrections,
weighting…)
The following single values are available. Some more explanation can be found
in the manual which is referred to.
Sound Metric: (all in the LMS Test.Lab Sound Diagnosis manual > The LMS
Test.Lab Sound Diagnosis workbook > The Sound Diagnosis worksheet > The
Metrics Panel > Metrics table)
 Sound Pressure Level
 Loudness ISO523B Free Field
 Loudness ISO523B Diffuse Field
 Articulation Index
 Open Articulation Index
 Sharpness Free Field
 Sharpness Diffuse Field
 Loudness Stevens 6 (ISO532A)
 Loudness Stevens 7
 Tone-to-noise Ratio

 Prominence Ratio
 Tonality
 ANSI Speech Interference Level
 Preferred Speech Interference Level
 Noise Rating (NR)
 Noise Criterion (NC)
 Balanced Noise Criterion (NCB)
Note: The acoustical metrics will not be supported for time data, they will only
be useful for frequency spectra or 3rd octave spectra. To be able to perform
some sound Metrics calculations the 'sound diagnose license' is also required. If
not available, all previously added values will still be displayed in the legend.
Statistical Value: (all in the LMS Test.Lab Signature Acquisition manual >
Functions > Frame statistics)
 Variance
 Range
 RMS
 Average
 Maximum
 5% percentile
 10% percentile
 50% percentile
 90% percentile
 95% percentile
 Last Value
Note: All the calculations for statistical single values on complex-valued

spectra are performed on the amplitudes. Percentiles are not supported on
throughput data. Statistical value calculation on throughput data is dependent
on the application setting: Tools>Options>Data>Time Data Options>Max.
number of samples used for calculations. The calculation is not supported
above this limit.
The format in which the single values are reported can be adapted.
 Prefix: the name that appears in the Legend (i.e. to enter "AI" for
Articulation Index) Decimal: the number of decimals can be specified
(0-12)
 dB: selecting this option will represent the data in dB in stead of linear
format. If you want to add the log reference of this dB value, you can do so
by adding this for the involved unit(s) in the unit editor.
16A 125
 Unit Label: you can optionally append the data with the unit label.
Layout
This tab lets you change the appearance of your legend box, including the box
itself (border and background colors, size and visibility) and the fonts used to
display its contents (font color, size, effects...).
For the Multi-trace and the Upper/Lower display, the legend can be ‘Split per Y
axis’.
Title Content
This tab enables you to give the display a title. This will be shown in the title
legend. There is also the possibility to choose where the attributes common to
all curves are shown.
Title Layout
This tab lets you change the appearance of your title legend box, including the
box itself (border and background colors, size and visibility) and the fonts used
to display its contents (font color, size, effects...).
Section 4.2.7 The Single (cursor) menus
Section 4.2.7.1 Single X

This schedules a single vertical line, with an arrowhead handle, that can be
dragged with the mouse. The X value corresponding to the cursor position is
annotated just above the lower x-axis. If any of the functions are selected, then
the corresponding values on those traces are also annotated.
Octave
In an Octave Display, the cursor is placed on the center frequency of the octave
band.
UpperLower
In an UpperLower Display, the cursor line covers both windows.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall Display, this item schedules a YZ plane that can be dragged
along the X-axis.
Section 4.2.7.2 Single Y

This schedules an Y cursor on the display i.e. a single horizontal line, with an
arrowhead handle, that can be dragged with the mouse).

Colormap
In a Colormap display, this item schedules a single horizontal line in the color
scale area to the right of the data display area. It can be moved with the mouse
and the Y value corresponding to the cursor position is annotated.
FrontBack
In a FrontBack display, the entry that you obtain from the Y menu item depends
on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The left half of the
window relates to the left (front) axis, and the right half of the window relates to
the right (back) axis.
These entries schedule a single horizontal line that can be moved with the
mouse. The Y value on the corresponding axis is annotated next to the axis. If
any of the functions on that axis are selected, then up to 20 X values
corresponding to this Y value will be annotated.
UpperLower
In an UpperLower display, The entry that you obtain from the Y menu item
depends on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper
window relates to the top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom
display. These entries schedule a single horizontal line that can be moved with
the mouse. The Y value on the corresponding axis is annotated next to the axis.
If any of the functions on that axis are selected, then up to 20 X values
Waterfall
In a Waterfall display, this item schedules an XZ plane that can be dragged
along the Y axis with the mouse. The Y value corresponding to the cursor
position is annotated.
Section 4.2.7.3 Single Z

These are only available on Colormap and Waterfall displays.
Colormap
In a Colormap display, this item schedules a single horizontal line in the display
area. It can be moved with the mouse or the arrow keys and the according Z
value to the cursor position is annotated.
Waterfall
The Z-cursor will schedule a XY-plane that can be moved along the Z-axis. The
block at the cursor position will be highlighted. Even when the trace density is
modified (reduced) the block at the Z-position will be shown and highlighted. A
cross-hair cursor indicates the peak value of the spectrum.
Section 4.2.7.4 Order

These are available in Colormap and Waterfall windows.
16A 127
Colormap
In a Colormap display, an order cursor is a radial line rotating about the point X
= 0, Z = 0. It can be used for examining “orders” when the Z axis values are
rpm.
The line can be moved with the cursor or you can use the ‘Move to …’ cursor
menu option.
The ‘order’ value displayed is the ratio of the X (frequency value) and the Z
(frequency value) :
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (frequency value)
Or when the Z axis values are rpm:
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (rpm) / 60
Order cursor in a Colormap display
You can give the order cursor an ‘offset’ on the X-axis. In this case the radial
line is rotating about the point X = offset, Z = 0.
The offset can be moved with the cursor at the location of the offset point.
The displayed values are the ‘offset’ and the ‘order’ value:
X (frequency value) = Offset + Order * Z (frequency value)
Also the Mirrored order is shown:
X (frequency value) = Offset - Order * Z (frequency value)

Order cursor with offset in a Colormap display
Waterfall
In a Waterfall Display, an order cursor is a radial plane rotating about the point
X = 0, Z = 0. Dragging can move it and the value X/Z of its current position is
displayed.
Order cursor in a Waterfall display
The exact value will of course depend on the values that are being displayed
along the Z axis. This cursor can be used for examining orders when the Z axis
values are rpm. The value displayed is the ratio of the X (frequency value) and
the Z rpm *60 (frequency value).
Section 4.2.7.5 Frequency

This type of cursor will schedule a YZ-plane that can be dragged along the
X-axis when the axis is a frequency axis. Even when switching to another
available X-axis (for example order), the frequency cursor will annotated the
according frequency. As a consequence, the shape of the cursor will change
also.
A regular single X cursor will always schedule a YZ-plane.
16A 129
Section 4.2.7.6 Power

This type of cursor represents the result of the product of the X and the Z axis
values. The power cursor is only available (not grayed out) when the resulting
product of the X axis and the Z axis quantity cases equals the ‘Power’ quantity
case, e.g. MomentOfForce (Nm) x RotationalSpeed (rpm) equals Power (W).
Section 4.2.7.7 Single cross

This schedules a vertical and horizontal line in the window. The crossed pair
can be moved with the mouse. The X and Z coordinates corresponding to the
position of the crossing point in the display area are annotated as (X, Z).
FrontBack
In the FrontBack display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The left half of the window
relates to the left (front) axis, and the right half of the window relates to the
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a vertical and horizontal line in the
window. The crossed pair can be moved with the mouse by dragging the
crossing point. The X and Y coordinates corresponding to the position of the
crossing point in the display area are annotated as (X, Y). The Y value relates to
the selected axis.
UpperLower
In the UpperLower Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a vertical and horizontal line in the
window. The crossed pair can be moved with the mouse by dragging the
crossing point. The X and Y coordinates corresponding to the position of the
crossing point in the display area are annotated as (X, Y). The Y value relates to
the selected axis.
Section 4.2.8 The Double (cursor) menus
Section 4.2.8.1 Double X

This schedules a pair of vertical lines that can be moved with the mouse. The X
values corresponding to the cursor positions are annotated. Drag the left line to
move the cursor pair. Drag the right line to change the distance between the
lines.
Octave
For an Octave Display, it is the same as two single cursors, except for the
coherence between them.

Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, this schedules a pair of YZ planes that can be dragged
along the X-axis with the mouse. Dragging the left plane moves the cursor pair.
Dragging the right plane changes the distance between the cursor planes.
Section 4.2.8.2 Double Y

This places a double Y-cursor on the display.
Colormap
For a Colormap Display, this schedules a pair of horizontal lines in the color
scale area to the right of the data display. They can be moved with the mouse
and the Y values corresponding to the cursor positions are annotated.
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, this schedules a pair of XZ planes that can be dragged
along the Y axis with the mouse. The Y values corresponding to the cursor
positions are annotated. Drag the bottom plane to move the cursor pair. Drag the
top plane to change the distance between the cursor planes.
FrontBack
In the FrontBack Display, the exact entry that you obtain from this menu
depends on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The left half of
the window relates to the left (front) axis, and the right half of the window
relates to the right (back) axis. These entries schedule a pair of horizontal lines
that can be moved with the mouse. Drag the bottom line to move the cursor
pair. Drag the upper line to change the distance between the lines.
The Y values on the corresponding axis are annotated. If any of the functions
associated with the same axis are selected, then up to 20 X values
UpperLower
In the UpperLower Display, the exact entry that you obtain from this menu
depends on where you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper
window relates to the top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom
display. These entries schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of which is
separated by a constant distance. The separating distance corresponds to the
distance between the zero value and first line, which is annotated. Dragging a
cursor line across the zero line moves all the harmonic lines to the opposite side.
The distance between all the lines can be adjusted by dragging any one of the
lines up or down.
Section 4.2.8.3 Double Z

These are only available in colormap and waterfall windows.
Colormap
For a Colormap Display, this schedules a pair of horizontal lines in the data
16A 131
display area that can be moved with the mouse along the Z axis. The Z values
corresponding to the cursor positions are annotated. Drag the bottom line to
move the cursor pair. Drag the upper line to change the distance between the
lines.
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, this schedules a pair of XY planes that can be dragged
along the Z axis with the mouse. The Z values corresponding to the cursor
positions are annotated. Drag the front plane to move the cursor pair. Drag the
back plane to change the distance between the cursor planes.
Section 4.2.8.4 Double Order

Colormap
In a Colormap Display, a double order cursor is a pair of radial lines rotating
about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The pair can be moved together by dragging the
left hand line (black in the figure). The angle between them can be adjusted by
dragging the right hand line (red in the figure). In each case, the value X/Z
corresponding to the positions of the two lines is annotated.
Double Order cursor in a Colormap Display
This exact values will of course depend on the values that are being displayed
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, a double order cursor is a pair of radial planes rotating
about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The pair can be moved together by dragging the
left plane. The angle between them can be adjusted by dragging the right plane.
In each case, the values X/Z corresponding to the positions of the two planes is
annotated.

Section 4.2.8.5 Double Cross

This schedules two crossed vertical and horizontal cursor lines. The X and Z
values corresponding to the two crossing points are annotated. Drag the
lower/left cross in order to move the pair. The distance between them can be
adjusted by dragging the upper/right cross.
FrontBack
For a FrontBack Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
right (back) axis. These entries schedule two crossed vertical and horizontal
cursor lines. The X and Y values corresponding to the two crossing points are
annotated. The pair can be moved by dragging the lower/left cross and the
distance between them can be adjusted by dragging the upper/right cross.
UpperLower
For an UpperLower Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper window relates to the
top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom display. These schedule
a series of crossed vertical and horizontal cursor lines at fixed intervals. The X
and Y intervals can be adjusted independently. The separating distance
corresponds to the distance between the zero-value and the first line. Dragging
the first horizontal line across the zero line moves all the horizontal lines to the
opposite side. The distance between all the lines can be adjusted by dragging
any one of the crossing points in any direction.
Section 4.2.9 The Harmonic (cursor) menus
Section 4.2.9.1 Harmonic X

This schedules a series of vertical lines, at equal intervals. The distance between
each line is that of the basic frequency range, i.e. the distance between the first
line and the starting frequency.
X Harmonic cursor
Moving any one of the lines will cause the others to adjust and so maintain a
16A 133
constant distance between them all. The basic frequency range is annotated on
the X axis. When the limits are free or optimized.
Section 4.2.9.2 Harmonic Y

This related to a Waterfall Display and schedules a series of YZ planes, at equal
intervals. The distance between each plane is the basic frequency range, i.e. the
distance between the first line and zero.
Moving any one of the planes will cause the others to adjust and so maintain a
constant distance between them all. The basic frequency (if it lies within the
displayed limits) is annotated on the X axis.
FrontBack
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of
which is separated by a constant distance. The separating distance corresponds
to the distance between the zero value and first line, which is annotated.
Dragging a cursor line across the zero line moves all the harmonic lines to the
any one of the lines up or down.
UpperLower
For an UpperLower Display, what you obtain from this menu depends on where
you are bringing up the Display popup menu. The upper window relates to the
top display, and the lower window relates to the bottom display. These entries
schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of which is separated by a constant
distance. The separating distance corresponds to the distance between the zero
value and first line, which is annotated. Dragging a cursor line across the zero
line moves all the harmonic lines to the opposite side. The distance between all
the lines can be adjusted by dragging any one of the lines up or down.
Section 4.2.9.3 Harmonic Z

This item schedules a series of XY planes, each of which is separated by a
constant distance. The distance between all the planes can be adjusted by
dragging any one of them up or down. The Z value of the lowest plane is
annotated on the left (Z) axis.
Section 4.2.9.4 Harmonic Order

Colormap
In a Colormap Display, a harmonic order cursor is a set of radial lines rotating
about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The whole set can be moved together by dragging
any of the lines. The ratio X1/Z1 of the first line is annotated. Each of the
following lines is a multiple of this first ratio.

Harmonic Order cursor in Colormap Display
This exact values will of course depend on the values that are being displayed
Waterfall
For a Waterfall Display, a harmonic order cursor is a set of radial planes
rotating about the point X = 0, Z = 0. The whole set can be moved together by
dragging any of the planes. The ratio X/Z of the first plane is annotated. Each of
the following planes is a multiple of this first ratio.
This cursor can be used for examining orders when the Z axis is displaying rpm
values.
Section 4.2.9.5 Harmonic Cross

This item schedules a series of crossed vertical and horizontal cursor lines at
fixed intervals. The X and Z intervals can be adjusted independently by
dragging any of the cross points in the required direction. The separating
distance corresponds to the distance between the lowest value and zero and
these values are annotated.
FrontBack
right (back) axis. These entries schedule a series of horizontal lines, each of
which is separated by a constant distance. The separating distance corresponds
to the distance between the zero value and first line, which is annotated.
Dragging a cursor line across the zero line moves all the harmonic lines to the
any one of the lines up or down.
UpperLower
What you obtain from this menu depends on where you are bringing up the
16A 135
Display popup menu. The upper window relates to the top display, and the
lower window relates to the bottom display. These schedule a series of crossed
vertical and horizontal cursor lines at fixed intervals. The X and Y intervals can
be adjusted independently. The separating distance corresponds to the distance
between the zero value and first line. Dragging the first horizontal line across
the zero-line moves all the horizontal lines to the opposite side. The distance
between all the lines can be adjusted by dragging any one of the crossing points
in any direction.
Section 4.2.10 The Automatic (cursor) menus
Section 4.2.10.1 Add Automatic Cursor

This allows you to add an automatic peak cursor or an automatic valley cursor.
They cannot be moved. They indicate the peak or valley of the selected curve
within the range of the display. Throughput data is not supported.
The ‘Automatic Peak/Valley parameters’ can be accessed by clicking on the

popup menu of the cursor.
Section 4.2.10.1.1 Source data

This parameter indicates which curve will be used for the peak or valley
calculations. The possible values are: First curve, All curves or Selected curve.
Section 4.2.10.1.2 Maximum number of extrema

This parameter indicates the maximum number of valleys/peaks that is shown.
Extra valleys/peaks are not indicated.
Section 4.2.10.1.3 Amplitude threshold

This parameter determines the band in which the obtained peaks and valleys can
be considered as real peaks or real valleys. The threshold is expressed in dB
below the highest value in the curve for peaks and in dB above the lowest value
in the curve for valleys.
For example: Take an averaged time block with a peak value of 1 g. Choose the
threshold at 6 dB. In this case, the local maxima which have a value less than
1g/(10^(6/20)) = 0.501g will be ignored, its amplitude being too low to be
considered as a real resonance peak.
Section 4.2.10.1.4 Gate

This parameter determines how much amplitude variation there should be after
a change in direction of the signal in order for the change to be considered as a
peak or valley. The gate is expressed in % of the dB range.

Note: They can only be used on 2D displays, not on a waterfall or colormap.
Section 4.2.11 The Processing (cursor) menus
Section 4.2.11.1 Add Processing Cursor

All different kinds of processing cursors are available on waterfalls and
colormaps. You can insert a Z-, Order-, Frequency and Cross-cursor in a
display. The corresponding processed block can be dragged and dropped into
another display. While moving the processing cursor the view is instantaneously
updated.
An X-processing cursor is also available in a Front/Back display. The start

There is also the ability to adjust the processing parameters. For example, the
width unit of an order section can be determined by order, percentage,
frequency or number of lines.
The processing cursors can also be used in semi-embedded active pictures.
Section 4.2.11.2 Processing X

Front/Back
A Processing X-cursor is only available in a Front/Back display. The start
Section 4.2.11.3 Processing Z

Colormap
In a Colormap display, this item schedules a single horizontal line in the display
area. A Cursor Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according
Frequency Spectrum into one or several displays. Moving the cursor with the
mouse or the arrow keys will ensure that the according view is updated
instantaneously. The Cursor Processing dialog can always be accessed by
16A 137
clicking on [processing…] in the popup menu of the cursor.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall display, this item schedules a XY-plane in the display area. A
Cursor Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according
Frequency Spectrum into one or several displays. Moving the cursor with the
mouse or the arrow keys will ensure that the according view is updated
instantaneously. The Cursor Processing dialog can always be accessed by
clicking on [processing…] in the popup menu of the cursor.
Section 4.2.11.4 Processing Order

Colormap
In a Colormap display, a Processing Order cursor is a radial line rotating about
the point X = 0, Z = 0 when the X-axis is a frequency axis. (If the X-axis is set
to order the cursor will schedule a vertical line) .
The ‘order’ value displayed is the ratio of the X (frequency value) and the Z
(frequency value) :
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (frequency value)
Or for Z-axis values in rpm:
X (frequency value) = Order * Z (rpm) / 60
The Cursor Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according
Order into one or several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the
arrow keys will ensure that the according view is updated instantaneously.
The Cursor Processing dialog can always be accessed by clicking on

[processing…] in the popup menu of the cursor. Even the parameters which
determine the width of the order can be modified by right clicking on the block
in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit can be specified in order, %,
frequency and number of lines.
You can give the order cursor an offset on the X-axis. The radial line is then
rotating about the point X = offset, Z = 0. In this case the Cursor Processing
dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according ‘off-zero order section’
into one or several displays. You can also drag and drop the ‘mirrored off-zero
order section’.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall Display, a Processing Order cursor is a radial plane rotating about
the point X = 0, Z = 0 when the X-axis is a frequency axis. (If the X-axis is set
to order the cursor will schedule a YZ-plane) The value displayed is the ratio of
the X (frequency value) and the Z rpm *60 (frequency value). The Cursor
Processing dialog will allow you to drag and drop the according Order into one
or several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the arrow keys will
ensure that the according view is updated instantaneously.


determine the width of the order can be modified by right clicking on the block
in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit can be specified in order, %,
frequency and number of lines.
Section 4.2.11.5 Processing Frequency

Colormap
In a Colormap display, a Processing Frequency cursor will schedule a line that
indicates the center of a Frequency or Octave section. The value displayed is the
center frequency value of the section. The Cursor Processing dialog will allow
you to drag and drop the according Frequency or Octave Section into one or
several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the arrow keys will

determine the width of the section can be modified by right clicking on the
block in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit of a Frequency section
can be specified in frequency, % and number of lines. For an Octave section
you can specify the band type.
Waterfall
In a Waterfall display, a Processing Frequency cursor will schedule a plane that
indicates the center of a Frequency or Octave section. The value displayed is the
center frequency value of the section. The Cursor Processing dialog will allow
you to drag and drop the according Frequency or Octave Section into one or
several displays. Moving the cursor with the mouse or the arrow keys will

block in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit of a Frequency section
can be specified in frequency, % and number of lines. For an Octave section
you can specify the band type.
Section 4.2.11.6 Processing Cross

Colormap
In a Colormap display, a Processing Cross cursor will schedule a cross-cursor
indicating the values of the X and Z-axis. The Cursor Processing dialog will
allow you to drag and drop the according Frequency Section, Frequency
Spectrum, Octave Section and Order Section into one or several displays.
Changing the position of the vertical line of the cross-cursor will update the
Frequency and Octave. The position of the horizontal line of the cross-cursor
will determine which Frequency Spectrum can be shown. And the value of the
Order Section is the ratio of the X and Z values of the cross-cursor.
16A 139

block in the Cursor Processing dialog. The width unit of a Frequency Section
can be specified in frequency, % and number of lines. In an Order Section you
can define the width unit in order, %, frequency and number of lines. For an
Octave section you can specify the bandtype.
Section 4.2.12 The Coupled (cursor) menus
The coupled cursor menu lists all visible units in a display on which coupled
cursors can be created. On all compatible quantity axes, for all displays within a
picture, a coupled cursor will be created. In case of a time coupled cursor there
are three possibilities of adding a coupled cursor, depending on the visible unit
in the display, i.e. on y-m-d h:m:s (Absolute), on s (Throughput) and on s. If a
conversion is possible between the time axes and even to the rpm axis, an entity
of the coupled cursor will also be added on these axes with the conversion
applied. Visually a converted cursor is indicated by a circle cursor handle. A
filled circle means the conversion is possible in both directions and the cursor is
movable. An empty circle means the conversion is possible in one direction and
the cursor in not movable. Below table summarizes the expected behavior. The
Default coupled cursor color is 'grey'. Coupled cursor layout settings are shared,
e.g. setting a certain color for a specific coupled cursor; all related coupled
cursors get the same color.
Adding a cursor y-m-d s (Throughput) s rpm

on:
h:m:s(Absolute)
Places a cursor on:
y-m-d
h:m:s(Absolute)
s(Throughput)
rpm
An example to illustrate:
Adding cursor on y-m-d h:m:s (Absolute) gives a movable cursor on s

(Throughput) and s and an un-movable cursor on rpm.

Section 4.3 Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays
Shortcut Action
Key For which
display
Mouse
Drag horizontally zoom in x-direction all function

displays
Drag vertically zoom in Y-direction all function

displays
Drag diagonally zoom in XY-direction all function

displays
Shift-drag horizontally pan in x-direction all function

displays
Shift-drag vertically pan in Y-direction all function

displays
Shift-drag on overview pan over x-axis upper/lowe

r -
overview
Shift-click on overview pan over x-axis - shifts 1 upper/lowe

range forward or backward r -
overview
Shift-scrollwheel on axis scroll over axis all function

displays
Ctrl-scrollwheel on axis zoom in/out on axis all function

displays
Ctrl-drag on axis move axis position all function

displays
Ctrl-drag on splitter move splitter Bode +

between upper and lower Upper/Low
of a BODE er with 2
views
Ctrl-double click on Y-axis expand axis upper/lowe

r (with
more than
2 views)
16A 141
Right-click on axis/curve/cursor/legend/de all function

axis/curve/cursor/legend/e fault popup menu displays
mpty space
Scrollwheel Panning up/down Table
Shift-scrollwheel Panning left/right Table
Ctrl-scrollwheel Zooming (font sizing) Table
Ctrl-right click (anywhere) default popup menu of the all function

display displays
Double click on axis "set fixed limits" menu all function

comes up displays
Double click on curve "adjust curve properties" all function

menu comes up displays
Double click on cursor "move to position" menu all function

comes up displays
Keyboar
d
Backspace UNDO last axis setting (up all

to 20) functions
display
Cursor keys (no curves move selected cursor all

selected) (normal interval) functions
display
Shift-cursor keys (no move selected cursor (small all

curves selected) interval) functions
display
Cursor keys (with one or move selected cursor to all

more curves selected) next/previous sample functions
display
Ctrl-cursor keys (with one move selected cursor to X axes

or more curves selected) next/previous local only
maximum
Shift-O keys (with the Switch between Upper/Low

display selected) Overlaid/Stacked mode er +
Multi-trace
display

Section 4.4 Geometry display windows
Geometry windows are used to display the geometric representation of a

structure and the modes that operate on that structure. The display window can
be used to manipulate the undeformed and the deformed model of the structure.
Section 4.4.1 [Procedure] To use the displays
Step 1
Open a Geometry display by clicking on one of the three icons that refers to the
Geometry display that you wish to open or by using a Geometry display from
the Select a layout dropdown menu.
Step 2
Load the undeformed model into the display, by dropping a geometry into it
from the browser window.
Note: components can be dropped in the geometry display.
Step 3
Load your modes into the chosen display by either, dragging the modes from
the browse tree and dropping them into the window, or by doing a copy/paste
operation.
Step 4
The animation is achieved using a number of frames in which the deformation
steps through a cycle of values defined by a cosine function. The geometry
model and the modes can be manipulated through a set of three icons and a
popup menu in the display.
16A 143
Geometry
The following types of Geometry (or 3D) displays are available:
Single Geometry display for the visualization of the nodes, lines and surfaces of
a geometry model, and the animation of one or two mode shapes.
The Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
To use a single mode shape, just drag and drop it from the detail panel on the
left-hand side to the geometry on the right-hand side. The animation will then
automatically start and the mode shape will be visible. Click the right mouse
button to change the settings of the animation and to start or stop it. In the lower
left or the lower right corner of the display window, you can see what mode
shape is active.
It is also possible to use a second mode shape on the same time on top of the
already existing first mode shape. To do this, just drag the second mode shape
on the geometry on which the first mode shape is active. However it is
important that you drop the second mode shape on the outer-right side of the
geometry display. When you move the mode shape over the display while
holding the mouse button pressed, the text ‘main’ or ‘overlaid’ will appear on
under the mouse arrow. When the text ‘overlaid’ appears, you are in the right
area of your display. Here you can drop the second mode shape.

You will notice that the ‘main’ area is much larger than the ‘overlaid’ area. This
is because most user only wish to see one mode shape at a time and drop the
mode shape in the middle of the display. If the first mode shape is already active
on the ‘overlaid’ area (on the right side), just drag and drop the second mode
shape on the ‘main’ area (on the left side) to see the two mode shapes at the
same time.
If you wish to see only one mode shape when two different mode shapes are
active, you can drop the mode on each side of the display. On the lower left and
the lower right corner you can see what mode shape is active on what side.
To see another mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape and drop it
on the area (overlaid or main), the mode that was already active, will then be
overwritten by the new one.
UL Geometry
The UL Geometry or Upper Lower 3D Display has two Geometry displays, one
above the other, and both displays have their own action buttons. Therefore, the
phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can be different, and
this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Upper Lower Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
In order to visualize a mode shape, select the ModeSet of the current geometry
16A 145
in the navigator panel and drag and drop the mode shape you want to see in the
upper or lower half of the display window. You can visualize a maximum of 2
mode shapes simultaneously, one in the upper half of the display window and
one in the lower half.
To change the mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape onto the
existing mode shape to replace it.
Options for the mode shapes are available by clicking the right mouse button.
LR Geometry
The LR Geometry or Left Right 3D Display window has two geometry displays
alongside each other, and both displays have their own action buttons.
Therefore, the phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can
be different, and this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Left Right Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
In order to visualize a mode shape, select the ModeSet of the current geometry
in the navigator panel and drag and drop the mode shape you want to see in the
left or right half of the display window. You can visualize a maximum of 2
mode shapes simultaneously, one in the left half of the display window and one
in the right half.

To change the mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape onto the
existing mode shape to replace it.
Options for the mode shapes are available by clicking the right mouse button.
Quad Geometry
This is a geometry display that shows four views at once. One of them has
exactly the same features as the single geometry display. The three other views
have a fixed orientation and translation, meaning the point of view cannot be
changed and the model cannot be moved.
To switch the projection of the views from European to American, select “Quad
Projection American” in the Tools Options Displays dialog.
The Quad Geometry (3 Display) icon represents it.
To use a single mode shape, just drag and drop it from the detail panel on the
left-hand side to the geometry on the right-hand side. The animation will then
automatically start and the mode shape will be visible. Click the right mouse
button to change the settings of the animation and to start or stop it. In the lower
left or the lower right corner of the display window, you can see what mode
shape is active.
16A 147
It is also possible to use a second mode shape on the same time on top of the
already existing first mode shape. To do this, just drag the second mode shape
on the geometry on which the first mode shape is active. However it is
important that you drop the second mode shape on the outer-right side of the
geometry display. When you move the mode shape over the display while
holding the mouse button pressed, the text ‘main’ or ‘overlaid’ will appear on
under the mouse arrow. When the text ‘overlaid’ appears, you are in the right
area of your display. Here you can drop the second mode shape.
You will notice that the ‘main’ area is much larger than the ‘overlaid’ area. This
is because most user only wish to see one mode shape at a time and drop the
mode shape in the middle of the display. If the first mode shape is already active
on the ‘overlaid’ area (on the right side), just drag and drop the second mode
shape on the ‘main’ area (on the left side) to see the two mode shapes at the
same time.
If you wish to see only one mode shape when two different mode shapes are
active, you can drop the mode on each side of the display. On the lower left and
the lower right corner you can see what mode shape is active on what side.
To see another mode shape, just drag and drop the new mode shape and drop it
on the area (overlaid or main), the mode that was already active, will then be
overwritten by the new one.
Acoustic Geometry

This is a geometry display which is used to show acoustic data: sound intensity,
sound pressure, and sound power data:
 Sound intensity data: interpolated color display in dB format and arrows
 Sound pressure and sound power data: interpolated color display in dB
format.
The color scale in dB is shown at the right side of the display.
Rotating Pointers Geometry
This geometry display is used to animate torsional vibrations. Rotating pointers

represent the rotational motion in torsional nodes in which discs have been
added.
Section 4.4.2 The Geometry display functions
The geometry model and the modes can be manipulated using the manipulation
icons, your mouse and a popup menu in the display.
16A 149
Section 4.4.2.1 The Geometry model manipulation icons
Section 4.4.2.1.1 Move
This icon allows you to interactively move the model in the X and Y
dimensions of the screen. Press on the icon and drag the mouse to move the
model to the required position.
You can restore the model to its original position by selecting Views Default
view from the popup display menu available when you right click anywhere in
the display.
Section 4.4.2.1.2 Zoom in / zoom out
This icon allows you to interactively increase or decrease the size of the model
in the window. Press on the icon and drag the mouse to zoom in or zoom out as
required.
You can restore the model to its original size by selecting Views Default
view from the popup display menu. You can also size the model to fit neatly in
the window by selecting Fit model from the popup display menu.
Note: You can also zoom in and zoom out by turning the mouse wheel.
Section 4.4.2.1.3 Rotate model

You can interactively rotate the model on display. The way to do this is by
pressing down the left mouse button in the geometry display, and moving the
mouse. You can then rotate the model to the preferred view whilst keeping the
mouse button depressed. To restore the model to its original rotation, select
Views Default View from the popup display menu available when you right
click anywhere in the display.
Note: You can also use the mouse wheel to rotate the model. To rotate the
model about the horizontal axis of the screen, hold down Shift while turning
the mouse wheel. To rotate the model about the vertical axis of the screen,
hold down Ctrl while turning the mouse wheel. To rotate the model in the
plane of the screen, hold down Shift and Ctrl while turning the mouse
wheel.

Section 4.4.2.2 The Geometry display menu
Section 4.4.2.2.1 Deformed Model

This is the model on which deformations can be performed.
4.4.2.2.1.1 Nodes
Marker
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes of the model.
Names
This toggles the display of names on the nodes of the model.
Euler Angles
This toggles the display of axis triads depicting the orientation of the Euler
angles of the node of the model.
4.4.2.2.1.2 Lines
This toggles the display of line elements.
4.4.2.2.1.3 Surfaces
This toggles the display of surface elements.
4.4.2.2.1.4 Solids
This toggles the display of solid elements.
4.4.2.2.1.5 Edges
This toggles the display of the edges of the model. This amounts to a wire frame
representation, e.g. a triangle has three edges while a line has one.
4.4.2.2.1.6 Faces
This toggles the display of the faces of the model, e.g. a cube has six faces
while a triangle has one.
4.4.2.2.1.7 Show All
This switches on the visibility of all the items.
4.4.2.2.1.8 Show None
This switches off the visibility of all the items.
Section 4.4.2.2.2 Selection

Selectable elements of the deformed model will be highlighted when the mouse
passes over them. Clicking on these selectable elements will select them. You
can also select more than one element at the same time by left clicking on them
while pressing the Shift key or dragging the mouse over the model with the
middle mouse button depressed.
4.4.2.2.2.1 Select All
Selects all the displayed elements.
16A 151
4.4.2.2.2.2 Clear Selection

Clears the selected elements.
4.4.2.2.2.3 Select Deform Maximum
This option is available only when a mode (with mode shapes) is used in the
geometry.
X
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum X direction
deformation.
Y
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum Y direction
deformation.
Z
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum Z direction
deformation.
Length
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes with the maximum vector
length deformation.
4.4.2.2.2.4 Node
Names
This toggles the display of names on the selected nodes of the model.
Euler Angles
angles of the selected node.
Section 4.4.2.2.3 Undeformed Model

The undeformed model serves as a reference only. No actions like deformation
or selection are possible on it. The deformed model must not be in the display.
Select Show None from the Deformed Model menu entry to remove the
deformed model from the display.
4.4.2.2.3.1 Nodes
Marker
This toggles the display of markers on the nodes of the model.
Names
This toggles the display of names on the nodes of the model.
Euler Angles

angles of the node of the model.

4.4.2.2.3.2 Lines
This toggles the display of line elements.
4.4.2.2.3.3 Surfaces
This toggles the display of surface elements.
4.4.2.2.3.4 Solids
This toggles the display of solid elements.
4.4.2.2.3.5 Edges
This toggles the display of the edges of the model. This amounts to a wire frame
representation, e.g. a triangle has three edges while a line has one.
4.4.2.2.3.6 Faces
This toggles the display of the faces of the model, e.g. a cube has six faces
while a triangle has one.
4.4.2.2.3.7 Show All
This switches on the visibility of all the items.
4.4.2.2.3.8 Show None
This switches off the visibility of all the items.
Section 4.4.2.2.4 Model scale

This entry allows you to select relative or absolute model scale. When you have
several geometry and you want to compare them by using the same geometry
display, then you can use these options.
4.4.2.2.4.1 Relative
When this option is “on”, if you drop a geometry into a geometry display, the
model will be resized to fit the geometry display, so that you can see the
complete geometry.
4.4.2.2.4.2 Absolute
When this option is “on”, if you drop a geometry in the geometry display, the
model scale is not modified. This is useful when you want to compare 2
geometries.
Section 4.4.2.2.5 Show Model Scale

This shows the geometry model scale in the geometry display.
Section 4.4.2.2.6 Animation

This option switches the animation of a vector on or off. The deformed model is
frozen in the current position.
16A 153
Section 4.4.2.2.7 Animation settings

4.4.2.2.7.1 Delay (ms)
The entries in this sub menu set the time in milliseconds between the displays of
consecutive frames. The total time to complete the animation cycle is the
{delay} x {the number of frames per cycle}. The delay is a minimum rather
than a maximum time.
4.4.2.2.7.2 Frames per cycle
The entries in this sub menu set the number of frames that are used during the
animation cycle. The more frames used, the smoother the animation appears.
The frames that appear are defined by an even distribution of the selected
number from the complete animation cycle, though this depends on the
deformation format that you are using too. The figure below illustrates the
effect of using four frames in the animation cycle.
Frames per animation cycle
4.4.2.2.7.3 Expand
These options allow you to choose whether the mode shapes will be expanded
and how they are expanded.
Note: These expand options are not available if there is no mode used in the
geometry display.
None
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will not be expanded.
Slave DOFs
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will be completed with the
animation of the slave DOFs.
Note: when a component is dropped in the geometry display, in stead of a full

geometry, the slave DOF information will not be used.
Protect Measured
When the “Slave DOFs” option is “on”, the “Protect Measured” option will be
available. If you have defined some slave DOFs which are also measured DOFs,

you can either choose to use the result of slave DOFs (“Protect Measured”
option “off”) or the measured data (“Protect Measured” option “on”) for
animation.
Automatic Geometrical
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will be expanded in a automatic
way. In this case an algorithm is used to automatically search for master nodes
which is bases on the Cartesian distance.
Automatic topological
When this option is “On”, the mode shapes will be expanded in a automatic
way. In this case an algorithm is used to automatically search for master nodes
which is based on the topological distance.
Smoothing
In case of automatic expansion, smoothing of the animation is applied. The
level of smoothing can be low, medium, or high.
Section 4.4.2.2.8 Animation Control
This dialog enables you to stop, start and adjust the animation of the results.
The animation is based on a cosine function varying from + max to - max

deformation. When the format of the displayed vector is Amplitude/Phase, then
the displacement for each point (Dp) for a complex value (Vp) = Rp + iIp is
given by and is illustrated below.
Displacement for each point
The Play button starts the continuous and repetitive animation of the results.
The Stop button halts the continuous animation.
The From Backward and the From Forward buttons are only sensitive when
the continuous animation is “off”. They allow you to step to the next or
16A 155
previous frame in the cycle. This will be indicated in the “Phase” field. The
increment depends on the number of “Frames per cycle”.
Section 4.4.2.2.9 Remove animation

Main/Overlaid
When the geometry display is selected, the main or overlaid animation can be
removed.
Upper/Lower
When the upper lower geometry display is selected, the upper or lower
animation can be removed.
Left/Right
When the left/right geometry display is selected, the right or the left animation
can be removed.
Section 4.4.2.2.10 Deformation

Enable Deformation
This option switches on or off the deformation animation.
Direction type
In case of vectors with mixed direction types, the user can choose which
direction type is animated as deformation: translational, rotational, or scalar. In
case of automatic, the translational direction type is taken if available (if not,
any other direction type is taken which is available).
4.4.2.2.10.1 Edit deformation Scale...
This entry allows you to adjust the scale of the deformation displayed. A dialog
appears in which you can choose to use a relative or an absolute deformation
scale.
When you choose a relative deformation scale, you can drag a slider to increase
or decrease the scaling factor applied to the current mode shape. The
deformation scale is always relative to the model and the current mode.
When you choose an absolute deformation scale, you have 2 options:

 Per m model: this is still actually a 'relative' scale. The scale is kept fixed
relative to the model. If you zoom in on the model or resize the workbook,
this value is kept the same. The deformation will always stay the same
relative to the model.
 Per cm screen: this is an absolute value compared to the screen. The value
you supply here (X), means that a deformation of 1 cm on your screen
corresponds to amplitude of X in the mode shape. The deformation scale
you can display on the screen is related to this. A distance is shown on the
screen and the corresponding amplitude of the mode shape.
Note: The relation between the distance shown on the screen and amplitude
of the mode shape is correct, but the relation between the deformation scale
shown in the display and the absolute value you enter per cm screen, is not
exact. It is impossible to make this absolute exact.
Link
If you use Left/Right or Upper/Lower geometry, this option will be available.
Use the “Absolute” deformation scale, check the “Link” check box, the
deformation scale of the Left or Upper will be the same as the one of the Right
or Lower. When you change the deformation scale for the Left or Upper, the
one of the Right or Lower will be adapted automatically.
4.4.2.2.10.2 Show Deformation Scale
This shows the deformation scale in the geometry display.
4.4.2.2.10.3 Deformation Format
This sub menu determines the format in which the animated vectors are
displayed.
When a modeshape is animated in a geometry window, it is first scaled to unity

modal A. After scaling to unity modal A, a physical complex mode has a
rotation of around 45 degrees towards the imaginary axis. (A pure normal mode
has a rotation of exact 45 degrees after unity modal A scaling.) For this reason
the modeshape gets an extra rotation of 45 degrees after this scaling.
As a result, the main vector components of the modeshape will be shown as the
imaginary part.
The real part will show the rest vector.
Real
The movement of a particular node is proportional to the real part of the
corresponding vector element. Nodes for which the corresponding vector
elements have real parts with identical signs move in phase, whereas other
nodes move 180° out of phase.
Imag (Imaginary)
The movement of a particular node is proportional to the imaginary part of the
corresponding vector element. Nodes for which the corresponding vector
elements have imaginary parts with identical signs move in phase, whereas
16A 157
other nodes move 180° out of phase.
Amplitude/Phase
The movement at a particular node is proportional to the amplitude of the
corresponding vector element. The phase relationship between the movements
of different nodes is determined by the phase difference of the corresponding
vector elements.
Amplitude
This is the same as Amplitude/Phase but the nodes move in phase if the absolute
value of the phase difference between the corresponding vector elements is less
than 90°, otherwise they move 180° out of phase.
Absolute
Same as Amplitude but only the first half of the animation cycle is used. This
does not mean, however, that all points move in phase.
4.4.2.2.10.4 Deformation Scalar Transform
If you drop a scalar rather than a vector quantity into the display, then it will be
converted to a vector, in the direction selected from this menu and with its
scalar value as the length. Each of the directions is shown in the top right corner
of the display.
4.4.2.2.10.5 Deformation Directions
This entry allows you to choose in which direction the deformation will be
animated. You can either choose one of these directions (X, Y or Z) or one of
their combinations.
X
The deformation will only be in the X direction. If you have a mode shape of Y
and Z direction, you will see that the deformation is 0.
Y
The deformation will only be in the Y direction. If you have a mode shape of X
Z
The deformation will only be Z direction. If you have a mode shape of X and Y
direction, you will see that the deformation is 0.
Section 4.4.2.2.11 Coloring

4.4.2.2.11.1 Enable Coloring
This option switches on or off the color animation.
4.4.2.2.11.2 Direction type
direction type is animated as color: translational, rotational, or scalar. In case of
automatic, the scalar direction type is taken if available (if not, any other

direction type is taken which is available).

4.4.2.2.11.3 Edit Color Scale...
This entry allows you to adjust the color scale of the color displayed. It
schedules a dialog where you can select the spectrum type (Temperature,
Magenta, Gray Scale, Hue, Hue Scale, Abaqus, Ansys, Patran and Rainbow)
and the number of colors.
Note: For some spectra, the number of colors cannot be modified.
4.4.2.2.11.4 Show Color Scale

This shows the color map of the defined color scale in the geometry display.
4.4.2.2.11.5 Color Format
The entry in this menu determines the format in which the results are displayed.
Remember that a vector quantity must first be transformed to a scalar using the
Vector transform option. A result can be animated through a cycle by
multiplying it with a cosine function.
Real
The real part of the result is displayed as a color value.
Imaginary
The imaginary part of the result is displayed as a color value.
Ampl/Phase
The color animation is often used to visualize acoustic data, like sound
intensities. The format type “Amplitude/Phase” of the color drop area in the
geometry display is used to show the data with phase information. In case of
sound intensities all vectors are in phase, except for the sign (+/- 180 degrees).
So, for showing sound intensities with sign information, the “Amplitude/Phase”
format of the color animation is to be used (together with the “Arrow” type).
Amplitude
The color at a particular node is proportional to the amplitude of the
corresponding result.
Absolute
Same as Amplitude but all values are shown as positive.
Phase
The color at a particular node is proportional to the phase of the corresponding
result.
Amplitude/dB Real/dB Imag/dB

The particular aspect of the result is displayed on a dB scale. Animation is not
possible.
16A 159
4.4.2.2.11.6 Color Interpolation

This option is used to interpret the visual color animation with either the
“Banded” or the “Smooth” option.
Banded
Colors are interpolated in the discrete domain of the color map, every color
shown will be in the color map and the result is that you see discrete bands of
colors.
Smooth
Colors are smoothly interpolated in the RGB domain.
Isolines
Colors are interpolated in the discrete domain of the color map as is the case
with the Banded option. However, not the color bands themselves are shown
but the color lines at the borders of these bands.
4.4.2.2.11.7 Color Vector Transform
This option is used to transform a vector into a scalar value. It will either have
the value “length” derived from the components in the three directions [ (x2 +
y2 + z2)] or just the value of a single component.
Section 4.4.2.2.12 Arrows

4.4.2.2.12.1 Enable Arrows
This option switches on or off the arrow animation.
direction type is animated as arrow: translational, rotational, or scalar. In case of
automatic, the translational direction type is taken if available (if not, any other
direction type is taken which is available).
4.4.2.2.12.3 Edit Arrows Scale...
This entry allows you to adjust the scale of the arrows displayed. A dialog
appears in which you can choose to use a relative or an absolute deformation
scale.
or decrease the scaling factor applied to the current mode shape. The
deformation scale is always relative to the model and the current mode.
When you choose an absolute deformation scale, you have 2 options:

 Per m model: this is still actually a 'relative' scale. The scale is kept fixed
relative to the model. If you zoom in on the model or resize the workbook,
this value is kept the same. The deformation will always stay the same
relative to the model.
 Per cm screen: this is an absolute value compared to the screen. The value
you supply here (X) means that a deformation of 1 cm on your screen

corresponds to amplitude of X in the mode shape. The deformation scale

you can display on the screen is related to this. A distance is shown on the
screen and the corresponding amplitude of the mode shape.
Note: The relation between the distance shown on the screen and amplitude of
the mode shape is correct, but the relation between the arrow scale shown in
the display and the absolute value you enter per cm screen is not exact. It is
impossible to make this absolute exact.
4.4.2.2.12.3.1 Link
Use the “Absolute” arrow scale, check the “Link” check box, the arrow scale of
the Left or Upper will be the same as the one of the Right or Lower. When you
change the deformation scale for the Left or Upper, the one of the Right or
Lower will be adapted automatically.
4.4.2.2.12.4 Limits
The arrow limits can be set in free or fixed mode. In case of fixed mode, the
user has to specify the lower and upper limits.
4.4.2.2.12.5 Show Arrows Scale
This shows the arrows scale in the geometry display.
4.4.2.2.12.6 Arrows Format
A result can be animated through a cycle by multiplying it with a cosine
function.
Real
The real part of the result is displayed as an arrow with a certain size and
direction.
Imaginary
The imaginary part of the result is displayed as a arrow with a certain size and
direction.
Amplitude/Phase
The arrows animation is often used to visualize acoustic data, like sound
intensities. The format type “Amplitude/Phase” of the arrows drop area in the
geometry display is used to show the data with phase information. In case of
sound intensities all vectors are in phase, except for the sign (+/- 180 degrees).
So, for showing sound intensities with sign information, the “Amplitude/Phase”
format of the arrows animation is to be used (together with the “Arrow” type).
Amplitude
The color at a particular node is proportional to the amplitude of the
corresponding result.
16A 161
Absolute
Phase
The color at a particular node is proportional to the phase of the corresponding
result.
Amplitude/dB Real/dB Imag/dB

The particular aspect of the result is displayed on a dB scale. Animation is not
possible.
4.4.2.2.12.7 Arrows Scalar Transform
If you drop a scalar rather than a vector quantity into the display, then it will be
converted to a vector, in the direction selected from this menu and with its
scalar value as the length. Each of the directions is shown in the top right corner
of the display.
4.4.2.2.12.8 Arrows Directions
This entry allows you to choose in which direction the deformation will be
animated. You can either choose one of these directions (X, Y or Z) or one of
their combinations.
X
The deformation will only be in the X direction. If you have a mode shape of Y
Y
The deformation will only be in the Y direction. If you have a mode shape of X
Z
The deformation will only be Z direction. If you have a mode shape of X and Y
direction, you will see that the deformation is 0.
4.4.2.2.12.9 Arrows Decompose
Instead of displaying the resulting vector as arrow, the user can decide to
display the X, Y, and Z component as 3 separate arrows.
Section 4.4.2.2.13 Nodal Lines

4.4.2.2.13.1 Enable Nodal Lines
This option switches on or off the nodal lines.
direction type is displayed as nodal lines: translational, rotational, or scalar. In
case of automatic, the translational direction type is taken if available (if not,
any other direction type is taken which is available).

4.4.2.2.13.3 Nodal Lines Properties

This entry allows you to adjust the Nodal Line Properties of the deformed main
model and the overlaid model, if available.
Adjustable options are the Line Color, Line Style and Line Thickness.
Press the default button to reset al values to their original ones.

4.4.2.2.13.4 Nodal Lines Format
The entry in this menu determines the format in which the nodal lines are
displayed: Real, Imaginary, Amplitude/Phase, or Amplitude (default).
4.4.2.2.13.5 Nodal Lines Directions
This entry allows you to choose for which direction the nodal lines will be
displayed. You must choose one of these directions (X, Y, or Z).
Section 4.4.2.2.14 Rotating Pointers

The torsional animation will use rotating pointers in the corresponding nodes.
The rotating angles of these pointers correspond with the rotational shape values
in the displayed RX, RY, or RZ direction. A general display option decides
which rotational directions to show: default all rotational directions are shown.
Of course, scaling is supported because typical torsional vibrations are very low
level. The default scale could be +-60 degrees (a range of 120 degrees) for the
node with the maximum rotation.
The length of the rotating pointers will be determined by the radii of the discs in
the related points.
4.4.2.2.14.1 Zero line marker and positive direction
A line marker is drawn in each corresponding node, to show the “zero degree”
position. The zero degree position itself corresponds with one of the local
directions X, Y, or Z, related to the disc orientation (rotation axis). Also the
positive rotation direction depends on this orientation. This leads to:
Disc orientation Zero line Positive rotation
+Z Y X->Y
+X Z Y->Z
+Y X Z->X
4.4.2.2.14.2 Range marker

A range marker around the zero marker is used the show the full range of
motion when the animation is going on, but especially when it is frozen or
inserted into a report.
16A 163
4.4.2.2.14.3 Disc translations

When the data contains also translational mode shapes values, the discs
themselves will be animated according to these translations.
4.4.2.2.14.4 Color animation of the disc
In nodes in which a disc is defined, the disc takes over the color of the node
marker. In this way the amplitude of the torsional vector could be displayed as
color (of the disc).
4.4.2.2.14.5 Enable Rotating Pointers
This option switches on or off the rotating pointers.
direction type is animated as rotating pointers: translational, rotational, or
scalar. In case of automatic, the rotational direction type is taken if available (if
not, any other direction type is taken which is available).
4.4.2.2.14.7 Edit Rotating Pointers Scale…
This entry allows you to adjust the angle scale of the rotating pointers which are
animated. A dialog appears in which you can choose to use a relative or an
absolute angle scale.
or decrease the scaling factor applied to the current mode shape. By default 60°
is used for the maximum rotation.
When you choose an absolute deformation scale, you can specify the value of
the scale factor per degree model.
4.4.2.2.14.8 Link
Use the “Absolute” scale, check the “Link” check box, the scale of the Left or
Upper will be the same as the one of the Right or Lower. When you change the
rotating scale for the Left or Upper, the one of the Right or Lower will be
adapted automatically.
4.4.2.2.14.9 Show Rotating Pointers Scale
If wanted, the scale legend for the torsional animation is shown in the geometry
display. This is a disc with the range marker of +- 60 degrees around the line
marker of the zero rotation and the annotation of the values of the real rotations.
4.4.2.2.14.10 Rotating Pointers Format
A result can be animated through a cycle by multiplying it with a cosine
function.
4.4.2.2.14.11 Real
The real part of the result is displayed as a rotating pointer.
4.4.2.2.14.12 Imaginary
The imaginary part of the result is displayed as a rotating pointer.

4.4.2.2.14.13 Amplitude/Phase
The format type “Amplitude/Phase” is used to show the data with phase
information.
4.4.2.2.14.14 Amplitude
The angle of the rotating pointer at a particular node is proportional to the
amplitude of the corresponding result.
4.4.2.2.14.15 Absolute
4.4.2.2.14.16 Rotating Pointers Directions
This option decides which rotational directions to show: default all rotational
directions are shown.
4.4.2.2.14.17 Screen projection
In case of this option, all discs are projected in the plane of the screen. The zero
line corresponds with the Y axis of the screen and the positive rotation
corresponds with: X screen axis -> Y screen axis.
Section 4.4.2.2.15 Fit Model

This resizes the model, so that it fits comfortably into the display window. This
operation has no effect on the particular view of the model or the deformation.
Section 4.4.2.2.16 Views

Model
When the view is saved in the Geometry application, this will be used as the
Model view. Otherwise, the isometric view will be used.
Note: When the model view is saved in the Geometry application, this will be
used as the default view in the Navigator sheet and in all built-in geometry
displays.
Isometric
This shows the isometric view of the model as shown in the figure below.
16A 165
Model with three axes
The other options in this menu allow you to view the model along one of the
major axes, see figure above.
XY
This shows the top view of the model, looking at it from the positive Z
direction, with the positive Y axis horizontal and the positive X axis vertical.
XY view of the model
YX
The YX view shows the bottom view of the model.
YZ
This shows the end view of the model, looking at it from the positive X
direction, with the positive Y axis horizontal and the positive Z axis vertical.
YZ view of the model

ZY
The ZY view shows the start view of the model.
ZX
This shows the side view of the model, looking at it in same direction as the
positive Y direction, with the positive X axis horizontal and the positive Z axis
vertical.
ZX view of the model
The ZX view shows the other side view of the model.
XZ
The XZ view shows the other side view of the model.
Views…
In the Views dialog the 8 pre-defined views are available.
Besides, the model rotation can be defined in 3 ways:
 We can use buttons to rotate around the 3 model axes.
In this case the rotation step can be defined.
 We can use short cut keys to rotate around the 3 screen axes:
To rotate the model about the horizontal axis of the screen, hold down Shift
while turning the mouse wheel.
To rotate the model about the vertical axis of the screen hold down Ctrl
To rotate the model in the plane of the screen hold down Shift and Ctrl
 We can specify the 3 euler angles of the model view point.
The angles can have values from -180 degrees till +180 degrees. The values
can be specified in edit fields which contain two digits. In this case, the
rotation is only performed after pushing the Apply button.
Sound maps
This view menu is used to tune the animation settings for displaying acoustic
data:
 Sound intensity data: interpolated color display in dB format and arrows
16A 167
 Sound pressure and sound power data: interpolated color display.
Mode shape animation

This view menu is used to tune the animation settings for displaying mode
shapes:
 Deformation display in Amplitude/Phase format.
Torsional animation
This view menu is used to tune the animation settings for displaying torsional
vibrations:
 Rotating pointers display in Amplitude/Phase format.
Section 4.4.2.2.17 Visual Extensions

The entries in this menu provide a number of facilities to improve the
visualization of the model.
ZX / XY /YZ Plane
These options display the corresponding plane of the global axis system of the
model. Each plane extends symmetrically around the model.
Bounding Box
This option draws a box in which the model fits completely.
Origin
Toggles the display of an axis triad depicting the model origin.
Show all
This switches all the visual extensions “on”.
Show none
This switches all the visual extensions “off”.
Section 4.4.2.2.18 Pre-fix Node - Name with Component

Check this option “on” when you want the node name to be shown in the
component:node format, for example, ROOF:67. If this option is “off”, you will
only see “67”. This option is used only when the toggle of node name of the
model is “on”.
Section 4.4.2.2.19 Use Component Visualization

Components are shown in distinctive colors to identify them. This option
enables you to use the defined components visualization. If this option is not
checked, all the components are shown in the geometry display. Click on the
“Component Visualization...” option for defining the components that you want
to see in the display.

Section 4.4.2.2.20 Component Visualization...

Components are shown in distinctive colors to identify them. This option
enables you to remove components from the display completely.
Click on the “Component Visualization...”, the “Component Visualization”

dialog will popup and list all the components contained in the model.
To make components visible, check the “visibility” checkbox. This component

will become invisible if the checkbox is unchecked.
To move components along an axis (either X, Y or Z), define the distance that
you want to move the component.
If you want to define different ways of viewing the geometry, you can use
“Preset”. Change the visibility and/or translation of the components, then push
the Add button, and a dialog will popup and you can define the name of the
“Preset”. The available “Preset” will be shown in the Preset list, then select one
of them, push the Use button, and the defined preset will be used.
Note: The preset information is not related to the geometry, the presets are
stored as configuration information.
Pushing the Defaults button returns the selection to the default selection, that is
all the components are visible.
Section 4.4.2.2.21 Display size

Maximize
This option causes the geometry window in which you are working to fill the
entire desktop space. Use the Restore option to return to the layout setting.
Restore
This option can be used after the Maximize operations to restore the active
geometry window to its rightful size within the worksheet.
Section 4.4.2.2.22 Copy To Clipboard

Copies the current picture to the clipboard so that it can be pasted elsewhere as
a graphical object.
Section 4.4.2.2.23 Export To Video...

This enables you to export a moving image of the animation cycle to a video
(.avi) file. A dialog is scheduled in which the name and the location of the file
are to be defined. If the animation is running, then the complete cycle (360°) is
recorded, starting at the beginning (0°). If the animation is not activated, then it
is started for the recording.
16A 169
Section 4.4.2.2.24 Options...

This schedules a dialog in which the appearances of different features of the
geometry display are set. 3D Display options can be set by first clicking on the
required tab, defining the settings and then clicking on OK to view the results.
4.4.2.2.24.1 Background
The options here define the background appearance.
Top color
The color at the top of the geometry display.
Bottom color
The color at the bottom of the geometry display.
Text annotation color

The color of the text of the geometry display.
Lighting
Enables or disables Lighting in the background.
Alpha Blended Transparency

Enables or disables the Alpha Blended Transparency.
4.4.2.2.24.2 Visual Extensions
The options here define the visual extension appearances.
Bounding Box
Bounding box is a box surrounding the model, it can be transparent or outline.
A different color can be used for the bounding box.
Planes
The color and the appearance of each plane (XZ, XY and YZ) can be defined
individually. The plane can either be solid, transparent or grid. If you use grid,
then you can define the density of the grid by using the slider.
4.4.2.2.24.3 Node Marker
The options here define the marker appearance. A different marker appearance
can be used for the deformed model and the undeformed model.
Type
Box, sphere, hourglass etc. are the different marker types.
Size
The size of the markers can be defined by moving the slider.

Font Size
The font size of the node annotation can be defined as Medium (default), Small,
or Large.
4.4.2.2.24.4 Models
The options here define the model appearance. A different model appearance
can be used for the deformed model and the undeformed model.
Shade color
If a surface does not belong to a specific component, the shade color will be
applied to that surface in the model.
Note: A surface created with nodes coming from different components does
not belong to a specific component.
Line color, style, and thickness

If a line does not belong to a specific component, the line color will be applied
to that line in the model. Defining the line style will affect the appearance of all
the lines in the model, also of the lines belonging to a specific component.
Note: A line between 2 nodes coming from 2 different components does not
belong to a specific component. When animating a main and an overlaid
mode, the component coloring is switched off for all the lines and surfaces.
Arrow color and style

The color and the style of the arrows can be specified.
4.4.2.2.24.5 Modifications
Modification Tab is only useful when there is modification (see LMS
Modification Prediction).
Scale Factor
The slider defines the size of the modifications.
Relate Size to Magnitude

The modifications can be drawn with respect to the magnitude of mass, stiffness
and damping defined in the dialog. If the modification is defined with more than
one of these values, the order as shown in the dialog will be used.
4.4.2.2.24.6 Discs
The Discs Tab is only useful when torsional nodes (discs) are defined.
Scale Factor
A relative or absolute scale can be used to specify the scale of the radii of the
discs. In case of a relative scale, a slider defines the size of the dics.
16A 171
Use Geometry Radius

By default the radii of the discs are used. If not, all discs are displayed with the
same radius.
Section 4.4.2.2.25 Legend

The first line of the geometry legend is fixed: ‘Mode X: frequency, damping,
mode description’, where X is the number of the mode.
Section 4.4.2.2.26 Legend Options

The second line of the geometry legend can be customized by the user.
Show Favorites
Show your favorite properties if selected and if you have already defined your
favorite properties.
Origin
Here you can select the origin where you wish to select the properties you wish
to add to the legend.
Type
Here you can select the type of properties you wish to use in the legend.
Available List
This list shows all available properties.
Selected List
This list shows the properties you have selected for the legend.
Add to/Remove from Favorites

Use these buttons to add or remove properties from the list of Favorites.
Selection order buttons

On the right side of the dialog, there are 4 buttons which allow you modify the
order in which the properties will appear.
Section 4.4.2.2.27 Display Format

Align Single – Quad displays and Align UpperLower –
LeftRight displays
In a picture containing multiple geometry displays, the settings of one Single or
Quad display can be taken over by the other Single and Quad displays via the
‘Align Single – Quad displays’ menu. In a similar way, the settings of one
UpperLower or LeftRight display can be taken over by the other UpperLower
and LeftRight displays via the ‘Align UpperLower – LeftRight displays’
command.

In general, all geometry display settings are aligned except for the Component
Visualization settings and the Display Size.
Copy and Paste

The settings of a geometry display can be copied and pasted into another
geometry display. In this way, the settings of Single and Quad displays can be
exchanged and also the settings of UpperLower and LeftRight displays.
In general, all geometry display settings are copied and pasted except for the
Component Visualization settings and the Display Size.
Section 4.5 Mouse and keyboard tips in geometry

displays
You can zoom in and zoom out by turning the mouse wheel.
You can also use the mouse wheel to rotate the model:
 To rotate about the horizontal screen axis, hold down Shift while turning
the mouse wheel.
 To rotate about the vertical screen axis hold down Ctrl while turning the
mouse wheel.
 To rotate in the plane of the screen hold down Shift and Ctrl while turning
the mouse wheel.
Section 4.6 Curve scrolling (prev/next on function

displays)
In the picture display panel,
the button
16A 173
allows a user to show or to hide advanced curve scrolling. When clicking on it,
an extra bar appears:
making it possible to scroll over curves, currently displayed in the picture. It

only applies to 2D and 2.5D function displays (so not on geometry displays nor
on the numerical display).
You can iterate over DOF ID, channel ID, REF DOF ID, section value, – in
the explanation beneath indicated as the iterator. When
displaying blocks from a waterfall, you can iterate over the Tracking value or
over the Tracking time.
With the buttons, you can switch to the first , the previous group ,
the previous , the next , the next group and the last data
.
A list of the possible iterator values is made, based on the location of the data.
Following rules are followed:
 All data is searched for on the folder itself or 1 folder up (in case of
waterfalls or referenced spectra).
 Data of the same ‘type’ is identified.
 For DOF ID, only data with the same function class, the same section value
(if applicable) and the same REF DOF ID (if applicable) is taken into
account.
 For REF DOF ID, only data with the same function class and the same DOF
ID is taken into account.
 For Section values, only data with the same function class and the same
DOF ID is taken into account.
For some specific function classes, some extra properties should be equal – eg
for FRF: the estimator (if applicable), for orders: the tacho.

 If data from different locations is displayed, only the common iterator

values are taking into account.
 The blocks are ordered alphabetically by the iterator values.
 A group is defined as a number of consecutive iterator values.
When clicking on , you get an overview of this list, clearly indicating the list
of DOF IDs found for the displayed curves.
The ‘Advanced view’ shows in the rows all possible DOF IDs and in the
columns each displayed curve. The crossing shows the name of the
corresponding block for each DOF ID and curve. If multiple result blocks are
found on 1 crossing, randomly a block is picked.
You can also exclude tacho signals from this list. Raw tachos are excluded
automatically. The option to ‘Restrict to containing folder’ will restrict curve
16A 175
scrolling to the data folder, excluding data located 1 folder up. The option ‘Use
AutoPowers as CrossPowers’ will identify AutoPowers as CrossPowers.
If some blocks are missing in this schedule, this ‘iterator value’ is skipped by
the prev/next. The example beneath shows such an example for this. Channel 3
and 4 are available both for the Octave sections (first column) as for the WF,
channel 5 and 7 are only available for the WF. By consequence, it is not
possible to jump to channel 5 nor 7.
Color codes:
: currently displayed DOF ID/curve
: DOF ID/curve that can be reached with prev/next
: DOF ID – for which 1 of the displayed curves has no

corresponding data
: DOF ID – for which 1 of the displayed curves has no

corresponding data, and it is displayed. In this case, prev/next is not possible.
Section 4.7 The Layout management dialog
This dialog enables you to create, modify and import display layouts to be used
in the worksheets that display pictures. You can also use this dialog to save
newly-defined layouts, to add them to your list of favorites which means they
will be easily accessible for use, and to export them so that other users can
access them.
The Layout Management dialog is scheduled by selecting View Layout

management from the menu bar.

The Layout management dialog
Section 4.7.1 [Procedure] To create or modify a layout
Section 4.7.1.1 [Procedure] To make a display layout

Step 1
Select a starting template
The first thing you need to do is get a starting point template into the Layout
editing panel. This starting point can be an existing defined layout that you will
use as a template, or it can be a template supplied by LMS. This starting point
template must be in the “Layout management” list.
You might have to import one by first clicking on the Import button and
selecting the necessary file. (If the file you have selected contains layouts that
have the same name as a layout already in the list, then a warning will be
issued.)
Step 2
View the template
To load a layout or a template into the Layout editing panel, simply click on it
in the “Layout management” list. A representation of this layout will appear in
the editing area. You can adjust the window types and other properties of the
windows in this dialog, though it is not possible to either add or subtract
windows to the layout.
You therefore need to start with a layout or template with the required number
of windows. Keep clicking on the different items in the “Layout management”
list until you find one with the right number and arrangement of windows.
16A 177
Step 3
Set the window type
To change the window type, select the required entry from the Switch To
options that appear in any of the popup menus associated with the window.
These popup menus are obtained by right clicking in or around the window.
Different types of window can be used.
The current window will convert to a basic format of the selected window type
that can have its properties edited.
Step 4
Edit the window properties
Characteristics of the windows can be modified and saved as part of the layout.
You should bear in mind that all of their properties can also be adjusted in the
worksheet at run time and that in the case of cursors for example, it makes more
sense to finalize their appearance, once the data is present. The properties that
can sensibly be associated with the layout and the means to set them are
described here.
 Axis properties
By right clicking on an axis, you can adjust all of the properties of that axis:
whether it is displayed at all, the limits (including the way they are calculated
and displayed), the format of the data on that axis and, the presence of ticks and
grids.
The following properties are all set from the display popup menu. This menu
can be obtained by right clicking in the display area itself. If you have difficulty
in obtaining the correct menu, then right clicking anywhere with the Ctrl key
depressed will result in the display menu popping up.
 Legend
A legend that will display text annotating the data can be added to the window.
Select Legend from the display popup menu.
 Background color around the window
Select Options XX... (where XX = the window type) from the Display popup
menu. Then specify the 'Display area color' that you would like.
Note: The “Display area color” is an important parameter since when pasting
your final picture into a Word document or PowerPoint presentation, the
background color (the default is grey) is taken too. You should ensure that the
background color blends suitably with that of your slide or paper.
 Background color inside the window

Select Options XX... (where XX = the window type) from the display popup
menu. Then define the Graphic area color.
 Waterfall properties
Select Options Waterfall... from the display popup menu in a waterfall window
to set the color for the traces to be displayed, the presence of hidden lines and
the proportions of the waterfall.

 Size
The relative size of the window in the working area can be adapted by sizing in
both the horizontal and the vertical directions. To do this place the mouse cursor
on the edge you want to change and drag the mouse in the required direction,
while depressing the Ctrl key.
Note: It is not possible to adjust the ratio of the area assigned to each
window. For example, in a layout with two windows, each window and its
associated axes and legend windows, can only occupy a maximum of half of
the total area.
When you have defined all the window properties to be associated with the
layout, you can proceed to saving your layout .
Step 5
Define an icon for the layout
This is an optional step in which you can use a bitmap that will be used to
represent your layout. If you then add the layout to your list of favorites, this
icon will appear on the worksheet and serve as a quick and easy way of loading
the layout. If no specific bitmap is specified then the layout can still be selected
by name from the drop down menu in the worksheet and a blank icon will be
used if the layout is added to the favorites.
LMS provides a bitmap with some of the templates it supplies with the
software. If you wish to modify the existing bitmap, just double click on it and a
standard bitmap editing tool will be scheduled.
If you have your own source of bitmaps, click on Choose file, select the
required bitmap file and push Open . A copy of the bitmap will appear in the
'Icon' area.
Step 6
Save the layout
When the display layout is set up as required, you can save it.
The name of the starting point layout will be displayed in the 'Save layout' input
field. If you want to create a new layout, then you must enter the name for this
layout in the input field. Other wise you can replace the current layout definition
for this layout with the newly defined one.
Click on Save layout.
If you entered a new name for the layout, this will appear in the 'Layout
management' list.
Step 7
Add to favorites
Adding a layout to the list of favorites means that it is easily accessible from the
worksheet - especially if an icon has been defined to represent it.
Select the layout from the 'Layout management' list and click Add to
favorites. It will appear in the lower list. It can be removed from this list using
the Delete button.
16A 179
Step 8
Export the layout
It is also possible to place layouts on a shared directory from where it can be
accessed by other users. To do this select the ones required from the 'Layout
management' list and click on Export. Select the directory, where you want to
export the layout(s) to, and give it a file name. The .lie (layout import export)
extension will be added.
When you have defined all the layouts you need, leave the 'Layout management'
dialog by using the Close button.
Numerical Display Panel

This panel can contain 1 or more gauge or numerical displays. It can only be
used to display tacho or static channel values online in Signature workbook.
Geometry
Single Geometry or 3D display for the visualization of the nodes, lines and
surfaces of a geometry model, and the animation of a mode shape.
The Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.

Upper Lower Geometry
The UL Geometry or Upper Lower 3D Display has two Geometry displays, one
above the other, and both displays have their own action buttons. Therefore, the
phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can be different, and
this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Upper Lower Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.
16A 181
Left Right Geometry
The LR Geometry or Left Right 3D Display window has two geometry displays
alongside each other, and both displays have their own action buttons.
Therefore, the phase control of the animations in both sides of the display can
be different, and this window can be used for comparing different mode shapes.
The Left Right Geometry (3D Display) icon represents it.

Quad Geometry
This is a geometry or 3D display that shows four views at once. One of them
has exactly the same features as the single geometry display. The three other
views have a fixed orientation and translation, meaning the point of view can
not be changed and the model can not be moved.
To switch the projection of the views from European to American, select “Quad
Projection American” in the Tools Options Displays dialog.
The Quad Geometry (3 Display) icon represents it.
16A 183
Bode
This display represents a function window divided into two parts. It shows you
two aspects of the same data. When you load a single data trace into this
window, the upper part shows the amplitude and the lower part shows the phase
of the same trace. When you switch the format of the upper part from
Amplitude to Real, the format of the lower part switches to Imaginary. An X
cursor operates on both parts of the window.
The Bode display icon represents it.

Colormap
This display is used to display a series of data functions in relation to a third

parameter such as time or rpm. This parameter is plotted along the Z axis. The
Y (ordinate) value of each block is represented as a color thus providing a two
dimensional map of X against Z.
In LMSTest.Lab, a waterfall icon represents this data and it can be

displayed in a Colormap window. In addition a series of blocks represented by
the function icons can be displayed.
The Colormap display icon represents it.
16A 185
FrontBack
This display shows a 2D function window with an X and Y axis used to display
a number of overlaying data functions. Two separate Y axes are provided; one
on the right and one on the left.
Data can be displayed relative to one or the other and the format of these two
axes can be made different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for
example) of the same data can be overlaid on each other.
In the LMSTest.Lab software you can display any data record that is
represented by the function icon in a FrontBack window.
The FrontBack display icon represents it.

Nyquist window
A Nyquist display contains three axes:

4.7.1.1.1.1 X axis
On this axis, the argument of a block will be presented.
4.7.1.1.1.2 Y horizontal axis
The result of a block viewed in a certain axis format.
4.7.1.1.1.3 Y vertical axis
The result of the same block as on the horizontal axis, but viewed in another
format.
The Nyquist window icon represents it.
16A 187
Octave
This display shows frequency spectra as octave blocks. In an Octave display

window you can see the result of integrating test data values over various types
of octave bands and their overall level values. These OA levels are calculated
and displayed for both the weighted and linear overall level.
The octave window icon represents it.
Upper/Lower
This display represents a pair of 2D windows that are linked together. They
allow you to compare data traces above one another rather than behind one
another, as in a FrontBack display window. This means, for example, that when
adding an X cursor, the same cursor is active in both the upper and the lower
window.
You have to add two curves with compatible X axes. Data can be displayed
relative to one or the other and the format of these two windows can be made
different so that different aspects (amplitude and phase for example) of the same

data can be compared.
You can also adjust the ratio of the area assigned to each window. Drag the
horizontal blue line between the Upper and Lower display windows to the
desired width.
In the LMSTest.Lab software you can display any data record that is
represented by the function icon in an Upper/Lower window.
The Upper/Lower (UL) window icon represents it.
Waterfall
This display shows a series of data functions in relation to a third parameter

such as time or rpm. This parameter is plotted along the Z axis and shows the
evolution of a function under particular conditions.
In the LMSTest.Lab software data represented by the waterfall icon can be

displayed in a waterfall window. In addition you can load a number of
individual data functions into a waterfall window too.
The Waterfall window icon represents it.
16A 189
XY
This display shows the Y-values of one block in function of the Y values of a
second block on the condition that both blocks have the same X-axis. An XY
display contains four axes:
4.7.1.1.1.4 X axis
On this axis, the argument of the blocks will be presented.
4.7.1.1.1.5 Y horizontal axis
The Y-values of a block. These values are used to compare with other Y-values
of blocks on the other Y axes (front and back).
4.7.1.1.1.6 Y front axis
On this axis, an unlimited number of blocks can be added. The result of one
block on this axis will be combined with the result of the Y horizontal axis to
form one display curve. Both blocks must have the same argument, which is the
argument of the X axis.
4.7.1.1.1.7 Y back axis
Similar to the Y front axis.
The XY window icon represents it.
Section 4.7.1.2 [Procedure] To make a reference curve layout

Step 1
Click on Select a layout... and choose the layout you want to use from the
Layouts Selection dialog or by clicking on a favorites icon.
Step 2
You may need to make a new layout (see "[Procedure] To create or modify
a layout" on page 177).
Step 3
To load data into a display, open the data selector by clicking on the Data

Selector icon in the toolbar, or by selecting Data Data Selector in the

menubar.
Step 4
Drag and drop your reference data onto the display layout. This can be from
previous run(s) in either the current (active) project or other projects.
Note: The window must be either empty or be displaying data of the same type
as you are loading.
Step 5
Repeat this for all the curves that you want to use as a reference, then close the
Data Selector window.
Step 6
Drag and drop onto a display the online data that you are going to measure.
The format and characteristics of the display can be changed via popup menus.
Step 7
Carry out the measurement sequence and view the data online as it is being
acquired.
Save and name your reference curve layout by using View Save Current
Layout As...
Section 4.7.2 The Layout management panel
Section 4.7.2.1 Layout list

This area lists all the layouts that are defined for the current user.
This listing consists of all the layouts which have been imported, created by the
current user and which LMS supplies as standard. These layouts can be edited
16A 191
as required by simply clicking on them in this list. Items selected from the list
become the subject of the action buttons and the first one appears in the Layout
editing area.
Section 4.7.2.2 Import...

This button schedules a dialog that allows you to import a layout import export
(.lie) file containing one or more layouts.
These layouts are imported from a shared central directory to make them
available for the current user. Such layouts would be the basic ones supplied by
LMS as starting templates, or completely defined layouts generated by other
users and exported for general availability.
Section 4.7.2.3 Export...

This button schedules a dialog in which you can export the layouts selected in
the list in a layout import export (.lie) file.
Other users can access layouts that are exported to a shared central directory.
Section 4.7.2.4 Delete

This button deletes the selected layout(s) from the list. If it has not been
exported then it will be lost. It is also removed from the favorites list.
Section 4.7.2.5 Add to favorites

This button adds the selected layout(s) to the list of favorites. It will appear in
the favorites list. An icon will appear in the worksheet and act as a quick means
of loading the layout.
Section 4.7.2.6 Favorites list

This area lists all the layouts which have been defined as favorites by the
current user. Defined layouts can be added to this list using the Add to
favorites button. An icon will appear in the worksheet and act as a quick means
of loading the layout. A bitmap to identify the icon can be selected using the
Choose File button when the layout is in the Layout editing panel.
Section 4.7.2.7 Delete (favorites)

This button, next to the favorites list, deletes the selected favorite(s) from the
list. The layout remains in the 'Layout management' list.

Section 4.7.3 The Layout editing panel
Section 4.7.3.1 Layout editing area

This area displays the layout selected from the Layout management list. You
can use a range of functions to modify the layout (see "[Procedure] To
create or modify a layout" on page 177) as required.
Section 4.7.3.2 Save layout field

This field displays the current name of the display layout that is in the 'Layout
editing' area. It can be used to enter a new name that you want to assign to the
current layout.
Section 4.7.3.3 Save layout button

Click on this button to save the current layout with the name you have defined
in the input field. The properties of an existing layout will be overwritten,
though confirmation to do this is requested first.
Section 4.7.3.4 Icon

This area contains a button that schedules a dialog from which you can select a
bitmap file which will represent the current layout. This bitmap is displayed
alongside. If the layout is added to the list of favorites, then this bitmap will
appear in the worksheet and serve as means of selecting the layout. You can
modify a displayed bitmap by just double clicking on it. This will schedule a
suitable application in which you can edit it.
Section 4.7.3.5 Close

This button closes the layout management dialog.
16A 193
Section 4.7.3.6 Help

This provides help on the layout management dialog.
Section 4.8 Document Memo Templates
This document explains how to make a new template for your memo document.
It also shows you how to change the default memo templates, used for projects,
sections, runs and blocks in the Documentation worksheet.
Section 4.8.1 New Memo Template
The following procedure shows you how to make a new documentation

worksheet template that can be imported into your project and used in place of a
default documentation template for the worksheet.
Section 4.8.1.1 [Procedure] To make a new memo template

Step 1
Open the word processing application e.g. Word or Notepad that you want to
use for writing documents.
Step 2
Create the document you require as a template.
Step 3
Use the Tools Options... menu to check the location of the “Memo
Inventory” directory where templates are being stored.
Normally, this is in the directory:
{LMS application}\Local\MemoInventory
Click on the File Locations tab to view the current location of the Document
Inventory directory.
Step 4
Save the document (file_name.doc) you have just created in this directory.
When you next use the Import... button in the Documentation worksheet to
attach a file to a project or section, the new document will be available for
selection.
Section 4.8.2 Default Memo template
New memos for projects, sections, runs or blocks are normally created using

their specific default document template. The following procedure explains how
to make changes to these default templates.
Section 4.8.2.1 [Procedure] To change the default memo template

Step 1
{LMS application}\Central\MemoInventory
Click on the File Locations tab to view the current location of the Memo
Step 2
Locate the file:
MemoInventory.txt
It lists the file-names of the default document templates for project, section, run
and block memos.
This file is found in the directory:
<LMS application>\central\MemoInventory
Note: To save the edited file, as MemoInventory.txt, the read-only attributes

assigned to this file must first be removed.
Step 3
Open, edit and save the appropriate file.
Use Windows Explorer to change the properties of the MemoInventory.txt
file.
Right click the file and using the File menu, select Properties.
Uncheck the “Read-only” Attributes box and click OK
Now changes to the file can be saved.
Replace the current documentation inventory file by saving it using the same
file name.
The new memo template will be used whenever the New from Template...
button is used.
Note: You should return the properties of the Memo Inventory file to read-only.
This means that the file cannot be changed or accidentally deleted.
Section 4.9 Creating print formats
Print formats for your reports can be made from a picture using the Navigator
16A 195
Data Viewing worksheet. They can also be created directly in Word or

PowerPoint, which is advantageous in the case of reports with multiple pictures
or pages.
The LMS Printing Add-In toolbar should be present in your PowerPoint or

Word application. If not you should add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to
Word or PowerPoint. (see "[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In
toolbar to Word or PowerPoint" on page 200) Default print formats are usually
made for the most commonly used picture layout.
This document provides you with the following procedures:

 To create a single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet
 To create a multiple-picture print format in Word or PowerPoint (see
"[Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print format in Word or
PowerPoint" on page 197)
 To set printing options (see "[Procedure] To set printing options" on page
198)
 To add Meta information to a print format (see "[Procedure] To add Meta
Information to a print format" on page 199)
 To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to Word or PowerPoint (see
"[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to Word or
PowerPoint" on page 200)
Section 4.9.1 [Procedure] To create a single-picture print

format in the Data Viewing worksheet
Step 1
In the LMS Test.Lab File menu, click on Printing Options (see "[Procedure]
To set printing options" on page 198) and indicate which application you want
to use: Word or PowerPoint.
Step 2
Select the picture you want to use as a basis for your print format, by clicking
its identification tab and then choose Make Plot Format in the dropdown
menu.
Step 3
In the “Save New Plot Format As” dialog that appears, the name field indicates,
by default, the type of layout that you have chosen and the type of application
file that the plot format will be saved as (.doc or .ppt). If you keep this name for
your plot format, it will automatically become the default format, activated by
clicking on Plot in the dropdown menu. You can make the name more
significant, if you wish, but it will not be saved as the default format. The name
will appear in the list of available plot formats and click on Plot with in order to
activate it.
Step 4
Click on the OK button to close the dialog and to open the Word or PowerPoint
application. The chosen layout is now displayed in the application.

Step 5
Build your print format using the standard editing features of the chosen
application (creating headings, text fields, importing graphics, etc.).
Note: If your picture is not empty (i.e. if it contains data), remove the data so
that the picture will be empty of unnecessary data (except any desired
reference data) and ready to receive data from whoever will be using the plot
format to produce a report.
Step 6
To add Meta information to an existing print format (see "[Procedure] To add
Meta Information to a print format" on page 199), select the picture and then
click on the LMS New Field button to open the “Select Display Dependent
Attribute” dialog.
Meta information lets you specify meta data - additional information about the
data rather than just its data values - in a variety of ways. Meta data can be data
properties, user attributes, LMS Tec.Manager information, etc.
Note: The LMS Printing Add-In 11B toolbar should be present in your
PowerPoint or Word application. If not you should add the LMS toolbar to
your application. (see "[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to
Word or PowerPoint" on page 200)
Section 4.9.2 [Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print

format in Word or PowerPoint
If you wish to create a format for a report containing multiple pictures, it is best
to do it directly in Word or PowerPoint.
Step 1
In the Test.Lab File menu, click on Printing Options (see "[Procedure] To set
printing options" on page 198) and indicate which application you want to use:
Word or PowerPoint.
Then start your application and open an empty PowerPoint presentation or
Word document.
Step 2
Click on the LMS New Picture button in the application toolbar. This opens a
dialog listing all available display layouts. Choose a layout.
Note: The LMS Printing Add-In toolbar should be present in your

PowerPoint or Word application. If not you should add the LMS toolbar to
your application. (see "[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar to
Word or PowerPoint" on page 200)
Step 3
16A 197
In the same dialog, a name appears in the name field. It can be changed, if
desired. The only restriction in choosing a name is that it must be unique to the
document.
If you wish to have a multi-picture (multi-page) report, enter page 1, page 2,
etc.) instead of “picture 1”, etc. (or something similar, i.e. Page 1 Upper,
Lower, etc.).
Note: When a user loads this print format, the pictures are loaded with the
names that you specify here.
Step 4
Make any number of pictures in the same way. For each picture, you can add
Meta information (see "[Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print
format" on page 199). Build your print format using the standard editing
features of the chosen application (Creating headings, text fields, importing
graphics, etc.).
Section 4.9.3 [Procedure] To set printing options
Step 1
Go to the File menu and click on Printing Options. (see "[Procedure] To set
printing options" on page 198)
Step 2
Set the Default Microsoft Office application as either “Microsoft Word” or
“Microsoft PowerPoint” in the Output panel.
Step 3
Specify whether the output should be Paper (default printer) to print on your
default printer or Electronic (Microsoft Office document) to save the printout.
Note: When you print a picture, the format associated with the default MS
Office application is used. For example, if you want to print a picture based on
the “FrontBack” layout format, the format FrontBack.doc is used if your
default is set to MS Word and the format FrontBack.ppt is used if it is set to MS
PowerPoint.
Step 4
Enabling the option “Use OOXML documents (docx, pptx) will ensure making
use of “Open Office XML”. This setting will also determine the output format
(.doc or. docx for example) of your document or print format. Making use of
this option will reduce the time consumed during plotting. Even when using an
Office 2003 version you can download for free a compatibly pack allowing you
to use these functionality (see
http://office.microsoft.com/en-us/products/HA101686761033.aspx).
Step 5
Set the Use picture settings from option as either “Pictures in the print format”
or “Test.Lab Picture” in the General settings panel.

Choose the “Pictures in the print format” setting to print the picture in
accordance with your predefined format settings. This is useful when you want
similar data to always be printed out in the same way.
Choose the “Test.Lab Picture” setting when you want the paper copy of the
picture to be exactly the same as the original Test.Lab picture shown in the
Display panel. This setting overrules the predefined print format settings.
Step 6
If the Output is set to Electronic, you can specify the Picture format as either
“Test.Lab Active Picture” or “Windows Metafile” in the Settings for electronic
(Microsoft Office document) panel.
When the option is set as “Test.Lab Active Picture”, not only is the picture
copied to file, but also the functionality of the Test.Lab display is also available.
All the formatting functions, such as adding and deleting cursors, are available
in the document.
When you choose “Windows Metafile”, you will not be able to activate the
picture in the resulting document.
Step 7
If you have multiple pictures to print, you can save them to one electronic
document by switching on the option “Combine multiple documents into a
single document”.
Note: When combining into a single document, the first format will determine
settings such as page format, margins, etc.
Section 4.9.4 [Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print

format
Step 1
Open the desired picture (print format file) in the appropriate MS Word or
PowerPoint application and select it.
Step 2
Click on the LMS New Field button in the toolbar.
The ”Select Display Dependent Attribute” dialog opens.
Step 3
Select a display.
The left part of the dialog is a graphical representation of the layout. Each
rectangle represents a display.
Step 4
Click on the rectangle that represents the desired display (where the attribute is
to be inserted) to select it.
A thick, black border appears around the selected rectangle.
Step 5
16A 199
Select a trace number from the dropdown menu beside the Trace Number field
in the dialog.
The trace number indicates which trace of the display is selected. The first data
block that will be dropped into the picture is trace 1, the next data block to be
dropped will be trace 2, and so on. You will need to select the trace number
(datablock) where you want to add an attribute to the print format.
Step 6
Select the attribute that you want to include in your print format.
In the dialog, a tree view is shown listing all possible attributes that can be
added to your print format. To display the names of the attributes in front of
their values, check "Include attribute name in field".
Step 7
Insert any other desired attributes by the above steps.
Note: Remember to hit the Add button for each attribute that you wish to
insert in the print format.
Step 8
Click on the Done button to close the window. The chosen attributes are
added to the print format and are visible in the form of text boxes at the same
location as the layout. You can drag the text boxes to a different position, if
necessary.
Section 4.9.5 [Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In

toolbar to Word or PowerPoint
Step 1
Execute Start Programs LMS Test.Lab version Configuration Configure
Office for Printing
This activates the LMS Printing Add-In toolbar.
Step 2
If you do not see the LMS toolbar when you start up Word or PowerPoint, go to
the View menu, click Toolbars and then click the LMS Printing Add-In
toolbar to display it in the application.

Section 4.9.6 [Procedure] To remove a message about an old

LMS Powerpoint Printing Add-In
When upgrading to a newer version of Test.Lab, the un-install of the old

Test.Lab version does not remove the according Powerpoint add-in from the
user registry. When you open Powerpoint, e.g. wto report with Powerpoint, you
will get the following message:
To remove this message the following key should be removed from the user
registry (Start > Run > Regedit).
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\OfficeVersion\P
owerPoint\AddIns\PlotFormatAddInTestLabVersion. In which the
OfficeVersion, e.g. 12.0 and TestLabVersion, e.g. 13A, need to be filled in
correctly.
Note: This key needs to be removed per user as Powerpoint uses registered
add-ins per user.
Section 4.10 Documentation User Attributes
This document explains how to define User Attributes. The attributes represent
a set of key values associated with a project or a section.
Section 4.10.1 User Attributes
User Attributes are displayed in the User Attributes grid on the worksheet. This
grid lists all the attribute values stored in the project or section. Although
editing the values is done directly on the grid, you need to use the following
procedure to define new attributes.
Section 4.10.1.1 [Procedure] To define a set of User Attributes

Step 1
Select whether your attributes are to be associated with the project or with a
section by clicking on the appropriate minor tab at the top of the worksheet.
Step 2
16A 201
Open the Attributes dialog by selecting Tools Add New Attribute from the
menu bar. The Add Attributes tab appears.
Step 3
In the Add Attributes tab, enter the name of the attribute in the “Name” field.
Step 4
Select what type of format the values must be defined as. Possible choices are:
Text, Number, Date and List.
Step 5
Click on the Add button. Your newly defined attribute is now displayed in the
User Attributes grid. You can edit it after clicking on its corresponding Edit
button in the grid.
Text
In this case the user must fill in the values as a text string. Enter a default value
in the value (text) field.
Number
Only a numeric value can be entered for this type of attribute. Enter a default
value in the value (number) field.
Date
Values for date attributes are chosen from a dropdown menu beside the value
field.
List
In this case the user must select the values from a pre-defined list. Select the list
from the list field.
Section 4.10.1.1.1 [Procedure] To define a predefined list of

attribute values
Step 1
Click on the ”New List” tab in the Attributes dialog.
Step 2
Type the name of the new list in the bottom left text field and click on the Add
button above it in order to add it to the list on the left hand side of the dialog.
Step 3
To define the values in this list, select the new list and enter the first value in the
right hand text field. Then click on the Add button. Repeat this step to add
more values. You can also use the Import From Txt button to import list
attribute values from a text file. Continue until all the required values have been
entered.
Step 4
Sort the list values into the required order using the sorting buttons. When the
list is ready, click on the OK button to save it in a documentation template.
Step 5

In the “Add Attributes” tab, select the list from the “List” field and select the
default value to be shown in the “Value (List)” field.
Step 6
Continue defining attributes.
Section 4.11 Document Memo Templates
This document explains how to make a new template for your memo document.
It also shows you how to change the default memo templates, used for projects,
sections, runs and blocks in the Documentation worksheet.
Section 4.11.1 New Memo Template
The following procedure shows you how to make a new documentation

worksheet template that can be imported into your project and used in place of a
default documentation template for the worksheet.
Section 4.11.1.1 [Procedure] To make a new memo template

Step 1
Open the word processing application e.g. Word or Notepad that you want to
use for writing documents.
Step 2
Create the document you require as a template.
Step 3
{LMS application}\Local\MemoInventory
Click on the File Locations tab to view the current location of the Document
Step 4
Save the document (file_name.doc) you have just created in this directory.
When you next use the Import... button in the Documentation worksheet to
attach a file to a project or section, the new document will be available for
selection.
16A 203
Section 4.11.2 Default Memo template
New memos for projects, sections, runs or blocks are normally created using
their specific default document template. The following procedure explains how
to make changes to these default templates.
Section 4.11.2.1 [Procedure] To change the default memo template

Step 1
{LMS application}\Central\MemoInventory
Click on the File Locations tab to view the current location of the Memo
Step 2
Locate the file:
MemoInventory.txt
It lists the file-names of the default document templates for project, section, run
and block memos.
This file is found in the directory:
<LMS application>\central\MemoInventory
Note: To save the edited file, as MemoInventory.txt, the read-only attributes

assigned to this file must first be removed.
Step 3
Open, edit and save the appropriate file.
Use Windows Explorer to change the properties of the MemoInventory.txt
file.
Right click the file and using the File menu, select Properties.
Uncheck the “Read-only” Attributes box and click OK
Now changes to the file can be saved.
Replace the current documentation inventory file by saving it using the same
file name.
The new memo template will be used whenever the New from Template...
button is used.
Note: You should return the properties of the Memo Inventory file to read-only.
This means that the file cannot be changed or accidentally deleted.

Chapter 5 The LMS Test.Lab Desktop workbook
In This Chapter
Desktop Add-ins .................................................................205
Parameter and Option Locking...........................................222
The Tec.Manager Options ..................................................225
The Desktop menu bar .......................................................226
The Desktop button bar ......................................................259
Conditioning toolbar...........................................................268
The Documentation worksheet ...........................................276
The Data Explorer dialog ...................................................280
The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet ..........................295
The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet ....................305
The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet .......................307
The Data Block Processing worksheet ...............................327
The Data Block Editor worksheet ......................................341
Section 5.1 Desktop Add-ins
Section 5.1.1 Introduction
Add-ins extend the basic functionality of an application with some rather

specific functions, features or tools. In the application, add-ins provide either
extra functions to existing worksheets or new worksheets, or both.
Note: You will need to have a license for the add-in in order to include it in
an application.
You can load add-ins using the Tools Add-ins menu entry. This schedules
the Add-ins dialog that lists all the available add-ins. Each add-in has a
checkbox that you can toggle “on” or “off”. Check “on” to activate the add-in
and include it in the application or “off” (i.e. uncheck the checkbox) to
deactivate it and remove it from the application.
You can include more than one add-in at the same time in the application. By
default, the active add-ins will be saved in the application configuration files
and they will remain active when you restart the application. You can change
the default by using the Tools Options... menu entry. In the Options dialog,
use the Add-ins tab and uncheck the “Save list of active add-ins when the
application is closed.” checkbox if you do not want to save your active add-ins
when the application is closed.
16A 205
Note: Although you can activate any available add-in (if you have the license
for it) in any application, not all add-ins are useful in all applications.
Some add-ins require other add-ins in order to carry out their function. If you
check “on” an add-in that requires additional add-ins then they will also be
checked “on” automatically.
If an add-in adds additional worksheets to an application, these new worksheets

will appear at the end of the workbook. This means that in the workflow bar the
extra worksheets will always appear at the end.
You can modify the order and the visibility of the worksheets using the Tools
Workbook Configuration menu entry. This schedules the Workbook
Configuration dialog that allows you to change the worksheet order and to
select which worksheets are visible in the workbook.
Section 5.1.2 General (Desktop) add-ins
This document lists the general add-ins for Test.Lab applications.
Note: Not all the listed Add-ins are available in all workbooks.

 3D Acoustic Camera (on page 209)

 3D Acoustic Camera Multiplicative Processing (on page 209)
 Acoustic Source Quantification for Pass-by Noise Engineering (on page
209)
 Angle Domain Processing (on page 209)
 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering (on page 209)
 Application Launcher (on page 209)
 ASAM ODS Database Export (on page 210)
 ASAM ODS Driver (on page 210)
 Audio Replay (on page 210)
 Audio Replay & Filtering (on page 210)
 Automated Reporting (on page 211)
 Automatic Modal Parameter Selection (on page 211)
 Batch Reporting (on page 211)
 Customized Metrics Calculator (on page 211)
 Data Block Editor (on page 211)
 Data Block Processing (on page 212)
 DATX Data Driver (on page 212)
 Durability Drivers Pack (see "DATX Data Driver" on page 212)
 Excel Data Driver (on page 212)
 Geometry (on page 212)
 Harmonic Removal (on page 213)
 Harmonic Tracking (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera Combustion Noise (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera Deconvolution (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera iNAH (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera Rotating Sources (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera Wind (on page 214)
 HD Array Batch Processing (on page 214)
 HD Array Data Selection & Comparison (on page 214)
 Head Data Driver (on page 214)
 Human Body Vibration (on page 214)
 Interactive Time Data (see "Interactive Time Data Editing" on page 214)
 MDM-plug-in (on page 215)
 Modal Analysis (on page 215)
 Modal Analysis Lite (on page 215)
 Modification Prediction (on page 215)
 Multi Reference Post Processing (on page 215)
16A 207
 Nastran Data Driver (on page 215)

 nCode Data Driver (on page 215)
 Network Hub (on page 215)
 Offline RPM-Extraction (on page 216)
 Offline Sine Data Reduction (on page 216)
 OPAX (on page 216)
 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time Animation (on page 216)
 Operational Modal Analysis (on page 216)
 Operational Modal Analysis Lite (on page 217)
 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis (on page 217)
 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite (on page 217)
 Operational PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis (on page 217)
 Operational PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis Lite (on page 217)
 Order Tracking (on page 217)
 Order-based Modal Analysis (on page 218)
 Parameter Locking (on page 218)
 PolyMAX Modal Analysis (on page 218)
 PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite (on page 218)
 PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis (on page 218)
 PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis Lite (on page 218)
 Principal Component Analysis (on page 218)
 Rigid Body Calculator (on page 219)
 Run Data Averaging & Comparison Organizer (on page 219)
 SCADAS Recording (on page 219)
 Signature Data Post-Processing (on page 219)
 Signature Throughput Processing (on page 219)
 Sound Diagnosis (on page 220)
 Sound Intensity Analysis (on page 220)
 Sound Quality Metrics (on page 220)
 Standalone Recording (on page 220)
 Tec.Manager Hub (on page 220)
 Test Data Management (on page 220)
 Time Data Editor – Advanced (see "Time Data Editor - Advanced" on
page 221)
 Time Data Editor – Standard (see "Time Data Editor - Standard" on page
221)
 Time Data Extraction (on page 221)
 Time Data Selection (on page 221)
 Time Data Processing (on page 221)
 Time Domain TPA (on page 221)
 Time Signal Calculator (on page 221)

 Time-Variant Frequency Analysis (on page 221)

 TPA Component Editing (on page 221)
 TPA Synthesis (on page 222)
 Transfer Path Analysis (on page 222)
 User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5) (on page 222)
 Windows Automation Support (on page 222)
Section 5.1.2.1 3D Acoustic Camera

This add-in loads the post-processing sheet of 3D Acoustic Camera into a
Desktop environment.
Section 5.1.2.2 3D Acoustic Camera Multiplicative Processing

This add-in improves results by combining two arrays. It applies to the LMS 3D
Acoustic Camera with extensions, in which the microphones on the solid sphere
are the primary array; and the microphones on the extensions constitute the
secondary array.
Section 5.1.2.3 Acoustic Source Quantification for Pass-by Noise

Engineering
This add-in allows using Acoustic Source Quantification (ASQ) for Pass-by
Noise Engineering. The method is based on an energetic Transfer Path Analysis
approach. The results allow quantifying, ranking and comparing the different
vehicle sources (intake, engine, exhaust, tires …) that contribute to the overall
Pass-by Sound Pressure level. The output also includes time data traces for each
source allowing more detailed objective & subjective analyses of each source.
Section 5.1.2.4 Angle Domain Processing

Angle Domain Processing adds the possibility to compute angle domain data
during the throughput processing of saved time data traces.
Section 5.1.2.5 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering

This functionality can be used in Signature acquisition and in Signature
Throughput Processing.
Octave spectra are generated by filtering the time data in octave bands and
averaging the result in the time domain. This functionality corresponds and is
consistent with the functionalities offered in RTO (Real Time Octave filtering).
You can choose to perform RTO in parallel with FS, RTO only, or FS only. A
checkbox is available for each channel group to select what processing has to be
performed.
Section 5.1.2.6 Application Launcher

The Application Launcher add-in can be configured through the file
16A 209
WorkbookExecutable.ini in the Central\Configuration directory. In this way, a

thirdparty application program can be launched by a Test.Lab workbook and
connect itself to Test.Lab via automation.
Section 5.1.2.7 ASAM ODS Database Export

The ASAM ODS Database Export enables writing to a customer configured
ASAM ODS database.
Section 5.1.2.8 ASAM ODS Driver

Enabling this add-in will make it possible to read and write ASAM ODS data.
This can be done in two ways:

 Reading and write ATF files (ATF classic and ATF xml)
 Connecting with an ASAM ODS server
When the add-in is loaded, ATF files that are encountered while browsing via
the “My Computer” entry point in the Data Explorer will be recognized and can
be opened for browsing and reading data.
Data blocks can be exported to a classic ATF file or an xml ATF file.
Next to this, an extra entry point will become visible in the Data Explorer:
“ASAM ODS”. Opening this entry point will result in a list of 1 or more entries,
each corresponding to an ASAM ODS server that has been configured. The
connection configuration for these servers can be done during the installation, as
well as by editing the corresponding files in the
central\Configuration\ASAM-ODS directory.
Section 5.1.2.9 Audio Replay

Audio feedback will be offered on data in displays in layouts and on data in the
Multi-trace Display panel in the Time Data Selection worksheet of the
Throughput Validation & Processing Host workbook.
Audio replay is offered on selected data in displays by means of a popup entry

('Audio replay') in the popup menu of the selected data. When this popup is
triggered, a dialog appears having simple audio control buttons and a trace list.
The Throughput Data corresponding to the selected data will be retrieved and
replayed. A double cursor appears in order to select a segment. A scrolling
cursor appears and is synchronized with the playback during replay.
Section 5.1.2.10 Audio Replay & Filtering

Audio feedback will be offered on data in displays in layouts and on data in the
Multi-trace Display panel in the Time Data Selection worksheet of the
Throughput Validation & Processing Host workbook.
Audio replay is offered on selected data in displays by means of a popup entry

('Audio replay') in the popup menu of the selected data. When this popup is

triggered, a dialog appears having simple audio control buttons, a trace list and
a filter area. The Throughput Data corresponding to the selected data will be
retrieved and replayed. A double cursor appears in order to select a segment. A
scrolling cursor appears and is synchronized with the playback during replay.
Following online filters will be offered:
 Lowpass
 Highpass
 Bandpass
 Bandstop
 Notch
 Order
Section 5.1.2.11 Automated Reporting

Automated reporting is about the possibility to start the reporting without user
input immediately after the measurement is finished using predefined templates.
The automated reporting sheet allows you to predefine the plot formats and
mappings.
Section 5.1.2.12 Automatic Modal Parameter Selection

Automatic Modal Parameter Selection allows selection of poles based on an
automated assessment from the stabilization diagram. It ensures that the poles
selection and therefore the modal model become user independent.
Section 5.1.2.13 Batch Reporting

This add-in provides a simple environment for printing large amounts of data in
an automatic way.
In this worksheet (see "Batch Reporting worksheet" on page 366) you can take
in the data from any source, sort them based on any property, load in the
appropriate format and push the Print button. Formats can go from very simple
1 display / 1 page formats to complicated multi-page/multi-picture reports. But
of course, the formats are like all standard Test.Lab formats: based on Microsoft
Office.
Section 5.1.2.14 Customized Metrics Calculator

Customized Metrics Calculator adds calculators that allow computing user
defined conditions and sections for each tracking point in Signature Throughput
Processing or Signature Acquisition applications. This results in section traces.
Data can be conditionally disregarded.
Section 5.1.2.15 Data Block Editor

With this add-in, it is possible to define new data blocks in a convenient way.
The most important header information can be defined in this worksheet (see
"The Data Block Editor worksheet" on page 341), as well as all data values.
16A 211
Any format of data can be defined: fixed or variable X-axis, real or complex
data, linear or dB values. On line visualization makes the definition process
easy and intuitive. Values can also be entered by simple copy/paste from e.g.
Microsoft Excel.
Section 5.1.2.16 Data Block Processing

Data Block Processing combines measured/calculated data into new data blocks
with capability to apply user defined units.
Section 5.1.2.17 DATX Data Driver

DATX Data Driver extends the data access capabilities of LMS Test.Lab to data
stored in files with extension “.datx”.
Section 5.1.2.18 Durability Drivers Pack

Durability Drivers Pack enables read access to time series data stored in
external file formats nCode DAC, NI Diadem, Somat SIE, Lexade and MDF
3.0.
Section 5.1.2.19 Excel Data Driver

This Driver will allow importing blocks or Waterfalls by using the Excel
format. As this format is commonly used and it is not always desired to see all
.xls-files in the navigator, this driver must be loaded as Add-in.
Within Test.Lab one can copy from within a display the values of blocks or
Waterfalls onto the clipboard. These values can be pasted into an Excel sheet.
Each sheet in the Excel file will be shown as a folder in the Test.Lab Navigator
which has the name of the sheet. Note that each sheet can contain several blocks
or one Waterfall (up to 127 spectra due to limitation of Excel).
Several data formats are supported when using the Excel Data Driver. All
following data types can be used next to each other in one sheet.
 real/imag
 ampl/phase
 dB/phase
Note: Note that only standard Test.Lab properties will be recognized when
using the Excel Data Driver. When some properties cannot be recognized,
they will be mentioned in a separate message-sheet.
Section 5.1.2.20 Geometry

This add-in helps you to define a 3D representation of the structure under test.
You can create and manipulate components, nodes, line, surfaces and slave
nodes of a complicated structure.

Section 5.1.2.21 Harmonic Removal

Harmonic Removal adds the harmonic filter and the harmonic average
commands to the Time Signal Calculator.
Section 5.1.2.22 Harmonic Tracking

Harmonic Tracking adds the Kalman frequency and Kalman order cut
commands to the Time Signal Calculator.
Section 5.1.2.23 HD Acoustic Camera

This add-in enables the post-processing sheet of HD Acoustic Camera in
Desktop environment.
Section 5.1.2.24 HD Acoustic Camera Combustion Noise

This add-in allows separating combustion noise from mechanical noise, for both
Sound Source Localization and Quantification. The method takes advantage of
the cylinder pressure and tacho.
Section 5.1.2.25 HD Acoustic Camera Deconvolution

This add-in allows increasing the spatial resolution of farfield beamforming, by
applying an automatic iterative procedure on the measured data.
This add-in is compatible with the add-ins ‘HD Acoustic Camera’, ‘HD
Acoustic Camera Wind’, ‘’HD Array Data Selection & Comparison’ and ‘HD
Array Batch Processing’.
Section 5.1.2.26 HD Acoustic Camera iNAH

This add-in enables the iNAH processing (irregular Nearfield Acoustic
Holography) in post-processing HD Acoustic Camera. iNAH quantifies sound
power and improves spatial resolution and therefore sound source localization
in the frequency range below 1000Hz. The maximum distance array-source is
30cm.
Section 5.1.2.27 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension

This add-in enables to analyze run-up run-down recordings in the
post-processing sheet of HD Acoustic Camera.
Section 5.1.2.28 HD Acoustic Camera Rotating Sources

This add-in allows a better Sound Source Localization and Quantification of
rotating sound sources (e.g. fan blades). This add-in is compatible with ‘HD
Acoustic Camera’ only.
16A 213
Section 5.1.2.29 HD Acoustic Camera Wind

This add-in bundles specific processing that is used in some advanced
applications like wind tunnel testing: windspeed correction, noise suppression
and symmetrization for side arrays positioned on the ground. All three can be
combined.
Acoustic Camera Deconvolution’, ‘HD Array Data Selection & Comparison’
and ‘HD Array Batch Processing’.
Section 5.1.2.30 HD Array Batch Processing

HD Array Batch Processing add-in enables a new worksheet (‘Array Data
Post-Processing’) allowing the definition of many calculations from multiple
recordings, which are processed in a single and optimized operation.
This add-in is compatible with ‘HD Array Data Selection & Comparison’, ‘HD
Acoustic Camera’ and its add-ins ‘Deconvolution’, ‘iNAH’, ‘Order Extension’,
Wind’ and ‘3D Acoustic Camera’.
Section 5.1.2.31 HD Array Data Selection & Comparison

HD Array Data Selection & Comparison add-in enables a new worksheet
(‘Array Data Post-Processing’) allowing the selection of several to all results
from multiple source files, with parallel linkable displays for data comparison
and reporting.
Acoustic Camera Deconvolution’, HD Array Data Selection & Comparison’
and ‘HD Array Batch Processing’.
Section 5.1.2.32 Head Data Driver

This add-in allows to read/use/process Head data files from HEAD Acoustics
(*.hdf files) as any native LMS Test.Lab file. A specific “HEAD” icon is
displayed for each .hdf file in navigator.
Section 5.1.2.33 Human Body Vibration

Human Body Vibration allows Whole-Body and Hand-Arm vibration testing
according to ISO2631 and ISO5349 respectively.
Section 5.1.2.34 Interactive Time Data Editing

This add-in introduces the “Interactive Time Data Editing” toolbar in the Time
Data Selection worksheet.

Section 5.1.2.35 MDM-plug-in

MDM-plug-in provides the interfacing functionality allowing LMS Test.Lab to
connect to MDM for reading and writing data.
Section 5.1.2.36 Modal Analysis

This add-in gives you the possibility to perform a modal analysis immediately
after testing a structure by using the FRFs. In this add-in, dedicated worksheets
are created for a 3-steps estimation method, and different validation tools such
as MAC and synthesis FRFs are available for validation of the modal model.
Section 5.1.2.37 Modal Analysis Lite

Modal Analysis Lite provides all the tools and functions required for an
experimental modal analysis limited to 50 DOF’s.
Section 5.1.2.38 Modification Prediction

The LMS Test.Lab Modification Prediction implements a dynamics
modification theory to predict the effect of structural modifications on a
mechanical structure's modal parameters. These modifications can take the form
of local changes to mass, damping and stiffness.
The Modification Prediction application allows you to evaluate the effect of

mass, spring-damper and tuned absorber modifications. Two minor worksheets,
List Modifications and Predict Modes, are defined in order to predict the effects
of structural modifications on a structure. The Modification Prediction
worksheet helps you to predict modes and to evaluate the result predicted for
your modifications by synthesizing FRFs and comparing the original FRFs with
the new ones.
Section 5.1.2.39 Multi Reference Post Processing

Multi Reference Post Processing provides off-line multi-reference spectral
processing on crosspower, FRF, partial coherence and transmissibility.
Section 5.1.2.40 Nastran Data Driver

Nastran Data Driver enables reading Nastran files directly from the Data
Explorer.
Section 5.1.2.41 nCode Data Driver
Section 5.1.2.42 Network Hub

The Network Hub makes it possible to directly access data on remote machines
(both Unix and Windows based), without knowing the physical names of the
machine. It offers network abstraction for situations where the data that have to
be read, processed or analyzed are stored on multiple computer throughout the
16A 215
network.
The “Network Hub” add-in loads the Network Hub Client. When this client is
loaded, an extra entry point becomes visible in the Data Explorer, called
“Network”. When opening this entry point, a list of all available startpoints on
Network Hub Servers becomes visible. These startpoints can be defined via the
Startpoint Configuration Wizard that is available on those computers where the
Network Hub Servers are installed.
Section 5.1.2.43 Offline RPM-Extraction

This add-in allows you to extract a RPM signal from measured vibration or
acoustic signals.
The RPM-Extraction worksheet can be used in cases where it is difficult or

impossible to measure the rpm using a tacho-device. An example is the
turbo-rpm in cars that have a turbocharger.
The RPM can be saved in a run (TDF) and can then be used either for signature
throughput processing in the Time Data processing worksheet or for order
filtering in the Sound diagnosis worksheet.
Section 5.1.2.44 Offline Sine Data Reduction

Offline Sine Data Reduction allows analyzing the response of a structure at
different points from the recording of a controlled swept sine excitation.
Section 5.1.2.45 OPAX

Operational Path Analysis enables identifying sources and contributions to
targets through statistical processing on operational data.
Section 5.1.2.46 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time Animation

This add-in helps you to investigate the deflection shapes of structures in
operational conditions, using either time or frequency domain data. In
Animation, you can either use order and frequency section or FRFs or
crosspower information for stationary condition. In time animation, you can use
time recordings.
Section 5.1.2.47 Operational Modal Analysis

This add-in gives you the possibility to identify a modal model in operational
conditions. Instead of using FRFs as input data, crosspowers and autopowers
are used as well.
In this add-in, dedicated worksheets are created for a 3-step estimation method,
and different tools are available for validation of the modal model.

Section 5.1.2.48 Operational Modal Analysis Lite

Operational Modal Analysis Lite provides the capability to extract the natural
frequencies, damping and mode shapes from operational data limited to 50
DOF’s.
Section 5.1.2.49 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis

Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis adds a sheet with the PolyMAX modal
parameter estimation technique. PolyMAX is an advanced parameter estimator
that gives a very clear stabilization diagram, greatly simplifying the modal
analysis process.
Section 5.1.2.50 Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite

Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite adds a sheet with the PolyMAX
modal parameter estimation technique (limited to 50 DOF’s). PolyMAX is an
advanced parameter estimator that gives a very clear stabilization diagram,
greatly simplifying the modal analysis process.
Section 5.1.2.51 Operational PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis

This add-in is a new worksheet with Operational PolyMAX Plus solver.
Operational PolyMAX Plus provides uncertainty bounds on frequency and
damping and, at the same time, iterates the frequency and damping estimates.
Section 5.1.2.52 Operational PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis Lite

This add-in is a new worksheet with Operational PolyMAX Plus solver (limited
to 50 DOF’s). Operational PolyMAX Plus provides uncertainty bounds on
frequency and damping and, at the same time, iterates the frequency and
damping estimates.
Section 5.1.2.53 Order Tracking

This functionality can be used in Signature Acquisition and/or in Signature
Throughput Processing. It allows you acquire order tracking data in parallel
with the Fixed sampled data.
The OT acquisition parameters are defined in the Acquisition settings tab of the
Measure worksheet. In the time data processing worksheet you can define the
parameters in the acquisition settings dialog. You can choose to perform an OT
acquisition in parallel with the FS acquisition, an OT acquisition only, or a FS
acquisition only.
You are able to define two sets of processing functions, one for the fixed
sampling acquisition (FS), and a new set of functions for the Order tracking
acquisition (OT).
16A 217
Section 5.1.2.54 Order-based Modal Analysis

This add-in allows performing the modal analysis on phase-referenced orders
with PolyMAX solver and also performing ODS on orders.
Section 5.1.2.55 Parameter Locking

To capture company specific procedures, lab supervisors can create Templates
for specific measurement procedures where all critical parameters have been
locked. This includes:
 Giving parameters a specific value
 Changing the font and color of user interface fields
 Making fields insensitive or invisible
 For each Template, a shortcut is created to launch the correct application
with the right workbook configuration. This shortcut can be put on the
desktop or distributed by E-mail to the test bench.
Section 5.1.2.56 PolyMAX Modal Analysis

PolyMAX Modal Analysis adds a sheet with the PolyMAX modal parameter
estimation technique. PolyMAX is an advanced parameter estimator that gives a
very clear stabilization diagram, greatly simplifying the modal analysis process.
Section 5.1.2.57 PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite

PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite adds a sheet with the PolyMAX modal
parameter estimation technique (limited to 50 DOF’s). PolyMAX is an
advanced parameter estimator that gives a very clear stabilization diagram,
greatly simplifying the modal analysis process.
Section 5.1.2.58 PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis

This add-in is a new worksheet with PolyMAX Plus solver. PolyMAX Plus
provides uncertainty bounds on frequency and damping and, at the same time,
iterates the frequency and damping estimates.
Section 5.1.2.59 PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis Lite

This add-in is a new worksheet with PolyMAX Plus solver (limited to 50
DOF’s). PolyMAX Plus provides uncertainty bounds on frequency and
damping and, at the same time, iterates the frequency and damping estimates.
Section 5.1.2.60 Principal Component Analysis

This add-in allows calculating the Principal Component Analysis on auto and
crosspowers.

Section 5.1.2.61 Rigid Body Calculator

Rigid Body Calculator allows calculating the center of gravity and moments of
inertia based upon frequency response measurements.
Section 5.1.2.62 Run Data Averaging & Comparison Organizer

This data organizer will automatically organize a set of measurement functions
according to multiple conditions:
 Run id
 Point id
 Measurement direction
 Measurement function
 Runup or rundown
Data from multiple Test.Lab projects can be combined and from then on, data
interpretation becomes very straightforward. You can easily
 Fill up automatically displays
 Scroll through all measurement points or measurement functions
 Calculate the average and envelope over all runs and automatically update
all displays
 Disable a run, add another run and update the average.
When using this add-in during an acquisition in Signature or Spectral Testing,
the 2D results of the current measurement run can easily be compared with the
average and envelope of the corresponding functions in the previous runs. In the
case of wrong measurements, the user can reject the last run.
Section 5.1.2.63 SCADAS Recording

This add-in enhances the Data Explorer with specific SCADAS Recording
functionality. It allows to read the properties of SCADAS Recording template
files and SCADAS Recorder data files. The quick overview data in the
SCADAS Recording data files can be directly accessed and SCADAS
Recording data can be imported into the active project/section.
Section 5.1.2.64 Signature Data Post-Processing

In this worksheet you can calculate a whole range of functions from the
measured data.
Section 5.1.2.65 Signature Throughput Processing

This add-in enables access to the Time Data Processing worksheet for
processing time data.
16A 219
Section 5.1.2.66 Sound Diagnosis

This add-in allows analyzing sounds via replay, filtering (online and offline),
DSP processing and metric calculation.
Section 5.1.2.67 Sound Intensity Analysis

The LMS Test.Lab Acoustic Intensity Analysis module supports evaluating a
structures acoustic behavior. Visualization is done using 2D color mapping of
sound pressures or sound intensities superposed on the measurement grid.
The 2D color maps are transparent so that pictures of the test object can be
positioned in the background relative to the measurement grid. The basic
acoustic intensity data can be visualized, checked and selected in a dedicated
worksheet. Measurement meshes can be defined freely and independent of
naming conventions for measurement surfaces. Results can be exported to MS
Excel including the ISO 9614-1 field indicators.
Section 5.1.2.68 Sound Quality Metrics

This add-in allows calculating additional, more advanced, sound quality metrics
to the Signature Throughput Processing application.
Section 5.1.2.69 Standalone Recording

Standalone Recording will allow the user to import data that was acquired by a
standalone measurement with a recorder.
Section 5.1.2.70 Tec.Manager Hub

The Tec.Manager Hub provides a deep integration between Test.Lab and
Tec.Manager. Loading this add-in, adds the following functions to the Test.Lab
Desktop and all other workbooks:
 Possibility to start the Tec.Manager client from the corresponding icon in
the Desktop toolbar Using this client, you can perform searches, and the
results of these search operations can be stored in a Tec.Manager “basket”.
 Direct loading of a Tec.Manager basket in the “Search Results” entry point
of the Data Explorer.
 Automatic registration of Test.Lab projects and their contents, in the
Tec.Manager environment, immediately after saving them from within
Test.Lab.
 Direct access to Tec.Manager HTML-based meta-info templates, for
advanced documentation of Test.Lab projects.
Section 5.1.2.71 Test Data Management

Test Data Management provides a deep integration between Test.Lab and LMS
Test.Lab Data Management.

Section 5.1.2.72 Time Data Editor - Advanced

Time Data Editor – Advanced adds the "Interactive Time Data Editing" toolbar
and the "Time Signal Calculator" panel in the Time Data Selection worksheet.
The time Signal Calculator is extended with the operations: Signal Generation;
BandPass, BandStop, Notch and FRF Filtering; Hilbert-Envelope; Doppler and
Pitch Correction. See Time Data Editing Functions.
Section 5.1.2.73 Time Data Editor - Standard

Time Data Editor – Advanced adds the “Interactive Time Data Editing” toolbar
and the “Time Signal Calculator” panel in the Time Data Selection worksheet.
Section 5.1.2.74 Time Data Extraction

Time Data Extraction recombines multiple TDFs or LDSFs of a Turbine
Testing test into a new TDF or LDSF for convenient validation or further
processing.
Section 5.1.2.75 Time Data Selection

See The Time Data Selection worksheet (see "Time Data Selection worksheet"
on page 373).
Section 5.1.2.76 Time Data Processing

See The Time Data Processing worksheet.
Section 5.1.2.77 Time Domain TPA

Time Domain TPA provides the capability to decompose transient and semi
stationary responses into path contribution. Starting from a TPA model and
throughput data of operational data, it allows the analysis and the auralization of
the time domain contributions.
Section 5.1.2.78 Time Signal Calculator

This adds the “Active Formula Set panel” in the Time Data Selection
worksheet. The Time Signal Calculator allows you to perform calculations on
time traces. It can be used as a time data pre-processor for the Signature
Throughput Processing Add-In.
Section 5.1.2.79 Time-Variant Frequency Analysis

This add-in enables access to the Time Frequency Analysis worksheet for
examining the spectral contents of a signal when this is varying in time.
Section 5.1.2.80 TPA Component Editing

This add-in enables the editing of TPA model components and the evaluation of
16A 221
the impact of these changes to the overall model.
Section 5.1.2.81 TPA Synthesis

TPA Synthesis enables interactive listening to, and direct comparison of Time
Domain TPA Models and their variants. Path and group contributions can be
individually activated, scaled or filtered while listening. Visual feedback is
provided by synchronous narrow-band and octave spectral feedback.
Section 5.1.2.82 Transfer Path Analysis

This add-in enables single and multi-reference transfer path analysis for
Classical and Fast TPA methods. Advanced contribution analysis for individual
path and path groups are included.
Section 5.1.2.83 User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5)

These add-ins can be configured through the file ExternalUI.ini in the
Central\Configuration directory. In this way, ActiveX programs can be loaded
in worksheets (up to 5) in order to host them in the Test.Lab user interface.
These add-ins provide up to 5 general ActiveX component hosts which may, or
may not, interact with Test.Lab.
Section 5.1.2.84 Windows Automation Support

This add-in enables the Windows Automation interface in Test.Lab in order to
connect between external programs and LMS Test.Lab applications and to
allow the user writing custom applications within Test.Lab.
Section 5.2 Parameter and Option Locking

 Options Locking (on page 224)
Section 5.2.1 Parameter Locking
Parameter locking allows an administrator to inactivate fields (including table

rows and columns) so that no changes can be made to them, and to inactivate
buttons, preventing their use. This add-in also makes it possible to change
parameters affecting the visual appearance of fields and buttons i.e. background
color, font style, etc.).
Section 5.2.1.1 [Procedure] To lock fields and buttons

Go to the Tools Add ins ... menu and click on the Parameter Locking

checkbox, if empty, to be sure that the Parameter Locking add-in has been
turned on.
Step 1
Go to the required worksheet in your application's workbook and right click on
the field or button that you wish to lock and then click on the Property dialog
button that appears. This opens a dialog with a “Read Only” check box. When
this box is checked, the corresponding button or field is inactivated. In the case
of a locked field, its background color changes from white to light gray.
Note: For grids and tables, you can only lock entire rows or columns.
Individual cells cannot be locked.
Either go on to the next step to save your locked parameters or, if you wish to
alter the appearance of the chosen field or button, do the following:
Step 2
Go to the File Save As Task Shortcut menu to open the dialog that lets you
save your workbook with its locked parameters and/or changed appearance
parameters as a Task Shortcut.
Step 3
Enter a name for your task and click Save. The saving process creates three
files that must be kept together:
Section 5.2.1.1.1 Project Template (.tpl)

This file contains all the default parameters of the project, including the values
for any locked fields.
Section 5.2.1.1.2 Workbook Configuration (.cfg)

This file contains the parameters for the visual configuration of the workbook,
including all the changes that you have made in the visual appearance of locked
fields and buttons as well as previously configured hidden worksheets. It also
saves any add-ins that have been activated.
Section 5.2.1.1.3 Task Icon (.tsk)

Clicking on this icon uses the .tpl and .cfg files (that have been saved as a task
shortcut) to call the application where the task (with its parameter locks and
changes) has been created. This is why all three files must be kept together.
Note: If you move a task (icon) to another computer, you must move the
associated .cfg and .tpl files to the same folder on the computer where they
were created. If for some reason they are not stored together, you must
change the path accordingly in the properties dialog of the Task Shortcut file.
16A 223
Section 5.2.1.1.4 [Procedure] To change the appearance of fields and

buttons
Step 1
In the same property dialog, click on one of the following buttons depending on
the appearance parameter that you want to change:
Font
This opens a dialog where you can choose the style, size and color of the font to
be used.
Foreground
This opens a dialog where you can choose the foreground color (where
possible) for your field or button.
Background
This opens a dialog where you can choose the background color of your field or
button.
Step 2
When finished click on OK and then save your changes.
Section 5.2.2 Options Locking
Options locking allows an administrator to inactivate all or some of the options

one can find via the desktop menu bar via Tools Options.
Section 5.2.2.1 [Procedure] To lock settings under Tools -> Options

Step 1
Copy the ToolsOptions.ini file from the
[installation_directory]\Central\configuration to the Central folder of the group
directory, or the Central folder of the Local directory if no Group directory is
specified.
Step 2
Modify the ToolsOptions.ini file to lock the settings that should not be modified
by the user.
The file syntax is
 [TabName]
 LockGlobalSettings=false | true
 #ControlName=false | true
Step 1
Set the LockGlobalSettings of a specific [TabName] to true to lock the whole
tab.
Step 2
Set a controlname of a [TabName] to true to lock only this specific option.

Step 3
Set it to false to have this option sensitive, no matter what the
LockGlobalSetting is set to.
For example, to lock only the 2D correction mode in the settings tab, specify:
 [Settings]
 LockGlobalSettings=false
 #Frequency=true
 2D Correction Mode=true
 #Sampling Bit Size=true
 #Calibration Validity Period=true
Section 5.3 The Tec.Manager Options
This document describes all the options available in the Tec.Manager tab of the
Options dialog (which you open by clicking on Tools Options in the
LMSTest.Lab menu bar.)
Section 5.3.1 Tec.Manager Tab
Section 5.3.1.1 Import from Tec.Manager
Section 5.3.1.1.1 Start page

This field specifies the URL to the Tec.Manager Application Server Main Page.
Section 5.3.1.1.2 Login

This field specifies the username that you normally use to log on to
Tec.Manager.
Section 5.3.1.1.3 Password

This field shows the corresponding password.
Section 5.3.1.1.4 Show User Dialog

This shows the login dialog used when loading Tec.Manager search results into
the Test.Lab Desktop Search results folder (by importing a basket).
Disabling this flag will log on with Tec.Manager automatically, with the
username and password as specified above, when importing a Search results
16A 225
basket.
Section 5.3.1.2 Tec.Manager
Section 5.3.1.2.1 Always include extended project / section

information
Including extended project / section information will make an extra minor tab
available. This Extended Documentation worksheet (see "Extended Project /
Section info" on page 279) will allow you to select and edit a htm- or
html-template. The attributes will then become available in the Documentation
worksheet.
Section 5.3.1.2.2 HTML template folder

This field specifies the path of the folder that can contain different Tec.Manager
templates (an .htm or .html file containing meta-information).
Section 5.3.1.2.3 Browse... button

This schedules the Select template folder dialog for specifying the location and
name of the template folder.
Section 5.4 The Desktop menu bar
 File (on page 226)

 Edit (on page 229)
 View (on page 230)
 Data (on page 231)
 Tools (on page 232)
 Window (on page 257)
 Help (on page 257)
Section 5.4.1 File
Section 5.4.1.1 New...

This opens a new project (see "Projects" on page 26). A dialog appears in
which you can select the template to be used for the new project. The template
defines the initial settings for the new project.
Select the template that you want to use and click Open. A new project with
the default name is opened. To make a new project template based on an

existing setup, save the project using the Save As Template... menu entry. The
next time the File New menu entry is selected, the new project template will
be available for selection. It is possible to change the default template (see
"[Procedure] To change the default project template" on page 27).
Section 5.4.1.2 Open...

This option enables you to open an existing project (see "Projects" on page 26).
It schedules the “Project dialog” in which you can specify the location and the
name of the project you want to open.
Section 5.4.1.2.1 Activate section

In the selected project, you can choose the section that you want to activate.
5.4.1.2.1.1 {Default}
This activates the last opened section in the selected project.
5.4.1.2.1.2 {Create a new section...}
This creates and activates a new section in the selected project.
5.4.1.2.1.3 <Section_name> list
Use the dropdown list of available sections in the selected project in order to
activate a specific section.
Section 5.4.1.2.2 Close the current project and activate section

Check this option "on" to close the current (active) project and activate the
selected section.
Section 5.4.1.3 Close

This closes the active project. The application and any other projects will
remain open. You will be asked if you wish to save the current state of the
project before it is closed.
Section 5.4.1.4 Save

This saves the current state of the active project. Thus settings and acquired data
will be saved to the database.
Section 5.4.1.5 Save As...

This saves the current state of the active project under another name. A dialog
appears in which you can specify the name you wish to assign to the project.
At the bottom of the dialog you can choose to save your project using the pre
7A storage technology. This technology makes use of Microsoft compound
files. All 7B and newer releases will use an LMS implementation of the storage
layer. This new technology increases save and load performance of large
projects, and enhances the project stability.
16A 227
When the file format will be changed, during saving, a warning message is
shown asking whether you want to convert the project or not. This is for
example the case when you want to save a 6A project in 7B using the LMS
storage technology.
When doing a ‘Save as’, a check is done for the remaining disc space. If the free
space is less than the size of the database (without data in memory) + a minimal
free space of 100MB, an error message will be given. You are expected to free
some space and retry to do the save as.The 100 MB can be changed in the
LoaderExtensions.ini file.
Section 5.4.1.6 Save As Template...

This saves the current settings of the active project as a template. A dialog
appears in which you can specify the name you wish to assign to the new
template.
Section 5.4.1.7 Save As Task Shortcut

This is only available when you have the “Parameter Locking Add-in”. It opens
the “Save As” dialog which allows you to save locked parameter settings as a
task shortcut file (.tsk).
Section 5.4.1.8 LMS Tec.Manager Project Management

In order to active the available entries in this menu, the LMS Tec.Manager
Project Management should be defined in Tools>Options>LMS Tec.Manager.
When doing so, the basic functionalities of registering a new project, checking
out and checking in will be possible.
Section 5.4.1.9 Printer Setup...

This entry schedules the “Print Setup” dialog, in which you can define the
parameters required for printing. These parameters will be used for all printing
operations.
Note: Landscape is the paper orientation setting that is advised when printing
a worksheet.
Section 5.4.1.10 Print Preview

This operation provides a preview of the current data as it will appear when
printed with the defined page setup. It can also be executed by clicking on the
Print Preview icon from the toolbar.
The working area of the desktop is filled with the print preview.
And, depending on the worksheet you are working in, a number of buttons
enable you to manipulate this view.

The following action buttons can be used:

 Print...
This schedules the “Print” dialog from which the print job can be initiated and
closes the Print Preview function.
 Zoom in / Zoom out
Clicking on Zoom in magnifies the current view of the previewed page. This
can be continued as required. The Zoom out button decreases the
magnification to the original value.
 Close
This closes the Print Preview function and returns you to the Test.Lab desktop.
Section 5.4.1.11 Print

This operation can also be executed by clicking on the “Print” icon in the
toolbar. The print job depends on the worksheet you are working in and can be
seen using the Print preview function from this menu.
Section 5.4.1.12 Printing Options

Clicking on this opens a “Printing Options” dialog where you can set the
parameters for format based printing of your data.
Section 5.4.1.13 Most recent files...

This list shows the most recently opened project files. Click on a file to open it
again.
Section 5.4.1.14 Exit

This option closes the Test.Lab desktop and all applications that are running in
it. Confirmation will be requested if unsaved data or setups exist. The active
workbook / project can be closed using the Close entry from the File menu.
Section 5.4.2 Edit
Section 5.4.2.1 Undo

This operation undoes the last action.
Section 5.4.2.2 Cut

This option deletes a selected item from the workspace and places it on the
clipboard. This item is then available for use in other applications which will
check whether they are able to manage this type of data.
16A 229
Section 5.4.2.3 Copy

This option makes a copy of a selected item and places it on the clipboard. This
item is then available for use in other applications which will check whether
they are able to manage this type of data.
Section 5.4.2.4 Paste

This operation pastes the item currently on the clipboard.
Section 5.4.2.5 Delete

This action deletes a selected item.
Section 5.4.2.6 Select all

This action selects all items in the workspace.
Section 5.4.3 View
Section 5.4.3.1 Layout Management...

This schedules the “Layout management” dialog (see "The Layout
management dialog" on page 176) in which you can create, select or import the
display layout that you want to use for viewing data. Layouts can only be used
in those worksheets where pictures can be used.
Section 5.4.3.2 Save Picture as Layout

This saves changes you have made to the current layout in whatever worksheet
you are working. These changes will be maintained when ever that layout is
selected in the same worksheet. The dialog is only applicable for those
worksheets that use pictures based on layouts you have created as the other ones
have predefined layouts that cannot be altered.
Section 5.4.3.3 Save Picture as New Layout...

This enables you to save the current layout in a worksheet with a specific name.
Section 5.4.3.4 License Usage...

This enables you to list all the licenses that the Test.Lab application is using at
that specific moment.
Section 5.4.3.5 Toolbars

This enables you to toggle the presence of the available toolbars (standard,

conditioning and averaging). When the mouse cursor is placed over an item in
the toolbar, it displays the function associated with that tool.
Section 5.4.3.6 Status Bar

This toggles the presence of the Status bar. The Status bar is found on the lower
edge of the application window.
Section 5.4.4 Data
Section 5.4.4.1 Data Explorer

This schedules the Data Explorer dialog that provides you with two views on
your data - a hierarchical tree view and a detail view (as in Windows Explorer)
of the data in your projects. You can drag specific data from the Explorer into a
display window and also perform certain operations on it.
A toggle at the top of the dialog allows you to select the location of your data
from a dropdown menu. You can choose between Active Project (saved data),
Online data (to be acquired) and all other directories on your computer.
There is a Parent folder button as well as Back and Forward buttons for easy
navigation and a Refresh button to refresh the browser tree when operations
are being carried out when the Data Selection dialog is open. There is also a
List All Blocks button to bring up a list of all the data blocks for a selected item
in the Tree-view panel.
Right clicking on any data entry in this dialog brings up a menu. The entries
available (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on page 280) from the popup menu
depend on the type of data selected.
Section 5.4.4.2 New Section...

This enables you to create a new section (see "Sections" on page 50) in which
data will be saved. In the dialog that appears you can enter the required name.
The new section is based on the current section setup.
Section 5.4.4.3 Rename Section...

This enables you to change the name of a section (see "Sections" on page 50).
In the dialog that appears you can select the section you want to rename.
Note: You cannot rename the currently active section, which is indicated in
the field in the toolbar.
Enter the name that you wish to assign to the selected section and press OK.
16A 231
Section 5.4.4.4 Delete Section...

This allows you to delete a section from the current project. All the data
contained in the section is deleted too. Individual runs can be deleted using the
popup menu when in the “Data Selection” dialog available from this (the Data)
menu.
The active section cannot be deleted. In the dialog that appears, select the
section to be deleted and click OK
Section 5.4.4.5 View Setup Parameters

This allows you to view the setup parameters.
Section 5.4.4.6 Print Setup Parameters

This allows you to make a printout of the setup parameters.
Section 5.4.5 Tools
Section 5.4.5.1 Add-ins...
Section 5.4.5.1.1 Add-ins dialog

This dialog allows you to download add-ins into . Loaded add-ins appear in the
workbook.
General add-ins are Desktop “Add-ins”. (see "Add-ins dialog..." on page 234)
These are:

 3D Acoustic Camera (on page 209)

 Angle Domain Processing (on page 209)
 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering (on page 209)
 Application Launcher
 ASAM ODS Database Export (on page 210)
 ASAM ODS Driver (on page 210)
 Audio Replay (on page 210)
 Audio Replay & Filtering (on page 210)
 Automated Reporting (on page 211)
 Automatic Modal Parameter Selection (on page 211)
 Batch Reporting (on page 211)
 Customized Metrics Calculator (on page 211)
 Data Block Editor
 Data Block Processing (on page 212)
 DATX Data Driver (on page 212)
 Excel Data Driver (on page 212)
 Geometry (on page 212)
 Harmonic Removal (on page 213)
 Harmonic Tracking (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera iNAH (on page 213)
 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension (on page 213)
 Head Data Driver (on page 214)
 Human Body Vibration (on page 214)
 Interactive Time Data Editing (on page 214)
 MDM-plug-in (on page 215)
 Mission Synthesis
 Modal Analysis (on page 215)
 Modal Analysis Lite (on page 215)
 Modification Prediction (on page 215)
 Multi Reference Post Processing (on page 215)
 Nastran Data Driver (on page 215)
 nCode Data Driver (on page 215)
 Network Hub (on page 215)
 Offline RPM-Extraction (on page 216)
 Offline Sine Data Reduction (on page 216)
 OPAX (on page 216)
 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time Animation (on page 216)
 Operational Modal Analysis (on page 216)
 Operational Modal Analysis Lite (on page 217)
16A 233
 Order Tracking (on page 217)

 PolyMAX Modal Analysis (on page 218)
 PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite (on page 218)
 Principal Component Analysis (on page 218)
 Rigid Body Calculator (on page 219)
 Run Data Averaging & Comparison Organizer (on page 219)
 SCADAS Recording (on page 219)
 Signature Data Post-Processing (on page 219)
 Signature Throughput Processing (on page 219)
 Sound Diagnosis (on page 220)
 Sound Intensity Analysis (on page 220)
 Sound Quality Metrics (on page 220)
 Tec.Manager Hub (on page 220)
 Time Data Editor – Advanced (see "Time Data Editor - Advanced" on
page 221)
 Time Data Editor – Standard (see "Time Data Editor - Standard" on page
221)
 Time Data Extraction (on page 221)
 Time Data Selection (on page 221)
 Time Domain TPA (on page 221)
 Time Signal Calculator (on page 221)
 Time-Variant Frequency Analysis (on page 221)
 TPA Component Editing (on page 221)
 Transfer Path Analysis (on page 222)
 User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5) (on page 222)
 Windows Automation Support (on page 222)
Section 5.4.5.1.2 Add-ins dialog...

This section describes the specific add-ins:
 CAN Bus
 Angle Domain Processing
 Customized Metrics Calculator
 Remote Control
 Source Control
 Time recording during Signature Testing
5.4.5.1.2.1 Vehicle Bus
The CAN (Controller Area Network) bus add-in is a data communications bus
for the real-time Test.Lab Signature applications:

 Signature Acquisition
 Signature Testing
It enables you to record CAN signals into a throughput file.
The recording of the CAN channels is available when parallel throughput is

active and when the CAN settings are specified.
The CAN add-in will start and stop the CAN measurement together with the
start and stop (respectively) of the Test.Lab measurement.
The raw CAN messages are converted into physical values and units. The
conversion from a CAN- defined unit into a Test.Lab unit is possible when the
unit is defined in Test.Lab.
The CAN and the Test.Lab data are synchronized, and. the recording frequency
for the CAN messages is 100 Hz.
The CAN add-in works with CAN acquisition devices from Vector Informatik.
The CAN driver library from Vector must be installed and the CAN parameters
must be set up in the Vector hardware configuration (available in the Windows
Control Panel) to match the network in use.
5.4.5.1.2.2 Angle Domain Processing
It adds the Angle Domain Validation worksheet to the workbook. This
worksheet allows you to convert time data into the angle domain. You can
visualize the angle domain data in a multi-trace display or you also save the data
into a LDSF/TDF file.
In Signature Acquisition and/or Time Data Processing it allows you to acquire

angle data in parallel with the Fixed sampled data. You can choose to perform
an AD acquisition in parallel with the FS acquisition, an AD acquisition only, or
a FS acquisition only.
The AD acquisition parameters are defined in the Acquisition settings tab of the
Measure worksheet. In the time data processing worksheet these parameters are
defined in the acquisition settings dialog.
You are able to define two sets of processing functions, one for the fixed
sampling acquisition (FS), and a new set of functions for the Angle domain
acquisition (AD). In addition to the map of angle data, Order sections,
OA-levels, Averaged and peak hold angle data can be calculated. Frame
statistics can be calculated in a cycle or in defined gate(s).
It also adds the SYNC_RESAMPLING commands to the time signal calculator.

5.4.5.1.2.3 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering
This functionality can be used in Signature acquisition and in Signature
Throughput Processing.
Octave spectra are generated by filtering the time data in octave bands and
averaging the result in the time domain. This functionality corresponds and is
consistent with the functionalities offered in RTO (Real Time Octave filtering).
16A 235
You can choose to perform RTO in parallel with FS, RTO only, or FS only. A
checkbox is available for each channel group to select what processing has to be
performed.
5.4.5.1.2.4 Automated Reporting
Automated reporting is about the possibility to start the reporting without user
input immediately after the measurement is finished using predefined templates.
The automated reporting sheet allows you to predefine the plot formats and
mappings.
5.4.5.1.2.5 Customized Metrics Calculator
The add-in gives the possibility to define extra user defined sections in
Signature Throughput Processing. It also give the possibility to define
conditions that can be used to accept or reject blocks from a waterfall.
5.4.5.1.2.6 Remote Control
In the Signature Testing workbook, the ‘Remote Control’ add-in can be used
with either the separate 4 button USB-remote control unit ‘SCx-RC01’ or with
the USB connection of the GRAS Intensity Proobe 50AI-L (which has built-in
the same 4 buttons and USB connection).
The actions linked to each of the four buttons or the following:
5.4.5.1.2.7 Source Control

This add-in allows to use the sources of the frontend and to define the signal
that will be sent out by the sources.
5.4.5.1.2.8 Time recording during Signature Testing
This add-in combines the advantages of real-time measurements with the safety
and flexibility of throughput measurements. During the real-time measurement,
a TDF file is written to disc without any loss in performance.
Section 5.4.5.2 Options...

This schedules the "Options" dialog where you can set configuration settings

and see where particular file types are located.

 General tab (see "Options - General tab" on page 237)
 Add-ins tab (see "Options - Add-ins tab" on page 241)
 Data tab (see "Options - Data tab" on page 242)
 File Locations tab (see "Options - File Locations tab" on page 244)
 Sorting tab (see "Options - Sorting tab" on page 247)
 Filtering tab (see "Options - Filtering tab" on page 248)
 Units tab (see "Options - Units tab" on page 249)
 Displays tab (see "Options - Displays tab" on page 249)
 License Server tab (see "Options - License Server tab" on page 250)
 Tec.Manager tab (see "Options - Tec.Manager tab" on page 251)
 Sound Settings tab (see "Options - Sound Settings tab" on page 251)
 Network Hub tab (see "Options - Network Hub tab" on page 251)
 Attributes Tab (see "Options - Attributes Tab" on page 253)
Section 5.4.5.2.1 Options - General tab

In the Options dialog, use this tab to change the general options.
5.4.5.2.1.1 General Options
5.4.5.2.1.1.1 Frequency
Here you can choose whether you want to specify either the bandwidth, the
sampling frequency or the span as acquisition setting. The bandwidth defines
the maximum frequency that can be measured during an acquisition. The span,
which is set at 80% of the bandwidth, is the frequency band that is unaffected
by the cutoff filters. The sample frequency is twice the bandwidth.
If ‘Span’ is selected the frequency range that can be shown in the display, when
displaying spectra, is limited to the span value.
5.4.5.2.1.1.2 2D Correction mode
The 2D Correction type is applied when showing data in displays.
Note: This option is not used for measurement.
Functions measured in Test.Lab automatically get the 'correct' window

correction factor. This is annotated in the data properties and it is independent
of what is specified in the Options dialog.
Once a function is measured, you can view it in the display with the correction
factor specified by the 2D correction type (default is automatic). This changes
the way the data is displayed but does not change the data and its annotation.
The default method of correcting for the effect of adding a window function
when showing data in displays can be selected.
Automatic means the software selects the best method. If the spectrum format is
PSD for example, the spectrum data will be energy corrected. If not, it will be
16A 237
amplitude corrected.
Note: The default setting for the correction method is automatic.
Fixed Amplitude means that the data will always be amplitude corrected. Fixed
Energy means that the data will always be energy corrected. Not Corrected
means that no correction method or factor will be applied to the data. Original
means that any new data (based on previous acquisitions) will be corrected
using the same correction method that was applied to the original data.
5.4.5.2.1.1.3 Sampling Bit Size
The data word length used in the communication between the Frontend and
your computer can be specified. For optimized data quality, 24 bit data transfer
is advised. For higher throughput bandwidths, 16 bit data transfer is advised.
5.4.5.2.1.1.4 Calibration Validity Period
The is the period in days that the calibration of a transducer remains valid. The
TEDS standard defines a calibration date to be stored in the transducers, not a
due date. In the case of TEDS import, the system will add the value set here to
the date and perform the check on the result.
5.4.5.2.1.2 Octave Filtering
Octave filtering can be done according to different methods. The options here
allow you to define these settings globally. If needed, you can even enforce it
within a group and/or company using the 'Options Locking' mechanism' (see
Desktop options (see "Parameter and Option Locking" on page 222) in
Desktop manual). Typically different methods will give only small differences.
Differences will be noticeable if high level narrowband components are present
around the edge frequencies.
Globally, one can distinguish between octave filtering done in the time domain
(with digital bandpass filter banks) and octave filtering done in the frequency
domain (conversion from FFT block by integration over frequency bands). Each
domain can use midband (or center) and edge frequencies according to two
different methods (base-2 and base-10) and can have attenuation filter shapes
that depend on the implemented filter.
5.4.5.2.1.2.1 Octave filter midband and edge frequencies
There are two accepted methods to determine the midband frequencies of the
octave bands:
 the base-2 method: subsequent center frequencies have a ratio of 21/b with 1/b
the bandwidth designator (e.g. b=3 for 1/3 octave band).
Edge frequencies are derived from the center frequency by multiplying or
dividing with 21/(2b).
The reference frequency is fr=1000 Hz. Center frequencies are given by:
 fcn=fr*2n/b for b odd
 fcn=fr*2 (2n+1)/(2b)
for b even

 the base-10 method: subsequent center frequencies have a ratio of (103/10)1/b

with 1/b the bandwidth designator (e.g. b=3 for 1/3 octave band).
Edge frequencies are derived from the center frequency by multiplying or
dividing with (103/10)1/(2b).
The reference frequency is 1000 Hz.
 fcn=fr*(103/10)n/b for b odd
 fcn=fr*(103/10)(2n+1)/(2b) for b even
Note: Current IEC 61260:1995 and ANSI S1.11-2004 standards accept both
base-10 and base-2, but recommend base-10. Some standards (e.g. ISO
266-1997) are based on base-10 but mention that base-2 may be used as an
acceptable approximation because the differences are small (103/10 =
1.995262).
Note: Apart from the exact midband frequencies as mentioned above, the
designation of the band will be expressed in ‘nominal’ midband frequencies
(typically rounded numbers, also specified in the standards for full and 1/3
octaves) and not with the ‘exact’ midband frequencies (according to e.g. ISO
266-1997 and ANSI S1.6-1984(R2006)). For a list of normalized frequencies,
see the table above.
16A 239
Note: With base-10 system, midband frequencies of 1/3 octave band will
include e.g. 10, 100, 1000, 10000 (ratio of 10). Other midband frequencies
digits will also repeat themselves apart from the location of the decimal
points. For the base-2 system, the 100 Hz (nominal) third octave band will
have a midband frequency of 99.2126 Hz while the 10000 Hz (nominal) third
octave band will have a midband frequency of 10079.37 Hz.
5.4.5.2.1.2.2 Octave filter shapes

When implemented in the time domain as digital band-pass filter banks on
sampled data, the relative attenuation of the filters is never ‘perfect’ (no
attenuation between the edges and full attenuation outside the edges). The
current IEC 61260:1995 and ANSI S1.11-2004 standards give an upper and a
lower limit for the relative attenuation, depending on the ‘Class’ of analyzer.
These limits allow a shape of the filter response which attenuates before the
edge frequencies and with a finite slope beyond the edge frequencies. When
converting data to octave band in the frequency domain, it is much easier (and
common practise) to implement a (nearly) ideal filter (i.e. a ‘square’ filter
shape): only energy on the frequency lines within the octave band will be
summed. However, in order to match as closely as possible data processed with
time-domain filters with data processed with FFT, it is also possible to use filter
shapes with a ‘smoother’ shape (ANSI Emulation). This requires more
processing, as for each octave band, (weighted) integration over more frequency
lines will be done.
5.4.5.2.1.3 Octave Filtering Options
5.4.5.2.1.3.1 Time-based
For time-based octave filtering, it is possible to select 3 methods:
 ANSI-IEC – Class1 – base 10: the recommended setting as it complies with
the latest IEC and ANSI standard and uses base 10 as recommended by the
standard.
 ANSI – base 2: for compatibility with previous (before 8A) releases (ANSI
method used in Signature throughput processing)
 IEC – base 2: for compatibility with previous releases (before 8A) (IEC
method used in Signature throughput processing)
This choice influences host-based octave calculations performed with the
ANSI-IEC Octave Filtering add-in (e.g. Signature throughput processing or
RTO in parallel with Fixed sampling acquisition). Front-end based octave
filtering (available in the RTO workbook) will always use an ANSI-IEC
–Class1 – base 2 filter implementation.
5.4.5.2.1.3.2 FFT-based
For FFT-based octave filtering (e.g. done in Octave display of narrowband data,
in Signature Fixed sampling, by the ‘Octave’ function in the Data calculator,
etc…) it is possible to select between:

 Ideal – base 10: the recommended setting (only method before 8A)
 Ideal – base 2: for compatibility with e.g. CADA-X data
 ANSI Emulation – base 10: if similarity with time-domain filters is
important (before 8A, only possible in Signature Processing with the ‘ANSI
Emulation’ option set in the setup).
 ANSI Emulation – base 2: for compatibility with e.g. CADA-X data
Note: Whatever the option chosen, the data (from 8A on) will always be
annotated with appropriate ‘Octave ratio’, ‘Octave filter type’ and ‘Octave
domain’ properties.
5.4.5.2.1.3.3 Minimum spectral lines for octave band

You can specify the minimum number of spectral lines (from 1 - 5) for an
octave band.
5.4.5.2.1.4 Offline Octave filtering optimization
A checkbox enables the optimization of the real-time octave filtering when used
in Offline mode.
This optimization generates synthetic data in negative time, with physical

content, such that the octave filters have enough extra time to stabilize in order
to give reliable results from t=0.00s.
This optimization is transparent and no extra action is required for its use.
5.4.5.2.1.5 GPS Options
It is possible to extract the GPS data from a throughput file and to export it to
NMEA or KML file by means of the popup menu in the navigator. Each GPS
point can be exported or just a reduced set of points can be exported. The type
of reduction can be defined in this pane. The reduction can be based on
equidistant distance intervals or on equidistant time intervals.
5.4.5.2.1.5.1 Filter Setting
5.4.5.2.1.5.2 Minimum time between points
5.4.5.2.1.5.3 Minimum distance between points
Section 5.4.5.2.2 Options - Add-ins tab

In the Options dialog, use this tab to set the default “Save list of active add-ins
when the application is closed” option.
If this option is “on” your active add-ins will be saved in the application
configuration files so that they will remain active when you restart the
application.
If this option is “off” your active add-ins will not be saved. All Test.Lab add-ins
are given in the Chapter on “Add-ins”. (see "Add-ins dialog..." on page 234)
You can load add-ins using the Tools Add-ins menu entry.
5.4.5.2.2.1 Save list of active add-ins when the application is closed
Uncheck the checkbox if you do not want to save the list of active add-ins when
the application is closed. By default, this option is checked "on" and all your
16A 241
active add-ins will be saved so that they will remain active when you restart the
application.
Section 5.4.5.2.3 Options - Data tab

5.4.5.2.3.1 External Data Options
5.4.5.2.3.1.1 Throughput File Format
Here you can choose if you want to use TDF or LDSF file format for
throughput files.
5.4.5.2.3.1.2 Throughput Bind Strategy
Here you can set the coupling strategy between the Test.Lab run and and its
associated TDF(s).
 Semi-Embedded
With this coupling strategy, the TDF is located and stored outside of the LMS
project file (*.lms) but in the same directory.
The Test.Lab database and the TDF will behave as they are one and the
association (naming and placement) between the run and the TDF will always
be consistent.
The "Semi-Embedded" option is the default strategy.
This option means that:
 the name of the TDF (and its directories) and the name of the run (and its
project/section) will always be the same.
 the TDF (starting with the project directory) will always be placed in the
same directory as the Test.Lab database.
 when you use Rename Section, the corresponding directory will also be
renamed.
 when you do a Save As of an existing project, all throughput data that was
semi-embedded in the original project, will be duplicated in separate TDF
files.
 Linked
With this coupling strategy, the TDF is located and stored outside of the LMS
project file (*.lms) but in a location that you can specify.
Select this option, if you want to share your data files with other people. You
can then use the Browse... button to search for and find the location you
require.
The coupling between the Test.Lab run and the TDF will be set when the run
was created. From then on, this link may or may not be consistent.
This option means:
 when originally created, there is a relationship between the naming of the
TDF (and the directories) and the naming of the run (and project/section).
But when a Save As or Rename is executed, the naming is not consistent
anymore.
 when doing a Save As, the linked throughput data will not be duplicated.

The new Test.Lab project will still refer to the original TDF's.
Note: The corresponding TDF of a specific run can be found by displaying the
link (path) that is stored in the throughput folder of that run. When you lose the
link by, for example, copying the TDF, you can always restore the link
manually.
5.4.5.2.3.1.3 Waterfall Bind Strategy

Here you can set the coupling strategy between the Test.Lab run and its
associated waterfall data file(s).
 Embedded
With this coupling strategy, the waterfalls are stored inside the LMS project
(.lms) file.
The "Embedded" option is the default strategy.
 Semi-Embedded
With this coupling strategy, the waterfalls are stored in a waterfall database
(.wfs) file outside of the LMS project file (*.lms) but in the same directory.
The external storage of waterfalls applies to fixed and synchronous sampled
waterfall data, in both acquisition and throughput processing applications.
The Test.Lab database and the Waterfall data file will behave as they are one
and the association (naming and placement) between the run and the Waterfall
data will always be consistent.
This location is the {project_name\section_name\run_name} folder.
This means that:
 the name of the Waterfall data file (and its directories) and the name of the
run (and its project/section) will always be the same.
 the Waterfall data file (starting with the project directory) will always be
placed in the same directory as the Test.Lab database.
 when you use Rename Section, the corresponding directory will also be
renamed.
 when you do a Save As of an existing project, all waterfall data that was
semi-embedded in the original project, will be duplicated in separate
Waterfall data files.
 Linked
With this coupling strategy, the waterfalls are stored in a waterfall data (.wfs)
file outside of the LMS project file (*.lms) but in a directory that you can
specify.
Select this option, if you want to share your data files with other people. You
can then use the Browse... button to search for and find the location you
require.
The external storage of waterfalls applies to fixed and synchronous sampled
waterfall data, in both acquisition and throughput processing applications.
The coupling between the Test.Lab run and the Waterfall data file will be set
16A 243
when the run was created. From then on, this link may or may not be consistent.
This means:
 when originally created, there is a relationship between the naming of the
waterfall data file (and the directories) and the naming of the run (and
project/section).
But when a Save As or Rename is executed, the naming is not consistent
anymore.
 when doing a Save As, the linked waterfall data will not be duplicated.
The new Test.Lab project will still refer to the original waterfall data files.
Note: The corresponding Waterfall data of a specific run can be found by

displaying the link (path) that is stored in the waterfall folder of that run.
When you lose the link by, for example, copying the waterfall data file, you
can always restore the link manually.
5.4.5.2.3.1.4 File Location

This defines the directory where the TDF (and Waterfall data) files are placed
when the TDF (and Waterfall) bind strategy is set to Linked. It can be
anywhere on your system and network.
5.4.5.2.3.2 Universal File Options
5.4.5.2.3.2.1 Write Cada-X compatible component info
This option should be used if you want to export data to universal file that can
be readable by CADA-X. Otherwise the universal file will contain data that
does not meet the need of the CADA-X comp:node:direction format with only 4
characters for comp and node.
5.4.5.2.3.3 Time Data Options
5.4.5.2.3.3.1 Max. number samples for calculations
This shows the network limit for processing data as the maximum number of
samples. This number must be at least 10,000 and no more than 999,999,999.
The default number is 1,000,000 samples.
5.4.5.2.3.3.2 Max. number samples for reporting
5.4.5.2.3.4 LDSF Saving Mode
Secured saving during acquisition: when this option is checked on, every 5s
during the acquisition, the throughput data will be saved to disc. If the
application would crash during the measurement, the LDSF file should be
intact, containing all the data except for max last 5s.
Elaborated overview for quick viewing: when this option is checked on, extra
statistics about the LDSF file will be saved that then will be used for quick
overview of the complete trace.
5.4.5.2.3.4.1 Secured saving during acquisition
5.4.5.2.3.4.2 Elaborated overview for quick viewing
Section 5.4.5.2.4 Options - File Locations tab

In the Options dialog, this shows the list of directories where particular folders
and file types are located by default. These default locations were set during the

Software installation. Test.Lab has 3 types of folders for storing configuration

files, layout files, templates and other files.
Central folder
Upon installation, all default files are placed in the <installation dir>\central
folder. All files in this folder were placed there during the installation. You can
not change the location of this folder. Files in this folder should never be
modified.
Local Folder
On the local folder, all configuration and layout files are stored for the user. The
default location of configuration files is by default on ‘one local folder’ (e.g.
D:/LMSLocalXXX/user). You can choose to have this default location different
per file type – with the radio button in Local Folder.
Group Folder
On the local folder, all configuration and layout files are stored for the user.
5.4.5.2.4.1 Group Folder
This folder is hierarchically placed between the central and local directory. It
allows a group of users to make use of an extra (write protected) folder without
modifying the central directory. A group folder can contain configuration files,
as well as project templates, documentation templates, picture layouts, print
formats, search criteria, data sets and processing sets.
When Test.Lab needs to open a configuration file, it will search for it in the
local folder. If the file is not locally available, Test.Lab will look for it in the
group folder, and then in the central folder. A modified configuration is always
saved locally. When Test.Lab needs any other file (print formats, picture
layouts, etc.), it makes a combination of all the files available, starting with the
local one, then the group one and then the central one. In this way, the result is a
union of all the items in the 3 files.
Example: A user wants to select a print format. Test.Lab makes a list of the print
formats available on the local folder, adds the print formats of the group folder
and then adds the ones of the central directory. In the case a print format with
the same name exists, both on the local and on group folder, only the one on the
local folder is available in the list. A modified print format is always saved in
the local folder.
Note: Test.Lab never copies files to the group folder. This has to be done by a
system administrator.
Upon installation, all default files are placed in the <installation

dir>\central folder. All files in this folder were placed there during the
installation. You can not change the location of this folder. Files in this folder
should never be modified.
5.4.5.2.4.1.1 Use Group Folder
16A 245
Check this box, if you want to share files with other people. You can then use
the Browse... button to search for and find the location you require.
5.4.5.2.4.2 Local Folder
This displays the directory where your data projects are stored. This location
was set during the Software installation. You can define one location for all
your files or a location for each file type.
5.4.5.2.4.2.1 Define one Local Folder
Click this radiobutton if you want to have all your files in the same place i.e. in
just one local folder. You can then use the Browse... button to search for and
find the location you require.
5.4.5.2.4.2.2 Define Local Folders per File Type
Click this radio button if you want to be able to define a different location for
each file type i.e. a local folder for each file type. You can then select a File
Type and use the Browse... button to search for and find the project location
you require.
5.4.5.2.4.2.2.1 Project
A project file is a file with the extension lms that contains all the data that
belong to the project. The location defined alongside represents the directory
where projects will be saved by default. Click the project entry, then enter a new
location in the input field or browse for one in order to change the location.
5.4.5.2.4.2.2.2 Project Template
A Project Template file is a file with the extension tpl that contains a starting
setup that will be used whenever a new project is created. The location defined
alongside represents the directory where this template will be searched for by
default. When a new project is created using the File menu, then you can select
which template to use. When clicking on the icon, then the default
template on this directory will be used. Click the Project Template entry, then
enter a new location in the input field or browse for one in order to change the
directory.
5.4.5.2.4.2.2.3 Memo Inventory
The Memo Inventory contains the document templates for projects, sections and
runs as well as the text file that defines which template is which. The location
defined alongside represents the directory where the templates and the text file
are located, and from where they will be accessed when a new document is
created from a template.
You can change the directory from which the templates will be retrieved by
clicking on the Memo Inventory entry, then entering a new location in the input
field or browsing for one.
5.4.5.2.4.2.2.4 Other local files and folders
The location of all the other files and folders can be defined.
You can change the location by clicking on the Other local files and folders
entry, then entering a new location in the input field or browsing for one.

Note: Any changes will be lost if another tab is selected before the Apply
button is pressed.
5.4.5.2.4.3 File access priority

For reading configuration files, the default priority rule is:
Local folder -> group folder -> central folder
Configuration files will first be read from local folder; if not found there, it
looks at the group folder (if defined); if not found there, it looks at the central
configuration folder.
When having selected ““When accessing files, prioritize group folder”): the
priority rule is:
Group folder -> local folder -> central folder.
To make sure that the correct (group) settings are also used in case of a network
failure, the group folder is copied to the local folder.
Section 5.4.5.2.5 Options - Sorting tab

In the Options dialog, this allows items in the Test.Lab browser tree to be
sorted.
Click the next to an item in the browser tree to view its contents. By
continuing to open up the tree, you can display all the items it contains, such as
folders, subfolders and files.
Different types of items will have different icons.
All other file types e.g. Word or Excel will have the unknown file icon.
Three groups of items can be sorted:

 Files and Databases
Files are those items that the application does not recognize. Databases
(known link) are those items that can be accessed by Test.Lab. Databases
contain folders for storing data.
 Folders
Folders (usually yellow folder icon) are those objects that can contain
subfolders and files for storing data.
 Data
Data items are files containing data.
Check the box alongside the sorting method you want to use.
Grouped means that items will be sorted and grouped together by file type (e.g.
LMS CADA-X project databases) but not into alphabetical (file_name) order.
16A 247
Grouped sorting method
Alphabetical sorting means that they will be sorted and placed in alphabetical
order regardless of their file type.
Alphabetical sorting method
Sorting items by both methods together means that file types are grouped
together and, within each type, files are put in alphabetical order.
Both (grouped and alphabetical) sorting methods together
Note: Unchecking the sorting method boxes will unsort the items to their
original order.
Section 5.4.5.2.6 Options - Filtering tab

In the Options dialog, this allows items in the browser tree to be filtered or
hidden. This reduces the information displayed and makes finding your desired
data files much easier and faster.
By default all supported file types are enabled in the dialog meaning that all file
types will be shown in the navigator. You can filter out some file types by
disabling the checkbox before each file type. You can disable or enable all file
types by clicking on the buttons “Show All” or “Hide All”. However it is never
possible to disable our own file type format “Test.Lab.”

Section 5.4.5.2.7 Options - Units tab

In the Options dialog, this allows the active unit system in which your data will
be expressed to be selected.
Note: Any changes you make to the Active Unit System will only become valid
after you restart the application.
Section 5.4.5.2.8 Options - Displays tab

In the Options dialog, use this tab to make changes to the default display
options.
Note: Any changes you make here will only become valid after you restart the
application.
5.4.5.2.8.1 3D Geometry Display

5.4.5.2.8.1.1 Disable Overlay Optimization
Check the box to disable the overlay optimization.
Note: Changes to the Disable Overlay Optimization will only become valid
after the application is restarted.
5.4.5.2.8.1.2 Use Quad Projection American

Check the box to use American projection in place of European projection as
the type of quad projection.
Note: Changes to the type of projection will only become valid after the
application is restarted.
5.4.5.2.8.1.3 Use Cada-X Triad Colors

Check the box to use Cada-X colors in place of Test.Lab colors. This changes
the color that is assigned to the X, Y and Z axis.
Color
Test.Lab Cada-X X-axis
Green Red Y-axis
Blue Green Z-axis
Red Blue
Display colors
5.4.5.2.8.2 2D Function Displays
5.4.5.2.8.2.1 Overall level of octave display based on
You can choose to use the Total Range or the Visible Range of your data to
16A 249
calculate the Overall level of the octave display.

5.4.5.2.8.2.2 Default Octave Trace Type
The checkbox: "Always use trace type 'Block Outlines' for octave data" is
checked by default. By unchecking this option you can use the display setting
'Curve Property Schema' to display other trace types per curve.
5.4.5.2.8.2.3 Default Trace Style Scheme
You can make changes to the default trace style scheme.
Use the Defaults button to undo all your changes and return to the original
default values.
Use the Change.. button to schedule the Default Trace Properties dialog in
which you can define the default properties of the curve used to draw the traces.
5.4.5.2.8.2.3.1 Line
You can choose styles for the lines from the Trace style, Color, Pattern and
Width dropdown menus.
5.4.5.2.8.2.3.2 Fill
This allows you to select the color used for the selected curves from the Fill
Color dropdown menu.
5.4.5.2.8.2.3.3 Marker
This only becomes sensitive when you have selected markers as the trace style
and pressed the Apply button. You can then select the size of the markers from
the MarkerSize dropdown menu.
5.4.5.2.8.2.3.4 Annotation
This allows you to add a legend to the selected curve.
5.4.5.2.8.2.4 Optimised & Free Y limits based on:
You can change the range for displaying both the Optimised and Free limits for
the Y axis.
You can select either visible range or total range from the dropdown menu.
Section 5.4.5.2.9 Options - License Server tab

5.4.5.2.9.1 License Server Options
This displays the name of the current license server.
5.4.5.2.9.2 Timer Options
This allows you to set a license curfew that returns all licenses at the specified
moment. At the curfew time, a warning is issued which allows the user to keep
the licenses. If five minutes expire without any reaction on the warning, all
applications are shut down and the licenses are returned. Optionally all projects
can be saved automatically. An administrator can force the curfew by using the
group folder mechanism to set the timer options, and the ToolsOptions locking
mechanism to make this Timer Options insensitive for the user.

Note: The Timer Options has no effect when a control loop is active at the
specified time or. while measuring or processing data. Licensing and Timer
changes will become valid after the application is restarted.
Section 5.4.5.2.10 Options - Tec.Manager tab

In the Options dialog, this tab displays the Tec.Manager settings.
All the options are described in the Tec.Manager tab (see "The Tec.Manager
Options" on page 225) document.
Section 5.4.5.2.11 Options - Sound Settings tab

5.4.5.2.11.1 Sound Player
5.4.5.2.11.1.1 Use internal sound player
Select this option, if you want to use an internal sound player.
5.4.5.2.11.1.2 Use external sound player
Select this option, if you want to use an external sound player. You can then use
the Browse... button to search for and find the player you require.
5.4.5.2.11.2 WAV Settings
5.4.5.2.11.2.1 Fade In / Out
Check this box, if you want a smoother start (and end) when you playback your
sound files.
5.4.5.2.11.2.2 Fading Time
You can specify the time (in milliseconds) for fading in and out when you
playback your sound files.
The default time is 100 msec.

5.4.5.2.11.2.3 Bits / Sample
You can specify the number of bits per sample for determining the output
precision when you playback your sound files.
The default number is 16 Bits.
Section 5.4.5.2.12 Options - Network Hub tab

In the Options dialog, this tab allows you to change the StartPoint Server that
Test.Lab connects to, for the Network Hub Add-In.
5.4.5.2.12.1 StartPoint Server
5.4.5.2.12.1.1 StartPoint server computer name
This displays the name of the system that you defined during the Software
installation.
5.4.5.2.12.1.2 StartPoint server port number
The displays the port number that is used by the system.
16A 251
Note: StartPoint Server changes will only become valid after you restart the
application.
5.4.5.2.12.2 Network
5.4.5.2.12.2.1 Timeout
This shows the time in seconds that the network will wait, when a command
cannot be successfully completed, before canceling the command.
Section 5.4.5.2.13 Options - Frontend

In the Options dialog, this displays the current Frontend settings.
After you connect a Frontend to your computer, and power them up, you should
restart your computer.
Test.Lab will automatically detect the parameters relating to the Frontend

settings (Host ID and Target ID) when you start Test.Lab for the first time.
These parameter settings will be suitable for using Test.Lab in most cases.
However, you may have to change them in some cases (e.g. when using 2
frontends or installing a new device).
5.4.5.2.13.1 Frontend Connection Options
5.4.5.2.13.1.1 Use SPTI
SPTI is a Small computer system interface (SCSI) Pass Through Interface card
used for connecting your PC to the Frontend.
5.4.5.2.13.1.1.1 Host Adapter ID
This is the SPTI port number.
5.4.5.2.13.1.1.2 Target ID
This is the SPTI ID number.
5.4.5.2.13.1.1.3 Scan button
The [Scan] button starts the Frontend Scan Tool for helping you to detect and
configure the SPTI settings.
5.4.5.2.13.1.2 Use ASPI
ASPI is an Advanced small computer system interface (SCSI) Programming
Interface card used for connecting your PC to the Frontend.
5.4.5.2.13.1.2.1 Host Adapter ID
This is the ASPI port number.
5.4.5.2.13.1.2.2 Target ID
This is the ASPI ID number.
5.4.5.2.13.1.2.3 Scan button
configure the ASPI settings.
5.4.5.2.13.1.3 Use UTP

UTP is an Unshielded Twisted Pair cable for connecting your PC to the

Frontend.
5.4.5.2.13.1.3.1 IP Address
This is the UTP IP address.
5.4.5.2.13.1.3.2 Scan button
configure the UTP settings.
5.4.5.2.13.2 FIFO Settings
This is the FIFO (first-in, first-out) buffer size on your computer for handling
data processing requests so that the oldest request is handled next.
Note: Changes you make to the SCI and FIFO settings will only become valid
after you restart the application.
5.4.5.2.13.2.1 Fifo Size

The default is 20,000,000 bytes. You can increase this up to 40,000,000 bytes
for working with high throughput rates or with large numbers of channels.
5.4.5.2.13.3 Optical Cable Length
5.4.5.2.13.3.1 Cable Length
Here you can specify the length of 1 optical cable when you are using a
master/slave frontend setup. The length of this cable will be used to calculate
the delay of the signals between 2 frames to synchronize them.
Section 5.4.5.2.14 Options - Font Size
Note: You will need to restart the application before any changes you make to
the font size will become active.
5.4.5.2.14.1 Measure Sheet Font Size

Changes the font size in the right hand pane in the Measure sheet.
Note: The Font Size you select here will only affect the text in the right hand
pane in the Measure worksheet. It will not affect the text in any other pane or
worksheet.
Section 5.4.5.2.15 Options - Attributes Tab

5.4.5.2.15.1 Extended Info
5.4.5.2.15.1.1 Always include extended project / section information
Including extended project / section information will make an extra minor tab
available. This Extended Documentation worksheet will allow you to select and
edit a htm- or html-template. The attributes will then become available in the
Documentation worksheet.
5.4.5.2.15.1.2 HTML template folder
16A 253
This field specifies the path of the folder that can contain different Tec.Manager
templates (an .htm or .html file containing meta-information).
5.4.5.2.15.1.3 [Browse...] button
This schedules the Select template folder dialog for specifying the location and
name of the template folder.
5.4.5.2.15.2 Section User Attributes
When creating a new section, copy the User Attribute values from the active
section.
Enabling this option will make sure that when a new section is created, the
attribute values from the active section will be copied.
Note: Please make sure the application is restarted to ensure that the changes
will become valid.
5.4.5.2.15.3 Run User Attributes

When this option is enabled, we will archive the existing user attributes at run
level during the creating of a new run. User attributes that exist at project and
section level will be copied into the run. All these attributes at run level will
have a prefix “Project:” or “Section:”.
Only when this option is selected the attributes at run level are editable by
right-clicking on a run and choosing the entry “Edit User Attributes”. This
command can be found either in the data explorer or in the navigator.
The same functionalities are supported when a run is copied and pasted, we will
also copy the user attributes at run level.
Section 5.4.5.3 Tec. Manager Search
Section 5.4.5.4 Relabel...

This lets you define how the labels (for blocks, texts and projects) will appear in
the browser tree
Section 5.4.5.5 Add New Attribute...

This opens a dialog that allows you to set new documentation attributes.
Section 5.4.5.6 Load Attributes List...

This allows you to load an attributes list into your project.
Section 5.4.5.7 Save Attributes List...

This allows you to save your current attributes list.

Section 5.4.5.8 Channel Setup Visibility

This schedules the Channel Setup Visibility dialog. Here you can define the
fields that will be displayed in the Channel Setup worksheet and the names that
will describe these fields. This entry is only available in those applications that
use the Channel id worksheet.
Section 5.4.5.8.1 Source field names

This list contains all possible fields that are used in channel descriptions.
Section 5.4.5.8.2 Selected fields

This list contains all fields that will appear in the Channel Setup worksheet. It
contains two columns. The left hand one shows the source field name, which
can not be altered. The right hand column contains the name that will appear in
worksheet and which can be defined by the user.
To change the name, right mouse click in the field to display a popup menu.
Select Clear and then enter the new name, either using the keyboard or by
using Copy and Paste. Finally click on OK to close the dialog and update the
channel list.
Section 5.4.5.8.3 Add

This places a field selected from the left list at the bottom of the “Selected
fields” list on the right.
Section 5.4.5.8.4 Remove

This removes a field selected from the “Selected fields” list on the right. This
field will no longer appear in the worksheet.
To remove a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in
front of the row).
Section 5.4.5.8.5 Replace

This replaces the selected field in the right hand list with the selected field in the
left hand list.
It also replaces the former decorated name in the right hand column of the
Selected fields list with the newly entered name.
To replace a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in
front of the row).
Section 5.4.5.8.6 Insert after

This inserts the selected field from the left hand list after the selected field in the
16A 255
right hand list.
To insert a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in front
of the row).
Section 5.4.5.8.7 Insert before

This inserts the selected field from the left hand list before the selected field in
the right hand list.
To insert a field, you must select the entire row (by clicking the number in front
of the row).
Section 5.4.5.8.8 OK
When the right hand list is complete with the number of fields, their order and
names as required, this button closes the dialog and updates the table in the
worksheet.
Section 5.4.5.8.9 Cancel

This closes the dialog without making any changes to the channel table.
Section 5.4.5.9 Reference Channel Setup Options...

This schedules the Reference Channel Setup Options dialog that enables you to
automatically save and load a reference channel setup when activating a section.
Following options are available:
Section 5.4.5.10 Data Source Editor

This schedules the Data Source Editor in which ODBC data sources can be
selected for use in the Channel Setup Worksheet. This option is only available
in those applications using the Channel setup sheet.
Section 5.4.5.11 Workbook Configuration...

This schedules a dialog with two lists, one showing all the worksheets contained
in the Workbook and the other showing all visible worksheets. It allows you to
indicate which worksheets you want to make visible.
Section 5.4.5.12 User Applications

This allows you to start any external application from within the Test.Lab user
interface. This concerns all files of type .exe, .com or shortcut that have been
put on the following directory: <installation
directory>\central\UserApplications

Section 5.4.6 Window
Section 5.4.6.1 Cascade

This arranges all project windows on the desktop in a cascading fashion.
Section 5.4.6.2 Tile

This re-sizes all project windows on the desktop so that they are all visible and
arranged as tiles.
Section 5.4.6.3 Open applications

The remaining entries in this menu list the windows (workbooks / projects) that
you have open on the desktop. A check mark indicates the active project.
Section 5.4.7 Help
Section 5.4.7.1 Contents and Index

This schedules the Help window on the “Home” page from which help on all
aspects of the software can be accessed.
Section 5.4.7.2 Application

This provides the online help for the software.
Section 5.4.7.3 Worksheet

This provides help on the currently active worksheet.
Section 5.4.7.4 PDF Manual

This provides the printable version of the online help for the software.
Section 5.4.7.5 Theory

This schedules the Theory documents.
Section 5.4.7.6 LMS on the Web

This entry provides a menu from where you can link directly either to the Home
Page of the web site or Test.Lab support page.
16A 257
Section 5.4.7.7 About Test.Lab

This schedules a dialog with the current version and build number.

Section 5.5 The Desktop button bar
 Toolbars (on page 259)

 New project button (on page 261)
 Open Project button (on page 262)
 Save Project button (on page 262)
 Active Section button (on page 262)
 Create New Section button (on page 262)
 Delete Section button (on page 262)
 Rename Section button (on page 262)
 Copy button (on page 263)
 Paste button (on page 263)
 Print Preview button (on page 263)
 Print button (on page 263)
 Open Data Explorer button (on page 263)
 Help button (on page 264)
 FFT button (on page 264)
 FFT Format Conversion button (on page 264)
 Averaged Autopower Spectrum button (on page 264)
 Curve fitting button (on page 264)
 Smoothing button (on page 264)
 Differentiation button (on page 265)
 Integration button (on page 265)
 Acoustic weighting button (on page 265)
 Add button (on page 265)
 Subtract button (on page 265)
 Multiply button (on page 265)
 Divide button (on page 266)
 SRS calculation button (on page 266)
 Settings dialog button (on page 266)
 Overwrite source data button (on page 266)
 Tec.Manager button (on page 266)
 Average button (on page 267)
 Envelope Max button (on page 267)
 Envelope Min button (on page 267)
 Standard Deviation button (on page 267)
 3 Sigma (3 times standard deviation) button (on page 267)
Section 5.5.1 Toolbars
16A 259
You can toggle the presence of available toolbars using the View Toolbars
menu.
There are three toolbars:
Section 5.5.1.1 Standard
Standard toolbar
Standard toolbar options are:
 New Project (on page 261)
 Open Project (on page 262)
 Save Project (on page 262)
 Active Section (on page 262)
 Create New Section (on page 262)
 Delete Section (on page 262)
 Rename Section (on page 262)
 Copy (on page 263)
 Paste (on page 263)
 Print Preview (on page 263)
 Print (on page 263)
 Open Data Explorer (on page 263)
 Help (on page 264)
Section 5.5.1.2 Conditioning
Conditioning toolbar
Conditioning (see "Conditioning toolbar" on page 268) refers to the functions

that can be performed on the data that you have on display in the Navigator

display windows.
Conditioning toolbar options are:
 FFT (on page 264)
 FFT Format Conversion (on page 264)
 Averaged Autopower Spectrum (on page 264)
 Curve fitting (on page 264)
 Smoothing (on page 264)
 Differentiation (on page 265)
 Integration (on page 265)
 Acoustic weighting (on page 265)
 Add (on page 265)
 Subtract (on page 265)
 Multiply (on page 265)
 Divide (on page 266)
 SRS calculation (on page 266)
 Settings dialog (on page 266)
 Overwrite source data (on page 266)
 Tec.Manager (on page 266)
New Project
This enables you to open a new default project (NewProject.lms in the

<installation directory>\central\Install folder).
If you want to start from a user-defined default project, change the default
project and store it in the Local or Group folder. (see "Options - File Locations
tab" on page 244)
16A 261
In the desktop a new window will open containing the new project. This new
project will be assigned the name “ProjectX” where X is the number of projects
that have been opened and it becomes the active project. All previously-opened
projects remain open.
Note: To open a project with a specific project template you have to use File
New on the menubar.
Open Project
This opens an existing project. It schedules the “Project dialog” in which you
can specify the location and the name of the project you want to open.
Save Project
This saves the current state of the active project. By default, projects are saved
on the directory specified in the dialog obtained by selecting the “File
Locations” tab in Options from the Tools menu.
Active Section
This displays the active section and allows you to select and open an existing
section using the dropdown menu.
Create New Section
This creates a new section based on the current section setup.
Delete Section
This deletes a complete section and also all the data it contains is deleted too.
Rename Section
This renames a section

Copy
This copies an item and places it on the clipboard.
Paste
This pastes an item currently on the clipboard.
Print Preview
This provides you with a preview of the current worksheet as it will be printed
according to the current print setup. The functions are as described for the
Print Preview (on page 228) function from the File menu.
Print
This schedules a print job of the current worksheet. The first page of the
worksheet, as it appears on your monitor, will be printed.
Open Data Explorer
This schedules the Data Explorer (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on page
280) dialog that provides you with two views on your data - a hierarchical tree
view and a detail view (as in Windows Explorer) of the data in your projects.
You can drag specific data from the Explorer into a display window and also
perform certain operations on it.
The online data root folder provides the user with data that is updated while
doing the acquisition. Data is available for each activated domain: Fixed
Sampling, Real Time Octaves and Order Tracked. For each of them 3 kinds of
data will be available:
 Monitoring data: This data will update when the system is armed. Updates
happen on a regular base and are independent from the selected tracking
settings. Time history data shows a time overview of the channel over a
longer period. This period can be defined in the More… dialog of the F8 tab
in measure sheet.
 Instantaneous data: This data will update whenever a new tracking point is
detected. It shows the data that is related with that tracking point.
 Time/Runup/Rundown/Event/Stationary data: the name of this node will
16A 263
depend on the selected tracking settings. The data shows in this node is the
result of all tracking points found since the start of the measurement up to
now. The data is updated whenever a new tracking point was found. At the
end of the measurement, this data will be equal to the processed data that
will be saved in the project.
Online data also contains the results of compare runs when this add-in is loaded.
It allows to the results of an averaging immediately at the end of each
measurement. It also allows to compare the averaged result of previous
measurements with the currently acquired data.
Help
This schedules the Online help on the “Home” page, from which all the
documentation can be accessed.
FFT
This computes the frequency spectrum (see "FFT" on page 270) of selected
time data curves. The results are to be found in the conditioning folder. A
frequency section will replace the time data.
FFT Format Conversion
This format conversion process (see "FFT Format Conversion" on page 270)
changes the frequency spectrum of selected time data curves to a particular
format.
Averaged Autopower Spectrum
This averaging process (see "Averaged Autopower Spectrum" on page 271)

computes the mean spectrum of selected time data curves.
Curve fitting
This performs a curve fitting procedure (see "Curve fitting" on page 273) of
the required degree. The degree is specified in the dialog, if the interactive icon
is set on. Otherwise the last used setting is used.

Smoothing
This smoothing process (see "Smoothing" on page 273) smoothes the

selected curves with the specified exponential smoothing factor. This is
specified in the dialog, if the interactive icon is set on. Otherwise the last used
setting is used.
Differentiation
This process differentiates the data (see "Differentiation" on page 274) in

the selected curves either once or twice. This number of differentiations is
specified in the dialog, if the interactive setting icon is on. Otherwise the last
used setting is used.
Integration
This integrates the data (see "Differentiation" on page 274) in the selected
curves either once or twice. This number of integrations is specified in the
dialog, if the interactive icon is set on. Otherwise the last used setting is used.
Acoustic weighting
This applies acoustic weighting (see "Acoustic weighting" on page 274) to

the data in the selected curves.
Add
This adds a specified scalar value (see "Scalar math functions" on page
275) to the data in the selected curves.
Subtract
This subtracts a specified scalar value (see "Scalar math functions" on page
275) from the data in the selected curves.
Multiply
This multiplies the values (see "Scalar math functions" on page 275) of the
16A 265
data in the selected curves by a specified scalar quantity.
Divide
This divides the values (see "Scalar math functions" on page 275) of the
data in the selected curves by a specified scalar amount.
SRS calculation
This calculates the SRS (see "SRS Calculation" on page 275) or Shock
Response Spectrum from an acceleration/time signal.
Settings dialog
When this setting is on, then a Settings dialog will appear in which any
parameters that are required for the function can be set. If this option is off then
the previous or the default value will be taken when you open this for the first
time.
Overwrite source data
When this setting is on, then the computed curve will replace the source curve
in the display. This will be necessary if the function is of a different format to
the source, for example the FFT of a time curve. In this case it is recommended
to work with two display windows, one of which has a copy of the source curve
in it. If this option is off then the computed curve will be added to the display,
with the source curve still visible. In both cases the resulting function can be
retrieved from the "Conditioning" folder.
Tec.Manager
This icon only becomes sensitive and so accessible after you load the
Tec.Manager Hub add-in.
Select Tools Options... Add-ins... and check the Tec.Manager Hub

checkbox to load this add-in.
The Tec.Manager icon schedules the LMS Tec.Manager application. You can
use LMS Tec.Manager to search for data and to insert the results into the

LMSTest.Lab Desktop browser tree.
Average
This option is only available with the Run Data Averaging & Comparison
Organizer Add-in.
The average function averages the values of a particular type of section over a
number of runs.
You can specify the averaging method in the Data options panel of the Compare
runs worksheet.
Envelope Max
Organizer Add-in.
The envelope max function provides you with an envelope function that
indicates which section is making the most significant contribution at different
stages in the run.
Envelope Min
Organizer Add-in.
The envelope min function provides you with an envelope function that
indicates which section is making the least significant contribution at different
stages in the run.
Standard Deviation
Organizer Add-in.
The Standard Deviation option calculates two curves; the standard deviation
added to the average values and the standard deviation subtracted from the
average values. This indicates how much the values of the sections of the
different runs vary from the mean value.
16A 267
3 Sigma (3 times standard deviation)
Organizer Add-in.
The 3 Sigma or 3 times standard deviation option calculates two curves; 3

times the standard deviation added to the average values and 3 times the
standard deviation subtracted from the average values. This indicates how much
the values of the sections of the different runs vary from the mean value.
Click the icons in the averaging toolbar (Average, Envelope Min or Envelope
Max) for those operations you wish to carry out on the runs for comparison.
Section 5.6 Conditioning toolbar
Conditioning refers to the functions that can be performed on the data that you
have on display in the Navigator display windows. It enables you to view
various aspects of the data and to adapt it to a suitable form required for your
report. The results of conditioning can be viewed immediately in a display, but
are also retained in the active section in the current project. These results will
then be saved in the active section of the project, unless specifically deleted.
To delete the results of conditioning:
First, select the file in the browser tree of the worksheet (or in data selection
using the Data Data Explorer menu).
Then right click the file and select Delete.
Detailed Information on the conditioning functions (on page 270) is provided

in this document.
Section 5.6.1 To condition displayed data
Step 1
Select the layout that you want to use, either from the favorites buttons or the
drop down menu.
If you are going to generate new functions that are not compatible with the
source data (time source and frequency result for example), then it may be
useful to select a layout that contains two windows; one in which the source
data will be retained and the other in which the corresponding conditioning
function will be displayed.
Step 2
Load the data into (both) windows, by dragging it from the browser tree.

Step 3
Check that the Settings dialog icon is depressed, i.e. set to “on”.
This means that a dialog will appear in which any parameters that are required
for the function can be set. These settings will be retained as the default for
further operations.
Step 4
Select the data curves in the display to which you want to apply the same
processing parameters. Left click to select a curve and use the Ctrl key to add to
the selection. Not all curves need to be selected.
Step 5
If you are going to perform an FFT, or Shock Response Analysis, then the result
will be incompatible with the source curves. You can choose therefore whether
to replace the source with the result or to retain the result in the processing
folder from where you can view it separately. To replace the source, click the
“Overwrite source data” icon “on”. Bear in mind that all curves in this
display will be removed in this case. In this situation it is recommended to use a
pair of windows, with the source data being retained in one and the processing
being performed in the other.
If you are performing a function where the Y axis of the result is compatible
with that of the source, then it is not necessary to replace the source. It can be
added to the display, overlaying the source, so you can have the “Overwrite
source data” icon set to “off”.
Step 6
Click on the conditioning function (see "Conditioning functions" on page 270)
icon that you want to use.
Step 7
Enter the required parameter value in the dialog if one is scheduled, and then
click on Apply to view the results. Conditioning will then be performed. Press
on OK to close the dialog and return you to the display.
The function(s) will be computed and displayed if the “overwrite source data”
setting is on.
Step 8
Go to the browser tree and open the “Processing X” folder in the current
project. In there you will see a number of data blocks that correspond to the
number of functions you have generated. These can be dragged into the display
in the normal way.
Step 9
Right clicking on the data block in the browser tree and you will obtain a popup
menu. Select Properties to obtain the Properties dialog box. Click on the
Details tab in which information relating to the displayed data can be seen.
Step 10
If you want to always use the function parameter than you just entered, then you
can switch "off" the interactive settings icon. This ensures that the same value
will be used as default until specifically changed - even if you quit the software
and then return.
Step 11
16A 269
If you do not wish to retain or save conditioned functions, Select them in the
browser tree (or Data Explorer), right click and then select Delete.
Section 5.6.2 Conditioning functions
This section provides information about each of the functions that can be
evaluated.
 FFT (on page 270)
 FFT Format Conversion (on page 270)
 Averaged Autopower Spectrum (on page 271)
 Curve fitting (on page 273)

 Smoothing on page 273
 Differentiation and Integration (see "Differentiation" on page 274)
 Acoustic weighting on page 274
 Scalar math functions (on page 275)
 SRS Calculation (on page 275)
Section 5.6.2.1 FFT
This computes the linear spectrum of a selected time data curve.

Any (time data)
Section 5.6.2.1.2 Input parameters

None. This is a simple FFT without user defined parameters.
Section 5.6.2.1.3 Resulting function

Complex block in amplitude plus phase format.
Section 5.6.2.2 FFT Format Conversion

This computes (or converts) the frequency spectra to a particular format. It is

particularly useful for comparing spectra from different sources by converting
them to the same format.

Time or Frequency domain data.

Amplitude scaling: peak / RMS / double sided.
These scaling modes, for a spectrum of a sine wave with an amplitude A, are
illustrated below.
Scaling modes of the frequency spectrum
Spectrum format: linear / power / PSD.
These formats for the autopower spectrum of a sine wave of amplitude A are
illustrated below.
Autopower spectrum formats
Autopower Format peak rms double sided

Linear
Power
PSD
Where = amplitude of the sine wave and = frequency resolution

Frequency spectrum with the specified scaling and format.
Section 5.6.2.3 Averaged Autopower Spectrum
16A 271
This computes the mean spectrum of selected time data curves.

Time / angle domain data.

Amplitude scaling: peak / RMS / double sided.
Spectrum format: linear / power / PSD.
Windowing method: Types of time windows available to reduce leakage

problems are Uniform / Hanning / Exponential / Force / Force-Exponential /
Blackman / Kaiser-Bessel / Flattop
BlockSize: Time signal data can contain a very large number of samples and the
resolution of the frequency spectrum can be very small. To improve the
resolution, the data is divided up into smaller blocks. These blocks are defined
by a blocksize that has a number of time samples.
Note: To achieve a high calculation performance the FFT algorithm requires

that the blocksize be a power of 2 (such as 2, 4, 8, ...., 512, 1024, 2048).
Overlap: Data blocks are overlapped to compensate for the effects of using time
windows. Applying a window means that the data at the window's edges is of
little use.
Number of averages
Specifying zero or no overlap means that each block will be processed
consecutively. Specifying a number of samples that overlap (as shown in the
diagram above), means that each new block will start where it overlaps the
previous one by the number of samples, f.e. specified by 50% of the total
number of samples in a block. The total number of blocks processed is the
number of averages. The overlap can be defined as number of samples.
The averaging type used is energy averaging.

The theory document provided on the software CD entitled “signal processing”

has more information on this topic.

Averaged frequency spectrum.
Section 5.6.2.4 Curve fitting

Any.

The degree of the polynomial being fitted to the data.
A degree of 0 will yield the DC level. A degree of 1 will yield a linear function.
Higher degrees will yield polynomial functions with the corresponding shape.

Complex block.
Section 5.6.2.5 Smoothing
(see "Smoothing" on page 273)
Returns the linear or exponential smoothing of a function.
The Exponential Averaging is expressed by the following formula:
The smoothing is once applied in the forward direction starting from the first
value in the data block and once in the backward direction starting from the last
value in the data block.
The final result is then the average of the data smoothed in the forward and in
the backward direction.
The Linear smoothing uses (except for the first and last sample) following
algorithm:
NewX(i) = (X(i-1)+2*X(i)+X(i+1))/4.
16A 273

Any.

Method : Linear or Exponential
Factor : Factor is the exponential factor. Weighting function between 0 and 1.0
implies no smoothing.
This parameter will be insensitive when the Linear method is selected.

Block with the smoothed data.
Section 5.6.2.6 Differentiation

Time data or frequency data. Differentiation and integration in time-domain on
time data and in frequency domain on frequency-data.

Single or double integration or differentiation once or twice.

Block with same X axis, different Y axis.
Section 5.6.2.7 Acoustic weighting
(see "Acoustic weighting" on page 274)
Applies a specified acoustic weighting to a selected function. Existing

weighting will be removed.

Any.

No change, Linear, A, B, C, D, AB, BC or User Defined.


The new-weighted version of the original data.
You can apply a user-defined weighting when you specify a reference

weighting block.
Section 5.6.2.8 Scalar math functions
These functions enable you to add, subtract, divide or multiply selected data by
a specified scalar amount.

Any.

Scalar amount.

Block with same X axis, different Y axis.
Section 5.6.2.9 SRS Calculation
The conditioning toolbar also allows to perform a Shock Response Spectrum

Calculation, i.e. a Shock Response Analysis.

Time signal data.

The parameters used in the SRS calculation dialog define a shock response
spectrum.
16A 275
Parameter Default setting

Minimum frequency 10 Hz
Maximum frequency 2000 Hz
Points per octave 6
SRS Q factor 10
Correction No correction
Instance Maximum
Amplitude Absolute
Dimension Abs. acceleration
SRA defaults

The SRS (shock response spectrum) of the original data.
Section 5.7 The Documentation worksheet
This worksheet allows you to create a set of documentation for both the project
and the sections within it. You can also select and edit a Tec.Manager template.
The attributes can be used in the Documentation worksheet.
Section 5.7.1 [Procedure] Project / Section info
 To create or edit documentation (see "[Procedure] To create or edit

documentation" on page 276)
 The User Attributes Grid (on page 277)
 The Notepad panel (on page 278)
 The Documentation List panel (see "The Attachments panel" on page 278)
 The Attachment panel (see "The Attachment Preview panel" on page 279)
Section 5.7.1.1 [Procedure] To create or edit documentation

Step 1
Choose whether you want to work with the documentation on the project level
or on the section level. If appropriate, select the required section.
Step 2
There are a number of ways in which you can create documentation to
accompany either the project or the section:

You can simply fill in the text in the notepad field.

You can attach documents or other files.
Choose which procedure you wish to follow.
Section 5.7.1.1.1 [Procedure] To fill in User Attribute values

All the User Attribute values that are stored in the project appear in the grid in
the User Attributes panel.
To edit an attribute value, double click on its corresponding Edit button to

open its “Edit Attribute” dialog where you can then enter the required value.
Note: When the extended project / section info is included you cannot modify
the attributes. All the edited fields in the template will respectively be copied to
the project and section info and can be used in the project.
Section 5.7.1.1.2 [Procedure] To create memo documents

Step 1
Click on the New from Template... button in the Documentation List panel.
The default template for a project or section document will appear in the
working area of the Attachment panel and the default name will appear in the
project or section list in the Documentation List panel.
Step 2
Double click on the document that is displayed in the Attachment panel work
area to open the appropriate application.
Step 3
Edit this document in the application. Close the application and save the
document directly to the project. The newly completed document appears in the
Attachment panel work area.
Section 5.7.1.1.3 [Procedure] To attach files

Step 1
Click on the Import button in the Documentation List panel to access the
“Open” dialog and then browse for the file that you wish to import. Then click
on the Open button.
Step 2
The file name will then appear in the Documentation List panel and a preview
of the file itself will appear in the Attachment panel work area. Double clicking
in the Attachment panel opens the file for editing. Closing it saves your
changes.
Section 5.7.1.2 The User Attributes Grid

This grid contains a list of key value pairs that are associated with either the
project or section. It consists of a “name”, “value” and “edit” columns. Right
clicking in this area opens a popup menu that allows you to add a new attribute.
16A 277
Section 5.7.1.2.1 Name

This column contains the names of the user attributes.
Section 5.7.1.2.2 Value

This column contains the values assigned to the attributes. Values can be edited
by clicking on their corresponding Edit buttons to access the appropriate “Edit
Attribute Value” dialog.
You may need to define User Attributes (see "[Procedure] To define a set of
User Attributes" on page 201).
Section 5.7.1.2.3 Edit

This column allows you to edit the values assigned to the attributes. These can
be edited by clicking on their corresponding Edit buttons to access the
appropriate “Edit Attribute Value ” dialog.
Section 5.7.1.3 The Notepad panel
Section 5.7.1.3.1 Notepad

This word processing field lets you add relevant project or section information
directly into the project or section. Entries can also be copied and pasted into
the Notepad panel.
Section 5.7.1.4 The Attachments panel
Section 5.7.1.4.1 The list of documents

All the files you have attached to or created for your documentation set are
listed here. Click on the file that you want to view or edit. Its contents will
appear in the Attachment panel. Double click on the displayed file to schedule
the appropriate application to edit it.
Section 5.7.1.4.2 The Import button

Clicking on this button, schedules a dialog from which you can select a file to
be attached to the documentation set. A whole variety of files can be attached:
documents, texts, graphics and spreadsheets. The selected file will appear in the
list and be displayed in the attachment panel. Double click on the displayed file
to schedule the corresponding application to edit the file.
When a file is attached to a documentation set, a copy is made that is saved with
the project, and all modifications will be made to this copy only. The original
file remains, unchanged, in its original location.

Section 5.7.1.4.3 The New from Template button

Clicking on this button will create a new memo document using the default
template for the project/section. The new item will appear in the list with the
default name (and possibly a number, if the same name already exists).
Click on the new entry in the list. It is automatically selected and the document
it contains is shown in the Attachment panel. Double click on it to schedule the
application used for editing the document.
It is possible to change the default memo template (see "[Procedure] To

change the default memo template" on page 195).
If you wish to use a different existing template than the default one, go to Tools
Load Documentation Template to browse for the desired template. You may
need to make a new documentation template (see "[Procedure] To make a
new memo template" on page 194) (and add it to the list of the existing ones).
Section 5.7.1.4.4 The Delete button

Clicking on this button will delete the item selected in the Documentation List.
This only deletes it from the list. The original file remains in the LMS project.
Section 5.7.1.5 The Attachment Preview panel
Section 5.7.1.5.1 Attachment display area

This area shows a preview of the item that is selected in the Documentation List
(when possible). Double clicking in this panel schedules the application
associated with that item (if one exists) and allows you to edit the file.
Ctrl-double click is a second option to edit an item.
Section 5.7.2 Extended Project / Section info
 To select and edit an htm- or html-template (on page 279)

In Tools Options you have to include the extended project / section
information to make the extra minor tab(s) available.
Section 5.7.2.1 To select and edit an htm- or html-template

This Extended Documentation Info will allow you to select and edit a htm- or
html-template. The attributes will then be listed in the Documentation
worksheet. They can only be edited in the Extended Documentation Info
worksheet.
16A 279
Section 5.7.2.1.1 Select

This button allows you to select an htm- or html-template in the HTML
template folder that was selected in the Tools>Option>Attributes Tab. The path
of the selected template will be shown in the dialog next to the button. Also a
copy of the template will be placed in directory LMSLocal\MemoInventory.
This will allow you to continue working with the template when your
connection to Tec.Manager is broken for example.
When saving a project only the path referring to the template will be saved, the
actual template will not be included in the project.
Section 5.7.2.1.2 Edit

This option allows you to edit the selected template.
Section 5.7.2.1.3 Accept Changes

Accepting the changes to the template will copy all the edited attributes and
their values to the Project / Section Info worksheet. They can be used in any
other worksheet, but only be edited in the Extended Project / Section Info.
Section 5.7.2.1.4 Discard Changes

Discarding the changes will reset all the values of the attributes to the last saved
settings.

Clicking this button will remove the selected template and allow you to select
another template.
Section 5.8 The Data Explorer dialog
This document describes all the “Data Explorer” functionalities. These are
available in the “Data Explorer” dialog and are embedded in some worksheets
e.g. the Navigator worksheet. All the functions provided are described here.
Section 5.8.1 [Procedure] To view and manage data
The Data Explorer provides you with two views on the data - a tree view and a
detail view ( like a Windows Explorer window).
Step 1
In the Navigator worksheet, click on the Folders toggle button to see both the

tree and the detail view or to see just the detail view.
Step 2
Click on the “Vertical/Horizontal Views” icon to see the detail view either
next to the display area or above it.
Step 3
There are a number of operations that you can use the Data Explorer for:
Section 5.8.1.1 [Procedure] To view the details of data in a folder

Step 1
Click on the Folders button to display the two data views.
Step 2
Browse through the tree view on the left hand side.
Step 3
Click on an item to see its contents in the detail view on the right.
Step 4
Click on the “List all blocks” icon to filter out all data items apart from blocks.
Step 5
You can select data blocks for viewing or other operations - or you can right
click on a data block to add it to the input basket.
Section 5.8.1.2 [Procedure] To fill an input basket

The Data Explorer provides you with an input basket to store data (blocks and
waterfalls) required for specific operations in Test.Lab.
Step 1
Browse for the required data in the Tree-view window.
Step 2
Select the item (block or waterfall) in the Detail View window,right click on it
and click on Add to Input Basket from the popup menu to add it to the input
basket.
Step 3
Browse and add as much data as required in the same way.
Step 4
Click on the input basket in the tree to see its contents in the Detail view
window.
Section 5.8.1.3 [Procedure] To search for data

Step 1
Click on the Search button.
Step 2
Fill in the fields.
Step 3
Click the Search Now button and the results are put into the “Search Results”
folder in the tree. Clicking on the folder displays the data in the Detail view
16A 281
window where you can right click on it to save the data to the input basket if
desired.
Note: Each time you search for data, any data from a previous search is
replaced by the data from the new search.
Section 5.8.2 The Data Explorer Toolbar
This panel contains action buttons for easy use of the browser. It also contains a
field that gives the complete computer directory path to the selected data.
Section 5.8.2.1 Back
Clicking (repeatedly) on this button takes you back through the previously
opened items of the Tree-view and the Detail view lists.
Section 5.8.2.2 Forward
Clicking on this button brings you forward through the displays of the various
items of both the Tree-view and the Detail view lists that were opened (one
click per item) prior to clicking on the Back button.
Section 5.8.2.3 Parent Folder
Clicking this button opens the parent folder of the selected item currently being
displayed in the Detail View panel.
Section 5.8.2.4 Folders
Clicking on this button works as a toggle that allows you either to hide the
Detail view panel from view or to view both the Tree-view panel and the Detail
view panel at the same time.

Section 5.8.2.5 Search
Section 5.8.2.6 Vertical / Horizontal Views
Clicking on this icon lets you choose between viewing the Detail View panel
and the Display panel side by side (Vertical Detail View) or one above the other
(Horizontal Detail View).
Section 5.8.2.7 Refresh
Clicking on this button enables the browser tree to be updated to reflect changes
that have been made to the database on the server. This operation can be
executed on any data folder as well as the database containers, e.g. a TDF or
Project database.
Section 5.8.2.8 List All Blocks
Clicking this icon brings up a list of all the data blocks for a selected item in the
Tree-view panel.
Section 5.8.2.9 Path field
This field shows you the complete address (computer directory path) of the
selected data.
Section 5.8.3 The Search panel
This panel is used for locating Projects, Sections (or tests, traces, etc.) and data
blocks. Simple procedures exist to help you execute your data search.
The Search panel is described in detail below.
Section 5.8.3.1 Search button

Clicking on this button opens the data search panel which contains several fields
16A 283
used for specifying search criteria.
Section 5.8.3.2 Address

When the Search panel first appears, it shows the location of the data on view in
the Detail View panel (see "The Detail View panel" on page 292). If you have
already selected the folder that has to be searched, you do not have to change
this address.
Note: Once you start the search process (by clicking on the Start search
button), the contents of the Address field changes, now it specifies the
“Search Results” folder, where the data resulting from your search will have
been put.
Section 5.8.3.3 Origin

This field lets you specify, from a dropdown menu, the general type of data that
you are searching for (LMSTest.Lab data, Cada-X Project Database, Universal
file, etc.).
Section 5.8.3.4 Search For

This field provides you with a dropdown menu from which you can choose the
specific data type that you are looking for (block, waterfall, run etc.)
Section 5.8.3.5 Look in

This field indicates the address (location/directory) where the search will be
executed. It provides you with a dropdown list that shows the history of
previous searches. It gives the addresses of the folders from where previous
searches have been made and allows you to view their contents. The “Look in”
field also allows you to further refine your search within the “Search Results”
folder.
However, if you want to change the “Address” field (at the top of the panel) in
order to search for data found in a different location, you must click on the
Folders button to go back to the browser and select your new location.
Section 5.8.3.6 Search Windows subfolders
Section 5.8.3.7 Search by properties

This function allows you to search by file properties.
Section 5.8.3.8 Property

This loads field values to be searched for (label, average type, Point id, ...) that
you choose from the dropdown menu.

To facilitate your search for the required properties, type the first letter of the
property in the field. This sets the dropdown menu to display all available fields
starting with that letter.
Section 5.8.3.9 Comparison

Here you choose the operator that will define the search criteria.
Section 5.8.3.10 Value

This field indicates the value to be searched for.
If you are not sure of the exact value of the property you can use a wild card.
The * character will search for everything.
Section 5.8.3.11 Adv. Search
Section 5.8.3.11.1 Add Criterion
Section 5.8.3.11.2 Remove Selected
Section 5.8.3.11.3 Replace Selected
Section 5.8.3.11.4 Save Criteria
Section 5.8.3.11.5 Load Criteria
Section 5.8.3.12 Adv. Sieve
Section 5.8.3.13 Search now

This starts the search using the defined criteria.
Section 5.8.3.14 Stop search

This stops the search process.
Section 5.8.3.15 More...

This opens up new fields of search criteria. It allows you to build a list of
additional criteria to be used during the search process.
Section 5.8.3.16 Add Criterion

This takes a selected criterion from the list of available criteria and adds it to
your list.
16A 285
Section 5.8.3.17 Remove Selected Criterion

This removes a selected criterion from your list.
Section 5.8.3.18 Save criteria

This allows you to save the criteria to the project. You are first asked to give the
criteria file a name.
Section 5.8.3.19 Load criteria

This loads your list of criteria into the search program, where it will now be
taken into account during the next search process.
Section 5.8.4 The Tree-view browser panel
The Test.Lab directory in the Tree-view contains a number of top level entries,
each of which is described here along with the actions that can be performed on
these items.
Section 5.8.4.1 ASAM ODS
This is the entry point for connections to ASAM ODS servers. Clicking on the
sign next to this icon opens the list of all ASAM ODS servers that have been
configured to be visible for the Test.Lab software.
Section 5.8.4.2 My Links
This icon indicates the collection of bookmarks (or links) made to specific data
items. You may wish to create links (see "[Procedure] To create and export
links (bookmarks)" on page 48).
Clicking on the sign next to the “My Links” icon will reveal the link folders
or specific links that are currently defined.
The links icon can be a link to either one specific data entry or to a
collection of items. This will be indicated both from the 'link to (item)' entry and
whether there is a sign in front of it.
Data that is referenced by a link can be identified by the different data icons
described below and can be viewed directly in the appropriate type of display
window.

Section 5.8.4.3 Current Project
This folder contains all the sections and the results of the conditioning in
the current project. You'll find these results in the “Processing” folders.
Section 5.8.4.4 Network
The “Network Hub” add-in must be loaded for the Network to be available in
the Tree-view browser panel.
Clicking on the sign next to this icon will reveal the list of StartPoints on the
network from which you can access resources. All the StartPoints appearing in
this list have been defined as part of the installation and configuration
procedures of all the Data Servers in the network. Therefore, they have all been
registered with the StartPoint Server.
If there is a problem connecting to a StartPoint, then this will be indicated by

the presence of the “Not OK” icon . This can be for a number of reasons; for
example that the server is not running, or the folder has been removed from the
server. Try to correct the problem at source and then right click on the item that
is not OK and select Reconnect.
When searching for data that can be viewed in display windows in the
Navigator worksheet then there are several types of databases that can be
searched for. The icons described below represent these.
Section 5.8.4.5 Search Results
Here you find the results of your latest search for comparative data.
Note: Data from a new search replaces existing data in the Search Results
folder.
If you wish to keep search results permanently, they must be saved to the Input
Basket folder. This is made possible by displaying the Search Results data in the
Detail view window and right clicking on them.
Section 5.8.4.6 Input Basket

You fill this basket (see "[Procedure] To fill an input basket" on page 281) (or
folder) with a set of data that you require for a specific operation. There is only
one Input Basket for an active session, but data from other baskets can be
imported into it.
16A 287
You can also include data in the Input Basket that has been imported from
baskets created in LMS Tec.Manager. If you have this option, you access it by
clicking on the Tec.Manager icon in the Test.Lab toolbar.
Section 5.8.4.7 Online Data
This folder lets you view the online data that has been defined for an
acquisition.
Section 5.8.4.8 Workspace
This folder can hold any temporary data. This data can result from copy/paste
actions or from calculations by the software (intermediate results).
The content of the workspace is lost when leaving the workbook. Data blocks in
workspace can be moved to the active project using the Move to active project
option from the pop-up menu obtained by right clicking on the data block.
Section 5.8.4.9 My Computer
This folder gives you access to all the drives on your computer, as well as all
mapped network drives. Via this way, you can browse to any data type - LMS
and non-LMS formats.
Section 5.8.4.10 Actions

A number of operations can be performed on the items in the Test.Lab directory
browser list. All of the actions described here are accessed from the popup
menu obtained by right clicking on the name of the item. The actions described
here are not necessarily applicable in their entirety to all of the items.
Section 5.8.4.10.1 Add Attachment

This operation adds an attachment to the selected folder.
Section 5.8.4.10.2 Add Memo Document

This operation adds a selected memo document to the item.
Section 5.8.4.10.3 Add Folder

This operation adds a folder to the selected folder.

Section 5.8.4.10.4 Add to Input Basket

This operation adds the selected item to the Input basket.
Section 5.8.4.10.5 Replace in Input Basket

This operation replaces the items in the Input Basket with the selected items.
Section 5.8.4.10.6 Empty Input Basket

This operation empties the Input basket.
Section 5.8.4.10.7 Activate This Section

This operation activates the selected section.
Section 5.8.4.10.8 View Setup Parameters
Section 5.8.4.10.9 Print Setup Parameters
Section 5.8.4.10.10 Copy

This operation copies the selected data function, and you can then paste it
directly into a display window.
Section 5.8.4.10.11 Edit Properties

This operation opens a dialog that lets you correct data properties.
This operation can only be performed on data in the active project. When
selected on throughput data a dialog is opened that allows you to correct the
Sensitivity factor in addition to the Point id, Point dir and User channel ID. A
new run is created containing the corrected throughput data. The original
throughput data will not be changed.
Section 5.8.4.10.12 Delete

This allows you to delete the selected data item.

Section 5.8.4.10.14 Import

This operation can be performed on folders in the bookmark collection or
on the collection itself It enables you to access bookmark references created
by other users and placed on a shared file for general access. A dialog is
scheduled in which you can select the directory from where the bookmark
16A 289
reference is to be imported. Select the required file with the suffix .bmk. Click
on Open to import the bookmark. It will be placed within the book or in the
selected folder.
Section 5.8.4.10.15 Import into Active Project

This operation allows to import data stored in a SCADAS Recorder data file. A
new run will be created with a TDF file holding the imported data. This
operation is only available when the 'SCADAS Recording' add-in is loaded.
Section 5.8.4.10.16 Export To

This operation allows you to export a data item from the Data Explorer to any
one of the following types of file formats: LMSCada-X, Universal File, SDF,
Matlab, DynaWorks, Text, Wav and Single Wav.
Exporting to Single Wav allows you to append the selected data items together
and write into a single wav file.
It is also possible to export GPS data from a throughput file to NMEA of KML
files or it is even possible to open Google Earth with this GPS data. These
actions are available in the popup menu van a throughput file. Data reduction is
done as specified in the Tools Options - General tab.
Section 5.8.4.10.17 List Settings

This opens up a dialog with a list of the settings for the selected section. The
items in the list will depend on the application in which the section was created.
Section 5.8.4.10.18 Edit User Attributes
Section 5.8.4.10.19 New Folder

This operation creates a new (empty) folder.
Section 5.8.4.10.20 Paste

This operation pastes an item into the selected folder.
Section 5.8.4.10.21 Paste as Link

This operation pastes an item as a link into the selected folder.
Section 5.8.4.10.22 Change geometry color

This operation changes the color of the geometry of the open project. The
geometry color is used for the elements which do not below to a component for
instance nodes on main level or lines in between different components.

Section 5.8.4.10.23 Rescale geometry

This operation is possible for the geometry of the open project. A scale factor
can be specified which is used to rescale the geometry around the center.

Section 5.8.4.10.25 Properties

This is available on all items. It brings up the properties dialog in which
attributes relating to the item can be read. Fields can be copied into the report if
required using the popup menu in the dialog.
Section 5.8.4.10.26 Rename

This operation renames the selected item.
Section 5.8.4.10.27 Refresh
Section 5.8.4.10.28 View/Change TDF (full) name...

On a Throughput file in the active project, you have the popup option
"View/Change TDFname". For a measured TDF, only the name is shown in the
pop-up. The TDF is located on the same directory as the Test.Lab database (in
the folder /project/section/run ). When the throughput data was processed, you
see also a throughput file in the processing run, which is a link to the measured
throughput file. In this case, "View/Change TDF full name" shows the complete
path to the TDF file. (e.g. :\LMS_Local_Dir\Data\my_project\section 1\run
1\run 1)
Section 5.8.4.10.29 View Settings

This displays the current test setup for a section as a Word document.
16A 291
Note: Changes made here will not apply unless you save the changes when you
exit the application.
Section 5.8.5 The Detail View panel
Selecting an item in the Tree-view browser replaces the Detail View Panel with
the contents of the selected item.
Section 5.8.5.1 Detail view list

Items can be either dragged from the detailed list and dropped into a chosen
layout in the display area or selected for other processes.
Section 5.8.5.2 Actions

The same operations that can be performed on items (see "Actions" on page
288) in the Tree-view browser can also be performed on items in the Detail
view list. They are accessed from the popup menu obtained by right clicking on
the name of the item. These actions are not all necessarily applicable to all of
the items.
Additional actions are obtained by right clicking on data blocks. This is only
possible in the Detail view panel. The Tree-view panel does not show block
details.
Section 5.8.5.2.1 Add Memo Document

This operation adds a selected memo document to the item.
Section 5.8.5.2.2 Add to Input Basket

This operation adds the selected item to the Input basket.
Section 5.8.5.2.3 Replace in Input Basket

This operation replaces the items in the Input Basket with the selected items.

Section 5.8.5.2.5 Activate This Section

This operation activates the selected section.

Section 5.8.5.2.6 View Setup Parameters
Section 5.8.5.2.7 Print Setup Parameters

This operation copies the selected data function, and you can then paste it
directly into a display window.


This allows you to delete the selected data item.
Section 5.8.5.2.11 Export to

This operation allows you to export a data item from the Data Explorer to any
one of the following types of file formats: LMSCada-X, Universal File, SDF,
Matlab, DynaWorks, Text, Wav and Single Wav.
Exporting to Single Wav allows you to append the selected data items together
and write into a single wav file.
It is also possible to export GPS data from a throughput file to NMEA of KML
files or it is even possible to open Google Earth with this GPS data. These
actions are available in the popup menu van a throughput file. Data reduction is
done as specified in the Tools Options - General tab.
Section 5.8.5.2.12 Play Sound

This operation plays the selected sound data.
Section 5.8.5.2.13 Move to active project

This operation moves a data block in workspace to a folder in the active project.
A dialog is scheduled in which you can select the folder to move to.
Section 5.8.5.2.14 View/Change TDF (full) name...

On a Throughput file in the active project, you have the popup option
"View/Change TDFname". For a measured TDF, only the name is shown in the
16A 293
pop-up. The TDF is located on the same directory as the Test.Lab database (in
the folder /project/section/run ). When the throughput data was processed, you
see also a throughput file in the processing run, which is a link to the measured
throughput file. In this case, "View/Change TDF full name" shows the complete
path to the TDF file. (e.g. :\LMS_Local_Dir\Data\my_project\section 1\run
1\run 1)
Section 5.8.5.2.15 Filter

This provides a quick filtering of data in the Navigator worksheet. It offers the
possibility to show or hide certain items in a column. The functionality and
usability is similar to an auto-filter in an Excel-sheet. The Filter entry is
available by right clicking on the background in the Detail View panel.
5.8.5.2.15.1 Auto Filter
When checking “on” the Auto Filter, every column is provided with a
dropdown menu in the header. This menu contains a list with all the different
items in that specific column. By checking or unchecking an item, a filtering
can be applied.
The Auto filter can be disabled by unchecking the Auto Filter in the dropdown
menu.
5.8.5.2.15.2 Show All
When a filtering is already applied on the data, you can choose Show All to
show all available data in the Detail View panel.
Section 5.8.5.2.16 Select Columns...

Right clicking on the background in the Detail View panel opens a dropdown
menu in which you can choose the entry Select Columns... In this dialog you
can first select the origin and then the type for which you want to specify a
column. Select the columns you wish to display from the list of “available”
columns and put them in the list of “selected” columns. You can sort the display
order of the columns by clicking on the arrow icons. Apply your column list
choices by clicking on the Apply button.
Section 5.8.5.2.17 Sort

Now you can use the different columns in the Detail View panel to sort the
available data. You can define the sorting order by selecting the Sort... entry in
the dropdown menu that can be opened by right clicking on a column header or
on the background of the Data View panel. Doing this schedules a dialog box in
which a sort order can be defined by selecting the corresponding columns in the
specified order, and selecting whether data should be sorted in ascending or
descending order. Click on Apply to apply the sorting on the data.

Section 5.8.5.2.18 Edit User Attributes

This operation renames the selected item.
Section 5.8.5.2.20 Auto Sort

The Auto Sort function can also be applied by right clicking on a column
header. This will apply a sorting on the Data Set using the settings in the
Tools>Options>Sorting Tab.
Section 5.8.5.2.21 Load View

By right clicking on the background of the Detail View panel, a previous saved
view can be loaded. All the settings regarding columns and sorting will be
applied on the available data.
Section 5.8.5.2.22 Save View

The selecting/ordering of the columns and the sorting of data within the Detail
View panel can be saved. Save View is available by right clicking on the
background of the Detail View panel. The file will be saved on the location
specified in the Tools>Options>File Location Tab.
Section 5.8.5.2.23 Double Clicking
By double clicking on a picture tab or name, the selected picture pops up and
becomes active. You can also change the name of the picture.
Section 5.9 The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet
This part of the Navigator worksheet enables you to create pictures of your data.
16A 295
Section 5.9.1 [Procedure] To create pictures of your data
This procedure describes how to access data, place it into various pictures and
adapt the appearance of the displays.
Step 1
In the Tree-browser panel of the Data Explorer, browse for the folder containing
the data that you wish to view. Click to see the details in the Detail View on the
right.
Note: Click on the List All Blocks button (on the basket icon) if you want to
see all available blocks in the selected section or folder.
Step 2
Select an appropriate layout, either by clicking on a layout icon or from the
“Create a Picture” dialog (both found in the Picture Selection bar).
Step 3
A representation of the selected layout will appear in the display area and a
“New Picture” tab will appear with an identifying number.
Note: A layout must have the number and type of displays that you want for
your final presentation. While you can adjust the attributes of a display in the
worksheet, you can not change either the display type or the number of displays
in the layout.
Step 4
If the layout is not suitable, click on the picture tab and then click on Delete.
If you cannot find a suitable layout, select View Layout management. This
schedules the “Layout management” dialog (see "The Layout management
dialog" on page 176) in which you can create a new layout.
Step 5
Once both the required data and a suitable layout are available, and before
actually loading any data into a display, you can preview various data to choose
what to put into your picture.
Step 6
Load specific data items by dragging them into the display.
To load a data function record into a FrontBack display, position the mouse
over the required item, and drag it into the required display, dropping it onto
either the left (front) or the right (back) axis. In fact dropping it anywhere in the
left hand side of the display will add it to the front axis. Similarly, dropping it
anywhere on the right hand side will add it to the back axis.
Note: The display must be either empty or be displaying data of the same type
as you are loading.
To view waterfall data in a display, drag and drop the data into either a

Colormap or Waterfall display and it will become visualized.

An alternative method of loading data is to right click on the data in the Data
Explorer and select Copy from the menu. You can then go to the display
window required and position the cursor in the left half of the display if you
want to place the curve on the front axis or the right half of the display if you
want to place the curve on the back axis. Right click and select “Paste” (“to
front” or “to back”) depending on which half of the display that you are in.
Further data records can be dropped into the same display. Right click the line
or curve and select Remove Curve in order to remove a single record. All
curves can be removed with a Ctrl + right click in the display area and selecting
Remove All Curves from the popup menu.
Note: It is not possible to remove individual curves from a waterfall display.
Step 7
When the data is in the required display, adjust its appearance as required using
all the functions available in the display windows. Save the picture if required.
You can now copy the picture into another application, if desired.
Section 5.9.1.1 To preview data

Step 1
Choose the window in the layout that you want to use for viewing the data.
Note: It is recommended that you remove existing curves from this window -
particularly those that are on the back (right hand) axis in a FrontBack
window.
Step 2
Right click inside that window and select Preview mode from the menu.
The preview mode icon will appear above that window.

In the Detail view panel, select the data that you want to preview. You must
select a suitable data type for the window and it must be compatible with any
data that is currently on display on the chosen axis. The data will immediately
appear in the window.
Step 3
If an item in the Detail view is already highlighted, it will appear automatically
in the window when you click on Preview mode.
Note: When the Preview mode is used in a FrontBack window, the data is
added to the right (back) axis. For the UpperLower and Multi-trace Display,
the selected item will be added to the lower (bottom) axis. For the UpperLower
and Multi-trace Display, the selected item will be added to the lower (bottom)
axis.
A number of data functions can be previewed at a time. Clicking on a second

function with the Ctrl key depressed will add that function to the window.
16A 297
Step 4
Click on a different data entry and the display will be refreshed.
Step 5
When you have scanned through the data and you are ready to prepare the
picture for presentation, then you can switch the Preview mode off.
Section 5.9.1.2 [Procedure] To copy pictures to another application

Step 1
Start up the receiving application (such as Word® or PowerPoint®) and then
Copy and Paste the item into it.
Step 2
To transfer the contents of one single display or one window in a layout to an
application. Right click near the required window while keeping the Ctrl key
depressed. Select Copy Metafile from the Display menu. The copied image will
appear in the application.
Step 3
To transfer the contents of a complete display or a whole picture, click on the
picture tab to display the popup menu. This provides you with number of
options (see "Picture tabs" on page 301) to copy your picture.
You can also print your pictures based on a predefined format.
Section 5.9.1.3 [Procedure] To print your picture

You can print unformatted active pictures by simply clicking on the print
icon in the Desktop toolbar. The following procedure shows you how to print
your pictures using a predefined format.
Step 1
Click on the picture tab that identifies the picture that you wish to print and
then click on the appropriate entry in the dialog:
Section 5.9.1.3.1 Print

This prints your picture with your project's default format, if one exists.
Section 5.9.1.3.2 Print with

This opens the “Formats” window containing a list of all available print
formats. Click on the desired format to print your picture using the chosen
format.
You may wish to create a print format (see "[Procedure] To create a

single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 196).

Note: If you wish to print to an electronic file, you must select Electronic as the
Output option in the Printing Options dialog.
Section 5.9.2 The Data Explorer
The Data Explorer has been embedded in the Navigator worksheet to simplify
data selection and storage. There is a Tree-view browser panel (see "The
Tree-view browser panel" on page 286) and a Detail View browser panel (see
"The Detail View panel" on page 292), as well as the Data Explorer toolbar
(on page 282) containing action buttons. The Data Explorer can be accessed
from other worksheets by simply clicking on the Data Explorer icon in the
LMSTest.Lab toolbar.
Section 5.9.2.1 The Data Explorer browsers and toolbar

The Data Explorer consists of browsers and a toolbar. (see "The Data
Explorer dialog" on page 280)
Section 5.9.3 The Picture Display panel
This panel is where pictures are made. A picture consists of a display window
contained in a layout. The data is visualized graphically in the window.
Section 5.9.3.1 The Picture display area

The picture is created and adapted in this area, based on a chosen layout.
Section 5.9.3.2 Layout

A layout is an arrangement of display windows of a particular type and with a
defined set of attributes. A layout is selected from the pane header above the
display windows.
Section 5.9.3.2.1 Number of displays

This is determined by the original layout selected. It is not possible to add or
remove displays from an existing layout. To change the number of displays, you
need to select a different layout or to create a new one.
Section 5.9.3.2.2 Size of displays

Pressing the Ctrl key and dragging one side of the display to make it bigger or
smaller can adjust the relative size of a display in a layout. You cannot however
make it bigger than its proportion of the original overall layout.
16A 299
Section 5.9.3.2.3 Display type

This is defined when the layout is created. It cannot be adapted at another time,
and so to obtain different types of displays you must either select a different
layout or edit the layout in the 'Layout management dialog'.
Section 5.9.3.2.4 Display attributes

The characteristics of the display axes and display area can be set using entries
from the popup menus obtained in and around each window in the layout. The
entries in these menus depend on the type of window.
Section 5.9.3.3 Data

The data forms the contents of the display and the other component of the
picture. Data can be dragged into the picture either from the browser panel or
from the data selector dialog. The data has a number of attributes:
Section 5.9.3.3.1 Curve Properties

Right click the data curve itself and select Curve Properties in order to adjust
the color and appearance of a data curve.

You can remove a data curve from a display by right clicking on the curve and
selecting Remove Curve.
Section 5.9.3.3.3 Selection status

In a FrontBack display, you can 'select' data by left clicking on that curve. This
will generate markers on the curve and cursor values will be displayed for these
points when a cursor is dragged over the curves.
You can deselect the same curve by left clicking on it while keeping the Ctrl
key down.
Left clicking on another curve will toggle the selection status.
Curves can be added to or removed from the selection status by clicking on

them while holding down the Ctrl or Shift keys or via the legend.
Section 5.9.4 The Picture Selection bar

This pane header above the display area is where you can select layouts in
which to view your data, and activate the picture you want to work with. It
consists of the following items.
Section 5.9.4.1 Create a picture
The names of all layouts that are available for use (favorites and others) can be
selected from the Layouts dialog that appears. Once selected, the layout will
appear in the data display panel as a new, empty picture.
Section 5.9.4.2 Layout icons
Each layout that has been added to the list of favorites in the “Layout
management” dialog (see "The Layout management dialog" on page 176)
will have an icon displayed here. If you have not specified a particular bitmap to
be associated with the layout then a “plain” icon will be displayed. Simply click
on the icon to load the layout.
Section 5.9.4.3 Picture tabs
A new, empty picture is created each time a layout is selected and a tab appears
to identify and access this picture. Simply clicking on the picture tab activates
and shows the picture. Clicking on the picture tab of an activated picture opens
a dropdown menu that allows you to perform a number of operations on the
active picture:
Section 5.9.4.3.1 Move First

Allows you to change the order of the layouts. It will move the current layout
completely to the left in the list.
Section 5.9.4.3.2 Move Last

completely to the right in the list.
Section 5.9.4.3.3 Move Left

Allows you to change the order of the layouts. The current layout will move one
place to the left in the list.
16A 301
Section 5.9.4.3.4 Move Right

place to the right in the list.
Section 5.9.4.3.5 Copy to Metafile

Word and PowerPoint and the contents (the text strings, fonts, lines and colors,
etc.) can be edited within the document.
Section 5.9.4.3.6 Copy to Bitmap

A bitmap is a picture format with a fixed number of pixels and colors. It can be
pasted into an application such as Word or PowerPoint and the picture can be
sized within the document. It can be opened in a suitable graphic editing
application, saved as a specific file and edited to a certain extent.
Section 5.9.4.3.7 Copy as Active picture (embedded data)

In this case, not only is the picture copied, but the functionality in the
LMSTest.Lab display is available too. All the formatting functions, e.g. adding
and removing cursors, is accessible in the document. File sizes of such pictures
can become quite large.
Section 5.9.4.3.8 Copy as Active picture (linked data)

Similar to above except now links are made to the data making the file sizes
smaller. For the links to be valid, the original data must be accessible from the
computer where the document is opened.
Section 5.9.4.3.9 Make Printformat

This is the easy way to create a default format (see "[Procedure] To create a
single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 196) for
the layout.

The contents of the picture will be printed using the default print format
connected to the layout from which the picture was made.
Section 5.9.4.3.11 Print with...

This allows you to print the picture with a different format to the default print
format. The Formats dialog appears and you can choose a format from the list
of available formats.


This schedules the Rename Active Tab dialog that allows you to change the
name of the active picture.
Section 5.9.4.3.13 Duplicate

This allows you to duplicate a layout within the active section. All settings and
data will also be copied. The new layout will be renamed as 'Copy of' the
original layout.

Click the active tab and select Delete from the dropdown menu in order to
remove the active picture.
Section 5.9.4.3.15 Delete All Pictures

Click the active tab and select Delete All Pictures from the dropdown menu in
order to remove the active picture and all your other pictures in the active
section.
Section 5.9.4.3.16 Replace Data Origin

Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data origin of the
functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be done
for broken links as well. The replace will only work if the path to the new data
is identical to the path of the existing data in the displays.
The data origin can be ‘Project’ , ‘Section’ or ‘Run/Analysis/…’ or a

measurement cycle (3th level folder). When selecting ‘project’, a list of the
projects, originating the data in the picture(s), is shown. This list contains
regular Test.Lab projects, ldsf files, tdf files, and non-lms databases. The origin
of unsaved data is not shown. When pushing Browse, a different project can be
selected.
When selecting ‘section’, a list of all sections is shown, originating the data in
the picture(s) – only for LMS projects. When pushing Browse, a different
section can be selected.
When selecting ‘run/Analysis/…’, a list of all ‘2d level’ items of a project

(being all runs, analysis, folders on sections) is shown, originating the data in
‘folder’ can be selected – please be careful to select the corresponding
run/analysis/folder in case of broken links.
When selecting ‘measurement cycle/3th level folder’, a list of all ‘3th level’
items of a project are shown, originating the data in the picture(s) – only for
LMS projects. When clicking on Browse, a different ‘folder’ can be selected.
In case an origin (Project/Section/Run/measurement cycle) does not exist, it is
16A 303
colored red.
When clicking Apply, the link to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new selected origin.
Section 5.9.4.3.17 Replace Data

Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data individually of
the functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be
done for broken links as well.
For each individual function in the picture(s), you can see which picture, display
and target it belongs, its ‘data origin’ (e.g. being the project containing the data)
and its ‘Data location’ (the structure inside the project). The ‘Data origin’ and
the ‘Data location’ can be changed with the browse button, or –only for test.lab
data - with typing in its new name.
You also see the Dof ID, the Ref DOF Id and the section value for each data
block. When altering these, the data location and data origin will be adapted
immediately. The new data is searched for on the folder itself or 1 folder up (in
case of waterfalls or referenced spectra). The result data will have the same
function classes as the original data. If it is not found, the cell is red and you
cannot click on OK.
You can duplicate data and remove data, move data up and down in the same
target of a display.
When clicking Apply, the links to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new list.
Section 5.9.4.3.18 Reset Limits

Selecting this resets all axis limits within the picture to their optimised limits.
Section 5.9.4.3.19 Coupled Limits

Coupled limits is a mode in which all compatible axis limits within a picture are
coupled. A checkmark represents its state. When activated the ‘Apply to all
compatible axes’ option in each axis Fixed limits dialog becomes insensitive,
meaning it is automatically applied. The Coupled Limits setting is saved with a
layout.
Section 5.9.4.3.20 Save as Layout

With this functionality, the current picture (including its settings and data) is
saved as a layout (for the current user) – a name for the layout is asked. When
creating a new picture, this layout can be selected.

Section 5.10 The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet
The Data Presentation worksheet is used for format based printing of your data
to either a printing device or to an electronic document.
Format based printing allows you to print your picture based on a predefined
format where both its appearance settings (picture size, etc.) and data settings
(format, scaling, etc.) have already been predefined. Other properties that need
to be visualized can be defined as well.
Section 5.10.1 [Procedure] To print data using a predefined print

format
Step 1
Click on the down arrow of the picture and select Print with....
You may need to create a print format (see "[Procedure] To create a
single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 196).
Step 2
Select the desired predefined format from the list in the popup menu that
appears.
Note: The selected format must be compatible with the picture that you want to
print.
For example, you cannot print a Waterfall picture with a print format based on a
FrontBack picture.
If you choose an incompatible format for your picture, a warning message
appears. If the list of available print formats is empty, you will need to create a
print format.
Step 3
In the File menu, click on Printing Options... to open the Printing Options
dialog. Click on the appropriate radio buttons depending on the type of
operation you wish to perform.
Note: If you wish to print to an electronic file, you must select Electronic as the
Output option in the Printing Options dialog.
Step 4
Print the data in the chosen format by clicking on Print in the File menu or by
simply clicking on the icon in the LMSTest.Lab toolbar.
A quicker way to print a picture using a predefined format is to click on the
down arrow of the picture and select Print. The print format with the same
name as the layout will be automatically used. If this print format does not exist,
a simple print of the picture will be produced.
16A 305
Step 5
The following procedure is very useful when you need to print a report based on
a print format containing more than one picture (which is the case for most
reports):
Section 5.10.1.1 [Procedure] To print a multi-picture report

Step 1
In the Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet, click on Load a format... to
open the list of predefined formats. (If the list is empty, you need to create a
predefined format.)
Step 2
Select the desired format. All the layouts of the chosen format are loaded into
the Navigator worksheet as separate pictures.
Step 3
Drag and drop your data into the relevant pictures and print the report by
clicking on Print in the File menu.
Section 5.10.2.1 Data Explorer

The Data Explorer (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on page 280) is found
on several worksheets.
Section 5.10.3 The Format display panel
This panel is where data is formatted using print formats.
Section 5.10.3.1 The Format display area

This area displays the data for formatting purposes.

Section 5.10.4 The Format selection bar
This pane header above the display area is where you can select the formats in
which to publish your data.
Section 5.10.4.1 Load a format

Clicking on this opens a dialog that lets you choose a format from a list of all
available print formats. You may need to create a print format (see
"[Procedure] To create a single-picture print format in the Data Viewing
worksheet" on page 196).

When using a format, the same “picture” tabs that appear in the Navigator -
Data Viewing worksheet (each time that a layout is selected) also appear at the
top of the Format Display panel in the Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet.
Simply clicking on the picture tab (with its corresponding identification
number) activates the picture.
Section 5.11 The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet
This worksheet allows you to calculate your own processing functions using
either individual data items or combinations of data items.
The output of a derived processing function is specified as an expression based

on data items, arithmetic operators and mathematical functions.
This minor worksheet in the Navigator worksheet is composed of:
Section 5.11.1 The Data Explorer panel
An area for data navigation and data folder selection.
Section 5.11.2 The Data Set panel
This shows the data you want to use for calculations in a list.
16A 307
Section 5.11.3 The Active Formula Set panel
Here you can define your formulas.
Section 5.11.4 The Picture display panel
An area where you can view the result of the calculations using the formulas
that you defined.
Section 5.11.5 [Procedure] To define a processing function
Section 5.11.5.1 [Procedure] To select the input data

Step 1
In the Tree-browser panel of the Data Explorer, browse for the folder containing
the data that you wish to use.
This can be any folder with data that can be opened in the Navigator worksheet.
Step 2
Select the data folder that you want to use.
When a folder with data is selected, its contents are immediately displayed in
the Detail View panel alongside. Select the data and click on the Add or
Replace button to add the data to the Data Set.
Each item in the Data Set is annotated in a separate column by an index, starting
from 1. These indices are used for the definition of the calculation.
Section 5.11.5.2 [Procedure] To add the input data to the data set
Step 1
Select the data you want to use for calculations in the detail view list of the
browse tree.
Step 2
Click the Add button in the Data Set Toolbar.

The Data is now listed in the Data Set.
Step 3
Alternatively, you can replace data from the Data Set with data you have
selected in the detail view list by clicking the Replace button .
The number of data items you want to replace must be the same as the number

of data items you have selected in the detail view list.
Section 5.11.5.3 [Procedure] To define a function

Step 1
Select your input data by following the procedure above.
The "Active Formula Set" panel contains a table that allows you to define a list
of functions.
Step 2
Alternatively, collect all your input data using the Input Basket.
Step 3
Select the edit field or an empty cell in the "Formula" column of the "Active
Formula Set" panel to define a new function.
Step 4
Click the Insert Function icon to insert a function into the Formula Editor
at the current position of the cursor, if required.
This schedules the Select Function dialog.
Step 5
Select the function that you want to use from the list in the Select Function
dialog.
Step 6
Specify the needed functions and parameters in the pop up window and click
OK. The function is added in the Active Formula list.
Alternatively, you can type the formula and its parameters directly in an empty
formula cell or in the formula editor above the table.
To indicate a specific item in the Data List, use the notation "Fn" (function
number) , where n is the index of the specific item in the list.
For example, if you wanted to add the second item (F2) to the fifth data item
(F5) of a data list, you would enter:
F2+F5.
Most of the functions use one or more data items, and use the word "function"
to indicate a data item.
For instance, the function "SUM(function;function)" calculates the SUM of all
the data items between two specified data items.
So, after selection of the function, you should fill in the functions for which you
want to calculate the sum in the pop-up window.
If you want to calculate the sum of the data items with index number 2 and 7,
you would edit the function "SUM(function ; function)" to become "SUM(F2 ;
F7)".
Note: The “;” means AND, like sum (F2 AND F7), while “:” means from...
to..., like sum (from F2 to F7).
Step 7
16A 309
Press OK to close the Select Function dialog.

Step 8
Indicate the range in the “Repeat for...” column of the Formula Set table, if you
want to calculate the formula on a range of data items.
In the “Repeat for... ” column, cells have the format "a:b", where a is the lowest
index and b the highest index number.
Note: The notation Fx should be used in the formula to indicate that a range of
data items is used.
For example, if you want to calculate half the value of your data items starting
with the data item number 10 (F10) and ending with the data item number 16
(F16).
You would define the formula Fx/2 in the Formula column and the range 10:16
in the Repeat for... column.
Formula definition
When you now calculate the results, 7 new data items are added to the data list
(F10/2, F11/2, F12/2, F13/2, F14/2, F15/2 and F16/2).
Step 9
When you have finished entering the formula, press the Enter key of your
keyboard to check the validity of the formula.
If the checkbox of the "Ok" column is green then the formula is valid. If it is not
ok, it turns red and some information is displayed in the logging window.
Step 10
Continue to add formulas following the steps above until the table is complete.
Step 11
Use the icons in the formula set panel to modify the number and order of the
rows in the table, if required.
Step 12
Follow the procedure below to save your results.
Section 5.11.5.4 [Procedure] To edit a function

Step 1
Load, if required, using the "Load FormulaSet from DFS file" icon , the
table that contains the formula that you want to edit.
Step 2
Select the row or the cell in the "Function" column of the table to edit an
existing formula.
The formula will be displayed on top of the table in the formula editor.
Step 3
Edit the formula as required and press Enter.

Alternatively, when you hit the Edit button, the function selection dialog will
pop up, offering you some help on how you can edit the formula.
Section 5.11.5.5 [Procedure] To execute the formulas and view the

results
Step 1
Define a new formula or edit an existing formula if required following the
procedure above.
Step 2
Click on “Calculate” to calculate all formulas, or click on “Calculate selected”
to calculate only the selected formulas.
The results are added to the workspace and visible in the data set list.
Note: The result will be a number of data items if you specified a range in the
“Repeat For...” column.
Step 3
Select an appropriate layout by clicking on a layout icon.
Step 4
Select a row in the data set or select just the “Name” cell and drag and drop it
into the display to visualize it.
(F20). And, you only want to use every other data item.
You would define the formula ("Fx/2") in the Formula column, the range
("10:20") in the Repeat for... column, and the increment (2) in the Increment
column.
(F10/2, F12/2, F14/2, F16/2, F18/2 and F20/2). To display the results, drag and
drop them in a display.
Section 5.11.5.6 [Procedure] To save the results

When you hit the “calculate” button, results are temporarily stored in the
Workspace. To save your results in the active project:
Step 1
Select the results you want to save in the Data Set.
Step 2
Press the Save Selected as... button.
This schedules the Save In Active Project dialog.
Step 3
Browse and select the location in the active project where you want to save the
results.
16A 311
Step 4
Press OK to save the results and to close the Save In Active Project dialog.
To save all the results you have calculated, hit the Save Results As button
and follow the directions as described above.
Section 5.11.6.1 The Data Explorer browsers and toolbar

The Data Explorer consists of browsers and a toolbar. (see "The Data
Explorer dialog" on page 280)
The Data Set contains input data for which you want to do calculations, as well
as the calculated results. Information on the data set is shown in a table with
rows and columns.
The data in this table can be sorted. The sorting can be defined in the same way
as for the details part of the Data Explorer (see "The Data Explorer dialog" on
page 280): double clicking a column header sorts the data following that
criterion.
Section 5.11.7.1 The data set toolbar icons
Section 5.11.7.1.1 Add
Data selected in the detail view list of the browse tree is added to the data set.
Section 5.11.7.1.2 Replace

Data selected in the data set is replaced with data selected in the detail view list.
Section 5.11.7.1.3 Add from Input basket
Data from the input basket is added to the data set.
Section 5.11.7.1.4 Replace from Input basket
Data selected in the data set is replaced with data from the input basket.
The data items selected in the data set are removed from the data set.
Section 5.11.7.1.6 Insert Sorted

Default this button is selected, which will sort all inserted data, i.e. by adding or
replacing, to the dataset according to Name. Deselecting the button will insert
all data from the Grid in the DataExplorer or Input Basket according to
WhatYouSeeIsWhatYouGet.
Section 5.11.7.2 The Data Set Table

The Data Set table displays a list of the input data with some of their properties.
Some of the properties that are displayed are the following:
Id
Name
Formula
Point Id
Point Dir
Y Unit
X-axis
Fs
16A 313
Section 5.11.7.3 Data Set buttons
Section 5.11.7.3.1 Save results as...

Hit this button to save all the calculated results in the active project.
Section 5.11.7.3.2 Save selected as...
Hit this button to save the selected data items in the active project. To be able to
save data with the Save Selected As button, you must first select an entire
row. This can be done by clicking on the number of the row, in the first column.
Section 5.11.7.3.3 Clear Results

Removes all the calculated results from the Data Set. Data that was imported
into the Data Set using the Data Set toolbar icons cannot be removed.
Section 5.11.7.3.4 Edit Properties...
This allows you to edit some properties of the selected data items, in case these

are calculated results. The properties of Data that was imported into the Data
Set using the Data Set toolbar icons cannot be edited.
5.11.7.3.4.1 Label
This is where the name of the Data is displayed.
If the Keep label checkbox is active, this name (label) will not change due to
other changes.
5.11.7.3.4.2 Change
Activate the appropriate checkbox to change certain properties. Activate the
checkbox next to Change to activate all the underlying checkboxes. You can
change up to six properties at once.
5.11.7.3.4.3 Property
From the dropdown menu, you can choose the property of the date you wish to
edit. Up to six different properties can be edited at once.
5.11.7.3.4.4 Value
This dropdown menu will adapt accordingly to the property that was selected in
the Property dropdown menu (see above).
You can change the value by selecting the desired value from the Value
dropdown menu.
5.11.7.3.4.5 Edit Properties dialog buttons
Previous / Next
These buttons allow you to switch from one data block to another.
Apply to Current
Press this button to apply the changes to the current data.
Apply to All
Restore
This restores the changed properties to their original values.
16A 315
Close
This closes the Edit Properties Dialog.
Section 5.11.8 The Active Formula Set panel
In this panel, the calculation functions can be defined.
A new function can be defined by:
Section 5.11.8.1 Selecting an empty line in the table

The new formula can be typed into the edit line above the table.
Section 5.11.8.2 Selecting an empty cell

The new formula can be typed into the cell, or into the edit line above the table.
Section 5.11.8.3 Pressing the "Create New Function" icon
This will add a new formula to the table.
Note: A data item is referred to as "Fn" (function number), where n is the

index number of the data item. For example, F3 indicates the third data item
(with the index number 3) in the Data List.
Section 5.11.8.4 Formula Set icons

You can use these icons for a number of actions, among which: add a new
formula row to the table, delete a formula row, move a formula one row up, or
to move it one row down...
Section 5.11.8.4.1 New FormulaSet
This starts a new formula definition table by clearing the table of the current
FormulaSet.
Section 5.11.8.4.2 Save FormulaSet to DFS file
This saves the active Formula set by scheduling the Save DataCalculator
FormulaSet dialog.

Specify the location and name of the FormulaSet file (the DFS extension is
automatically added) and then click Save.
Note: It is possible to read and write this file (with window applications such
as Excel or Notepad).
Section 5.11.8.4.3 Load FormulaSet from DFS file
This loads an existing formula set by scheduling the "Select DataCalculator

FormulaSet" dialog.
Specify the location and name of an existing FormulaSet file with a DFS
extension and then click Open.
Section 5.11.8.4.4 Create new formula
This will create a new formula with the current Formula Editor entry.
Section 5.11.8.4.5 Delete the selected Formula
This will remove the selected formula(s) from the Formula Set.
Section 5.11.8.4.6 Move up
This will move the selected formula one position up.
To do so, first select the entire row by clicking the number in front of the row.
Section 5.11.8.4.7 Move down
This will move the selected formula one position down.
To do so, first select the entire row by clicking the number in front of the row.
Section 5.11.8.4.8 Insert a function
This inserts a function into the Formula Editor at the current position of the
cursor.
16A 317
It schedules the Select Function dialog where you can select the function to use.
Section 5.11.8.4.9 Renumber FormulaSet
When there is a conflict in the Ids of the Data Set and the Ids of the formulas,
"Renumber FormulaSet" will set the Ids of the formulas in the Active formula
set such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest Id of the
data items in the Data Set.
Section 5.11.8.5 Formula Editor

Below the formula set icons is the input field of the Formula Editor where you
can define and edit a formula.
Select the row you want to edit in the Active Formula Set table and edit the
formula in the Formula Editor field.
Section 5.11.8.5.1 Formula Editor

In defining a formula, mathematical symbols +, -, * and / can be used.
Units can be forced to other units without changing the values via the use of
squared brackets, e.g. [Unit Case Label] or [Pa]. The choice of the according
Quantity Case Name is based on matching Unit Case labels and the Unit Case
Status (LMS Units Editor). For temperature formulas, a forcing to Quantity
Case Name "TemperatureInterval" discards the temperature offset in the
calculations.
Additional functions can be accessed through pressing the Insert function icon
. This opens up a dialog with an extensive set of functions that can be used.
When the exact format of a function is known, it can be typed in directly in the
formula edit field, instead of using this dialog.
Most of the functions use one or more data items in their argument, and so use
the word "function" to indicate that.
For instance the function "SUM(function ; function)" calculates the SUM of

two functions.
So, after selection of the function, you should replace the words "function" with
the data items that you want to use. A data item is referred to as "Fn", where n is
the index number of the data item. For example, F2 indicates the second data
item in the Data List with index number 2.
To calculate the SUM of all functions between the first and the second function,
use a : sign. This means that if you want to calculate the sum of all data items
from index 2 to index 7, you would edit the function "SUM(function ;
function)" to become "SUM(F2:F7)".

The validity of the formula is automatically checked upon pressing the

keyboard Enter key. If it is correct, the box in the "Ok" column is green. If the
function is not valid, this box is red and the presumed cause of the invalidity is
indicated in the logging box.
Section 5.11.8.6 Formula Set table
In the Active Formula Set table all the Formulas that are currently active are
listed in a table.
The columns in the table define the properties associated with each Active
Formula.
This box is green when the formula format is correct. It turns red if the formula
is not valid.
After entering or editing a formula the formula is checked when you press the
Enter key of your keyboard.
Section 5.11.8.6.2 Id
You can assign a unique Id to each formula, which can then be used in other
formulas to refer to. The format of the Id should be "Fn" with n a unique
number.
The Id should be different from these already used in the Data set table. You
can use the Renumber Formula Set icon above the table to set the Ids of the
formulas such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest
number currently available in the Data Set.
Section 5.11.8.6.3 Formula

This is the formula that will be calculated when you press the Calculate button.
Section 5.11.8.6.4 Point Id

Here you can specify the Point id of the result. If you do not fill in this column,
the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Point id’s can only be used in a formula when the DOF id has direction “None”
which means that the DOF id is the same as Point id. Otherwise Point ids can’t
be used in a formula, even not when there is a single trace with a direction (no
ambiguity).
16A 319
Section 5.11.8.6.5 Point Dir

Here you can specify the Point Direction of the result. If you do not fill in this
column, the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Section 5.11.8.6.6 Repeat for...

If you want to calculate the formula on a range of data items, here you can
indicate the range. The format for this cell is "a:b", where a is the lowest index
and b the highest index number. The notation Fx should be used in the formula
to indicate that a range of data items is used.
(F16).
You would define the formula Fx/2 in the Formula column and the range 10:16
Formula definition
(F10/2, F11/2, F12/2, F13/2, F14/2, F15/2 and F16/2).
For formulas that require more than one function as input you can use the
notations Fx and Fxn, with xn corresponding to the index x+n. A formula Fx
+Fx10 for example
with a range 1:5 in the Repeat for... column and an increment 1 in the Increment
column, corresponds to the following formulas:
Section 5.11.8.6.7 Increment

The value in this column indicates the increment that will be used with the
defined range.

You would define the formula fx/2 in the Formula column, the range 10:16 in
the Repeat for... column and the increment (2) in the Increment column.
(F10/2, F12/2, F14/2 and F16/2).
If you do not define a value, the default of 1 will be used.
Section 5.11.8.6.8 Status
If the Ok column in the active formula table is red this field gives an indication
of what is wrong with the formula.
Section 5.11.8.7 Calculate buttons
Section 5.11.8.7.1 Calculate

This calculates the formulas in the Active Formula Set Table. The results of the
calculation are added to the Data Set table.
The results are saved when you push the Save Results As... button.
Section 5.11.8.7.2 Calculate Selected

This calculates the selected formula(s) using the Active Formula Set table.
Section 5.11.9 The Picture Display panel
This panel is where pictures are made. A picture consists of a display window
contained in a layout. The data is visualized graphically in the window.
Section 5.11.9.1 The Picture display area

The picture is created and adapted in this area, based on a chosen layout.
Section 5.11.9.2 Layout

A layout is an arrangement of display windows of a particular type and with a
defined set of attributes. A layout is selected from the pane header above the
16A 321
display windows.
Section 5.11.9.2.1 Number of displays

This is determined by the original layout selected. It is not possible to add or
remove displays from an existing layout. To change the number of displays, you
need to select a different layout or to create a new one.
Section 5.11.9.2.2 Size of displays

Pressing the Ctrl key and dragging one side of the display to make it bigger or
smaller can adjust the relative size of a display in a layout. You cannot however
make it bigger than its proportion of the original overall layout.
Section 5.11.9.2.3 Display type

This is defined when the layout is created. It cannot be adapted at another time,
and so to obtain different types of displays you must either select a different
layout or edit the layout in the 'Layout management dialog'.
Section 5.11.9.2.4 Display attributes

The characteristics of the display axes and display area can be set using entries
from the popup menus obtained in and around each window in the layout. The
entries in these menus depend on the type of window.
Section 5.11.9.3 Data

The data forms the contents of the display and the other component of the
picture. Data can be dragged into the picture either from the browser panel or
from the data selector dialog. The data has a number of attributes:

You can remove a data curve from a display by right clicking on the curve and
selecting Remove Curve.

Section 5.11.9.3.2 Move to lower
Section 5.11.9.3.3 Cut
Section 5.11.9.3.5 Copy Values
Section 5.11.9.3.6 Status Message
Section 5.11.9.3.7 Data Properties
Section 5.11.9.3.8 Curve Properties

Right click the data curve itself and select Curve Properties in order to adjust
the color and appearance of a data curve.
Section 5.11.9.3.9 Replay
Section 5.11.9.3.10 (De-)selecting of curves

In a FrontBack display, you can 'select' data by left clicking on that curve. This
will generate markers on the curve and cursor values will be displayed for these
points when a cursor is dragged over the curves.
You can deselect the same curve by left clicking on it while keeping the Ctrl
key down.
Left clicking on another curve will toggle the selection status.
Curves can be added to or removed from the selection status by clicking on

them while holding down the Ctrl or Shift keys or via the legend.
Section 5.11.10 The Picture Selection bar
16A 323
Each layout that has been added to the list of favorites in the “Layout
management” dialog (see "The Layout management dialog" on page 176)
will have an icon displayed here. If you have not specified a particular bitmap to
be associated with the layout then a “plain” icon will be displayed. Simply click
on the icon to load the layout.
Section 5.11.10.3 Add a detached picture window
Clicking this icon will create a detached window with all the same functionality
and layout as the Picture Selection Bar and the Picture Display Panel. You can
create and view data pictures just as in the non-detached picture panel.
and shows the picture. Clicking on the picture tab of an activated picture opens
a dropdown menu that allows you to perform a number of operations on the
active picture:
Section 5.11.10.4.1 Move First

Section 5.11.10.4.2 Move Last


Section 5.11.10.4.3 Move Left

Section 5.11.10.4.4 Move Right

Section 5.11.10.4.5 Copy to Metafile

Section 5.11.10.4.6 Copy to Bitmap

Section 5.11.10.4.7 Copy as Active picture (embedded data)

Section 5.11.10.4.8 Copy as Active picture (linked data)

Section 5.11.10.4.9 Make Printformat

This is the easy way to create a default format (see "[Procedure] To create a
single-picture print format in the Data Viewing worksheet" on page 196) for
the layout.

16A 325
Section 5.11.10.4.11 Print with...


Section 5.11.10.4.13 Duplicate

original layout.

Section 5.11.10.4.15 Delete All Pictures

Click the active tab and select Delete All Pictures from the dropdown menu in
order to remove the active picture and all your other pictures in the active
section.
Replace Data Origin

Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data origin of the
functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be done
for broken links as well. The replace will only work if the path to the new data
is identical to the path of the existing data in the displays.
The data origin can be ‘Project’ , ‘Section’ or ‘Run/Analysis/…’. When

selecting ‘project’, a list of the projects, originating the data in the picture(s), is
shown. This list contains regular testlab projects, ldsf files, tdf files, and
non-lms databases. The origin of unsaved data is not shown. When pushing
Browse, a different project can be selected.
When selecting ‘section’, a list of all sections is shown, originating the data in
section can be selected.
When selecting ‘run/Analysis/…’, a list of all ‘2d level’ items of a project

(being all runs, analysis, folders on sections) is shown, originating the data in
‘folder’ can be selected – please be careful to select the corresponding
run/analysis/folder in case of broken links.

In case an origin (Project/Section/Run) does not exist, it is coloured red.
When clicking Apply, the link to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new selected origin.
Section 5.11.10.4.16 Replace Data

Clicking on this gives you an the possibility to replace the data individually of
the functions, currently shown in the picture or in all pictures. This can be
done for broken links as well.
For each individual function in the picture(s), you can see which picture, display
and target it belongs, its ‘data origin’ (e.g. being the project containing the data)
and its ‘Data location’ (the structure inside the project). The ‘Data origin’ and
the ‘Data location’ can be changed with the browse button, or –only for test.lab
data - with typing in its new name.
You also see the Dof ID, the Ref DOF Id and the section value for each data
block. When altering these, the data location and data origin will be adapted
immediately. The new data is searched for on the folder itself or 1 folder up (in
case of waterfalls or referenced spectra). The result data will have the same
function classes as the original data. If it is not found, the cell is red and you
cannot click on OK.
You can duplicate data and remove data, move data up and down in the same
target of a display.
When clicking Apply, the links to the data in the picture(s) is replaced to the
new list.
Section 5.11.10.4.17 Save as Layout

With this functionality, the current picture (including its settings and data) is
saved as a layout (for the current user) – a name for the layout is asked. When
creating a new picture, this layout can be selected.
Section 5.12 The Data Block Processing worksheet
In this worksheet, you can combine data blocks from a selected source (Most
Recent Run, Active Section, Input Basket) in order to create new "metrics",
called "User Metrics". The combination of data blocks is possible through an
advanced calculator.
In this calculator, you can combine data blocks of different nature, assign to the
result any unit you want, including "User Defined Units" one can create in
Tools Options... Units Edit units User Defined Units.
In this calculator, you can create new kind of data blocks. The function class of
such new data blocks is called "User metrics". Since this class is too general, a
16A 327
specific attribute, the "function description", allows you to create a specific

name for the new metrics resulting from your calculations. The "function
description" together with the point Id and the point direction will appear as the
resulting data block name.
An advantage of the Data Block Processing is to allow post-processing

calculations after each measurement, using the "Most Recent Run" mode
together with automatic calculations.
Here is given a screenshot of the Data Block Processing worksheet:
The Data Block Processing worksheet is divided into three main panels:
Step 1
The Data Lists: On top left, the data list gives a view on all the data available
from the chosen data source, with a function Id (F1, F2 …) appended to every
data block. Below this list lays the Reference blocks list, fed by the
button. Their Ids are different (B1, B2 …) and these ones cannot be overwritten
run after run in the Most Recent Run mode.
Each column of the list can be sorted and a filter can be applied to facilitate the
search of specific data blocks.
Step 2
The Calculator, on the top right is identical to the Data Block Calculator but
allows to combine any data blocks, with the minimal requirement that the x-axis
are of the same type (time, frequency, octave). Combining data blocks may lead
to unknown units and unknown functions. Two columns are added to the
calculator to allow the use of User Defined units and to define the resulting
block name by using the Function Description.
Step 3
The display panel is identical to the one from navigator.

Section 5.12.1 [Procedure] To create and calculate user defined

metrics
Step 1
Take any time trace, for instance a sound file (acoustic group)
Step 2
Replace this time trace into the Input Basket (right click on the data file)
Step 3
Replace in the Time Data Selection worksheet (Data Source: Input Basket; and
click on the Replace button)
Step 4
In Time Data Processing, select the time data in the list
Step 5
In Time Data Processing, select some calculations in "Section" (Overall level,
Psychoacoustic metrics, Frequency/order/octave sections, Level calculations,
Modulation metrics, Frame statistics...)
Step 6
The calculation results in data blocks, which are all copied in the Data List of
the Data Block Processing (Data Source: Most Recent Run; and push the
Replace List button)
Step 7
In the Data Block Processing calculator, enter any formula that mixes data with
identical X-axis but different Y-axis units. The status is red then.
Step 8
Enter any unit, usually a User Defined Unit, created in Tools > Options... >
Units > Edit Units (with User Defined Units selected) > User Defined Units tab.
The status may become green.
Step 9
The data calculated in this calculator, mixing different data blocks and units, has
a general function class called "User metrics".
Step 10
To give a unique block name to the newly calculated data block, you can enter
any name in the "Function Description: cell of the calculator.
Step 11
The resulting name of the calculated "User Metric" block is: Function
Description + Point ID + Point Dir.
Step 12
Press calculate: The data from the formula is added to the Data List.
Step 13
The results are saved in the folder entered in the Results Destination, at the
bottom of the Data List.
16A 329
Section 5.12.2 The Data List panel
The Data List panel contains a Data Source header and a data list body and a
results destination bottom. These three parts are distinct and described
respectively below.
Section 5.12.2.1 Data Source Selection panel

The data from measurements/channels can be loaded into the Data Set using the
current (active) project, an existing Data Set, the Input Basket, the Most Recent
Run or any combination of these data sources.
Clicking on the […] button brings up the 'Data source selection' dialog in which
the data source can be selected. The selected Data Source is shown in a message
box.
 Most Recent Run (on page 330)
 Active project (see "Most Recent Run" on page 330)
 Data Set (see "Most Recent Run" on page 330)
 Input Basket (on page 331)
Once you have specified where to find the data, click on the [Add] or [Replace]
button.
The [Add] button adds the selected data to the current data set in the Data Set
panel.
The [Replace] button empties the Data Set and its content is replaced by the
newly-selected data.
Section 5.12.2.1.1 Most Recent Run

Most Recent Run
This is only sensitive when the Throughput Validation & Processing host (Time
Data Selection worksheet) is used as an Add-in in Acquisition workbooks.
Select this radio button to use the most recent run.
After each measurement, the selected run is automatically updated to
correspond to the last measured run.
Active project
When you select to find data in the current (active) project, you can specify a
section and a run (or all runs) from this section.
All the throughput data that have been measured in this section and run(s) are
selected. If your selection does not contain any throughput data, a popup
message will warn you of this fact when you push the Add/Replace button.

Section 5.12.2.1.2 Section selection

Select from the dropdown list the section in the current project that you want to
use.
Section 5.12.2.1.3 Run selection

Select from the dropdown list the run (or All runs) in the selected section that
you want to use.
Section 5.12.2.1.4 Data Set

Select this radio button to use a previously defined Data Set.
Enter the name of an existing data set in the field alongside or you can use the
Browse... button to select it.
A Data Set is a collection of pointers to time data. You can make a Data Set
(see "[Procedure] To make a Data Set" on page 374) and save it for later reuse
in this worksheet using the Save Data Set (on page 387) icon in the Data Set
toolbar.
Name field
This specifies the name and location of the DataSet file.
... button
This schedules the Select DataSet dialog for specifying the location and name of
the DataSet file with a XDS extension. Data Sets have a .XDS extension and are
as default saved in the DataSet folder on your local directory.
Section 5.12.2.1.5 Input Basket

This basket can be filled with any data blocks item or object: 2D data,
waterfalls, folders and projects, etc.
Please remind than only Test.Lab data blocks can be loaded to the Data Block
Processing.
Section 5.12.2.1.6 Add to List and Replace List buttons

Add to List button
This adds the selected data to the current Data list.
Replace List button
This empties the Data List and its contents are replaced by the newly-selected
data blocks.
16A 331
Section 5.12.2.2 Data List panel

In this panel, you have a view on all the available data blocks for calculations.
The "Data List" panel is identical to the one of the Navigator. However, the
columns are sorted in a bit different way by default. This sorting is dedicated to
show the most important information at a glance. Here is the available columns:
ID | Name | Folder / Name | Y-axis unit | Function Class | Octave domain
Section 5.12.2.2.1 Function ID column

A specific column is added at the left, the "ID" column, this is a very important
information, attributing a function ID to every data block in the list. This
function ID is the one that will be used to build equations in the Data Block
Processing calculator.
Section 5.12.2.2.2 Autofilter

It may be possible that the data list is huge. therefore, an "Autofilter" function
on each column of the Data List is helpful to visualize a restricted amount of
data blocks.
Right-click on any Data List column, then choose Filter > Autofilter.
Section 5.12.2.3 Reference Blocks data list

The lower data list is identical to the upper data list, described in Data List
panel (on page 332).
The difference is that the data blocks in this second list are so-called “reference
blocks”. Their function Ids is annotated as B1, B2 … to avoid confusion with
the data from the upper data list.
These reference blocks are loaded using the button from the calculator
panel (see Formula set icons (on page 333)).
The main advantage of reference blocks is its use in the Most Recent Run mode,
when “Calculate Automatically” is selected. In Most Recent Run mode, the
upper data list is replaced after each run but the reference blocks from the lower
data list remain the same whatever happens.
Section 5.12.2.4 Results destination panel

By default, the data is classified in alphabetical order of the data bocks Names.
The sorting can be modified in each column.
In this panel is given the location where to store the results from the Data Block
Processing.

By default, the results are stored in the current section, current run and
"UserMetricSaveDirectory".
To modify the results destination you can select first the Section, then the Run
and finally you can enter a folder name. You can even create a new folder by
entering a new name.
Section 5.12.3 The Data Block Processing Calculator
The Data Block Processing calculator is identical to the Data Block Calculator
from navigator.
However, two specific columns are added to the formula list: the Function
Description and the Unit columns.
These two extra columns allow defining new metrics by combining data blocks
with not compatible units or function class in the Formula column.
In this panel, the calculation functions can be defined. A new function can be
defined by:
Selecting an empty line in the table

The new formula can be typed into the edit line above the table.
Selecting an empty cell
The new formula can be typed into the cell, or into the edit line above the table.
Pressing the "Create New Function" icon

This will add a new formula to the table.
Note: A data item is referred to as "fn" (function number), where n is the

index number of the data item. For example, f3 indicates the third data item
(with the index number 3) in the Data List.
Section 5.12.3.1 Formula Set icons

You can use these icons for a number of actions, among which: add a new
formula row to the table, delete a formula row, move a formula one row up, or
to move it one row down...
16A 333
Section 5.12.3.1.1 New FormulaSet
This starts a new formula definition table by clearing the table of the current
FormulaSet.
Section 5.12.3.1.2 Save FormulaSet to DFS file
This saves the active Formula set by scheduling the Save DataCalculator
FormulaSet dialog.
Specify the location and name of the FormulaSet file (the DFS extension is
automatically added) and then click Save.
Note: It is possible to read and write this file (with window applications such as
Excel or Notepad).
Section 5.12.3.1.3 Load FormulaSet from DFS file
This loads an existing formula set by scheduling the "Select DataCalculator

FormulaSet" dialog.
Specify the location and name of an existing FormulaSet file with a DFS
extension and then click Open.
Section 5.12.3.1.4 Create new formula
Section 5.12.3.1.5 Delete the selected Formula
Section 5.12.3.1.6 Move up

Section 5.12.3.1.7 Down
Section 5.12.3.1.8 Insert a function
cursor.
Section 5.12.3.1.9 Renumber FormulaSet
When there is a conflict in the IDs of the Data Set and the IDs of the formulas,
"Renumber FormulaSet" will set the Ids of the formulas in the Active formula
set such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest ID of the
data items in the Data Set.
Section 5.12.3.1.10 Browse for Reference Blocks...
This button opens a panel with a list of data blocks with Ids B1, B2 … .
5.12.3.1.10.1 Add block...

The panel is at first empty, but clicking on “Add block…” opens a browser. It is
then possible to load blocks that are stored outside the current project.
5.12.3.1.10.2 Delete
Deletes the highlighted reference blocks from this list.
5.12.3.1.10.3 Close
Closes the Block Set Editor Selection dialog.

Below the formula set icons is the input field of the Formula Editor where you
can define and edit a formula.
16A 335
Select the row you want to edit in the Active Formula Set table.
Section 5.12.3.2.1 Formula Editor

In defining a formula, mathematical symbols +, -, * and / can be used.
Additional functions can be accessed through pressing the Insert function icon
. This opens up a dialog with an extensive set of functions that can be used.
When the exact format of a function is known, it can be typed in directly in the
formula edit field, instead of using this dialog.
Most of the functions use one or more data items in their argument, and so use
the word "function" to indicate that.
For instance the function "SUM(function ; function)" calculates the SUM of

two functions.
So, after selection of the function, you should replace the words "function" with
the data items that you want to use. A data item is referred to as "fn", where n is
the index number of the data item. For example, f2 indicates the second data
item in the Data List with index number 2.
To calculate the SUM of all functions between the first and the second function,
use a : sign. This means that if you want to calculate the sum of all data items
from index 2 to index 7, you would edit the function "SUM(function ;
function)" to become "SUM(f2:f7)".
The validity of the formula is automatically checked upon pressing the

keyboard Enter key. If it is correct, the box in the "Ok" column is green. If the
function is not valid, this box is red and the presumed cause of the invalidity is
indicated in the logging box.

In the Active Formula set table all the Formulas that are currently active are
listed in a table.
Formula.
This box is green the formula format is correct. It turns red if the formula is not
valid.
After entering or editing a formula the formula is checked when you press the
Enter key of your keyboard.

Section 5.12.3.3.2 On/Off

When this box is checked, the corresponding formula on this line will be
calculated. When this box is unchecked, the corresponding formula on this line
will not be calculated.
Section 5.12.3.3.3 Id
formulas to refer to. The format of the Id should be "fn" with n a unique
number.
The Id should be different from these already used in the Data set table. You
formulas such that the numbering is increasing and starting from the highest
number currently available in the Data Set.

Section 5.12.3.3.5 Point Id

Here you can specify the Point id of the result. If you do not fill in this column,
the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Section 5.12.3.3.6 Point Dir

Here you can specify the Point Direction of the result. If you do not fill in this
column, the result will have the same Point id as the original data.
Section 5.12.3.3.7 Function Description

The function description is a user-defined attribute that appears in the calculated
block name.
In the case the resulting data block has a function class "User Metric", then the
block name (appearing in the Data List and in the display Legend) is defined as:
Function Description + Point Id + Point dir.
Since the Point Id and Point Dir are also editable in the Active Formula Set
panel, the resulting data block name can be completely defined.

The unit column is by default blank. It assumes that if the data blocks entered in
Formula are assembled in an equation such that an existing unit can be easily
derived, then the unit is automatically selected by the calculation itself.
16A 337
In case the equation does not lead to an existing unit or to a unit easily derived
from an existing one, then the Status bar shows a red light and the calculation
seems not allowed.
Then, one can click on the cell of the Unit column to select an existing unit or a
new unit, created and saved in the Test.Lab unit system (Tools > Options... >
Units > Edit units > User Defined Units).
Section 5.12.3.3.9 Repeat for...

If you want to calculate the formula on a range of data items, here you can
and b the highest index number. The notation fx should be used in the formula
to indicate that a range of data items is used.
(F16).
You would define the formula fx/2 in the Formula column and the range 10:16
Formula definition
(F10/2, F11/2, F12/2, F13/2, F14/2, F15/2 and F16/2).

defined range.
You would define the formula fx/2 in the Formula column, the range 10:16 in
the Repeat for... column and the increment (2) in the Increment column.
(F10/2, F12/2, F14/2 and F16/2).
If you do not define a value, the default of 1 will be used.


Section 5.12.3.4.1 Calculate button

This calculates the formulas in the Active Formula. The results of the
calculation are added to the Data Set table.
The results are saved when you push the Save Results button.
Section 5.12.3.4.2 Calculate automatically

The Calculate automatically is an option going along with the "Most Recent
Run (on page 383)" mode (Data Source set to "Most Recent Run).
After a measurement (time data acquisition), inline processing is possible via

the chain of Time Data Selection, Time Data Processing and finally Data Block
Processing.
The measured data is automatically loaded into the Time Data Selection and
then into the Time Data Processing when the Most Recent Run mode is selected
for Data Source. From the calculations and processing done in the Time Data
Processing, new data blocks are generated (frequency/order/octave sections,
levels, psychoacoustic metrics...).
The calculated data blocks are automatically loaded in the Data Block
Processing Data List and the saved formulas in the calculator are applied
automatically.
The results are saved in the pre-defined location (Results destination).
Section 5.12.4 The Display panel


Each layout that has been added to the list of favorites in the "Layout
management" dialog (see "The Layout management dialog" on page 176) will
have an icon displayed here. If you have not specified a particular bitmap to be
associated with the layout then a "plain" icon will be displayed. Simply click on
16A 339
the icon to load the layout.

the picture. Clicking on the picture tab opens a dropdown menu that allows you
to perform a number of operations on the active picture:
Move First
Move Last
Move Left
Move Right
Copy to Metafile
Copy to Bitmap
Copy as Active picture (embed data)
Copy as Active picture (link data)
Make print Format

This is the easy way to create a default format for the layout.
Print
Print with...
Rename
Duplicate
original layout.
Delete
Delete All Pictures
Click the active tab and select Delete All Pictures from the dropdown
menu in order to remove the active picture and all your other pictures in the
active section.
A small button on the top right of each column appear. By clicking on it, you
can select which type of data block to show or not.
Section 5.13 The Data Block Editor worksheet
The Data Block Editor is a worksheet that can be scheduled as an add-in. It

allows you to create a data block by defining X/Y values. Also existing data
blocks can be imported and modified.
Section 5.13.1 [Procedure] To create a data block
Step 1
Click on the Data Block Editor tab in the workflow bar (at the bottom of the
project window).
Step 2
16A 341
Specify the Y-axis properties of the block:

Enter the Point id.
Select the Point direction, the Y-axis unit and the weighting type from the
option lists.
Step 3
Specify the X-axis:
Enter values for Number of lines, Start and End.
Select the X-axis unit from the option list.
The X-axis values in the table and in the display will be adapted according to
the specified values.
Check increment Fixed “on” if you want to define an X-axis with a fixed
increment and enter an increment value. The X-axis values in the values table
will be set according to the specified increment.
Check increment Variable “on” if you want to specify a non-equidistant X-axis.
In this case enter the X-axis values in the first column of the values table.
Step 4
Specify the function:
Select the function from the option list. The function qualifier definition fields
will adapt depending on the function you select.
Select the function qualifier from the option list.
The display will adapt to accommodate the type of data.
Step 5
Specify the Y-axis values:
Select the format in which the values in the table need to be interpreted using
the toggle Linear or dB.
Specify the value type from the option list above the table. You can define a real
block, a complex block by entering it amplitude and phase values, or a complex
block by entering its real and imaginary values. The columns in the table will be
adapted accordingly.
Enter the Y-axis values in the table. The display will be adapted accordingly.
Step 6
Click on Add to workspace to store the data block into workspace.
The List workspace button opens a dialog that lists all the blocks available in
the workspace.
Step 7
Click on Save workspace in active project to save the data in a section of the
active project. It schedules the "Save in active project " dialog.
Browse to the section in which you want to save the data.
Section 5.13.1.1 [Procedure] To copy and paste values from Excel to

the table
Step 1

When copying and pasting values from an Excel table the selected number of
cells need to correspond with the selected number of cells in the Test.Lab table.
Only cells containing numbers can be copied and pasted.
Note: If the error “Type mismatch while pasting” appears when pasting cells
containing numbers, this means that the “use 1000 separator (,)” is on in
Excel. You need to switch this option off.
Step 2
You can also copy and paste a complete column. If there are less cells in the
Test.Lab table column only the first values will be pasted. If there are more cells
in the Test.Lab table column the remaining cells will be filled with zeros.
Step 3
If the X-axis increment is variable also X-axis values can be copied and pasted.
Note: Test.Lab blocks can also be exported to Excel by using the copy values
option in the data menu accessed by right clicking on the curve in the display
Section 5.13.1.2 [Procedure] To create a data block starting from an

existing Test.Lab data block
Step 1
Push the Select block ... button. A dialog is scheduled containing a data
explorer.
Search for the project, section and run folders containing the data you wish to
process in the browser.
Select the data you want to import and push OK. The dialog is closed, the
attributes of the block are listed and the values appear in the table.
Step 2
You can modify now the Y-axis properties, the X-axis, the function type and the
data values if needed.
If the X-axis increment is changed, interpolation is used to obtain values for the
intermediate lines
Section 5.13.2 Function
The specified values forms part of the properties describing the block.
Section 5.13.2.1 Function

Select the function type from the dropdown menu.
16A 343
Section 5.13.2.2 Function qualifier

The name of this field will adapt according to function selected. Select the
function qualifier from the dropdown menu. If the function type is octave
spectrum, the octave band type can be selected as function qualifier. As a
consequence of the selection made the X-axis values in the table are set to the
normalized center frequencies of the selected octave band type.
Section 5.13.3 X-axis
Here you can define the X-axis, of the data block. The X-axis values in the table
and in the display are adapted according to the values specified here. The X-axis
values are related according to End = Start + Number of lines * Increment
Section 5.13.3.1 Nbr. of lines

Enter the number of lines in the data block.
Section 5.13.3.2 Start

Enter the first X-axis value. The number of lines in the block will be adjusted
accordingly.
Section 5.13.3.3 End

Enter the end X-axis value.
Section 5.13.3.4 Unit

Select the required unit from the options available.
Section 5.13.3.5 Increment

Choose the type of increment required

5.13.3.5.1.1 Variable
Check this button “on” if you want to specify a non-equidistant X-axis. If
selected, you can enter the X-axis values in the table.
5.13.3.5.1.2 Fixed
Check this button “on” and enter the increment value if you want to define an
X-axis with a fixed increment. The number of lines in the block will be adjusted
accordingly. The values in the table are set according to the specified increment
and cannot be modified. In case the function is an octave spectrum the X-axis
values are set to the normalized center frequencies and the specified increment

is not used.
Section 5.13.4 Y-axis
Here you can define the Y-axis of the block. The specified values forms part of
the properties describing the block.
Section 5.13.4.1 Point ID

Enter the id of the point on the structure under test.
Section 5.13.4.2 Point direction

Select the measurement direction for the point from the options available.
Section 5.13.4.3 Unit

Select the required unit from the options available.
Section 5.13.4.4 Weighting

Select the required acoustic weighting from the options available.
Section 5.13.4.5 Run slope

Select the required Run slope from the options available. Filling in this property
is required if you want to use the data block in the Compare Runs worksheet.
Section 5.13.5 Buttons
Section 5.13.5.1 Select Block ...

This button allows you to import an existing block. Pushing this button
schedules a dialog containing a data explorer. Select the data block you want to
import and push OK. The values of the data block appear in the table and the
Y-axis properties, the X-axis properties and the Function are updated to
correspond to this of the imported block.
Section 5.13.5.2 Add to Workspace

This button stores the data block that you have defined into workspace.
16A 345
Section 5.13.5.3 List Workspace

This button opens a dialog that lists all blocks available in the workspace.
Section 5.13.5.4 Save workspace in active project

This allows you to save the data in a section of the active project. It schedules
the "Save in active project " dialog. Browse to the section in which you want to
save the data.
Section 5.13.6 The Values table
This panel allows you to define the block values.
Section 5.13.6.1 Format options

The radio buttons let you choose whether the values in the table are interpreted
as Linear or dB values. The Y-axis format in the display is set according to the
format selected.
When Linear is selected and when the values were already entered in format dB,
these values will be converted to linear values.
When dB is selected and when the values were already entered in format Linear,
these values will be converted to dB values.
Section 5.13.6.2 Interpolation method

Interpolation is used to obtain values for the intermediate lines if the X-axis
increment is changed in the X-axis panel or if the update button is used. Select
the interpolation method from the option list above the table.
Section 5.13.6.3 Value type

If you want to define a real block select Amplitude from the option list above
the table. The table will show a column in which you can enter the amplitude
values.
If you want to define a complex block by entering it amplitude and phase

values, select Ampl/Phase from the option list above the table. The table will
show two columns in which you can enter the amplitude and phase values.
If you want to define a complex block by entering its real and imaginary values,
select Real/Imag from the option list above the table. The table will show two
columns in which you can enter the real and imaginary values.

Section 5.13.6.4 Update

This calculates values for intermediate empty lines in the table according to the
selected interpolation method. Select a new function and specify some values in
the table (for example the start and end value). Then use the update button to
calculate values for the intermediate lines. You can clear intermediate lines
using the popup menu obtained by right clicking on a selection of cells in the
values table, or by pressing the delete button.
Section 5.13.6.5 The table

A table is provided with X-Y values.
The X-axis values depend on the properties set in the X-axis panel.
If the X-axis increment is set to Fixed, the X-axis values in the table are set
according to the specified Start, End and Increment value and cannot be
modified.
If the X-axis increment is set to Variable, the number of lines in the block and
the Start and End value are set according to the specified values in the X-axis
panel. The X-axis values in between can be entered in the table.
Note: If the function selected in the Function panel is an octave spectrum the
X-axis values are set to the normalized center frequencies
You can enter the Y-axis values in the table or you can copy and paste values
from other cells or from Excel files.
The amplitude values in the table are interpreted as Linear values or dB values
depending on the setting of the toggle above the table.
The phase values in the table are interpreted in degrees.
When switching between format Linear and format dB, the values in the table
are recalculated to correspond to the selected format.
When switching between the options Ampl/Phase and Real/Imag, the values in
the table are recalculated to correspond to the selected value type.
If the X-axis increment is changed in the X-axis panel, interpolation is used to

obtain values for the intermediate lines. The method used for interpolation can
be set above the table.
Section 5.13.7 The Display
This provides a view of the data block currently being defined.
16A 347
Section 5.13.7.1 The 2D display

This is where your function is displayed.
Other data blocks can be loaded into the display using the Data Explorer.
Section 5.13.7.2 Window type selection

You can switch to an other type of 2D display using the selector in the panel
header.

Chapter 6 The LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis workbook
Chapter 6 The LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

workbook
In This Chapter
Introduction ........................................................................349
Derivation of a test specification ........................................351
Batch Reporting worksheet ................................................366
Time Data Selection worksheet ..........................................373
Section 6.1 Introduction
Almost all equipment is subjected to vibrational environments, such as that

encountered during road transportation at some point during its useful life. Such
environments have been shown to be both important and damaging, since
approximately half of the failures suffered during satellite and missile launch
vehicle flights can be attributed to mechanical vibration and shock. To reduce
such failure rates, therefore, it is essential to take these vibrational stresses into
account at an early stage of the development of the equipment and to be able to
design accurate tests to achieve this end.
Such tests must satisfy the following criteria:

 be severe enough to ensure that if the equipment survives the test then you
can safely assume that it will do so in the actual environment;
 be representative enough of the actual environment to give sufficient
confidence that if the equipment fails during the test it will do so under real
operational conditions;
 be general enough to ensure that all items of equipment of the same design
will survive the test.
A balance needs to be found therefore between severity and accuracy. The test
needs to give the developer the confidence that it is strenuous enough to
produce those failures that are likely to occur under normal operating
conditions, while avoiding such levels as would cause excessive damage as such
testing would tend to lead to a costly ‘over design’ of the equipment. Thus the
goal of the mission synthesis is to design the optimum test.
Section 6.1.1 Test strategies
Mission synthesis is concerned with the specifications for tests based on real
environmental data. To this end, there are two main strategies possible for
determining test specifications.
16A 349
Step 1
Testing of the equipment in situ
This involves mounting the equipment on the source of vibration and subjecting
it to the actual conditions it is likely to encounter. Such testing has the
advantage that
it is highly representative and requires no laboratory facilities for simulation or
specification of test conditions. In some cases (satellites for example) it is
highly
impractical and can be either costly or inaccurate if the life cycle of the
equipment is long. In addition, there is no real control over the test conditions
and the random
character of real life situations do not allow you to either test the limits of
endurance or to provide a safety factor.
Step 2
Testing of the equipment by simulation of conditions in a laboratory
For condition simulations, the test specifications can be based on either
standards or on data measured in the environment.
Section 6.1.1.1 Standards

There are a wide range of standards readily available defining levels for shock
and vibration tests, which in general are derived from real environmental data.
Using standard test specifications is useful when the conditions the equipment
will be subjected to are unknown or cannot be easily measured or approximated.
They are of course essential if you wish to ensure the equipment has a
predefined strength which complies with certain standards. Standards are
however conservative by nature and in general will lead to overdesigned
equipment, incurring a long and costly development.
Section 6.1.1.2 Real environmental data

This type of testing can be performed when the life cycle of the equipment is
well known. When this life cycle can be divided into stages of known duration
and loading conditions, specifications can be developed which closely simulate
the real environment. Testing to the limits enables safety margins to be
evaluated, and in general the risk of oversizing is diminished.
On the other hand, however, the equipment will be designed for a specific life
cycle.This implies that comparisons between different pieces of equipment are
difficult and that changes to the test specifications will require a new
assessment. It is also important to ensure that the actual testing complies with
the specifications. This is not always easy because of mechanical impedance
problems.
The Test.lab Mission synthesis software enables you to determine test

specifications based on real environmental data.

Section 6.2 Derivation of a test specification
This section describes how a test specification for a particular life profile of a
piece of equipment can be derived from a set of data describing the real
environment.
The determination of the test specification can be summarized as the following

stages:
Step 1
Analysis of the life cycle (on page 9)
Step 2
Collection of the data on the real environment (on page 9)
Step 3
Determination of the environment to be simulated (on page 10)
Step 4
Determination of the test PSD or sweeping sine (on page 24)
Section 6.2.1 Analysis of the life cycle
The life cycle of an item of equipment can be broken down into a series of
phases known as situations, as illustrated in the flow chart below.
Figure 1 Life profile of the equipment
In general, situations occur one after the other, i.e., in series. At some stages in
the life cycle, however, situations may occur in parallel, as illustrated above.
During each situation, there are a number of parameters that effect the
environment. These can include such factors as speed, position of the
equipment, duration of the phase, as well as conditions such as temperature,
humidity and vibrations, which must be taken into account.
16A 351
Section 6.2.2 Collection of the data on the real environment
Data must be obtained to evaluate each situation identified in the life cycle.
Several sources of this type of data are possible.
 Measurements made under actual conditions
Such data which involves placing the equipment in the actual environment is the
most accurate. But since the equipment is often not available and the
measurement situation impractical, it is also the most difficult to obtain.
 Measurements made on vehicles without the test object
When the test equipment is not available, useful data can be obtained by taking
measurements on the actual vehicles to be used in the life profile, and either
modelling the test structure or weighting the resulting data with transfer
functions.
 Representative measurements obtained from data bases
In many cases, data acquired for defining or verifying test specifications is
retained in data banks. This can be useful when making test specifications for
vehicles in the same category, where the measured values are felt to
approximate sufficiently to the current situation. Such data are generally
available as time signals, shock response spectra or power spectral densities.
 Standards
 Prediction computations
Section 6.2.2.1 Data describing the environment

The categories for describing the environments can be broken down into actual
measured data taken from a database or data generated specifically to describe a
particular situation. Once data has been selected for use in the mission synthesis
program it is called an "environment" and can be seen in the upper list in the
‘Mission synthesis’ module.
Section 6.2.2.1.1 Measured data

The measured data must be of type acceleration. They can be:
 Frequency spectra referred to as Swept sine
 Autopower spectra referred to as Random PSD
 Time samples − from shock pulses, TDF files or random measurements
referred to as Time records
Section 6.2.3 Determination of the environment to be simulated
The simulated environment must be as severe as the real one, allow a reduced
test time to be implemented, and preferably be capable of being conducted on
standard testing equipment. The determination of the simulated environment

consists of three stages:

 the synthesis of the equivalent damage potential of the real environment this
involves the computation of the SRS, MRS and FDS
 the application of an uncertainty (safety) factor to take into account the
uncertainties that exist in the definition of the test specifications
 the combination of all the factors describing individual situations into one
global test specification
Section 6.2.3.1 Synthesis of the equivalent damage potential

The starting point is the data collected on the real environment − consisting of
the shocks and random vibrations to which the equipment is subjected. The
damage incurred by these loads arises from:
Step 1
the stress exceeding a maximum (threshold)
Step 2
the accumulated fatigue due to cyclic loading
The first type of stress is represented by the Maximum Response Spectrum and
the Shock Response Spectrum, and the second type by the Fatigue Damage
Spectra.
16A 353
Section 6.2.3.1.1 Calculation of the Shock Response Spectrum (SRS)

A shock response spectrum models the damage potential of an object that has
been subjected to an acceleration shock time pulse. It is obtained, by
considering the response of a series of damped single−degree− of−freedom
systems, each with a different natural frequency, to the input pulse. A plot of the
peak response against the natural frequency defines the shock response
spectrum. This is illustrated below.
Figure 3 Derivation of a shock response spectrum
A typical SDOF system and the differential equation for the response y of the
mass is given below.
where

 m is the mass
 c is the viscous damping coefficient
 k is the spring constant.
Using the natural frequency , and critical damping factor , Equation 1 can
be written as:
Using Laplace transformation, we can obtain the transfer function of the

response of the mass for base excitation as:
Similarly the transfer function of relative displacement of the mass with respect
to the base, for base excitation, is derived as:
Equations 4 and 5 define ‘Shock filters’ in the frequency (Laplace) domain. The
smaller the value of , the larger will be the magnification factor for the filter
response for frequencies in the input near the resonance frequency . The
Laplace transform of the response of such a shock filter to a given base input is
obtained by multiplying by the Laplace transform of the base input.
16A 355
Section 6.2.3.1.2 Calculation of the Maximum Response Spectrum

(MRS)
This function represents the variation with frequency of the maximum response
of a series of damped single−degree− of−freedom systems, each with a different
natural frequency, to a dynamic load. While the SRS models the response to
short but high level time pulses, the MRS represents the steady state response to
repetitive, lower level time pulses. The loading signal can be a time function or
a Power Spectral Density function derived from the original time signal.
Figure 4 Derivation of the maximum response spectrum
Section 6.2.3.1.3 Calculation of the Fatigue Damage Spectrum (FDS)

The relationship between the maximum stress induced by cyclic loading
and the maximum number of cycles before rupture for a given material is
given by the Woehler curve. The constant A and the exponent b are
characteristics of the material.

Figure 5 Woehler curve
The stress is assumed to be related linearly to the strain (relative displacement)

through the Elastic modulus of the material. is the number of cycles at which
rupture or failure will occur when the object is subjected to cyclic stress at level
. The fatigue damage induced by cycles at level can be quantified by
the ratio . A real environment load will rarely be purely cyclic. There are
however several counting algorithms that can extract a number of cyclic loads at
different levels and numbers of cycles . The two methods are Zero max
and Range pair. Range pair is used in Test.Lab software.
Zero max
This method consists of searching for the maximum value between any two zero
crossings, and considering this as a half cycle at that level.
The cumulative damage D can be derived in the following manner.
16A 357
Range pair
This method consists of counting ranges between consecutive peaks and valleys
in the signal. The first phase consists of a data reduction process whereby
ranges that are smaller than the following one are eliminated from the signal. In
the example shown here, R1>R2, so R1 is not eliminated. R2<R3 so R2 is
eliminated from the signal and one cycle is added to the cycle count. The
process is then restarted using the new signal. R4>R1 so the point is retained as
a residual and the search continues for smaller ranges.
At the end of the first phase the result is a count of all the cycles removed and
series of residual points retained from the original signal. The second phase
consists of dividing the signal into a series of consecutive range pairs as shown
below. 1 cycle is then added to the cycle count for each pair.
The final result is a cycle count with the corresponding level determined
from its range value . According to Miners rule, the cumulative damage ( )
due to the real loading is given by

If D is equal to 1, then the object will fail due to fatigue. The Fatigue Damage
Spectrum is arrived at by considering the cumulative damage experienced by a
series of damped single−degree− of−freedom systems, each with a different
natural frequency to the input load. A plot of the cumulative damage against the
natural frequency defines the Fatigue Damage Spectrum, as illustrated in Figure
6.
Figure 6 Derivation of a Fatigue Damage Spectrum
Section 6.2.3.2 Application of the uncertainty (safety) factor (k)

The determination of a test specification from measured data involves taking
into account a whole series of uncertainties arising from different sources. The
test data, for example, are subject to measurement errors and inadequacies of
the test method. The actual results obtained are subjected to variations or
dispersal of values for both measured vibrations and strengths. Because of this it
is necessary to apply a safety or uncertainty factor to compensate. However,
simply summing the uncertainty factors from all possible sources would lead to
an unrealistically high value. The purpose of this section is to show how a
realistic uncertainty factor (k) can be derived.
An arbitrary value of (k) can be chosen. This strategy should be adopted when
very few environments are being used to determine the test specification. In this
case you should define a User defined factor and simply enter the required value
for k. MRS and FDS factors respectively will then be multiplied by this value
when determining the test specification.
If the distribution of the environmental load E (CVE and distribution type) and
the distribution of the material resistance R (CVR and distribution type) are
known, then a Constant uncertainty factor k can be computed. If a large amount
of data is available, then a variable coefficient of variation CVE can be
computed for each frequency.
16A 359
The parameter used to describe the characteristic environment relating to a

situation can generally be regarded as a random function represented by a type
of distribution, a mean value and a standard deviation as shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7 Distribution of the environmental load
The standard deviation as well as its ratio with the value known as the
coefficient of variation can be computed either from the measured
data or obtained from specialist literature. The most suitable distribution
function for the environmental load level is considered to be a log−normal one.
Similarly, the capability of the equipment to resist the loads exerted by the
environment can be described in a similar way, as shown in Figure 8.
Values for the coefficient of variation can be obtained from

reference to the appropriate literature or by performing measurements on some
of the test objects. A suitable value based on published results is considered to
be A suitable value for the coefficient of variation for fatigue damage
is Strength distributions can be represented by both normal and
log−normal distributions, but the log−normal one is considered to be the most
suitable.
Figure 8 Distribution of material resistance
If all the above parameters are known, then the actual probability (P) that an
equipment material will not withstand its environment can be determined.

P = Prob (Environment > Resistance)
This can be represented graphically by the area where the curves describing the
loads and the material characteristics overlap as shown below.
Figure 9 Probability of failure P
If we now impose a required probability failure (P0) by moving the material

resistance curve to encompass this area we can arrive at a (fictional)
position where this condition is satisfied as shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10 Required probability of failure P0
The ratio of this position (where r implies required) to the

environment (where m implies measured) is known as the uncertainty factor
(k)
Eqn 8
If then the failure probability (P) of the material will be less than the
imposed value (P0) for this particular environment The goal of the test
specification is to prove that this is in fact the case and that failure is unlikely to
occur.
16A 361
The arbitrary or computed value of k is now applied and the required

environment is given by
This has to be done for each frequency line of the environmental load E. If CVE
is retrieved from the literature, k will be constant over the frequency range. If
CVE is computed from measured data, then k will vary with frequency. Figure 2
shows the final outcome of this stage is a triplet of functions (SRS, MRS and
FDS) determining the equivalent damage potential for a particular situation.
Section 6.2.3.3 Combining the situations

The three spectra describing each situation must now be combined according to
their role in the overall life cycle. These situations can exist in parallel or in
series. Consider the following life profile.
Section 6.2.3.3.1 Situations in parallel

In this case the equipment is subjected only to one of the parallel situations
or . The combined effect is arrived at by computing:

Section 6.2.3.3.2 Situations in series

Now the equipment is subjected only to situations in series. The combined
effect for all situations is arrived at by computing:


 the sum of the
Section 6.2.4 Establishment of the test program
The purpose of quantification testing is to demonstrate that the equipment has a

certain reliability, i.e. that it has a failure probability less that P0. The discussion
on the application of the uncertainty factor (see "Application of the
uncertainty (safety) factor (k)" on page 17) showed that this was equivalent to
proving that the condition exists. If it can be shown that if n tests are
done at level (where TF is the test factor), and that all these tests
resulted in no failures, then the above conditions is satisfied.
Consider first, a statistical variable x with the mean value m, and standard
deviation The variable given by
(where n is the number of values of x) is also a statistical variable with mean

value m, and standard deviation given by
The mean value for the equipment resistance can be determined by performing a
number of tests (n). From the above theory, we will know that the mean value
calculated from these n results will lie within a certain range centered on the
actual mean value
It will in fact lie in a range defined by the limits and defined by a

certain confidence factor X%.
The test factor is defined as
16A 363
which can be computed when the following parameters are known:
Let us now consider the particular hypothetical case where n ruptures occurred
at the same load level Rconst
which implies that
So if n tests were carried out, and all failed at the same level (Rconst), then
Rconst lies in the range Rinfr to Rsupr with confidence level X%.
Now assume that n tests are performed at a test level ET and that no failures
occurred. This implies that ET < Ri for all n tests.
In the worst case this would mean that the test level was only just below the
rupture level
From the above, we know that

and
This defines the possible positions of
and
as indicated by the gray area in the figure.
The worst case is the lowest range where ET was equal to Rsupr. This implies that
although n tests resulted in no failures, the strongest specimens had been tested.
The mean resistance is smaller than ET.
But if we now consider the case where the test level is set to
Therefore, if we do n tests without failure at level we have proven

that even for the worst case and the failure probability of the material
will be less than P0 for the environment load defined by
16A 365
Section 6.2.5 Determination of the test PSD or sweeping sine
The final stage is to find a swept sine or random signal which will form an
adequate test specification. When fatigue is critical, this PSD − based on the life
profile functions and the test factor − must have an FDS that envelopes that of
the life profile (reference) FDS. If this is not the case, then the test specification
parameters must be adjusted and a new PSD determined.
Figure 11 Generation of the test PSD and swept sine where fatigue is critical
For certain applications, it is preferable to determine the characteristics of the

PSD based on the MRS or the SRS. This procedure can be adopted if fatigue
damage is not a critical factor. The same procedure as shown in Figure 11 is
adopted.
Section 6.3 Batch Reporting worksheet
The Batch Reporting worksheet allows you to gather and sort 2D and waterfall
data, and batch print it based on a selected print format.
Section 6.3.1 [Procedure] To batch report data
Step 1
Create the data set.
Clicking on the ... button brings up a dialog in which the data source can be
selected. The data can be loaded into the data set using the Input Basket, the
Active Project, Search Results or the Workspace.
Select the source in the "Data source selection" panel that contains the data.
Check the Input Basket box “on” if you want to import data from the input
basket. The input basket can be filled using the Data Explorer option of the Data
menu or by using the Navigator worksheet. Check the Active project box “on”
if you want to import data from the active project. In this case you need to select

also the Section and Run from which you want to import the data. Data can also
be imported from the Search Results. Therefore you can perform a search in the
Navigator worksheet and import this data into batch reporting. In a similar way,
data can be imported from the Workspace.
Click on the Add to List button to add the selected data to the current data set
in the Data Set panel. When all data is added to the data set, hit the Close
button to close the dialog.
Step 2
Adjust the data set.
The data in the data set is shown in the Data Set panel.
You can add/remove columns showing particular data properties using the
“Select Columns” dialog. This dialog is available by right clicking on a column
header of the Data Set panel. By using this dialog all sort of attributes of
different origin and type can be added or removed.
Click on Select Columns... to open the dialog. First select the Origin and
Type for which you want to specify a column. Select the columns you wish to
display from the list of “available” columns and put them in the list of
“selected” columns. You can sort the display order of the columns by using the
arrow icons. Apply your column list choices by clicking on the Apply button.
Step 3
Sort the data set.
Now you can use the different columns in the Data Set panel to sort the
available data. You can define the sorting order by selecting the Sort... entry in
the drop-down menu that can be opened by right clicking on a column header or
on the background of the Data Set panel. Doing this schedules a dialog box in
which a sort order can be defined by selecting the corresponding columns in the
specified order, and selecting whether data should be sorted in ascending or
descending order. Click on Apply to apply the sorting on the data.
The Auto sort function can also be applied by left-clicking on a column header.
This will apply a sorting on the Data Set using the settings in the
Step 4
Load the print format in which you want to report the data.
Click on Load a format to open the list of predefined formats and select the
desired format. If the list of available print formats is empty, you will need to
create a print format. (see "Creating print formats" on page 195)
Step 5
Group and display the data.
The Group size can be adjusted to the desired amount of data of the Data Set
panel that you want to use in each print format. The data of each group will be
printed on a different print format. You can choose the Group size in the Data
Set panel by entering a specified number or using the arrow keys.
Displaying data is done by dragging and dropping a block or waterfall of the
current group into the desired display of the print format. Each block or
waterfall can be used and displayed multiple times in the print format if
16A 367
necessary.
Notice that only the data of the current group is displayed and the corresponding
data is highlighted in the Data Set panel. You can change the current group to
check whether the data of the different groups is similar. This is also indicated
in the status bar on the bottom of the Reporting panel.
If necessary you can use the Delete, Move Up, Move Down, Duplicate ,
Insert Block and Insert WF (Waterfall) buttons in order to make the data of
different groups similar.
Step 6
Use Templates (Optional step)
Previous actions (Step 2 to Step 5) can be saved into a template to improve the
overall reporting efficiency. So, all settings regarding the column visibility,
sorting criteria, group size, teaching of the data to the print format can all be
saved in a template by using the Load Template… and Save Template…
buttons. If you would like to reset all automatic changes (loading a print format,
data teaching, sorting…) you can use the Reset Template button.
Step 7
Report the data.
In the Reporting panel you can choose whether the Current group or All groups
will be printed. Press the Print button to report the data in the selected print
format. If a preview is desired, hit the Preview button.
The progress indicator in the Status Bar shows the progress of the operation.
Use the Cancel button to cancel the printing operation.
Section 6.3.2 The Data Selection panel
Clicking on the ... button brings up a dialog in which the data source can be
selected. The data can be loaded into the data set using the Input Basket, the
Active Project, Search Results and the Workspace or a combination of those.
The selected Data Source is shown in a message box in the Data Selection
Panel.
The Add to List button adds the selected data to the current data set in the Data
Set panel.
The 'Data source selection' dialog gives an overview of the different possible
data sources:

The input basket can be filled using the Data Explorer option of the Data menu
or by using the Navigator worksheet. It can contain any data item or object: 2D
data, Waterfalls, folders, projects, etc. All 2D and waterfall data that is in any of
the objects of the input basket will be added to the Data Set when clicking Add
to List.

Section 6.3.2.2 Active Project

Check the Active project radio button if you want to import data from the active
project. In this case you also need to select the Section and Run from which you
want to import the data.
Section Selection
Select from the dropdown list the section (or All sections) in the current project
that you want to use.
Run selection
you want to use.
Section 6.3.2.3 Search Results

Checking the “Search Result” radio button allows you to import Search Results
in the batch reporting. All 2D and waterfall data present in the Search Results
will be added to the Data Set when clicking Add to List. Search results can be
attained by performing a search in the navigator worksheet.
Section 6.3.2.4 Workspace

After checking the “Workspace” radio button, all 2D and waterfall data present
in the Workspace will be added to the Data Set when clicking Add to List.
When all data is added to the data set, hit the Close button to close the Data
Source Selection dialog.
Section 6.3.3 The Template Set panel
In the Template Set Panel you can choose to load a template which contains all
kind of predefined settings. This can improve the overall reporting efficiency.
Making use of a template ensures that the correct columns are automatically
shown, sorting is applied, the group size is set, the correct printformat is loaded
and data teaching is automatically done.
Section 6.3.3.1 Load Template...

A dialog will list all available templates in the the local and/or group folder
(especially PrintFormats folder). Selecting a template will automatically apply
all settings.
16A 369
Section 6.3.3.2 Save Template...

At any time you can click on the “Save Template” button allowing you to define
a name for the template and saving it in the local folder. This template will then
contain all column settings, sorting, group size and data teaching.
Section 6.3.3.3 Reset Template...

Clicking on the “Reset Template…” button will ensure that no additional
columns are visible and no sorting is applied to the data in the data panel, also
the group size will be reset to 1 and no print format will be loaded. However the
data in the data set panel will not be removed.
This panel contains a view of the contents of the Data Set. The information on
the Data Set is shown in a table. You can add/remove columns and apply
sorting on the data. This view can be saved and loaded. All those options are
available in a popup menu that can be shown by right-clicking on one of the
column headers or in the background of the Data Set.
Section 6.3.4.1 Columns

You can add/remove columns showing particular data properties using the
“Select Columns” dialog. This dialog is available by right clicking on a column
header of the Data Set panel. By using this dialog all sort of attributes of
different origin and type can be added or removed.
Select Columns...
Click on Select Columns... to open the dialog. First select the Origin and
Type for which you want to specify a column. Select the columns you wish to
display from the list of “available” columns and put them in the list of
“selected” columns. You can sort the display order of the columns by using the
arrow icons. Apply your column list choices by clicking on the Apply button.
Sort
You can use the different columns in the Data Set panel to sort the available
data. Define the sorting order by selecting the Sort... entry in the popup menu
that can be opened by right clicking on a column header or on the background
of the Data Set panel. This action will schedule a dialog box in which a sort
order can be defined by selecting the corresponding columns in the specified
order and selecting whether data should be sorted in ascending or descending
order.
A maximal number of 7 columns can be used in the sorting criteria. Click on

Apply to apply the sorting to the data. The columns which are taken into
consideration for sorting, together with the sorting order will be indicated by a

letter in the column headers (from A to G corresponding to a maximum of 7 sort

criteria).
There are two additional options to extend the sorting possibilities:

 Limit Data Sorting to this Sort Panel
This option will ensure that sorting can be defined only in this dialog. If this
option is disabled you can always overrule the sorting by clicking on the
column header which will consecutively sort the column ascending or
descending. Clicking on a column header will ensure that this column will be
the first sorting criterion (indicated by letter A) followed by possible already
defined sorting criteria.
 Order Columns according to Sort Sequence
When sorting is applied, each column on which a sorting is defined will be
annotated with a prefix (letter A to G). If this option is enabled we will sort the
order of the columns in such a manner that the first column is shown to the left
while the last sorting options are presented to the right.
Auto Sort
The Auto Sort function can also be applied by left clicking on a column
header. This will apply a sorting on the Data Set using the settings in the
Load/Save View
All the setting of the columns and sorting in the Data Set Panel can be saved
and loaded. This can be done right-clicking on a column header and then
clicking on the Load View... or Save View... button. By default the view is
saved in a DataListView Folder on the Local Folder.
Section 6.3.4.2 Groups

In the Data Set panel there is also the possibility to group data and create similar
groups. This can be done by browsing through the different groups and where
necessary deleting, moving, duplicating ... blocks or waterfalls. All the options
are described below.
Group size
The Group size can be adjusted to the desired amount of data of the Data Set
panel that you want to use in each print format. The data of each group will be
printed on a different print format. You can choose the Group size in the Data
Set panel by entering a specified number or using the arrow buttons.
Current group
Only the data of the current group is highlighted in the Data Set Panel and can
be displayed in the Print Format panel. This can be done by dragging and
dropping the desired block or Waterfall from the Data Set panel into a display in
the Print Format panel. Each block or waterfall can be displayed multiple times
in the print format if necessary. You can change the current group to check
16A 371
whether the data of different groups are similar. If not, this is also indicated in
the status bar on the bottom of the Reporting panel.
The current group can be changed by specifying a number or by using the arrow
buttons. There is also the possibility to move directly to the last or first group.
Show data
If desired, you can hide the curves added to the displays by unchecking the
'Show data'. This provides you a better overview of the print format.
Delete
When a Block or Waterfall is selected and you click on the Delete button, the
selection is removed from the Data Set list. If the whole list must be deleted,
you can select one item and press Ctrl+A (select all) and then click the Delete
button.
Move Up
This moves the selected item one position upwards in the Data Set list.
Move Down
This moves the selected item one position lower in the Data Set list.
Duplicate
By using the Duplicate button you can duplicate a block or Waterfall of the
Data Set list.
Insert Block
The Insert Block button will insert an empty block one position before the
selection. It can be used to make groups similar.
Insert WF
The Insert WF button will insert an empty Waterfall one position before the
selection. It can be used to make groups similar.
Sort
Order of the input data can change when using the buttons “Delete” “Move Up”
“Move Down”, “Duplicate”, “Insert Block”, “Insert WF” or when replacing the
data set. Such action can also disturbe the sorting that was applied when loading
a template. Therefore we have this “Sort” button available to apply the sorting
defined in the template again on the available dataset in the left panel.
Section 6.3.5 The Print Format panel
Click on Load a format to open the list of predefined formats and select the
desired format. If the list of available print formats is empty, you will need to

create a print format.
Section 6.3.5.1 Display

The display can also be copied to a Metafile, Bitmap and Active Picture
(embedded or linked data), those options are available in the dropdown-menu of
the picture tab.
Section 6.3.6 The Reporting panel
In the Reporting Panel you can choose whether the Current Group or All
Groups will be printed. Press the Print button to report the data in the selected
print format. If a preview is desired, hit the Preview button.
Section 6.3.6.1 Progress

The progress indicator in the Status Bar shows the progress of the operation.
Use the Cancel button to cancel the printing operation.
Section 6.4 Time Data Selection worksheet
In this worksheet you can define Data Sets.
A data set is a set of 2D data with an X-axis that has as quantity "time" or
"angle".
A data set can consist of one or more measurements. A measurement consists of

a set of channels that have been measured at the same time (a Test.Lab run or
data in one file).
To do this, the worksheet has:
16A 373
 a data area that lists the data you collect in a table as a Data Set.
 a multi-trace display area that allows you to see data from the Data Set.
 an option to display the data in a 3D display either as a colormap or a
waterfall.
Section 6.4.1 [Procedure] To use the Time Data Selection

worksheet
Section 6.4.1.1 [Procedure] To make a Data Set

Step 1
Click on the […] button in the "Data source selection" panel to open the 'Data
source selection' dialog in which the data source can be selected. In the Data
Source Selection dialog, select the radio button (the data source) that contains
the measured data.
Input Basket, the current (active) project, an existing Data Set or any
combination of these data sources.
When you select the current (active) project as data source, open the Test.Lab
project file first that contains your measured data using the File File Open...
menu.
Select then from the "Section" dropdown list the section in the current project
that you want to use and select from the "Run" dropdown list the run in the
selected section that you want to use. You can also specify All runs. All the
throughput data that have been measured in this section and run(s) are now
selected.
When you select a previously defined Data Set as data source, enter the name of
the data set in the field alongside or use the Browse... button to select it.
Throughput Data Sets have a .TDS extension and are as default saved on your
local directory in the Lms folder ...\local\DataSet.
When you select the Input Basket as data source fill the Input Basket (see
"[Procedure] To fill an input basket" on page 281) first by using the data
explorer.
Step 2
Press the Add button.
This action will add the selected data to the current Data Set.
New measurements are always created in any event, even if the data has already
been added to the Data Set.
Step 3
Use the Replace button, if required.
This action empties the current Data Set and its contents is replaced by the
Step 4

To save the Data Set, click on the Save Data Set icon in the Data Set
toolbar, and define the name (e.g. TP Data Set) of the Data Set.
Save it to your local directory in the Lms folder ...\local\DataSet.
The Data Set is a collection of pointers to the data and can be reused in this
worksheet.
Note: The Data Set contains links to the original data, if the original data has
changed its path, it will not be possible to recover the data.
Section 6.4.1.2 [Procedure] To view and sort data in the Data Set
Step 1
Selecting the view of the data set table in the pane header
You can switch between three views (Measurements – Channels List –
Channels Pivot).
 Select the measurements view if you want to have a list of all
measurements. In this view you can also select the segment that will be used
for processing in the Time Data Processing worksheet.
 Select the channels list view if you want to have a detailed view on all
channels in a measurement. In this view you can sort the data. You can
scroll through the measurements using the Measurement browser buttons
above the table.
 Select the channels pivot view if you want to have an overview table of all
channels in all measurements.
Step 2
Sorting and Filtering data in the channel list view
 Use the selector above the table for filtering the data in the data set. If you
want for example only to see the vibration channels, select “Channel group”
in the first and “Vibration” in the second selection list.
 Use the different columns to sort the data. You can do this by double
clicking on a column header.
 Scroll through the measurements using the Measurement browser buttons
above the table. You can also select the measurement in the selection list
near the scroll buttons.
Step 3
Viewing data in the channel pivot view
Select the rows and columns you want to see in the table using the selection lists
above the table. In the default view the rows are the channel names and the
columns the measurements. The cells indicate the number of items (channels) in
that cell.
Section 6.4.1.3 [Procedure] To view data in the multi-trace display

Step 1
Add the data to the display by checking the corresponding "View" check box in
16A 375
the data set table. New windows will be created, each containing a data curve.
The order with which the data are put in the windows is the current order in the
data set table.
Use the “Multiple channels view” icon above the data set table if you want to
select and display multiple channels at once. Select first the channels in the data
set table, and then push the “Multiple channels view” icon.
Step 2
Navigation over channels
Each time the next, previous, up or down arrows in the data set are pressed, the
data selection in the data set table is moved from its current position.
Step 3
Displaying multiple curves per window
You can drag and drop selected data into a window.
Note: When navigating over the channels a curve that is added to the front of
the display window, will be replaced. Add a curve to the back of the display
window if you want that it remains in its corresponding display when
navigating over the channels (e.g. a reference curve).
You can also set the "number of curves per window" parameter. In this case the
If you want to include multiple curves per window are kept when navigating
over the channels:
 Set the "number of curves per window" parameter
You can set this in the display properties dialog scheduled by clicking
the “display properties” icon above the data set table.
This parameter is the maximum number of curves that are added to a
newly created window. It determines how the data, which is put into the
displays, is divided over the different windows.
 Add the data to the display by checking the corresponding "View" check
box in the data set table.
New windows will be created, each containing a maximum number of
curves as given by the "number of curves per window" parameter. Only
data with a compatible Y-axis are put in the same window. Once a curve
is encountered that has a different Y-axis than the previous curve, a new
display is created, even if the "number of curves per window" was not
yet reached in the previous window.
Section 6.4.1.4 [Procedure] To define a segment of the

measurement data for further processing
For each measurement you can select a time segment of the data to be
processed.
Step 1
Switch to the Measurements view of the Data Set table using the dropdown
menu in the blue banner of the Data Set panel. The rows in the Data Set table
are all the measurements in the data set.

Step 2
Define the segment per measurement by editing the values in the "Processing
Start" and "Processing End" input fields.
Step 3
Or, select the segment via the graphical segment selection in the multi-trace
display:
Step 4
Enable the 'Segment from' check box in the multi-trace display panel.
Step 5
Highlight a segment in the multi-trace display (on page 398).
Step 6
Select the row in the table for which you want to define the segment (the
"Processing Start" and "Processing End" value).
Step 7
Push the "use segment for processing" icon above the table. This sets the
"Processing Start" and "Processing End" values of the selected row equal to the
segment selected in the multi-trace display.
Step 8
You can also define multiple time segments for the same measurement.
Step 9
Select the row in the table for which you want to define an additional segment
(by clicking on the row number).
Step 10
Push the Duplicate selected measurement(s) icon above the table to add a
new row for the same measurement.
Step 11
Specify the segment (as described in the previous steps above).
Section 6.4.1.5 [Procedure] To calculate a quick spectral map

Step 1
Select the channel in the Data Set table by clicking on the corresponding row
number in the table.
Step 2
Select a time segment in the multi-trace display if you want to calculate the
spectral map on a segment of data.
Step 3
Push the Start calculation button in the Quick spectral map panel.
Section 6.4.1.6 [Procedure] To perform calculations on traces in the

Data set using the Time signal calculator
Step 1
Use the Tools Add-in menu and select the Time Signal Calculator from the
Add-ins available. This adds the "Active Formula Set panel " in the Time Data
Selection worksheet.
Step 2
16A 377
Define a Formula:
The "Active Formula Set" panel contains a table that allows you to define a (list
of) formula(s).
 Select a row by clicking on the row number in the table.
 Enter a new formula using the keyboard by entering it either directly into
the cell, or by using the formula editor above the table.
To refer to a time trace on which the operations must be executed, use the id
"CHn" as listed in the Data Set or use the DOF id (Point Id:Direction).
 Click the Insert Function icon to insert a time signal calculator function
into the Formula at the current position of the cursor. This schedules the
Select Function dialog.
Select the function that you want to use from the list and press OK to
close the dialog. The Edit formula arguments dialog is opened that
allows you to specify the arguments in the formula.
Use the "function" input field to specify the source trace on which the
calculation will be performed. Enter the Id of the source trace (as is
listed in the Data set table).
Note: This can be done in an easy way by positioning the cursor in the
"function" input field and then using the mouse to select the id item in the
Data set grid. This item will then be filled in automatically.
You can proceed in the same way if you want to use the Channel id for
referring to the source data.
When you have finished entering the arguments, press the OK button.
 When you have finished entering the formula, press the Enter key of your
keyboard.
If the formula is correct the OK column turns green. If the formula is
not correct the OK column turns red and a description of the problem is
given in the Logging field.
Step 3
If required, specify the Point id and the Point direction of the resulting formula
by entering it in the Source id and Point Id column in the table. If you don't
specify these, the result will then have the same Point id and Point Direction as
the original time trace.
Step 4
Specify the channel group of the resulting formula by selecting it from the
dropdown list in Channel group column in the table. If you select "Tacho" as
channel group you can use the calculated trace as tracking channel in Time Data
processing. If you do not specify the channel group, the result will have the
same Channel group as the original time trace.
Step 5
Continue to add formulas following the steps above until the table is complete.
 You can use the result of a previously specified formula as source in a next
formula: for example

Using the result of a previously specified formula
 Use the icons in the formula set panel to modify the order of the rows in the
table, if required.
 Push the "Save formula set " button if you want to save the formula set to a
TFS file for later reuse.
 You can also Load a previously defined formula set if required using the
"Load FormulaSet from TFS file" icon. To edit an existing formula: Select
the row or the cell in the "Formula" column of the table. The function will
be displayed on top of the table in the formula editor. Edit the function as
required and press Enter.
Step 6
Push Calculate. This adds the defined time traces to the Data set. If you want
to calculate only one formula from the Active Formula set you can also select
the formula in the table and then push the Calculate the selected Formula
button.
When calculating a formula this is executed for all runs in the Data Set.
Step 7
You can now display the results in the multi-trace display (see "Multi-trace
Display" on page 398) and / or calculate a quick spectral map (see "Quick
spectral map" on page 402). The calculated traces can be processed in the Time
Data Processing worksheet.
Step 8
Follow the procedure below to save the calculated time traces.
Section 6.4.1.7 [Procedure] To perform calculations on time traces

automatically after each run (only in acquisition
workbooks)
This procedure describes how to calculate Virtual Channels which means that a
new time Trace is calculated automatically after each acquired Run and added
to the same Measurement run as if it would concern an extra Channel.
Step 1
Prepare the project template:
 Specify the channels you want to measure in Channel setup worksheet.
Define the settings to be used in the Tracking Setup, Acquisition Setup and
Online Processing Worksheet. Enable “measure throughput data” in The
Throughput data Options tab of the Online processing Worksheet.
 Enable the “Most recent run” option in the Data Source selection panel of
the Time Data Selection sheet. With this option, after each measurement,
the Active Data Set will be automatically replaced by the measurement
(TDF) of the last measured run.
 Define the virtual channels. Define the formulas in the Active Formula Set
panel as described above. Specify the source id of the result. If you perform
16A 379
first a trial run, the Source id of the results is set automatically to a correct
value. If you cannot make a trial run, you have to set the source id manually.
Therefore you have to count the number of channels activated in channel
setup and set the source id such that it is succeeding on this number of
channels. E.g. if three channels are activated in channel setup, enter a
Source Id "CH4" as Source id of the first formula.
 Enable the "Calculate automatically after each run" option in the Active
Formula Set panel.
 Save the project.
Step 2
Perform a measurement.
The new time Traces are calculated automatically after the acquisition and
added to the same Measurement run as if it would concern an extra Channel.
Step 3
You can now display the results in the multi-trace display (see "Multi-trace
Display" on page 398) and / or calculate a quick spectral map (see "Quick
spectral map" on page 402).
Step 4
The calculated traces can be processed in the Time Data Processing worksheet.
After measurement you can go immediately to the Time Data Processing
worksheet, where the calculated time traces are available for processing.
You can also switch on the "Calculate automatically after each measured run"
option in this worksheet. Then you will have the processing results calculated
on the virtual channels available immediately after each measured run. The
results are in this case added to the same measurement run but in a separate
folder called "Tracked processing".
Section 6.4.1.8 [Procedure] To perform calculations on traces in the

Data set using the interactive editing toolbar
You need to have included the Interactive Time Data Editing Add-in to view this
toolbar.
Use the Tools Add-in ... menu and select Interactive Time Data Editing
from the Add-ins available.
Step 1
To perform editing operations on channels in the Data Set:

 Select the channel in the dataset. Click therefore on the channel name in
the channel list view or on a cell in the channel pivot view. In the
multi-trace display you can select the channel by clicking on the
corresponding trace.
 Specify the segment on which the calculation should be performed in the
cursor and segment panel of the multi-trace display. You can enter the start
and end values in the 'Segment From' and 'Segment to' input fields or select
them graphically by dragging the cursor in the display.
 Clicking on a function icon in the interactive toolbar applies the function to
the selected channel(s).
 A function parameter dialog will appear in which any parameters that are
required for the function can be set. If you don’t need this dialog toggle the
“Settings dialog’’ icon off. The function will then use the previous used
values of the parameters.
 As a result of the operation the selected channel(s) will be replaced by the
modified one(s). If you want each editing operation to create a new channel
toggle the “Always create new channel” icon on.
 In the multi-trace display the 'modified' channel is overlaying the original
channel. If you don't want to see the original channel toggle the “display
original channel” icon off.
 The ‘Copy’ or ‘Cut’ function allows you to place data on the clipboard. The
clipboard is where data that has been cut or copied from a channel is held.
You can use the ’Insert at position’, ‘Overwrite at position’ or ‘Append’
function to place this data into a channel. Each time a new cut or copy
operation is performed the clipboard data is overwritten.
 Specify the position where the data will be inserted in the cursor and
segment panel of the multi-trace display. You can enter the value in the
‘Cursor at' input field or select it graphically by dragging the cursor in the
display.
Step 1
To perform conditioning operations on channels in the data set
 add the conditioning function(s) to the toolbar. Click the customize toolbar
icon. It schedules the Function Selection dialog. The dialog contains two
lists. The left hand list shows the available functions. The right hand list
contains the functions that will appear in the toolbar. Use the 'add to
selection' and 'remove from selection' arrows to modify the content of this
list. You can also change the order in which the functions appear by using
the up and down arrows. Finally click on [OK] to close the dialog and
update the toolbar.
Step 1
Save the calculated channels.
Section 6.4.2 Pane header options
This allows to switch "on" the Quick spectral map or Single value statistics
pane below the Multi-trace Display.
16A 381
You can also print your current view of the worksheet and view the online help.
Section 6.4.2.1 The additional pane selector

You have the option to switch on the Quick spectral map pane or the Single
value statistics pane or to hide the additional pane below the Multi-trace
Display.
Quick spectral map

Select this option when you want to view and calculate a spectral map in a 3D
display window.
Single value statistics

Select this option when you want to view and calculate single value statistics.
Hide additional pane

Select this option when you do not want to view the quick spectral map pane or
the single value statistics pane.
Section 6.4.2.2 Print Screen

This schedules a print job of the current worksheet.
Section 6.4.2.3 ?
This provides help on this worksheet.
Section 6.4.3 Data Source Selection panel
Most Recent Run, the Input Basket, the Active project, an existing Data Set, or
any combination of these data sources.
Clicking on the […] button brings up the ‘Data source selection’ dialog in
which the data source can be selected. The selected Data Source is shown in a
message box.
 Most Recent Run (on page 383)
 Input Basket (on page 383)
 Active project (on page 383)
 Data Set (on page 383)
Once you have specified where to find the data, click on the Add or Replace
button.
The Add button adds the selected data to the current data set in the Data Set

panel.
The Replace button empties the Data Set and its content is replaced by the
Section 6.4.3.1 Most Recent Run

Most Recent Run
This is only sensitive when the Throughput Validation & Processing host (Time
Data Selection worksheet) is used as an Add-in in Acquisition workbooks.
Select this radio button to use the most recent run.
After each measurement, the selected run is automatically updated to
correspond to the last measured run.

Input Basket
This basket can be filled (see "[Procedure] To fill an input basket" on page
281) with any data item or object: 2D data, waterfalls, folders and projects, etc.
Any Test.Lab Throughput data that has "time" on the X-axis that is in any of the
objects in the input basket is selected automatically.
When the input basket contains no such "time" data, a popup message warns
you of this fact.
Section 6.4.3.3 Active project

When you select to find data in the current (active) project, you can specify a
section and a run (or all runs) from this section.
All the throughput data that have been measured in this section and run(s) are
selected. If your selection does not contain any throughput data, a popup
message will warn you of this fact when you push the Add/Replace button.
Section 6.4.3.3.1 Section selection

Select from the dropdown list the section in the current project that you want to
use.
Run selection
you want to use.
Section 6.4.3.4 Data Set

Select this radio button to use a previously defined Data Set.
Enter the name of an existing data set in the field alongside or you can use the
Browse... button to select it.
16A 383
A Data Set is a collection of pointers to time data. You can make a Data Set
(see "[Procedure] To make a Data Set" on page 374) and save it for later reuse
in this worksheet using the Save Data Set icon (see "Save Data Set" on page
387) in the Data Set toolbar.
Name field
This specifies the name and location of the DataSet file.
Browse...
This schedules the Select DataSet dialog for specifying the location and name of
the Throughput DataSet file with a TDS extension.Throughput Data Sets have a
.TDS extension and are as default saved in the DataSet folder on your local
directory.
Section 6.4.3.5 Add and Replace buttons
Section 6.4.3.5.1 Add button

This adds the selected data to the current Data Set.
New measurements are always created in any event, even if the data has already
been added to the Data Set.
Section 6.4.3.5.2 Replace button

This empties the Data Set and its contents are replaced by the newly-selected
data.
A popup message warns you that this will happen and asks you if you are really
sure that you want to do this.
Section 6.4.4 Data Set panel
Information on the data set is shown in a table with rows and columns allowing
you to see, define and change information.
A data set consists of at least one but possibly more measurements. A

measurement consists of a set of channels that have been measured at the same
time.
The data (measurements or channels) in this table can be sorted. The sorting can
be defined in the same way as for the details part of the Data Explorer: double
clicking a column header sorts the data following that criterion.
Section 6.4.4.1 Viewing options

You can switch between three views (Measurements, Channels list or Channels
pivot) Set table.

Section 6.4.4.1.1 Measurements

The rows in the Data Set table are measurements.
Channels list
The rows in the Data Set table are the channels of one measurement. You can
scroll through the measurements using the Measurement browser buttons.
Enable the checkbox in the ‘View’ column if you want to view the channel(s) in
the multi-trace display.
Channels pivot
The channels are organized in a pivot table. You can select the rows and
columns you want to see in the table using the selection lists above the table. In
the default view the rows are the channel names and the columns the
measurements. The cells indicate the number of items in that cell. Enable the
checkbox in the cell if you want to view the channel(s) in the multi-trace
display.
Section 6.4.4.1.2 Data Set toolbar icons

6.4.4.1.2.1 New Measurement
This schedules the Create new measurement dialog.
Enter the new name in the field provided.

6.4.4.1.2.2 Duplicate Selected Measurement
This will duplicate the selected measurement(s) from the Data Set. Select a cell
in the appropriate row, then click the Duplicate Selected Measurement icon
to duplicate that measurement.
6.4.4.1.2.3 Use segment for processing
This allows you to specify the segment of data that will be processed in the
Time Data Processing worksheet (the Start processing and End processing
parameter shown in the Measurements view). It applies the segment as defined
in the Multi-trace Display to the selected measurement(s).
Switch to the Measurements view of the Data Set table.
Enable the "Segment from" option in the Multi-trace display panel, to

graphically define a segment in the display.
If you now push the Use segment for processing icon, the Start Processing
and End Processing values of the selected measurements are updated to
correspond to those you selected in the display.
16A 385
6.4.4.1.2.4 Remove Measurement
This will remove the selected measurement(s) from the Data Set. Select a cell in
the appropriate row, then click the Remove Measurement button to remove
that measurement.
A warning popup message will ask you to confirm the deletion.

6.4.4.1.2.5 Move/Copy channel
This schedules the Move Selected channel(s) dialog to move or copy the
channel to a different measurement.
Select the new measurement destination from the dropdown list of available
measurements.
6.4.4.1.2.6 Duplicate channel
This will duplicate the selected channel(s) from the Data Set. Select a cell in the
appropriate row, then click the Duplicate Channel button to duplicate that
channel.
6.4.4.1.2.7 Duplicate channel segment(s) into new measurement
This allows you to create a new measurement containing the selected segment
of the selected channels. It applies the segment as defined in the Multi-trace
Display to the selected channel(s) and duplicates these channel segments into a
new measurement.
Switch to the Channels view of the Data Set table and select the channels you
want to duplicate.
Select the segment. Enable therefore the "Segment from" option in the
Multi-trace display panel, and define the segment graphically in the display.
Push the Duplicate channel segment(s) into new measurement button. A

dialog is coming up that allows you to specify the new measurement name.
6.4.4.1.2.8 Remove channel
This will remove the selected channel(s) from the Data Set. Select a cell in the
appropriate row, then click the Remove Channel button to remove that
channel.
A warning popup message will ask you to confirm the deletion.

6.4.4.1.2.9 Save Data Set
This schedules the Save Throughput DataSet dialog to save the current Data
Set.
Specify the location and name of the Throughput DataSet file (the TDS
extension is automatically added) and then click Save.
Throughput Data Sets are as default saved in the DataSet folder on your local
directory.
6.4.4.1.2.10 Channel properties
This allows you to view the properties of the selected channels. The General
and Detailed Properties are shown in separate tabs.
6.4.4.1.2.11 Multiple channels view
This allows you to select and display multiple channels at once. Select first the
channels in the data set table, and then push the icon.
6.4.4.1.2.12 Display properties
This allows you to specify the display parameters. Number of (compatible)

curves per window. This is the maximum number of curves that are added to the
newly created window.
Section 6.4.4.1.3 Channels - per measurement view

The data set information is shown in a table with rows (channels) and columns
(channel properties).
The data in this table can be sorted. Double clicking a column header sorts the
data following that criterion.
6.4.4.1.3.1 Data selection lists
Use these selectors for filtering the data in the data set.
If you want for example only to see the vibration channels, select “Channel
group” in the first and “Vibration” in the second selection list.
6.4.4.1.3.2 Multi-trace display navigation buttons
The data that have been added to the display can automatically be replaced by
other data using the next channel /previous channel / first channel / last channel
buttons. Each time the next/previous button is pressed, the single (or multiple)
data selection in the data set list changes (either stepping up or down).
16A 387
6.4.4.1.3.3 Measurement browser buttons
These up and down buttons allows you to browse through your measurements.
You can also select the measurement in the selection list near the scroll buttons.
6.4.4.1.3.4 Columns
 View: This column contains check boxes for viewing the channel in the
Multi-trace Display. The cell is colored orange after having modified the
channel using interactive editing or the time signal calculator.
 Name: this is a combination of the channel id (CHx) and the DOF id (Point
id: direction).
 Run Name: this is the name of the run to which the channel belongs.
 Processing segment: this shows the length of the segment that will be
processed in the Time Data Processing worksheet. Per default it is the
complete trace. If the measurement contains traces with a different length it
is the cross-section of the X-axes of all traces in the measurement. Use the
‘use segment for processing’ toolbar icon if you want to specify a segment
of data to be processed.
 DOF id: this shows the DOF id of this trace.
 Point direction: this shows the point direction of the DOF of this trace.
 Channel Group: this field shows the channel group of the trace.
 Y axis unit
 X-Axis: the X-Axis limits (minimum and maximum values).
 Sample frequency
 Weighting: the weighting function.
Section 6.4.4.1.4 Channels pivot view

The channels are organized in a pivot table.
The cells indicate the number of items in that cell. Enable the checkbox in the
cell if you want to view the channel(s) in the multi-trace display.
6.4.4.1.4.1 Row and Column selection lists
Select the rows and columns you want to see in the table using the selection lists
above the table. In the default view the rows are the channel names and the
columns the measurements. The cells indicate the number of items (channels) in
that cell.
6.4.4.1.4.2 Navigation buttons
The data that have been added to the display can automatically be replaced by
other data using the navigation buttons. Each time the next/previous or up/down
button is pressed, the single (or multiple) data selection in the Data Set list

changes (either stepping left or right or up or down).

6.4.4.1.4.3 Table cells
Each cell contains checkboxes for viewing the channel(s) in the Multi-trace
Display.
For any operation on channel(s) you need first to select the channel(s) on which
the operation should be performed.
Click on a cell, a row (by clicking on the row number) or a column (by clicking
on the column’s header) or select multiple cells by dragging the mouse across
the cells rows or columns. To select multiple cells that are not in order press
CTRL and then click the cells, rows or columns you want.
A channel that is not modified is indicated by a green colour in the table. After
having modified the channel using interactive editing or the time signal
calculator the cell is colored orange.
Section 6.4.4.1.5 Measurements view

The data set information is shown in a table with rows (measurements) and
columns (data parameters) allowing you to see, define or change selected
parameters.
The data in this table can be sorted. The sorting can be defined in the same way
as for the details part of the Data Explorer (see "The Detail View panel" on
page 292): double clicking a column header sorts the data following that
criterion.
6.4.4.1.5.1 Measurement Name
This name is generated automatically when loading new data using the Add
button.
For Test.Lab data the measurement name is based on the run name.
6.4.4.1.5.2 Processing Start – Processing End
This is a range representing the selected segment that is to be processed. You
can graphically define a segment by selecting it in the Multi-trace Display. You
can also define a segment for a single or multiple measurement(s) by editing the
values in the data set table.
6.4.4.1.5.3 Nr channels
This is the number of channels in this measurement.
6.4.4.1.5.4 Nr tracking channels
This is the number of tracking channels in this measurement.
Section 6.4.4.2 Save As …

This button allows you to save a copy of the data in the data set into the active
project.
It creates new runs with throughput data in TDF or LDSF file format. The
throughput file format can be selected in the Data tab of the Options dialog
opened via the Tools Options... menu.
16A 389
In the Save As… dialog, select the measurements to be saved in the

measurement list. All the channels in the measurements will be saved. Use the
icons above the dataset table (new measurement, move channel, remove
channel, duplicate channel) if you want to change the content of the
measurements before saving.
If you only want to save a segment of data enable the "save processing segment
only" check box. Specify the segment in the measurement view of the dataset
by entering the values in the Processing Start and End input fields or by using
the "Use segment for processing" icon above the table.
Specify the name of the result

The 'Use original run name, append' option allows you to include the run name
(i.e. the measurement) of the data that is being processed as part of the name of
the new run.
The 'Use new run name' option allows you to specify the complete name of the
new run.
Section 6.4.4.3 Save

You need to have included the Time Signal Calculator or Time Data editing
Add-in to view this. Use the Tools Add-in ... menu and select the Time
Signal Calculator or Time Data editing Add-in from the Add-ins available.
Starting from the data in the dataset, this button allows you to overwrite the data
in the measurements. In the data set the cells corresponding to channels that are
not modified have a green colour. The modified channels are indicated with an
orange colour. These channels will be overwritten or added to the measurement
(if they are new).
Saving can only be done for data in the active project. Use the Save as...
button to copy the data to the active project if this is not the case.
Section 6.4.4.4 Clear results

You need to have included the Time Signal Calculator or Time Data editing
Add-in to view this. Use the Tools Add-in... menu and select the Time
Signal Calculator or Time Data editing Add-in from the Add-ins available.
This removes the results from all calculations from the Data Set table.
If you only want to undo an operation on a selected channel use the Undo
button in the interactive toolbar.
Section 6.4.5 Time Signal Calculator panel
It allows you to build up the Active Formula of the formula selected in the table
by manually typing the operations (+, -, etc.), or by inserting functions selected

from the function dialog opened by pushing the Insert Function button.
You need to have included the Time Signal Calculator Add-in to view this
panel.
Use the Tools Add-in.. menu and select the Time Signal Calculator from the
Add-ins available.
You can use the panel to perform calculations on traces in the Data Set. (see
"[Procedure] To perform calculations on traces in the Data set using the Time
signal calculator" on page 377)
Functions that can be calculated....
Section 6.4.5.1 Formula Set Icons

New FormulaSet
This clears the table of the current FormulaSet.
Save FormulaSet to TFS file
This schedules the Save Throughput FormulaSet dialog to save the current
Formula Set.
Specify the location and name of the Throughput FormulaSet file (the TFS
extension is automatically added) and then click Save.
Note: This file is read and write able (with window applications such as Excel
or Notepad).
Load FormulaSet from TFS file
This schedules the "Select Throughput FormulaSet" dialog for specifying the
location and name of an existing Throughput FormulaSet file with a TFS
extension.
Create new Formula
Delete the selected Formula
16A 391
Move up
Move down
Expand rows
This will expand the rows when using range of channel Ids (Sx).
If a range of channel Ids (Sx) is used in the formula, pushing this button makes
multiple rows from the one row in the Active formula panel.
Insert a function
cursor.
Renumber FormulaSet
This sets the Source Ids of the formulas in the Active formula set such that the
numbering is increasing and starting from the number of channels in the Data
Set.
Block selection dialog
It schedules the Block selection dialog where you can select the block(s) you
want to use in a formula.
The NON_LINEAR_CALIBRATION function for example requires the

selection of a calibration block.
The dialog shows the properties of the selected blocks and allows you to add
blocks to the block set. The first column shows the ID of the block; "Bn" where
n is the index number of the block as listed in the dialog. Use this ID to refer to
the block in the formula (for example B1).

Here you can define and edit a formula. Select the row in the Active Formula
set table that you want to edit.
Formula Editor
It allows you to build up the Active Formula of the formula selected in the table
by manually typing the operations (+, -, etc.), or by inserting functions selected
from the function dialog opened by pushing the Insert Function button.
Units can be forced to other units without changing the values via the use of
squared brackets, e.g. [Unit Case Label] or [Pa]. The choice of the according
Quantity Case Name is based on matching Unit Case labels and the Unit Case
Status (LMS Units Editor). For temperature formulas, a forcing to Quantity
Case Name "TemperatureInterval" discards the temperature offset in the
calculations.
You can use either the channel id or the DOF id to refer to the data on which the
operations must be executed [e.g. DETREND (CH1)] or DETREND(Point1)
Note: You can insert a point id or source id from the data set table by clicking
on it in the data set table.
Section 6.4.5.2.1 Edit...

Once a formula is defined, pushing this button opens the Edit formula
arguments dialog that gives you a description of the parameters in the formula
and allows you to edit them. You can define a function using the Insert
Function icon.
In the Active Formula Set table all the Formulas that are currently active are
listed in a table.
Formula.
Ok
This box when green indicates that the formula format is correct. After entering
or editing a formula the formula is checked when you press the Enter key of
your keyboard. If the box is red the logging field below the table gives an
indication of what is wrong.
16A 393
Id
formulas to refer to. The format of the Id should be "CHi" with i a unique
number.
The Id should be different from those already used in the Data Set table. If you
specify an Id that is already used in the Data Set table, the data in the dataset
will be replaced.
The Id should be different from those already used in the Data Set table. You
formulas so that the numbering is increasing and starting from the number of
channels in the Data Set.

Point Id
Here you can specify the Point id of the result. If you don't fill in this column,
the result will have the same Point id as the original time trace.
Point Dir
Here you can specify the Point Direction of the result. If you don't fill in this
column, the result will have the same Point id as the original time trace.
Channelgroup
Here you can specify the Channel group of the result. If you do not fill in this
column, the result will have the same Channel group as the original time trace.
Repeat for...
If you want to calculate the formula on a range of channels here you can
and b the highest index number. The notation CHx should be used in the
formula to indicate that a range of data items is used.
For example, if you want to calculate half the value of your channels starting
with the data item number 10 (CH10) and ending with the data item number 16
(CH16).
You would define the formula CHx/2 in the Formula column and the range
10:16 in the Repeat for... column.
(CH10/2, CH11/2, CH12/2, CH13/2, CH14/2, CH15/2 and CH16/2).
You can use the expand rows button (see "Expand rows" on page 392) for
making multiple rows from the one row in the Active formula panel.
For formulas that require more than one channel as input you can use the
notations CHx, CHx1, CHx2, …, CHxn, with x1 corresponding to x+1, x2 to
x+2 and xn to x+n. A formula

with a range 1:9 in the Repeat for... column and an increment 3 in the Increment
column, corresponds to the following three formulas:
Increment
defined range.
For example, if you want to calculate half the value of your channels starting
with the channel number 10 (CH10) and ending with the channel number 15
(CH15) and, you only want to use every other channel, you would define the
formula CHx/2 in the Formula column, the range 10:16 in the Repeat for...
column and the increment (2) in the Increment column.
(CH10/2, CH12/2, CH14/2 and CH16/2).
Calculate
This calculates the formulas in the Active Formula Set which are "on" i.e.
active. This starts the calculation. The results of the calculation are added to the
Data Set table.
The results are saved when you push the Save Results button.
Calculate Selected
This calculates the selected formula(s) using the Active DataSet.
Calculate automatically after each run

Check this option on to calculate automatically after each run.
This is only sensitive if the "Most Recent Run" is selected as the data source.
If "on", the active formulas are calculated automatically after each measured
16A 395
run.
The results of the calculations are saved in the same run. A new time trace is
calculated and added to the same measurement run (TDF), as if it would
concern an extra channel (a "Virtual Channel").
You do not need to go to the Time Data Selection worksheet for performing the
calculations.
As soon as you go to the Time Data Processing worksheet, the results are
immediately available for further processing.
Section 6.4.6 Interactive editing toolbar
You need to have included the Interactive Time Data Editing Add-in to view this
toolbar.
Use the Tools Add-in... menu and select Interactive Time Data Editing
from the Add-ins available.
You can use the toolbar to perform editing operations on channels in the Data
set.
Section 6.4.6.1 Interactive time data editing icons

Customize toolbar
This allows you to customize the content of the toolbar. You can add
conditioning functions to the toolbar or remove some of the editing or modify
segment functions that you don't often use.
It schedules the Function Selection dialog. The dialog contains two lists. The
left hand list shows the available functions. The right hand list contains the
functions that will appear in the toolbar. Use the ‘add to selection’ and ‘remove
from selection’ arrows to modify the content of this list. You can also change
the order in which the functions appear by using the up and down arrows.
Finally click on [OK] to close the dialog and update the toolbar.
Function icons
Clicking on a function icon applies the function to the selected channel(s). As a
result the selected channel(s) will be replaced by the modified one(s).
Select the channel in the dataset. Therefore, click on the channel name or on a
cell in the channel pivot view. In the multi-trace display you can also select the
channel by clicking on the corresponding trace. Therefore you should first
disable the segment checkbox in the cursor and segment selection panel.
Specify the segment on which the calculation should be performed in the cursor
and segment panel of the multi-trace display. You can enter the start and end
values in the 'Segment From' and 'Segment to' input fields or select them
graphically by dragging the cursor in the display. Note that for specifying a

segment the segment checkbox in the cursor and segment selection panel should
be enabled.
The following functions are available:
 Editing operations
 Append
 Copy segment
 Cut segment
 Insert at position
 Insert delay
 Overwrite at position
 Keep segment (segment)

 Modify segment operations
 Drift correction
 Filter segment
 Offset segment
 Replace by constant
 Replace by curve
 Scale segment
 Set mean of segment
 Smooth segment
There are other operations that can be performed and that can be added to the
toolbar using the Customize toolbar icon.
History
This opens a dialog that shows all performed editing operations on the selected
channel.
Undo
This undoes the last performed editing operation on the selected channel.
16A 397
Redo
After an Undo you can Redo the operation on the selected channel.
Always display original channel
When toggled, the 'modified' channel is overlaying the original channel in the
multi-trace display. If this option is off you don’t see the original channel.
Always create new channel
When toggled, each editing operation creates a new channel. If this option is off
then the selected channels are modified by the editing operation.
Settings dialog
When toggled, if a function is selected a function parameter dialog will appear

in which any parameters that are required for the function can be set. If this
option is off then the function will use the previous used values of the
parameters.
Section 6.4.7 Multi-trace Display
The Multi-trace Display provides a graphical representation of the data in a

trace. It gives you an overall picture of the whole trace in the Overview panel as
well as a more detailed view of a section of it in the Detail panel.
Section 6.4.7.1 Cursor and Segment control parameters

Cursor at
Selecting this checkbox places a cursor on the X axis of all windows.
The position of the cursor is displayed in the field alongside.
The left arrow moves the cursor to the left.
The middle arrow moves the cursor to the center in the detailed view.
The right arrow moves the cursor to the right.
Segment from
A segment is part of the global X-axis of the Multi-trace display that has been

selected and highlighted.
You can define the segment graphically by dragging the mouse in the display.
Note:
Click the <Ctrl> left mouse on the segment to remove it.
Click the <Shift> left mouse on the edge of the segment to tune the selection.
Click the left mouse on the segment to move it
You can also enter the beginning and end value in the From and To input fields.
From
The beginning (minimum value) of the segment.
To
The end (maximum value) of the segment.
Range
The range (maximum minus minimum value) of the segment. The maximum
value will adapt automatically to meet the right range.
Section 6.4.7.1.1 Domain

If you are viewing data in two different domains (time domain and angle
domain) specify here in which domain you wish to see the cursor and segment
values. In the scrollbar it specifies also the unit of the X-axis limit values of the
detail window.
Section 6.4.7.2 Multi-trace Display windows

The Multi-trace display consists out of two areas. The upper area contains a
number of overview windows. The lower area contains a number of detail
windows and a zooming scrollbar with some zooming buttons. Each area has
its own toolbar.
Note: An unlimited number of traces can be added to any window.
Overview checkbox
Check this box to display the overview window (on page 400).
16A 399
Detailed checkbox
Check this box to display the detailed window (see "Detail window" on page
400).
Section 6.4.7.2.1 Overview window

In an overview window, the whole curve will be displayed. Its functionality is
based on a standard FrontBack window. You can add any number of overview
windows to the overview area.
If necessary, all X-axes of the overview windows will adapt to accommodate

the new curve values. The X-axis limits for all windows will widen to cover the
minimum and maximum X-values of the new curve.
For example, if a multi-trace display has an overview window containing one

curve with an X-axis range of 10 to 20 seconds. Adding a new curve (with an
X-axis range of 15 to 50 seconds) to that window or to any other overview
window will result in a multi-trace display where all the overview windows will
have an X-axis range of 10 to 50 seconds. The data in all windows is updated
accordingly.
Section 6.4.7.2.2 Detail window

Since a detailed window is mainly used for zooming, its functionality is the
same as a FrontBack display, extended with some zooming tools. You can add
any number of detail windows to the detail window area.
Section 6.4.7.2.3 Time domain and angle domain windows

Each of the overview area and detail area has two subpanels: the first one is for
showing data in the time domain, while the second one is for showing data in
the angle domain. Data selected for viewing is automatically viewed in the
correct panel, thus angle domain data in the angle domain panel and time
domain data in the time domain panel.
6.4.7.2.3.1 Multi-Trace Display toolbar icons
Each of the overview and detail area contains its own toolbar. The toolbar has
icons to perform the following actions:
6.4.7.2.3.1.1 Show/hide time curves
This shows or hides all time windows in the Multi-trace display.

6.4.7.2.3.1.2 Show/hide angle domain curves
This shows or hides all angle domain windows in the Multi-trace display.
6.4.7.2.3.1.3 Add a display to the time domain

This adds a new time window.

6.4.7.2.3.1.4 Add a display to the angle domain
This opens a new angle window.

6.4.7.2.3.1.5 Clear displays
This removes all windows in the Multi-trace display.

6.4.7.2.3.1.6 Auto-arrange displays
After having resized the multi-trace display windows you can use this button to
optimize the size of the windows again.
Section 6.4.7.2.4 Scrollbar and zooming buttons

The detail window is a certain scope view of the overview windows. Its size can
be controlled with the scrollbar.
Surrounding the scrollbar there are two input fields to indicate the X-axis limit
values of the detail window and four zooming buttons. These input fields will
reflect all scrolling and zooming actions you do.
6.4.7.2.4.1 Scrollbar
Resizing the scrollbar will change the limits of the detail window accordingly.
Moving the scrollbar allows you to scroll through the part of the overview
window that is shown in the detailed window.
6.4.7.2.4.2 Minimum X-axis value
This is the minimum value for the X-axis limits. Enter the value directly in the
input field or change it using the scrollbar.
6.4.7.2.4.3 Maximum X-axis value
This is the maximum value for the X-axis limits. Enter the value directly in the
input field or change it using the scrollbar above.
6.4.7.2.4.4 Zoom in
This button zooms in on the signal and thus reduces the scope of the Detailed
Window.
6.4.7.2.4.5 Zoom out
This button zooms out on the signal and thus enlarges the scope of the Detailed
Window.
16A 401
6.4.7.2.4.6 Zoom segment
This button zooms the detail window to the limits of the Multi-trace display
segment.
6.4.7.2.4.7 Zoom tool
This button allows you to zoom graphically: with a left mouse click you can
draw a frame in the detail window. Upon releasing the mouse button, the detail
window zooms into the specified frame. This action can be repeated. By left
clicking on the display area the user can undo (or redo) one or all recent
zooming actions. You can thus restore the original situation.
Section 6.4.8 Quick spectral map
This display is an optional area below the Multi-trace Display that can be
switched on via the pane header options using the quick spectral map menu
entry above the Multi-trace display.
It allows you to calculate a spectral map (see "[Procedure] To calculate a

quick spectral map" on page 377), an angle map or an order map on the
selected channel in the Data Set table. Select the channel by clicking on the row
number in the table.
You can calculate the map on a segment of the channel by highlighting the
segment in the multi-trace display.
The function selection dropdown allows you to select whether you want to
calculate a spectral map, an angle map or an order map.
The result can be displayed in either a Colormap or a Waterfall display.
Section 6.4.8.1 Measurement

This gives the Measurement Name.
Section 6.4.8.2 Channel

This gives the Channel Id.
Section 6.4.8.3 Function selection

This allows you to select whether you want to calculate a spectral map, an
angle map or an order map.

Section 6.4.8.4 Calculate

This starts the spectral map calculation on the channel selected in the Data Set
table. Select the channel by clicking on the row number in the table.
If more than one channel is selected the spectral map is calculated on the first
one of the selected channels.
The FFT is calculated with following parameters:

 the number of blocks is equal to 50. These are equidistantly distributed
over the whole signal (thus the amount of overlap depends on signal length).
 the frequency resolution is as specified in the More dialog.
 a Hanning window is used.
Section 6.4.8.5 More…

This allows you to select the frequency resolution. For high frequency
resolutions, enough datapoints must be selected. If not enough data is selected,
an error message will occur.
Section 6.4.8.6 Display selection

You can view the resulting spectral map either in a Colormap or in a Waterfall
display window, by selecting the appropriate radio button.
Section 6.4.9 Single value statistics
This is an optional area below the Multi-trace Display that can be switched "on"
via the pane header options above the Multi-trace display using the Single value
statistics menu entry.
The single value statistics pane contains a table with statistical values calculated
on the channels in the data set.
The rows in the table are the channels in the dataset. In the channel list view of
the dataset, the table shows all the channels. In the pivot view of the dataset, the
table shows the selected channels.
You can select the statistical functions to be shown in the table using the
Select functions … button in the blue banner.
Push the Calculate button to calculate and show the values in the table.
16A 403
Section 6.4.9.1 Calculate button

This calculates the statistical functions and shows the values in the table.
Section 6.4.9.2 Select functions …

This allows you to select the functions to be calculated and viewed in the table.
It schedules the Function Selection dialog. The dialog contains two lists. The
left hand list shows the available functions. The right hand list contains the
functions that will appear in the table. Use the 'add to selection' and 'remove
from selection' arrows to modify the content of this list. You can also change
the order in which the functions appear by using the up and down arrows.
Finally click on OK to close the dialog.

[Procedure] To create pictures of your data •
Index 300
[Procedure] To define a function • 312
( [Procedure] To define a predefined list of
attribute values • 203
(De-)selecting of curves • 327 [Procedure] To define a processing function •
311
?
[Procedure] To define a segment of the
? • 384 measurement data for further processing •
379
[
[Procedure] To define a set of User Attributes •
[All] • 118 202, 282
[Between X limits] • 118 [Procedure] To edit a function • 314
[Browse...] button • 257 [Procedure] To execute the formulas and view
[Procedure] Project / Section info • 280 the results • 314
[Procedure] To add Meta Information to a print [Procedure] To fill an input basket • 285, 291,
format • 197, 198, 200 377, 385
[Procedure] To add the input data to the data [Procedure] To fill in User Attribute values •
set • 312 281
[Procedure] To add the LMS Printing Add-In [Procedure] To lock fields and buttons • 225
toolbar to Word or PowerPoint • 197, 198, [Procedure] To lock settings under Tools ->
201 Options • 226
[Procedure] To attach files • 281 [Procedure] To make a Data Set • 335, 377,
[Procedure] To batch report data • 370 386
[Procedure] To calculate a quick spectral map • [Procedure] To make a display layout • 178
380, 405 [Procedure] To make a new memo template •
[Procedure] To change the appearance of fields 195, 203, 283
and buttons • 226 [Procedure] To make a new project template •
[Procedure] To change the default memo 27
template • 196, 204, 283 [Procedure] To make a reference curve layout •
[Procedure] To change the default project 191
template • 27, 229 [Procedure] To perform calculations on time
[Procedure] To copy and paste values from traces automatically after each run (only in
Excel to the table • 346 acquisition workbooks) • 382
[Procedure] To copy pictures to another [Procedure] To perform calculations on traces
application • 302 in the Data set using the interactive editing
[Procedure] To create a data block • 345 toolbar • 383
[Procedure] To create a data block starting [Procedure] To perform calculations on traces
from an existing Test.Lab data block • 347 in the Data set using the Time signal
[Procedure] To create a multiple-picture print calculator • 380, 393
format in Word or PowerPoint • 197, 198 [Procedure] To print a multi-picture report •
[Procedure] To create a single-picture print 309
format in the Data Viewing worksheet • 197, [Procedure] To print data using a predefined
302, 306, 309, 310, 329 print format • 309
[Procedure] To create and calculate user [Procedure] To print your picture • 302
defined metrics • 333 [Procedure] To remove a message about an old
[Procedure] To create and export links LMS Powerpoint Printing Add-In • 201
(bookmarks) • 38, 49, 290 [Procedure] To save the results • 314
[Procedure] To create memo documents • 281 [Procedure] To search for data • 285
[Procedure] To create or edit documentation • [Procedure] To select the input data • 311
50, 280 [Procedure] To set printing options • 197, 198,
[Procedure] To create or modify a layout • 199
178, 191, 194 [Procedure] To use cursors in the display • 71
16A 405
[Procedure] To use the displays • 142 Add Harmonic Cursor • 108
[Procedure] To use the Time Data Selection Add Memo Document • 292, 296
worksheet • 377 Add New Attribute... • 258
[Procedure] To view and manage data • 284 Add Processing Cursor • 108, 136
[Procedure] To view and sort data in the Data Add Single Cursor • 107
Set • 378 Add to favorites • 193
[Procedure] To view data in the multi-trace Add to Input Basket • 293, 296
display • 379 Add to List and Replace List buttons • 335
[Procedure] To view the details of data in a Add to Workspace • 349
folder • 285 Add to/Remove from Favorites • 172
Add-ins dialog • 234
< Add-ins dialog... • 234, 237, 244
<Section_name> list • 229 Add-ins... • 234
Address • 288
2 Adv. Search • 289
2D Correction mode • 240 Adv. Sieve • 289
2D Function Displays • 253 AFM file (ASCII format) • 47
Align Direction • 94
3 Align Single – Quad displays and Align
3D Acoustic Camera • 209, 211, 236 UpperLower – LeftRight displays • 172
3D Acoustic Camera Multiplicative Processing Alpha Blended Transparency • 170
• 209, 211 Always create new channel • 400
3D Effect • 113 Always display original channel • 400
3D Geometry Display • 252 Always include extended project / section
information • 228, 257
A Always show intersections • 114
About Test.Lab • 262 Ampl/Phase • 159
Absolute • 153, 157, 159, 161, 164 Amplitude • 94, 157, 159, 161, 164
Accept Changes • 284 Amplitude threshold • 135
Acoustic Geometry • 148 Amplitude/dB Real/dB Imag/dB • 159, 161
Acoustic Source Quantification for Pass-by Amplitude/Phase • 157, 161, 164
Noise Engineering • 209, 211 Analyses • 31
Acoustic weighting • 269, 274, 278 Analysis of the life cycle • 9, 355
Actions • 292, 296 Angle • 117
Activate section • 229 Angle Domain Processing • 209, 211, 236, 238
Activate This Section • 293, 296 Animation • 153
Active project • 385 Animation Control • 155
Active Project • 372 Animation settings • 153
Add • 259, 315 Annotation • 118, 253
Add a detached picture window • 328 Annotation visible • 90, 98, 103
Add a display to the angle domain • 403 ANSI-IEC Octave filtering • 209, 211, 236,
Add a display to the time domain • 403 238
Add and Replace buttons • 386 Append to value • 115
Add Attachment • 292 Application • 261
Add Automatic Cursor • 108, 135 Application Launcher • 209, 211
Add block... • 339 Application of the uncertainty (safety) factor
Add button • 386 (k) • 16, 19, 363, 366
Add Coupled Cursor • 108 Applications • 25, 26
Add Criterion • 289 Apply to All • 319
Add Double Cursor • 107 Apply to Current • 319
Add Folder • 292 Arrow color and style • 171
Add from Input basket • 316 Arrows • 160
Arrows Decompose • 162

Arrows Directions • 162 Calculate buttons • 325, 343, 398
Arrows Format • 161 Calculate Selected • 325, 398
Arrows Scalar Transform • 161 Calculated Content • 123
ASAM ATFx data • 29, 37 Calculation of the Fatigue Damage Spectrum
ASAM ATFx Data • 47 (FDS) • 13, 360
ASAM ODS • 290 Calculation of the Maximum Response
ASAM ODS Database Export • 209, 212, 236 Spectrum (MRS) • 13, 360
ASAM ODS Driver • 209, 212, 236 Calculation of the Shock Response Spectrum
Aspect ratio • 112 (SRS) • 11, 358
Attachment display area • 283 Calculations • 120
Audio Replay • 209, 212, 236 Calibration Validity Period • 241
Audio Replay & Filtering • 209, 212, 236 Cancel • 260
Auto • 110 Cascade • 261
Auto Filter • 298 Change • 318
Auto Sort • 299, 374 Change geometry color • 294
Auto-arrange displays • 403 Channel • 405
Autofilter • 336 Channel properties • 389
Automated Reporting • 209, 213, 236, 239 Channel Setup Visibility • 258
Automatic Geometrical • 154 Channelgroup • 396
Automatic Modal Parameter Selection • 209, Channels - per measurement view • 390
213, 236 Channels list • 387
Automatic topological • 155 Channels pivot • 387
Available List • 172 Channels pivot view • 391
Averaged Autopower Spectrum • 268, 274, Clear displays • 403
276 Clear results • 393
Axis options • 112 Clear Results • 317
Clear Selection • 151
B Close • 194, 229, 319, 339
Back • 286 Close the current project and activate section •
Background • 170 229
Banded • 159 Collection of the data on the real environment
Base Quantity • 57 • 9, 355, 356
Base Resolution • 90, 91, 98, 102, 103 Color animation of the disc • 163
Batch Reporting • 209, 213, 236 Color Format • 158
Batch Reporting worksheet • 213, 370 Color Interpolation • 159
Bits / Sample • 254 Color Scale • 100, 116
Block selection dialog • 395 Color Vector Transform • 160
Bode • 75, 185 Coloring • 158
Bottom color • 170 Colormap • 76, 126, 127, 130, 131, 134, 137,
Bounding Box • 168, 170 138, 139, 186
Browse for Reference Blocks... • 339 Columns • 374, 390
Browse... • 386 Columns selection • 69
Browse... button • 228 Combining the situations • 19, 366
Buttons • 349 Comparison • 289
Component Visualization... • 169
C Concatenated Files... • 46
Cable Length • 257 Concept of the LMS Configurations System •
Cada-X • 39 53
Calculate • 325, 398, 405 Concept of the LMS Unit System • 56
Calculate button • 406 Conditioning • 264
Calculate automatically • 343 Conditioning functions • 272, 273, 274
Calculate automatically after each run • 398 Conditioning toolbar • 265, 272
Calculate button • 343 Contents and Index • 261
16A 407
Copy • 117, 232, 293, 297, 326 Data record headers • 30
Copy and Paste • 173 Data selection lists • 390
Copy as Active picture (embedded data) • 306, Data Set • 334, 385, 386
329 Data Set buttons • 317
Copy as Active Picture (embedded data) • 48 Data Set panel • 387
Copy as Active picture (linked data) • 306, 329 Data Set toolbar icons • 387
Copy as Active Picture (linked data) • 48 Data Source Editor • 260
Copy Legend Values • 122 Data Source Selection panel • 333, 385
Copy to Bitmap • 48, 306, 329 Data types you can import • 29
Copy To Clipboard • 169 Data values • 30
Copy to Metafile • 48, 110, 305, 328 Date • 202
Copy values • 117 DATX Data Driver • 209, 214, 236
Copy Values • 326 dB • 94
Copying pictures • 28, 47 Decades • 87
Coupled Limits • 308 Decimals • 91, 92, 99, 103, 104, 114
Create a new section... • 229 Decimals... • 116
Create a picture • 304, 327, 343 Default • 229
Create new formula • 320, 338 Default Memo template • 195, 204
Create new Formula • 394 Default Octave Trace Type • 253
Creating print formats • 196, 371 Default Trace Style Scheme • 253
Cross (back) • 110 Define Local Folders per File Type • 249
Cross (front) • 110 Define one Local Folder • 249
Cumulative • 95 Deformation • 156
Current group • 375 Deformation Directions • 158
Current Project • 291 Deformation Format • 157
Cursor • 113, 114 Deformation Scalar Transform • 158
Cursor and Segment control parameters • 401 Deformed Model • 150
Cursor at • 401 Delay (ms) • 153
Cursor Legend • 110 Delete • 193, 232, 293, 297, 307, 316, 330,
Cursors • 113 339, 375
Curve fitting • 269, 274, 277 Delete (favorites) • 193
Curve Properties • 118, 304, 326 Delete All Pictures • 307, 330
Curve Property Schema • 115 Delete Section... • 234
Curve scrolling (prev/next on function Delete the selected Formula • 321, 338, 394
displays) • 77, 173 Derivation of a test specification • 8, 355
Custom Content • 122 Derived Frequency • 106
Custom Grid • 91, 102 Derived Frequency / Order • 105
Customize toolbar • 399 Derived number • 106, 107
Customized Metrics Calculator • 209, 213, Deselect All Curves • 109
236, 239 Desktop Add-ins • 207
Cut • 117, 232, 326 Detail view list • 296
Detail window • 402
D Detailed checkbox • 402
Data • 228, 233, 304, 326 Determination of the environment to be
Data and its management • 25 simulated • 9, 10, 355, 356
Data Block Editor • 209, 213 Determination of the test PSD or sweeping
Data Block Processing • 209, 214, 236 sine • 9, 22, 355, 369
Data describing the environment • 10, 356 Differentiation • 269, 274, 278
Data Explorer • 233, 310 Direction type • 156, 158, 160, 162, 163
Data functions • 30 Disable Overlay Optimization • 252
Data List panel • 335, 336 Disc translations • 163
Data management and configuration • 25 Discard Changes • 284
Data Properties • 118, 326 Discs • 171

Display • 376 49
Display Area Color • 113 Empty Input Basket • 293, 296
Display attributes • 303, 326 Enable Arrows • 160
Display Format • 112, 172 Enable Coloring • 158
Display properties • 389 Enable Deformation • 156
Display selection • 406 Enable Nodal Lines • 162
Display size • 169 Enable Rotating Pointers • 163
Display Size • 111 End • 348
Display type • 303, 326 Engineering notation • 91, 92, 99, 104, 114
Document Memo Templates • 195, 203 Establishment of the test program • 19, 366
Documentation • 25, 28 Euler Angles • 151, 152
Documentation and Presentation • 71 Excel Data Driver • 209, 214, 236
Documentation User Attributes • 202 Exit • 231
Domain • 402 Expand • 154
Double Clicking • 299 Expand rows • 394, 397
Double Cross • 132 Export options • 41
Double Order • 131 Export to • 297
Double X • 129 Export To • 294
Double Y • 130 Export To Video... • 169
Double Z • 131 Export... • 193
Down • 338 Exporting data items • 28, 30, 38
Duplicate • 306, 329, 376 Extended Info • 257
Duplicate channel • 388 Extended Project / Section info • 228, 283
Duplicate channel segment(s) into new External Data Options • 245
measurement • 388
Duplicate Selected Measurement • 387
F
Durability Drivers Pack • 214 Faces • 151, 153
DynaWorks • 44 Fade In / Out • 254
Fading Time • 254
E Favorites list • 193
Edges • 151, 153 FFT • 268, 274
Edit • 228, 232, 282, 284 FFT Format Conversion • 268, 274, 275
Edit => Add label… • 63 FFT-based • 243
Edit => Add rule… • 63 FIFO Settings • 256
Edit => Add unit… • 63 Fifo Size • 257
Edit => Delete… • 64 File • 228, 229
Edit => Edit… • 64 File => Exit • 63
Edit => Find • 63 File => Import dynamic units • 62
Edit Arrows Scale... • 160 File => Save • 62
Edit Color Scale... • 158 File => Save as… • 63
Edit deformation Scale... • 156 File => Select active unit system • 60
Edit Properties • 293, 295, 297 File => Upgrade unit system • 61
Edit Properties dialog buttons • 319 File =>Configuration • 60
Edit Properties... • 318 File access priority • 250
Edit Rotating Pointers Scale… • 164 File Location • 247
Edit User Attributes • 294, 299 File name extensions • 47
Edit... • 396 Fill • 118, 253
Edit…/Add... Labels panel • 68 Filter • 298
Edit…/Add... Unit Rules panel • 70 Filter Setting • 244
Edit…/Add...Unit Cases panel • 67 Fit Model • 165
Editing LMS Units • 58 Fixed • 348
Elaborated overview for quick viewing • 247 Fixed... • 87, 93, 101
Elements in the My Links collection folder • Folders • 286
16A 409
Font • 90, 92, 93, 99, 100, 103, 104, 105, 114 Harmonic Removal • 209, 215, 236
Font Size • 171 Harmonic Tracking • 209, 215, 236
Format • 92, 100, 104 Harmonic X • 132
Format of the Level String • 67 Harmonic Y • 133
Format options • 350 Harmonic Z • 133
Format X • 87 Hatching • 96
Format Y • 93 HD Acoustic Camera • 209, 215, 236
Format Z • 101 HD Acoustic Camera Combustion Noise • 209,
Formula • 323, 341, 396 215
Formula Editor • 321, 322, 339, 395 HD Acoustic Camera Deconvolution • 209,
Formula Set icons • 320, 336, 337 215
Formula Set Icons • 393 HD Acoustic Camera iNAH • 209, 215, 236
Formula Set table • 322, 340, 396 HD Acoustic Camera Order Extension • 209,
Forward • 286 215, 236
Frames per cycle • 153 HD Acoustic Camera Rotating Sources • 209,
Free • 87, 93, 101 215
Frequency • 128, 240 HD Acoustic Camera Wind • 209, 216
From • 401 HD Array Batch Processing • 209, 216
Front/Back • 136 HD Array Data Selection & Comparison • 209,
FrontBack • 79, 126, 129, 130, 132, 133, 135, 216
187 Head Data Driver • 209, 216, 236
Frontend Connection Options • 255 Help • 195, 228, 261
Function • 347 Help => About LMS Configuration and Unit
Function Description • 341 System tool • 64
Function display windows • 74 Help => LMS Configuration and Unit System
Function icons • 399 Help • 64
Function ID column • 336 Hidden lines • 116
Function qualifier • 347 Hide additional pane • 384
Function selection • 405 History • 400
Host Adapter ID • 255, 256
G HTML template folder • 228, 257
Gate • 136 Human Body Vibration • 209, 216, 236
Gauge / Numerical • 116
I
General • 117
General (Desktop) add-ins • 208 Icon • 194
General cursor calculations in all Functions Id • 323, 341, 396
displays • 121 Imag • 94
General Options • 240 Imag (Imaginary) • 157
General… • 89, 97, 101 Imaginary • 159, 161, 164
Geometry • 31, 143, 181, 209, 214, 236 Import • 293
Geometry display windows • 142 Import from Tec.Manager • 227
GPS • 44, 85 Import into Active Project • 294
GPS Options • 244 Import... • 193
Graphic Area Color • 113 Importing and exporting data • 28
Grid • 91, 97, 102 Importing data items • 28, 29
Group Folder • 248 Increment • 324, 342, 348, 397
Group size • 375 Input Basket • 291, 334, 335, 372, 385
Groups • 375 Input parameters • 274, 275, 276, 277, 278,
279
H Insert a function • 321, 339, 394
Harmonic count • 115 Insert after • 259
Harmonic Cross • 134 Insert before • 260
Harmonic Order • 134 Insert Block • 376

Insert Sorted • 316 Load Attributes List... • 258
Insert WF • 376 Load criteria • 290
Integrate/Differentiate • 95 Load Criteria • 289
Interactive editing toolbar • 398 Load FormulaSet from DFS file • 320, 338
Interactive Time Data Editing • 209, 217, 236 Load FormulaSet from TFS file • 394
Interactive time data editing icons • 399 Load Template... • 373
Interactive zooming • 111 Load View • 299
Interpolation method • 350 Load/Save View • 375
Intersection • 114 Local Folder • 249
Introduction • 7, 207, 353 Lock position • 120
IP Address • 256 Log • 94
Isolines • 159 Login • 227
Isometric • 165 Look in • 288
LR Geometry • 145
K
M
KML (Keyhole Markup Language) • 44
Main panel logic • 59
L Main/Overlaid • 155
Label • 115, 318 Major upgrade • 61
Label Unit • 57 Make Printformat • 306, 329
Layout • 113, 125, 303, 325 Marker • 118, 150, 152, 253
Layout editing area • 194 Matlab • 43
Layout icons • 305, 327, 343 Matlab data • 29, 35
Layout list • 192 Matrix • 78
Layout Management... • 232 Max. number samples for calculations • 247
LDSF • 51 Max. number samples for reporting • 247
LDSF Saving Mode • 247 Maximize • 111, 169
Left Right Geometry • 183 Maximize to Picture • 111
Left/Right • 156 Maximum number of extrema • 135
Legend • 109, 172 Maximum X-axis value • 404
Legend Options • 172 MDM-plug-in • 209, 217, 236
Length • 152 Measure Sheet Font Size • 257
License Server Options • 254 Measured data • 10, 356
License Usage... • 233 Measurement • 405
Lighting • 170 Measurement browser buttons • 390
Limits • 87, 92, 93, 99, 100, 104, 119, 160 Measurement Name • 392
Line • 118, 253 Measurements • 387
Line color, style, and thickness • 171 Measurements view • 391
Line style • 113 Memo Inventory • 249
Line Style • 90, 91, 98, 102, 103 Menu bar • 60
Line Style... • 116 Minimum distance between points • 244
Linear • 87 Minimum spectral lines for octave band • 244
Linear / dB • 116 Minimum time between points • 244
Lines • 151, 152 Minimum X-axis value • 404
Link • 156, 160, 164 Minor upgrade • 62
List • 202 Miscellaneous • 115
List All Blocks • 287 Mission Synthesis • 7
List Settings • 294 Modal Analysis • 209, 217, 236
List Workspace • 349 Modal Analysis Lite • 209, 217, 236
LMS Document templates • 28 Modal Cursor calculations in Front/Back and
LMS on the Web • 262 Bode display • 121
LMS Tec.Manager Project Management • 230 Mode shape animation • 167
Load a format • 310 Model • 165
16A 411
Model scale • 153 Network Hub • 210, 218, 236
Models • 171 New Folder • 294
Modification Prediction • 209, 217, 236 New FormulaSet • 320, 337, 393
Modifications • 171 New Measurement • 387
More... • 289 New Memo Template • 195, 203
More… • 405 New Section... • 234
Most recent files... • 231 New... • 229
Most Recent Run • 334, 343, 385 NMEA (National Marine Electronics
Mouse and keyboard tips in function displays • Association) • 45
140 Nodal Lines • 162
Mouse and keyboard tips in geometry displays Nodal Lines Directions • 162
• 173 Nodal Lines Format • 162
Move • 149 Nodal Lines Properties • 162
Move down • 321, 394 Node • 152
Move Down • 375 Node Marker • 170
Move First • 305, 328 Node naming strategy • 39
Move Last • 305, 328 Nodes • 150, 152
Move Left • 305, 328 None • 154
Move Right • 305, 328 Normalized • 94
Move to active project • 297 Notepad • 282
Move to Front/Back • 117 Nr channels • 392
Move to global maximum / minimum • 120 Nr tracking channels • 392
Move to lower • 326 Number • 202
Move to next local maximum / minimum • 120 Number of displays • 303, 325
Move to next Sample • 120 Numerical Display Panel • 180
Move to previous local maximum / minimum • Nyquist • 80
120 Nyquist window • 188
Move to previous Sample • 120
Move to… • 120
O
Move up • 321, 338, 394 Octave • 81, 125, 130, 189
Move Up • 375 Octave bands • 88
Move/Copy channel • 388 Octave filter midband and edge frequencies •
Multi Reference Post Processing • 209, 217, 241
236 Octave filter shapes • 243
Multichannel File... • 46 Octave Filtering • 241
Multiple channels view • 389 Octave Filtering Options • 243
Multi-trace Display • 380, 382, 401 Octaves • 88
Multi-Trace display • 82 Offline Octave filtering optimization • 244
Multi-trace display navigation buttons • 390 Offline RPM-Extraction • 210, 218, 236
Multi-Trace Display toolbar icons • 403 Offline Sine Data Reduction • 210, 218, 236
Multi-trace Display windows • 402 Offset and increment • 90, 91
My Computer • 292 Ok • 396
My Links • 48, 290 OK • 260, 322, 340
On all Harmonics • 114, 115
N On/Off • 340
Name • 92, 100, 104, 282 Online Data • 292
Name field • 386 OPAX • 210, 218, 236
Names • 150, 152 Open applications • 261
Nastran Data Driver • 210, 217, 236 Open KML • 45
Navigation buttons • 391 Open... • 229
Nbr. of lines • 348 Opening a project directly • 27
nCode Data Driver • 210, 218, 236 Opening a project within an application • 27
Network • 255, 291 Operational Deflection Shapes & Time

Animation • 210, 218, 236 Parameter Locking • 210, 220, 224, 225, 237
Operational Modal Analysis • 210, 219, 236 Parent Folder • 286
Operational Modal Analysis Lite • 210, 219, Password • 227
236 Paste • 109, 232, 294
Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis • 210, Paste as Link • 294
219 Paste to Front / Back • 109
Operational PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite • Paste to Upper / Lower • 109
210, 219 Path field • 287
Operational PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis • PDF Manual • 261
210, 219 Phase • 94, 159, 161
Operational PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis Picture tabs • 302, 305, 310, 328, 344
Lite • 210, 219 Planes • 170
Optical Cable Length • 257 Play Sound • 297
Optimised & Free Y limits based on: • 253 Point Dir • 323, 341, 396
Optimized • 87, 93, 101 Point direction • 349
Options • 89, 97, 102, 105, 113, 121 Point Id • 323, 341, 396
Options - Add-ins tab • 240, 244 Point ID • 349
Options - Attributes Tab • 240, 257 PolyMAX Modal Analysis • 210, 220, 237
Options - Curve • 116 PolyMAX Modal Analysis Lite • 210, 220,
Options - Data tab • 51, 240, 245 237
Options - Displays tab • 240, 252 PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis • 210, 220
Options - File Locations tab • 240, 247, 266 PolyMAX Plus Modal Analysis Lite • 210, 220
Options - Filtering tab • 240, 251 Power • 129
Options - Font Size • 257 Pre-fix Node - Name with Component • 168
Options - Frontend • 255 Presentation of unit cases per Quantity • 65
Options - General tab • 240 Presentation of unit cases per quantity case •
Options - License Server tab • 240, 254 66
Options - Network Hub tab • 240, 255 Presentation of unit rules per resulting quantity
Options - Numerical Display • 115 case • 69
Options - Sorting tab • 240, 250 Pressing the • 319
Options - Sound Settings tab • 240, 254 Preview Mode • 111
Options - Tec.Manager tab • 240, 254 Previous / Next • 319
Options - Units tab • 240, 252 Principal Component Analysis • 210, 221, 237
Options - View • 116 Print • 231, 302, 306, 329
Options Locking • 224, 226 Print Preview • 231, 267
Options... • 122, 170, 240 Print Screen • 384
Options… • 116 Print Setup Parameters • 234, 293, 297
Order • 126 Print with • 302
Order map, spectrum waterfall, individual Print with... • 306, 329
spectra of a waterfall • 105 Printer Setup... • 230
Order Tracking • 210, 219, 237 Printing Options • 231
Order-based Modal Analysis • 210, 220 Processing • 94
Origin • 168, 172, 288 Processing Cross • 139
Other folders • 51 Processing Frequency • 138
Other local files and folders • 249 Processing Order • 137
Overall level of octave display based on • 253 Processing Start – Processing End • 392
Overall Level Options... • 112 Processing X • 136
Overview checkbox • 402 Processing Z • 137
Overview window • 402 Processing… • 121
Progress • 376
P Project • 249
Pane header options • 384 Project data • 50
Parameter and Option Locking • 224, 241 Project Template • 249
16A 413
Project Template (.tpl) • 225 Replay • 119, 327
Project templates • 27 Rescale geometry • 295
Projects • 25, 26, 229 Reset All • 96
Properties • 295 Reset Limits • 308
Properties… • 121 Reset Template... • 373
Property • 288, 318 Restore • 111, 112, 169, 319
Protect Measured • 154 Resulting function • 274, 275, 277, 278, 279,
Pulse channel settings • 47 280
Pulse Embedded 16bits Stereo File... • 46 Results destination panel • 336
Reverse • 89, 97
Q Rigid Body Calculator • 210, 221, 237
Quad Geometry • 146, 184 Road Runner files • 29, 34
Quantity • 57 Rotate model • 150
Quantity Case • 58 Rotating Pointers • 163
Quick spectral map • 382, 383, 384, 404 Rotating Pointers Directions • 164
Rotating Pointers Format • 164
R Rotating Pointers Geometry • 149
Range • 402 Row and Column selection lists • 391
Range marker • 163 Rows selection • 69
Range pair • 15, 362 RPC III • 47
Range Settings • 46 RPC III files • 29, 35
Read strategy • 55 Run Data Averaging & Comparison Organizer
Real • 93, 157, 159, 161, 164 • 210, 221, 237
Real environmental data • 8, 354 Run selection • 334, 372, 386
Redo • 400 Run slope • 349
Reference Blocks data list • 336 Run User Attributes • 258
Reference Channel Setup Options... • 260 Runs • 51
Refresh • 287, 295
S
Relabel... • 258
Relate Size to Magnitude • 171 Sampling Bit Size • 241
Relative • 153 Save • 229, 392
Remote Control • 239 Save As … • 392
Remove • 117, 259, 284, 304, 326 Save as Layout • 308, 331
Remove All Cursors • 108 Save As Task Shortcut • 230
Remove All Curves • 109 Save As Template... • 230
Remove animation • 155 Save As... • 230
Remove channel • 389 Save Attributes List... • 258
Remove cursor • 119 Save criteria • 290
Remove Curve • 109 Save Criteria • 289
Remove Measurement • 388 Save Data Set • 335, 386, 389
Remove Selected • 289 Save FormulaSet to DFS file • 320, 338
Remove Selected Criterion • 290 Save FormulaSet to TFS file • 393
Rename • 295, 299, 306, 329 Save layout button • 194
Rename Section... • 234 Save layout field • 194
Renumber FormulaSet • 321, 339, 395 Save list of active add-ins when the application
Repeat for... • 323, 342, 397 is closed • 244
Replace • 259, 316 Save Picture as Layout • 232
Replace button • 386 Save Picture as New Layout... • 233
Replace Data • 307, 330 Save results as... • 317
Replace Data Origin • 307, 330 Save selected as... • 317
Replace from Input basket • 316 Save Template... • 373
Replace in Input Basket • 293, 296 Save View • 299
Replace Selected • 289 Save workspace in active project • 349

SCADAS Recording • 210, 221, 237 Show Handle • 114
Scalar math functions • 269, 270, 274, 279 Show Model Scale • 153
Scale • 116 Show none • 168
Scale Factor • 171 Show None • 151, 153
Scan button • 256 Show Rotating Pointers Scale • 164
Screen projection • 165 Show User Dialog • 228
Scrollbar • 404 Show/hide angle domain curves • 403
Scrollbar and zooming buttons • 403 Show/hide time curves • 403
SDF • 43 Signature Data Post-Processing • 210, 221, 237
SDF files • 29, 34 Signature Throughput Processing • 210, 222,
Search • 286 237
Search button • 287 Single cross • 129
Search by properties • 288 Single value statistics • 384, 406
Search For • 288 Single X • 125
Search now • 289 Single Y • 125
Search Results • 291, 372 Single Z • 126
Search Windows subfolders • 288 Situations in parallel • 19, 366
Second X Axis • 88 Situations in series • 19, 366
Second X-axes • 106 Size • 170
Section selection • 334, 386 Size of displays • 303, 325
Section Selection • 372 Size to fit • 122
Section User Attributes • 258 Slave DOFs • 154
Sections • 50, 234 Smooth • 159
Sections, (orders, frequency sections, octave Smoothing • 95, 155, 269, 274, 277
sections, overall level, ...) • 105 Snap to data values • 114
Secured saving during acquisition • 247 Snap to Data Values • 120
Segment from • 401 Solids • 151, 152
Select • 119, 284 Sort • 298, 374, 376
Select all • 232 Sorting according to base quantities • 65
Select All • 151 Sorting according to name • 66
Select All Curves • 109 Sorting of the Unit Cases • 64
Select Block ... • 349 Sorting of the Unit Rules • 69
Select Columns... • 298, 374 Sound Diagnosis • 210, 222, 237
Select Deform Maximum • 151 Sound Intensity Analysis • 210, 222, 237
Select functions … • 406 Sound maps • 167
Selected fields • 259 Sound Player • 254
Selected List • 172 Sound Quality Metrics • 210, 222, 237
Selecting an empty cell • 319 Source Control • 239
Selecting an empty line in the table • 319 Source data • 135, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278,
Selection • 151 279
Selection order buttons • 172 Source field names • 259
Selection status • 304 Spectrum & Section Scaling • 96
Separate Files... • 45 SRS Calculation • 270, 274, 279
Settings dialog • 400 Standalone Recording • 210, 222
Shade color • 171 Standard • 264
Show • 113, 122 Standard Content • 123
Show all • 168 Standards • 8, 354
Show All • 151, 153, 298 Start • 348
Show Arrows Scale • 161 Start page • 227
Show Color Scale • 158 StartPoint Server • 255
Show data • 375 StartPoint server computer name • 255
Show Deformation Scale • 157 StartPoint server port number • 255
Show Favorites • 172 Status • 325, 342, 397
16A 415
Status Bar • 233 The Data menus • 117
Status Message • 118, 326 The Data Selection panel • 372
Stereo File... • 45 The Data Set panel • 311, 315, 373
Stereo WAV settings • 46 The Data Set Table • 316
STL data • 29, 38 The data set toolbar icons • 315
Stop search • 289 The Delete button • 283
Style • 113 The desktop • 25
Subdivisions • 90, 91 The Desktop button bar • 263
Surfaces • 151, 152 The Desktop menu bar • 228
Synthesis of the equivalent damage potential • The Detail View panel • 288, 296, 302, 310,
11, 357 315, 391
Sysnoise databases • 29, 34 The Display • 351
The Display menus • 107, 119
T The Display panel • 343
Table • 86 The Documentation worksheet • 280
Table cells • 391 The Double (cursor) menus • 107, 129
Tacho channel (rpm), Derived Tacho channel The Format display area • 310
and Static channel • 106, 107 The Format display panel • 310
Target ID • 255, 256 The Format selection bar • 310
Task Icon (.tsk) • 225 The Geometry display functions • 149
TDF • 51 The Geometry display menu • 150
Tec. Manager Search • 258 The Geometry model manipulation icons • 149
Tec.Manager • 228 The Harmonic (cursor) menus • 108, 132
Tec.Manager Hub • 210, 222, 237 The Import button • 282
Tec.Manager Tab • 227 The Layout editing panel • 194
Test Data Management • 210, 223 The Layout management dialog • 177, 232,
Test strategies • 7, 353 300, 305, 327, 343
Tests • 30 The Layout management panel • 192
Text • 44, 202 The list of documents • 282
Text annotation color • 170 The LMS Configuration and Unit System • 53
The 2D display • 351 The LMS Test.Lab Desktop workbook • 207
The Active Formula Set panel • 311, 319 The LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis
The additional pane selector • 384 workbook • 353
The Attachment Preview panel • 280, 283 The Navigator - Data Calculator worksheet •
The Attachments panel • 280, 282 311
The Automatic (cursor) menus • 135 The Navigator - Data Presentation worksheet •
The Axis menus • 87 308
The Cada-X project database • 29 The Navigator - Data Viewing worksheet • 299
The Coupled (cursor) menus • 139 The New from Template button • 283
The Cursor menus • 119 The Notepad panel • 280, 282
The Curve Legend menus • 109, 119, 122 The Picture display area • 303, 325
The Data Block Editor worksheet • 213, 345 The Picture display panel • 311
The Data Block Processing Calculator • 337 The Picture Display panel • 303, 325
The Data Block Processing worksheet • 331 The Picture Selection bar • 304, 327
The Data Explorer • 302, 310, 315 The Print Format panel • 376
The Data Explorer browsers and toolbar • 303, The Processing (cursor) menus • 136
315 The Reporting panel • 376
The Data Explorer dialog • 233, 267, 284, 303, The Search panel • 287
310, 315 The Single (cursor) menus • 107, 125
The Data Explorer panel • 311 The table • 350
The Data Explorer Toolbar • 286, 302, 310, The TDF database • 29, 31
315 The Tec.Manager Options • 227, 254
The Data List panel • 333 The Template Set panel • 373

The Tree-view browser panel • 290, 302, 310, Undo • 111, 232, 400
315 Unit • 56, 88, 92, 96, 99, 101, 104, 341, 348,
The User Attributes Grid • 280, 281 349
The Values table • 350 Unit Case • 58
Theory • 262 Unit Cases panel • 64
Throughput Bind Strategy • 245 Unit Rules panel • 69
Throughput File Format • 245 Unit system • 58
Ticks • 89, 98, 103 Universal File • 39
Tile • 261 Universal File Options • 247
Time • 105, 107 Universal files • 29, 33
Time (Throughput) • 106, 107 Update • 350
Time Data Editor - Advanced • 210, 223, 237 Upper Lower Geometry • 182
Time Data Editor - Standard • 210, 223, 237 Upper/Lower • 156, 189
Time Data Extraction • 210, 223, 237 UpperLower • 125, 126, 129, 130, 132, 133,
Time Data Options • 247 135
Time Data Processing • 210, 223 Use ASPI • 256
Time Data Selection • 210, 223, 237 Use Cada-X Triad Colors • 252
Time Data Selection worksheet • 223, 377 Use Component Visualization • 168
Time domain and angle domain windows • 403 Use external sound player • 254
Time Domain TPA • 210, 223, 237 Use Geometry Radius • 172
Time recording during Signature Testing • 239 Use Group Folder • 249
Time Signal Calculator • 210, 223, 237 Use internal sound player • 254
Time Signal Calculator panel • 393 Use Quad Projection American • 252
Time-based • 243 Use segment for processing • 388
Timeout • 255 Use SPTI • 255
Timer Options • 254 Use UTP • 256
Time-Variant Frequency Analysis • 211, 224, User 1 (2, 3, 4 and 5) • 211, 224, 237
237 User Applications • 261
Title Content • 125 User Attributes • 202
Title Layout • 125 Using cursors in displays • 71
Title Legend • 110
To • 401
V
To condition displayed data • 272 Value • 114, 282, 289, 319
To preview data • 301 Value type • 350
To select and edit an htm- or html-template • Variable • 348
283 Vehicle Bus • 237
Tool • 117 Versioning of LMS Unit System • 59
Toolbars • 233, 263, 264 Vertical / Horizontal Views • 287
Tools • 228, 234 View • 228, 232
ToolTip Style • 114 View => Show • 64
Top color • 170 View => Sort • 64
Torsional animation • 168 View => Toolbar • 64
TPA Component Editing • 211, 224, 237 View Settings • 295
TPA Synthesis • 211, 224 View Setup Parameters • 234, 293, 297
Transfer Path Analysis • 211, 224, 237 View/Change TDF (full) name... • 295, 297
Transition • 100 Viewing options • 387
TRDS files • 29, 32 Views • 165
Type • 90, 98, 103, 170, 172 Views… • 167
Visibility Checkboxes of the Unit Cases tab •
U 69
UL • 81 Visible • 89, 91, 92, 93, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102,
UL Geometry • 144 103, 104, 105
Undeformed Model • 152 Visual Extensions • 168, 170
16A 417
W ZX / XY /YZ Plane • 168
ZY • 166
Waterfall • 83, 125, 126, 128, 130, 131, 132,
134, 137, 138, 190
Waterfall Bind Strategy • 246
Wav • 45
WAV Settings • 254
Weighting • 95, 349
Window • 228, 261
Window type selection • 351
Windows Automation Support • 211, 224, 237
Workbook Configuration (.cfg) • 225
Workbook Configuration... • 260
Worksheet • 261
Workspace • 292, 373
Write Cada-X compatible component info •
247
Write strategy • 55
X
X • 110, 151, 158, 162
X axis • 80, 84, 188, 191
X Axis • 88
X-axes • 105
X-axis • 87, 348
XY • 84, 165, 191
XZ • 167
Y
Y • 152, 158, 162
Y (back) • 110
Y (front) • 110
Y back axis • 84, 191
Y front axis • 84, 191
Y horizontal axis • 80, 84, 188, 191
Y vertical axis • 80, 188
Y-axis • 93, 348
YX • 166
YZ • 166
Z
Z • 152, 158, 162
Z-axes • 107
Z-axis • 100
Zero line marker and positive direction • 163
Zero max • 14, 361
Zoom • 117, 119
Zoom in • 404
Zoom in / zoom out • 150
Zoom out • 404
Zoom segment • 404
Zoom tool • 404
ZX • 166

LMS Test - Lab Mission Synthesis

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LMS Test - Lab Mission Synthesis

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LMS Test - Lab Mission Synthesis

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LMS Test.

Lab Mission Synthesis

Copyright Siemens Industry Software NV

Chapter 1 Mission Synthesis ......................................................................................... 7

Chapter 2 Data and its management ........................................................................... 25

Chapter 3 The LMS Configuration and Unit System .................................................. 53

Chapter 5 The LMS Test.Lab Desktop workbook ..................................................... 205

4 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

Chapter 6 The LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis workbook .................................... 349

6 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

Chapter 1 Mission Synthesis

Section 1.1 Introduction

Almost all equipment is subjected to vibrational environments, such as that

Such tests must satisfy the following criteria:

Section 1.1.1 Test strategies

it to the actual conditions it is likely to encounter. Such testing has the

Section 1.1.1.1 Standards

Section 1.1.1.2 Real environmental data

The Test.lab Mission synthesis software enables you to determine test

Section 1.2 Derivation of a test specification

8 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

The determination of the test specification can be summarized as the following

Section 1.2.1 Analysis of the life cycle

Figure 1 Life profile of the equipment

Section 1.2.2 Collection of the data on the real environment

 Measurements made under actual conditions

Section 1.2.2.1 Data describing the environment

Section 1.2.2.1.1 Measured data

Section 1.2.3 Determination of the environment to be simulated

10 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

Section 1.2.3.1 Synthesis of the equivalent damage potential

Section 1.2.3.1.1 Calculation of the Shock Response Spectrum (SRS)

Figure 3 Derivation of a shock response spectrum

12 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

Using Laplace transformation, we can obtain the transfer function of the

Section 1.2.3.1.2 Calculation of the Maximum Response Spectrum

Figure 4 Derivation of the maximum response spectrum

Section 1.2.3.1.3 Calculation of the Fatigue Damage Spectrum (FDS)

14 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

Figure 5 Woehler curve

The stress is assumed to be related linearly to the strain (relative displacement)

The cumulative damage D can be derived in the following manner.

16 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

Figure 6 Derivation of a Fatigue Damage Spectrum

Section 1.2.3.2 Application of the uncertainty (safety) factor (k)

The parameter used to describe the characteristic environment relating to a

Figure 7 Distribution of the environmental load

Values for the coefficient of variation can be obtained from

Figure 8 Distribution of material resistance

18 User manual LMS Test.Lab Mission Synthesis

P = Prob (Environment > Resistance)

Figure 9 Probability of failure P

If we now impose a required probability failure (P0) by moving the material

Figure 10 Required probability of failure P0

The ratio of this position (where r implies required) to the

The arbitrary or computed value of k is now applied and the required

Section 1.2.3.3 Combining the situations

Section 1.2.3.3.1 Situations in parallel

 the envelope of the